Krone BA BiG X 630 Stufe 3 (BX201-45) Operating Instructions


Add to my manuals
634 Pages

advertisement

Krone BA BiG X 630 Stufe 3 (BX201-45) Operating Instructions | Manualzz

Original operating instructions

Document number: 150001270_04_en

Version: 14/03/2022

BX201-45

Precision forage harvester

BiG X 630

From machine number: 1092378

Contact

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10

48480 Spelle

Germany

Telephone main office

Telefax main office

Telefax spare parts warehouse national territory

+ 49 (0) 59 77/935-0

+ 49 (0) 59 77/935-339

+ 49 (0) 59 77/935-239

Telefax spare parts warehouse export + 49 (0) 59 77/935-359

Internet www.landmaschinen.krone.de

https://mediathek.krone.de/

Information for enquiries and orders

Model

Vehicle identification number

Year of manufacture

Contact data of your dealer

2

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

3

4

4.1

4.1.1

4.2

4.3

2

2.4.13

2.4.14

2.4.15

2.4.16

2.4.17

2.4.18

2.4.19

2.4.20

2.4.21

2.4.22

2.4.23

2.4.24

2.5

2.5.1

2.5.2

2.5.3

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

2.4.3

2.4.4

2.4.5

2.4.6

2.4.7

2.4.8

2.4.9

2.4.10

2.4.11

2.4.12

2.5.4

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.8.1

2.8.2

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.6.1

1.6.2

1.6.3

1.6.4

1.6.5

1.6.6

1.6.7

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Table of contents

Information on This Document...............................................................................................  13

Validity .......................................................................................................................................  13

Significance of the document.....................................................................................................  13

Re-ordering ................................................................................................................................  13

Applicable documents................................................................................................................  13

Target group of this document ...................................................................................................  13

How to use this document .........................................................................................................  14

Directories and references.........................................................................................................  14

Information on direction .............................................................................................................  14

Term “machine”..........................................................................................................................  14

Figures .......................................................................................................................................  14

Scope of the document ..............................................................................................................  14

Means of representation ............................................................................................................  14

Conversion table ........................................................................................................................  17

Safety ........................................................................................................................................  18

Intended use ..............................................................................................................................  18

Reasonably foreseeable misuse................................................................................................  18

Service life of the machine.........................................................................................................  19

Basic safety instructions ............................................................................................................  19

Importance of operating instructions..........................................................................................  19

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel ....................................................................  19

Personnel qualification of the technicians..................................................................................  20

Children in danger .....................................................................................................................  20

Connecting the machine ............................................................................................................  20

Structural modifications on the machine ....................................................................................  21

Additional equipment and spare parts .......................................................................................  21

Jobs on the machine..................................................................................................................  21

Operational safety: Technically sound condition .......................................................................  22

Danger zones ............................................................................................................................  23

Ensuring functionality of safety devices .....................................................................................  25

Personal protective equipment ..................................................................................................  25

Safety markings on the machine ...............................................................................................  26

Road safety................................................................................................................................  26

Parking the machine safely .......................................................................................................  27

Consumables .............................................................................................................................  27

Chemicals ..................................................................................................................................  28

Dangers arising from environment.............................................................................................  28

Sources of danger on the machine ............................................................................................  30

Dangers in connection with certain activities: climbing up and down ........................................  31

Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine ....................................  32

Dangers in connection with certain activities: checking and charging batteries ........................  33

Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres..............................  33

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents .....................................................  34

Safety routines ...........................................................................................................................  34

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine...........................................................................  34

Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering..................................................  35

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely.......................................  35

Running actuator test.................................................................................................................  36

Safety labels on the machine.....................................................................................................  36

Information labels on the machine .............................................................................................  57

Safety equipment .......................................................................................................................  65

SMV emblem .............................................................................................................................  67

Fire extinguisher ........................................................................................................................  67

Data memory ............................................................................................................................  69

Machine Description................................................................................................................  70

Machine overview ......................................................................................................................  70

Contents of the storage compartment .......................................................................................  71

Labelling ....................................................................................................................................  72

Lighting ......................................................................................................................................  73

3

Table of contents

4.3.1

4.3.2

4.3.3

4.4

5

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

5.8

5.9

5.10

5.11

5.12

5.13

5.14

5.14.1

5.14.2

5.14.3

5.14.4

5.14.5

5.15

5.16

5.17

6

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

6.13

6.14

6.15

6.16

6.17

6.18

6.18.1

6.18.2

6.18.3

6.18.4

6.18.5

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.3.1

6.3.1.1

6.3.1.2

6.3.1.3

6.3.1.4

6.3.1.5

6.3.1.6

6.3.2

6.3.3

6.4

Road travel lighting ....................................................................................................................  73

Working lights ............................................................................................................................  74

Maintenance lighting ..................................................................................................................  75

Function description chopping crops .........................................................................................  76

Technical Data..........................................................................................................................  78

Dimensions ................................................................................................................................  78

Weights ......................................................................................................................................  78

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel) .................................................................  78

Engine data................................................................................................................................  79

Traction drive .............................................................................................................................  79

Electrical system ........................................................................................................................  79

Airborne noise emission ............................................................................................................  79

Ambient temperature .................................................................................................................  79

Vibration values .........................................................................................................................  80 tow coupling ...............................................................................................................................  80

Power supply for headers – power ............................................................................................  80

Power supply for headers – hydraulics ......................................................................................  80

Power supply for headers – electrics .........................................................................................  80

Consumables .............................................................................................................................  80

Oils.............................................................................................................................................  81

Lubricating grease .....................................................................................................................  83

Coolant ......................................................................................................................................  83

Refrigerant (air conditioning) .....................................................................................................  83

Fuel ............................................................................................................................................  84

Tyres ..........................................................................................................................................  84

Total weights and axle loads .....................................................................................................  85

Released headers......................................................................................................................  88

Control and Display Elements ................................................................................................  90

Overview of operating elements ................................................................................................  90

Opening doors and windows of cabin .......................................................................................  90

Control and display elements on the steering column ...............................................................  93

Steering column switch ..............................................................................................................  93

Activating horn ...........................................................................................................................  93

Switching direction indicators on/off ..........................................................................................  94

Switching parking light/dipped beam on/off ...............................................................................  95

Switching full beam on/off ..........................................................................................................  96

Actuating headlamp flasher .......................................................................................................  96

Switching windshield wipers on/off ...........................................................................................  96

Indicator and warning lamps ......................................................................................................  97

Switching the flashing warning light on/off .................................................................................  98

Actuating service brake .............................................................................................................  98

Actuate the trailer brake system (for "trailer brake system" version) .........................................  99

Actuating the momentary foot switches (for "Momentary foot switches in the cabin" version)  100

Mirror adjuster..........................................................................................................................  100

Keypad for wiper and warning beacon ....................................................................................  101

Lighting on the cabin ladder and right ladder...........................................................................  102

Interior lighting .........................................................................................................................  103

Operating elements on control lever ........................................................................................  103

Control and display elements on the keypad ...........................................................................  107

Main mode switch ....................................................................................................................  109

Quick-stop switch.....................................................................................................................  110

Navigation module ...................................................................................................................  110

Ignition lock ..............................................................................................................................  112

Additional keypad ....................................................................................................................  112

Sockets ....................................................................................................................................  113

Cigarette lighter 12 Volt ...........................................................................................................  113

12 V socket/24 V socket ..........................................................................................................  114

Diagnostics sockets .................................................................................................................  115

In-cab socket ...........................................................................................................................  115

USB connection .......................................................................................................................  115

4

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

6.19

6.20

6.21

7

7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

10

10.1

10.2

10.3

10.4

10.5

10.6

10.7

10.8

10.9

10.10

10.11

10.11.1

10.11.2

10.11.3

9

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

9.9

9.10

9.11

9.11.1

9.11.2

9.11.3

9.11.4

9.11.5

9.12

8

8.2.4

8.2.5

8.2.6

8.2.7

8.3

8.3.1

8.3.2

8.3.3

8.1

8.2

8.2.1

8.2.1.1

8.2.1.2

8.2.1.3

8.2.2

8.2.3

Table of contents

Grinding control unit.................................................................................................................  116

Quick-stop switch grinding control unit ....................................................................................  117

Opening and closing side hoods and rear hood ......................................................................  118

Initial operation ......................................................................................................................  119

Checklist for initial operation ....................................................................................................  119

Mounting warning panels in operating position........................................................................  120

Mounting fire extinguisher........................................................................................................  120

Mounting licence plate .............................................................................................................  121

Start-up ...................................................................................................................................  122

Check before start-up ..............................................................................................................  122

Setting driver’s seat .................................................................................................................  123

Air-cushioned comfort seat ......................................................................................................  123

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "Standard" version) ...............................................  124

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "ACTIVO" version).................................................  126

Turning the driver's seat (for the "Swivel seat adapter" design) ..............................................  130

Steering column adjustment ....................................................................................................  130

Setting the terminal ..................................................................................................................  131

Monitor for camera monitoring .................................................................................................  132

Sun visor ..................................................................................................................................  133

Adjustable air nozzles ..............................................................................................................  134

Inside rear mirror......................................................................................................................  134

General aspects.......................................................................................................................  134

Instructional seat......................................................................................................................  134

Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox") ...................................................................  135

Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions ....................................................................  135

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header ............................................................................  136

Removing the corn conditioner ................................................................................................  137

Installing the grass channel .....................................................................................................  141

Adjusting the air intake ............................................................................................................  142

Removing round brushes from the rotating screen..................................................................  143

Setting Lifting Unit Hydraulics ..................................................................................................  143

Removing grain capture sheet .................................................................................................  144

Removing spout extension ......................................................................................................  145

Mounting camera into grass mode position (for "auto-loading system" version) .....................  147

Dismounting camera when in maize mode position (for "auto-loading system" version).........  148

Removing rear weight ..............................................................................................................  149

Removing husk comb (version with "Husk comb") ..................................................................  151

Removing the maintenance flap and deflector sheet...............................................................  151

Removing blade support and husk comb ................................................................................  153

Removing wear plate ...............................................................................................................  154

Mounting wear plate (without window) and deflector sheet .....................................................  154

Mounting maintenance flap transfer shaft................................................................................  155

Removing additional axle.........................................................................................................  155

Commissioning – Maize mode..............................................................................................  163

Removing the grass channel ...................................................................................................  164

Installing the corn conditioner ..................................................................................................  165

Adjusting the air intake ............................................................................................................  169

Pressing round brushes onto the rotating screen ....................................................................  170

Adjusting the lifting unit hydraulics...........................................................................................  171

Mounting grain capture sheet ..................................................................................................  171

Mounting spout extension ........................................................................................................  172

Mounting camera into maize mode position (for "auto-loading system" version) ....................  177

Dismounting camera when in grass mode position (for "auto-loading system" version) .........  179

Attaching rear weight ...............................................................................................................  179

Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb") ....................................................................  182

Removing the maintenance flap transfer shaft and wear plate................................................  182

Mounting wear plate ................................................................................................................  184

Mounting husk comb................................................................................................................  185

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 5

Table of contents

10.11.4

10.11.5

10.12

11

12

12.1

12.1.1

12.1.2

12.1.3

12.1.4

12.2

12.3

13

13.1

13.1.1

13.1.2

13.1.3

13.1.4

13.1.5

13.2

13.3

14

14.1

14.1.1

14.1.2

14.1.3

14.1.4

14.2

14.3

15

15.1

15.1.1

15.1.2

15.1.3

15.2

15.3

16

16.1

16.1.1

16.1.2

16.1.3

16.1.4

16.1.5

16.2

16.2.1

16.3

16.4

16.4.1

16.4.2

16.4.3

16.4.3.1

16.4.4

16.5

16.5.1

16.5.2

16.6

16.7

Mounting blade support ...........................................................................................................  186

Mounting maintenance flap transfer shaft and deflector sheet ................................................  188

Mounting additional axle ..........................................................................................................  189

Commissioning – Grass/maize mode for the transition period.........................................  199

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow ....................................................................  203

Mounting EasyFlow .................................................................................................................  204

Preparing the intake.................................................................................................................  204

Connecting EasyFlow ..............................................................................................................  205

Connecting hydraulic hoses.....................................................................................................  207

Moving parking jacks on right/left into transport position .........................................................  208

Removing EasyFlow ................................................................................................................  208

Putting Down EasyFlow ...........................................................................................................  210

Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect .........................................................  211

Attaching XCollect ...................................................................................................................  212

Preparing the intake.................................................................................................................  212

Connecting XCollect ................................................................................................................  213

Connecting hydraulic hoses.....................................................................................................  215

Moving support jacks on right/left into transport position .........................................................  216

Enabling additional axle on the terminal ..................................................................................  217

Removing XCollect ..................................................................................................................  217

Parking XCollect ......................................................................................................................  220

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect.................................................................  221

Mounting EasyCollect ..............................................................................................................  222

Preparing the intake.................................................................................................................  222

Connecting EasyCollect...........................................................................................................  223

Connecting hydraulic hoses.....................................................................................................  225

Moving parking jacks on right/left into transport position .........................................................  226

Removing EasyCollect.............................................................................................................  227

Putting down EasyCollect .......................................................................................................  230

Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc ...........................................................................  231

Mounting XDisc........................................................................................................................  232

Preparing the intake.................................................................................................................  232

Connecting XDisc ....................................................................................................................  232

Moving parking jacks on right/left into transport position .........................................................  235

Removing XDisc ......................................................................................................................  235

Putting down XDisc..................................................................................................................  237

Driving and Transport ...........................................................................................................  238

Preparing the machine for road travel .....................................................................................  239

Transport position ....................................................................................................................  239

Moving header to transport position ........................................................................................  240

Moving intake into transport position .......................................................................................  242

Swivelling spout into transport position....................................................................................  242

Opening the stop cock additional running gear on the XCollect ..............................................  243

Starting engine.........................................................................................................................  243

Observing indicator and warning lamps...................................................................................  245

Behaviour after the engine has stalled ....................................................................................  246

Starting up machine .................................................................................................................  246

Setting the acceleration behaviour ..........................................................................................  247

Notes on driving the machine ..................................................................................................  247

Driving forwards and stopping .................................................................................................  248

Cruise control...........................................................................................................................  248

Driving backward and stopping................................................................................................  250

Stopping the machine ..............................................................................................................  250

Stopping machine by using control lever .................................................................................  251

Stopping machine with the service brake ................................................................................  252

Couple brake pedals (for "trailer brake system" version).........................................................  253

Applying parking brake ............................................................................................................  253

6

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

17

17.1

17.2

17.3

17.4

17.4.1

17.4.2

17.5

17.5.1

17.5.2

17.5.3

17.6

17.6.1

16.8

16.9

16.10

16.11

16.12

16.12.1

16.13

16.13.1

16.13.2

17.6.2

18

18.1

18.2

18.3

18.4

18.5

17.21

17.22

17.23

17.24

17.25

17.25.1

17.25.2

17.26

17.26.1

17.26.2

17.26.3

17.26.4

17.27

17.6.3

17.7

17.8

17.9

17.10

17.11

17.12

17.13

17.14

17.15

17.16

17.17

17.18

17.19

17.20

Table of contents

Switching off the engine...........................................................................................................  255

Fitting wheel chocks ................................................................................................................  255

Main battery switch ..................................................................................................................  256

Parking the machine ................................................................................................................  256

Towing the machine.................................................................................................................  257

Releasing the parking brake manually.....................................................................................  258

Preparing the machine for shipment ........................................................................................  259

Lashing the machine................................................................................................................  259

Removing the machine wheels ................................................................................................  260

Operation device....................................................................................................................  261

Raising and lowering lifting unit ...............................................................................................  261

Aligning pendulum tube horizontally ........................................................................................  262

Releasing header locking ........................................................................................................  263

Trailer operation.......................................................................................................................  264

Connecting trailer.....................................................................................................................  265

Disconnecting trailer ................................................................................................................  266

Additional axles........................................................................................................................  267

Maize mode .............................................................................................................................  268

Grass mode .............................................................................................................................  268

XDisc operating mode .............................................................................................................  268

Silage additives unit .................................................................................................................  269

Internal silage additives unit coarse dosing (for version with "Controlled silage additives unit")

.................................................................................................................................................  269

Internal silage additives unit fine dosing (for "regulated silage additives unit fine dosing" version)

.................................................................................................................................................  274

Connecting an additional silage additives unit (for "External silage additives unit" version) ...  280

Field mode on slopes...............................................................................................................  281

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)....................................................................  281

Operating intake/header ..........................................................................................................  282

Lifting unit control.....................................................................................................................  284

Setting spout ...........................................................................................................................  287

Adjusting discharge distance ...................................................................................................  288

TractionControl/Traction control system ..................................................................................  288

Automatic steering system.......................................................................................................  289

Setting chop length ..................................................................................................................  291

Metal detection ........................................................................................................................  293

RockProtect .............................................................................................................................  294

ConstantPower ........................................................................................................................  295

Engine speed management .....................................................................................................  296

AutoScan .................................................................................................................................  297

CropControl..............................................................................................................................  297

PowerSplit................................................................................................................................  299

Contents sensor system ..........................................................................................................  300

Operating VariQuick electrically...............................................................................................  303

Operating VariLOC chop length gearbox.................................................................................  303

Switching VariLOC cutting length gearbox ..............................................................................  305

VariLOC cutting length gearbox settings on the terminal ........................................................  306

Operating the auto-loading system ..........................................................................................  309

Camera monitor status display ................................................................................................  309

Activating/deactivating auto-loading system ............................................................................  311

Selecting filling strategy ...........................................................................................................  312

Transverse movement of the destination.................................................................................  313

Operating the dirt seal .............................................................................................................  313

Terminal ..................................................................................................................................  315

Display design .........................................................................................................................  315

Description display...................................................................................................................  316

Possible terminals....................................................................................................................  316

Input window ............................................................................................................................  317

Selection window .....................................................................................................................  318

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 7

Table of contents

20

20.5.2

20.5.3

20.6

20.6.1

20.6.2

20.6.3

20.6.4

20.6.5

20.6.6

20.6.7

20.6.8

20.6.9

20.6.10

20.7

20.7.1

20.7.2

20.1

20.2

20.3

20.3.1

20.4

20.5

20.5.1

20.5.1.1

20.5.1.2

20.5.1.3

20.5.1.4

20.5.1.5

20.5.1.6

20.5.1.7

20.8

20.8.1

20.8.2

20.8.3

20.8.4

20.8.5

20.8.6

20.8.7

20.8.8

20.8.9

20.8.10

20.8.11

20.8.12

19

19.1

19.2

19.3

19.3.1

19.3.2

19.3.3

19.4

19.4.1

19.4.2

19.4.3

19.4.4

19.4.5

19.5

19.6

19.7

Terminal machine functions .................................................................................................  320

Status line ................................................................................................................................  321

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel .............................................................  326

Keys in the title bar ..................................................................................................................  327

“Counters” menu ......................................................................................................................  328

“Error” menu.............................................................................................................................  337

Main menu ...............................................................................................................................  341

Direct input “Field mode” .........................................................................................................  341

Temporarily change working width or number of rows ............................................................  342

Changing the header speed ....................................................................................................  343

Change chop length.................................................................................................................  343

Changing the lifting unit control default value ..........................................................................  344

Changing Corn Conditioner Roller Distance ............................................................................  344

Information area.......................................................................................................................  345

Engine and driving data display range.....................................................................................  345

Traction drive indicator lights ...................................................................................................  348

Terminal - Menus ...................................................................................................................  351

Menu structure .........................................................................................................................  351

Bringing up menu level ............................................................................................................  361

Navigating in menus ................................................................................................................  362

Changing/saving parameter.....................................................................................................  362

“Diagnostics” menu explanation ..............................................................................................  362

"Machine" menu.......................................................................................................................  364

"Electronics" menu...................................................................................................................  366

"E-Solutions" menu ..................................................................................................................  367

"Telemetry" menu ....................................................................................................................  367

"Active errors" menu ................................................................................................................  369

"Error history" menu.................................................................................................................  369

"Control units overview" menu .................................................................................................  370

"Control unit versions" menu....................................................................................................  372

"Information" menu ..................................................................................................................  373

"Camera systems" menu .........................................................................................................  374

"Lighting" menu........................................................................................................................  374

“Cabin” menu ...........................................................................................................................  376

“Terminal” menu.......................................................................................................................  378

“Armrest” menu ........................................................................................................................  379

“Control Lever” menu ...............................................................................................................  381

“Background Lighting” menu....................................................................................................  382

“Control Unit Versions” menu ..................................................................................................  383

“Printer” menu ..........................................................................................................................  384

"Automatic climate control" menu ............................................................................................  384

"Wiper" menu ...........................................................................................................................  386

"Mirror heating" menu ..............................................................................................................  387

"Momentary foot switch" menu ................................................................................................  387

"Lubrication" menu...................................................................................................................  388

"Central lubrication" menu .......................................................................................................  389

"Intermediate gearbox" menu ..................................................................................................  391

"Crop flow" menu .....................................................................................................................  391

“Header” menu.........................................................................................................................  395

“Header Drive” menu ...............................................................................................................  395

"AutoScan" menu.....................................................................................................................  396

“Intake” menu...........................................................................................................................  397

"Foreign object detection" menu ..............................................................................................  397

“Lifting Unit” menu ...................................................................................................................  398

"Grinding device and counterblade" menu...............................................................................  399

“Main Coupling” menu .............................................................................................................  402

“Corn Conditioner” menu .........................................................................................................  403

“Discharge Accelerator” menu .................................................................................................  406

"Content material sensor" menu ..............................................................................................  407

"CropControl" menu .................................................................................................................  408

8

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Table of contents

22

22.1

22.1.1

22.1.2

22.1.3

22.1.4

22.1.5

22.1.6

22.1.7

22.1.8

22.1.9

22.1.10

22.1.11

22.1.12

22.1.13

22.1.14

22.1.15

22.1.16

22.1.17

22.1.18

22.1.19

22.1.20

22.2

22.3

22.4

23

23.1

23.2

23.2.1

20.8.13

"Silage additives units" menu...................................................................................................  410

20.8.13.1

"External silage additives unit" menu.......................................................................................  410

20.8.13.2

"Silage additives unit fine dosing" menu ..................................................................................  410

20.8.13.3

"Silage additives unit coarse dosing" menu .............................................................................  411

20.9

"Spout" menu ...........................................................................................................................  412

20.9.1

20.9.2

"Spout" menu ...........................................................................................................................  413

"Auto-loading system" menu....................................................................................................  415

20.10

20.10.1

20.10.2

20.10.3

20.11

20.11.1

20.11.2

20.11.3

“Engine” menu .........................................................................................................................  416

“Diesel Engine” menu ..............................................................................................................  416

“ConstantPower” menu ...........................................................................................................  418

"Compressed air cleaning" menu.............................................................................................  418

“Hydraulics” menu....................................................................................................................  420

“Header Locking” menu ..........................................................................................................  421

“Work Hydraulics” menu ..........................................................................................................  421

“Auxiliary Hydraulics” menu .....................................................................................................  422

20.12

20.12.1

20.12.2

20.12.3

20.12.4

20.12.5

20.13

20.14

“Drive Functions” menu............................................................................................................  422

“Automatic Steering System” menu .........................................................................................  424

“Traction Drive” Menu ..............................................................................................................  424

“Additional Axle” menu.............................................................................................................  425

“Rear Axle” menu.....................................................................................................................  426

"Trailer brake" menu ................................................................................................................  427

“Season Settings” menu ..........................................................................................................  428

"User level" menu ....................................................................................................................  429

21

21.1

21.2

21.2.1

21.2.2

21.2.3

21.3

Settings...................................................................................................................................  430

Optimising crop flow.................................................................................................................  430

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine ........................................................................  431

Adjusting overhang of chopping blades ...................................................................................  431

Setting drum base ...................................................................................................................  431

Setting the rear wall of the discharge accelerator....................................................................  434

Setting deflector sheet on the corn conditioner .......................................................................  438

Maintenance - General Information......................................................................................  439

Maintenance table ...................................................................................................................  440

Maintenance – Before the season ...........................................................................................  440

Maintenance – After the season ..............................................................................................  441

Maintenance - once after 1 hour .............................................................................................  442

Maintenance - once after 4 hours ............................................................................................  443

Maintenance - once after 10 hours ..........................................................................................  443

Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours............................................................................  443

Maintenance - Once after 50 hours .........................................................................................  443

Maintenance – Once after 200 hours ......................................................................................  444

Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km........................................................................................  444

Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a day...........................................................  444

Maintenance – Weekly ............................................................................................................  445

Maintenance – Every 30 hours ................................................................................................  446

Maintenance - Every 50 hours .................................................................................................  446

Maintenance - every 100 hours ...............................................................................................  446

Maintenance - every 250 hours ...............................................................................................  446

Maintenance - Every 500 hours ...............................................................................................  447

Maintenance – every 500 hours, at least before the start of the season .................................  448

Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the end of the season ..................................  448

Maintenance - every 3 years ...................................................................................................  449

Maintenance - as required .......................................................................................................  449

Tightening torques ...................................................................................................................  451

Cleaning the machine ..............................................................................................................  454

Compressed air connections to clean with compressed air.....................................................  455

Maintenance - Engine ............................................................................................................  456

Engine overview .....................................................................................................................  457

Dirt deposits in engine compartment .......................................................................................  457

Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air ................................................................  458

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 9

Table of contents

23.3

23.3.1

23.3.2

23.4

23.4.1

23.4.2

23.4.3

23.5

23.6

23.7

23.8

23.9

23.9.1

23.9.2

23.9.3

23.9.4

23.10

23.11

23.12

24

24.1

24.2

26

26.1

26.2

26.3

26.4

26.5

26.5.1

26.5.2

26.5.3

25

25.5.5

25.6

25.7

25.7.1

25.7.2

25.8

25.8.1

25.8.2

25.8.3

25.8.4

25.9

25.10

25.11

25.1

25.2

25.2.1

25.2.2

25.2.3

25.2.4

25.2.5

25.3

25.4

25.5

25.5.1

25.5.2

25.5.3

25.5.4

Engine oil level.........................................................................................................................  458

Checking engine oil level ........................................................................................................  459

Topping up engine oil ..............................................................................................................  459

Fuel prefilter/water separator ...................................................................................................  460

Changing the fuel filter element ...............................................................................................  460

Cleaning the fuel prefilter sight glass .......................................................................................  461

Draining condensation water out of the fuel prefilter ...............................................................  461

Refuelling .................................................................................................................................  462

Vent fuel filter ...........................................................................................................................  463

Engine coolant .........................................................................................................................  463

Checking the engine coolant level ...........................................................................................  464

Checking engine piping ...........................................................................................................  466

Checking pipework in the air conditioning and heating system ...............................................  466

Checking tubing in engine cooling system...............................................................................  466

Checking pipework in air intake and charge air .......................................................................  467

Checking fuel lines...................................................................................................................  467

Cleaning air filter ......................................................................................................................  468

Replacing safety cartridge .......................................................................................................  469

Shutting down the diesel engine ..............................................................................................  469

Maintenance – Compressed Air System .............................................................................  471

Drain condensation water from the compressed air tank ........................................................  471

Retighten tensioning straps at the compressed air tank ..........................................................  472

Maintenance – Basic Machine ..............................................................................................  473

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system .........................................................................  473

Maintaining air conditioning and heating .................................................................................  474

Components of air conditioning ...............................................................................................  474

Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/dryer ..............................................................  475

Checking the condition and filling quantity of refrigerant ........................................................  475

Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter.............................................................................................  476

Replacing/cleaning circulation filter .........................................................................................  477

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment ................................................................................  477

Draining coolant .......................................................................................................................  478

Maintaining chassis .................................................................................................................  479

Checking attachment of steering cylinder ................................................................................  479

Checking fitting of track rod .....................................................................................................  479

Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version..................................  480

Checking the hub bearing of the rear axle, for the front-wheel drive version ..........................  480

Checking attachment of wheel hub gearbox............................................................................  481

Maintaining brake (Bosch) .......................................................................................................  482

Maintaining belt drives ............................................................................................................  483

Checking kraftband ..................................................................................................................  484

Checking pulley .......................................................................................................................  485

Maintaining tyres and wheels ..................................................................................................  485

Checking/maintaining tyres......................................................................................................  485

Retighten wheel nuts ...............................................................................................................  486

Running direction of tyres ........................................................................................................  486

Changing tyre size ...................................................................................................................  486

Maintaining tow coupling .........................................................................................................  487

Checking the fire extinguisher .................................................................................................  488

Checking the gaps at the mudguards ......................................................................................  488

Maintenance – Feed System .................................................................................................  491

Removing intake unit with mounting cart .................................................................................  491

Mounting intake unit with installation cart ................................................................................  494

Removing intake unit with header............................................................................................  496

Mounting intake unit with header .............................................................................................  498

Grinding chopping blades ........................................................................................................  500

Grinding the chopping blades when intake is not mounted .....................................................  502

Checking the grinding stone and cleaning the grinding channel .............................................  503

Performing grinding process ....................................................................................................  504

10

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

26.5.4

26.5.5

29

29.1

29.2

29.3

29.4

29.5

29.6

29.7

29.8

29.9

29.10

29.11

30

28

28.1

28.2

28.3

28.4

28.5

27

27.1

27.1.1

27.1.2

27.1.3

27.1.4

27.1.5

27.1.6

27.1.7

27.1.8

27.1.9

27.2

27.2.1

27.2.2

27.3

27.3.1

27.3.2

27.3.3

27.3.4

27.4

27.5

26.6

26.6.1

26.6.2

26.6.3

26.7

26.8

26.9

26.10

26.10.1

26.10.2

26.11

26.12

26.13

26.14

26.15

Table of contents

Readjusting the counterblade ..................................................................................................  505

Grinding and readjusting counterblade (for the version with "automatisch counterblade adjustment").............................................................................................................................  508

Readjusting or replacing grinding stone ..................................................................................  509

Checking grinding stone ..........................................................................................................  510

Readjusting grinding stone ......................................................................................................  511

Replacing grinding stone .........................................................................................................  513

Readjusting or changing chopping blades ...............................................................................  515

Working with half the number of chopping blades ...................................................................  530

Turning or replacing counterblade ...........................................................................................  531

Operating the mounting cart of the chopper unit (for "Chopper unit mounting cart" design) ...  533

Setting mounting cart ...............................................................................................................  533

Parking mounting cart ..............................................................................................................  534

Turning or replacing conveyor bars of pre-compression roller ................................................  534

Changing conveyor bars on feed roller ....................................................................................  535

Adjusting the distance between the scraper and flat roller ......................................................  535

Setting the gap compression roller-scraper .............................................................................  537

Setting the tension springs of intake unit .................................................................................  539

Maintenance - Crop Flow ......................................................................................................  541

Access points to crop flow .......................................................................................................  541

Removing the grass channel ...................................................................................................  542

Installing the grass channel .....................................................................................................  542

Opening maintenance flap transfer shaft .................................................................................  542

Removing drum base and grating base (version with "Grating base") ....................................  543

Mounting drum base and grating base (version with "Grating base")......................................  545

Removing the rear wall of the discharge accelerator...............................................................  546

Reinstalling the rear wall of the discharge accelerator ............................................................  547

Removing maintenance flap in channel support ......................................................................  547

Opening maintenance flap in the spout ...................................................................................  548

Maintaining the corn conditioner ..............................................................................................  549

Lubricating the deflection roll of the corn conditioner belt after washing .................................  549

Check the corn conditioner with rollers for wear and tear........................................................  550

Maintenance discharge accelerator .........................................................................................  551

Cleaning the bearing of the discharge accelerator ..................................................................  551

Checking discharge scoops ....................................................................................................  552

Removing/installing discharge scoops.....................................................................................  552

Checking and adjusting discharge accelerator scraper ...........................................................  553

Setting corn conditioner ...........................................................................................................  554

Maintenance husk comb (version with "Husk comb") ..............................................................  555

Maintenance - Hydraulic System..........................................................................................  558

Pressure limiting valves ...........................................................................................................  558

Hydraulic oil .............................................................................................................................  559

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank...................................................................................................  559

Changing the high-pressure filter.............................................................................................  560

Checking hydraulic hoses ........................................................................................................  561

Maintenance - Gearbox .........................................................................................................  562

Overview of gearboxes ............................................................................................................  562

Maintaining transfer gearbox ...................................................................................................  563

Maintaining intermediate gearbox............................................................................................  564

Maintaining intermediate gearbox intake .................................................................................  564

Maintaining bottom roller gearbox ...........................................................................................  565

Maintaining top roller gearbox .................................................................................................  566

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox ...............................................................................................  567

Maintaining spout rotary drive gearbox....................................................................................  570

Maintaining fan gearbox ..........................................................................................................  571

Maintaining power take-off gear ..............................................................................................  572

Servicing VariLOC chop length gearbox..................................................................................  573

Maintenance – Electrics ........................................................................................................  575

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 11

Table of contents

30.1

30.1.1

30.1.2

30.1.3

30.2

30.3

32

32.1

32.2

32.3

32.4

32.5

31

31.1

31.1.1

31.1.2

31.1.3

31.1.4

31.2

33

33.1

33.1.1

33.1.2

33.1.3

33.1.4

33.1.5

33.2

33.2.1

33.3

33.4

33.5

34

35

Batteries...................................................................................................................................  576

Cleaning and maintaining batteries .........................................................................................  577

Charging batteries ...................................................................................................................  577

Replacing batteries .................................................................................................................  578

Maintaining alternator ..............................................................................................................  580

Maintaining starter ...................................................................................................................  581

Maintenance - Lubrication ....................................................................................................  582

Lubricating universal shafts .....................................................................................................  582

Lubricating the universal shaft drive intake..............................................................................  583

Lubricating the universal shaft upper roller gearbox ................................................................  583

Lubricating universal shaft header ...........................................................................................  584

Lubricating the double joint ......................................................................................................  585

Lubrication chart - machine .....................................................................................................  585

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System .......................................................................  592

Distributor blocks of the central lubrication unit .......................................................................  592

Lubricants ................................................................................................................................  597

Filling the lubricant tank ...........................................................................................................  597

Check filling level .....................................................................................................................  598

Starting intermediate lubrication ..............................................................................................  599

Malfunction, cause and remedy ...........................................................................................  600

Electrics/electronics BiG X defective .......................................................................................  600

Cable break, short circuit .........................................................................................................  600

Overview of fuses ....................................................................................................................  602

Overview of control units .........................................................................................................  605

Overview of sensors ................................................................................................................  606

Overview actuators ..................................................................................................................  607

Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit ...............................................................................  609

Searching for the error in the central lubrication system .........................................................  609

External starting of the machine ..............................................................................................  609

Removing crop blockages in area of crop flow ........................................................................  611

Car jack contact points ............................................................................................................  616

Waste disposal.......................................................................................................................  618

Index........................................................................................................................................  619

Declaration of conformity .....................................................................................................  633

12

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

Information on This Document

Validity

1

1.1

Information on This Document

Validity

This document is valid for machines of type:

BX201-45 (BiG X 630)

All information, illustrations and technical data in this document correspond to the latest state at the time of publication.

We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Significance of the document

This is an important document. It is addressed to the user and contains safety-relevant information.

„ Prior to starting work, read the complete document and observe its contents.

„ Keep this document ready to hand for the user of the machine.

„ Hand over this document to subsequent users.

Re-ordering

You can request a replacement document if this document became completely or partly unusable, or if you need it in a different language. Please specify the document number shown on the cover page in your order. Alternatively, you can download the document online from

KRONE MEDIA https://media.mykrone.green

.

Applicable documents

To ensure that the machine is used safely and as intended, observe the following further applicable documents.

• Operating instructions for diesel engine, MTU Friedrichshafen GmbH

• Fuel specification for diesel engine, MTU Friedrichshafen GmbH

• Maintenance instructions for diesel engine, MTU Friedrichshafen GmbH

• Supplement to operating instructions "Error messages, information messages and parameters"

• Operating instructions for prefilter for diesel fuel, HYDAC

• Operating instructions for header, KRONE

• Operating instructions for transport wagon, KRONE

• Operating instructions for KRONE NIR Control dual

• Operating instructions for universal shaft

• Circuit diagram, KRONE

• Spare parts list, KRONE

Target group of this document

This document aims at the operator of the machine who fulfills the minimum requirements of personnel qualification,

see Page 19 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 13

1

1.6

1.6

Information on This Document

How to use this document

How to use this document

1.6.1

1.6.2

1.6.3

1.6.4

1.6.5

1.6.6

Directories and references

Contents/headers

The contents and headers in this document ensure quick orientation in the chapters.

Index

The index contains catchwords in alphabetical order which enable to find information on a desired topic easily. The index can be found on the last pages of this document.

Cross references

Cross references to another place in the document or to another document are in the text with page number.

Examples:

Check the tight seat of all screws on the machine, see Page 14

. ( INFO : If you use an electronic version of this document, click on the link to go to the specified page.)

• For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the universal shaft manufacturer.

Information on direction

Directional information in this document, such as front, rear, right and left, applies in the direction of travel of the machine.

Term “machine”

Throughout the rest of this document, the “exact forage harvester” will also be referred to as the

“machine”.

Figures

The figures in this document do not always represent the exact machine type. The information that refers to the figure always corresponds to the machine type of this document.

Scope of the document

In addition to standard equipment, accessories kits and versions of the machine are described in this document. Your machine may deviate from this document.

Means of representation

Icons in the text

The following means of representation (icons) are used to present the text more clearly:

14

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Information on This Document

How to use this document

1

1.6

This arrow characterizes an action step . Several arrows in a row identify a sequence of actions to be performed step by step.

This icon identifies a prerequisite that has to be fulfilled to perform an action step or a sequence of actions.

This arrow marks the intermediate result of an action step.

This arrow identifies the result of an action step or sequence of actions.

This bullet point identifies an enumeration . If the bullet point is intended, it identifies the second level of the enumeration.

Icons in figures

The following icons can be used in illustrations:

Icon

1

Explanation

Reference sign for part

Icon

I

X

LH

Dimensions (e. g. also W = width,

H = height, L = length)

Left side of machine

Direction of travel

Reference line for visible material

RH

Centre line

Open

Apply liquid lubricant (e.g. lubricating oil)

Explanation

Position of a part (e.g. move from position I to position II)

Magnification of display detail

Right side of machine

Direction of motion

Reference line for covered material

Cable routes

Closed

Apply lubricating grease

Warning signs

Warnings of dangers are separated from the remaining text as warning signs and are identified with a danger sign and signal words.

The warning signs must be read and the measures must be observed in order to prevent personal injury.

Explanation of danger sign

This is the danger sign that warns of a risk of injury.

Please observe all notes marked with the danger sign in order to avoid injuries or death.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 15

1

1.6

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Explanation of signal words

DANGER

The signal word DANGER warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or death if the warning sign is ignored.

WARNING

The signal word WARNING warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or death if the warning sign is ignored.

CAUTION

The signal word CAUTION warns of a hazardous situation which will result in minor to moderate injuries if the warning sign is ignored.

Example of a warning sign:

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles

When cleaning with compressed air, dirt particles are ejected at high speed and could get into the eyes. Therefore eyes could be hurt.

„ Keep people away from the working area.

„ Wear personal protective equipment when performing cleaning work with compressed air

(e.g. eye protection).

Warnings of property damage/environmental damage

Warnings of property/environmental damage are separated from the remaining text and marked with "Notice".

Example:

NOTICE

Gearbox damage due to low oil level

The gearboxes could be damaged when the oil level is too low.

„ Check gear oil level at regular intervals and top up oil, if necessary.

„ Check gear oil level approx. 3 to 4 hours after the machine has been switched off. Check oil level only when machine is in horizontal position.

Notes with information and recommendations

Additional information and recommendations for trouble-free and productive operation of the machine are separated from the remaining text and marked with “Information”.

Example:

INFO

Each safety label is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the manufacturer or from the authorized specialist dealer.

16

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1.6.7

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Conversion table

The following table can be used to convert metric units into US units.

Size

Area

SI units (metric)

Unit name Abbreviation

Hectare ha

Volume flow Litres per minute L/min

Cubic metres per hour m³/h

Force

Length

Power

Pressure

Torque

Temperature

Velocity

Newton

Millimetre

Metre

Kilowatt

Kilopascal

Megapascal bar (non-SI)

Newtonmeter

N mm m kW kPa

MPa bar

Nm

Degrees Celsius °C m/min

Factor

2.47105

0.2642

4.4029

0.2248

0.03937

3.2808

1.3410

0.1450

145.0377

14.5038

0.7376

8.8507

°Cx1.8+32

3.2808

Inch-pound units

Unit name

Acre

US gallons per minute

Pound force

Inch

Foot

Horsepower

Pounds per square inch

Abbreviation acres gpm lbf in.

ft.

hp psi pound-foot or foot-pound pound-inch or inch-pound ft∙lbf in∙lbf

Degrees

Fahrenheit

°F

Feet per minute ft/min

Volumes

Weight

Metres per minute

Metres per second

Kilometres per hour

Litres

Millilitre

Cubic centimetre

Kilogram m/s km/h

L ml cm³ kg

3.2808

0.6215

0.2642

0.0338

0.0610

2.2046

Feet per second ft/s

Miles per hour

US gallon

US ounce

Cubic inch

Pound mph

US gal.

US oz.

in³ lbs

1

1.6

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 17

2

2.1

2

Safety

Intended use

Safety

2.1

2.2

18

Intended use

This machine is a self-propelled forage harvester and is used to chop crops.

The crops designated for the intended use of this machine in conjunction with

• a KRONE XCollect are harvested thick-stemmed forage plants, e.g. maize plants,

• a KRONE EasyCollect are harvested thick-stemmed forage plants, e.g. maize plants,

• a KRONE XDisc are mown stalk and leaf crops,

• a KRONE EasyFlow collected stalk and leaf crops,

• a header for smallwood crops from cut groves.

The machine is designed exclusively for use in agriculture and may only be used when

• all safety devices are available according to the operating instructions and are located in the protective position.

• all safety instructions of the operating instructions have been observed and complied with,

both in chapter “Basic safety instructions”, see Page 19 , and directly in the chapters of the

operating instructions.

The machine may be used only by people who satisfy the personnel qualification requirements

designated by the machine manufacturer, see Page 19

.

These operating instructions are part of the machine and must therefore be at hand when the machine is in use. The machine may be operated only when the operator has received training and in compliance with these operating instructions.

If the machine is used for applications which are not described in these operating instructions, this may result in serious injuries or death and damage to the machine and other property.

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt the proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

The intended use shall also include the adherence to the operating, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Any use beyond the intended use

see Page 18 is regarded as improper use and is therefore

misuse according to the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer is not liable for damage resulting from this, the user alone bears the risk.

Such misuse is for example:

Processing of crops which are outside the intended use of the machine, see Page 18

• Transport of people

• Transport of goods

• Exceeding the permitted technical gross weight

• Non-compliance with the safety labels on the machine and safety notes in the operating instructions

• Performing troubleshooting, setting, cleaning, repair and maintenance work contrary to the information in the operating instructions

• Unauthorised modifications to the machine

• Attachment of unauthorised or unapproved additional equipment

• Use of spare parts which are not KRONE original spare parts

• Stationary operation of the machine

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications will exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

Safety

Service life of the machine

Service life of the machine

• The service life of this machine depends on its proper operation and maintenance as well as the operating and harvesting conditions.

• By heeding the instructions and information in these operating instructions, permanent operational readiness and a long service life of the machine can be achieved.

• After each operating season, inspect the entire machine for wear and other damage.

• Replace damaged and worn components before recommissioning the machine.

• Carry out a full technical inspection of the machine after five years of machine operation and make a decision on further machine usage taking the results of this inspection into account.

• Theoretically, the service life of this machine is unlimited as all worn or damaged components can be replaced.

2

2.3

Basic safety instructions

Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings

Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings may result in injuries and damage to the environment and property.

Importance of operating instructions

The operating instructions are an important document and a part of the machine. They are intended for the user and contain information that is relevant to safety.

Only the procedures specified in the operating instructions are safe. If the operating instructions are not followed, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries.

„ Prior to using the machine for the first time, read and observe the "Basic safety notices" completely.

„ Prior to starting work, read and observe the respective sections in the operating instructions too.

„ Keep the operating instructions easily accessible for the machine user at all times.

„ Hand over the operating instructions to subsequent users.

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel

If the machine is not used properly, people may be seriously injured or killed. To avoid accidents, each person who works with the machine must satisfy the following minimum requirements:

• He is physically capable of controlling the machine.

• He can work safely with the machine in accordance with these operating instructions.

• He understands the method of operation of the machine within the scope of his work and can identify and avoid the dangers associated with the work.

• He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating instructions accordingly.

• He is familiar with driving vehicles safely.

• For road travel he has adequate knowledge of the highway code and has the stipulated driving licence.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 19

2

2.4

2.4.3

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Personnel qualification of the technicians

If the work (assembly, conversion, modification, extension, repairs, retrofitting) is performed improperly on the machine, people may be seriously or fatally injured. To avoid accidents, everyone who performs work according to these instructions must meet the following minimum requirements:

• Qualified professional, with relevant training.

• Capable of assembling the (partially) disassembled machine according to the assembly instructions provided by the manufacturer.

• He is capable, e.g. by attending a training course, of extending, modifying or repairing the function of the machine according to the relevant instructions provided by the manufacturer.

• He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating instructions accordingly.

• Ability to perform the work safely according to these instructions.

• Understands the mode of operation of the work to be performed and the machine and is able to identify and avoid risk in carrying out the necessary work.

• Has read these instructions and is able to implement the information explained in these instructions accordingly.

2.4.4

2.4.5

Children in danger

Children are not in a position to assess dangers and behave unpredictably.

Thus children are particularly at risk.

• Children are especially at risk when climbing up and down the machine.

• There is no possibility to secure children sufficiently on the self-propelled machine.

• Vibrations can be particularly harmful to children's bodies.

• Children may initiate dangerous movements of the machine.

„ Never take children on the self-propelled harvester.

„ Keep children away from the machine.

„ Keep children away from consumables.

„ Make sure that there are no children in the danger zone, especially when starting and triggering machine movements.

Connecting the machine

If headers or trailers not connected properly to the forage harvester, serious accidents could be caused.

„ When connecting, observe the following operating instructions:

• the header operating instructions

• the trailer operating instructions

• the machine operating instructions

• the universal shaft operating instructions

„ Follow the coupling instructions:

• for headers

see Page 203

und

see Page 221

.

• for trailers

see Page 264

„ Observe the changed driving behaviour of the combination.

20

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

2.4.6

2.4.7

2.4.8

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Structural modifications on the machine

Structural modifications and extensions that were not approved by KRONE can impair the functionality, operational safety and also the road traffic certification of the machine. As a result, persons can be seriously injured or killed.

Any structural modifications and extensions that are not authorised by KRONE are not permitted.

Additional equipment and spare parts

Additional equipment and spare parts that do not correspond to the requirements of the manufacturer may affect the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ To ensure operational safety, use original parts or standard parts which correspond to the requirements of the manufacturer.

Jobs on the machine

Control of moving machine

The moving machine requires that the driver/operator is able to react quickly at any time.

Otherwise, the machine may move uncontrollably and cause serious injuries and death.

„ Start the engine from the driver's seat only.

„ While the vehicle is travelling, never leave the driver's seat.

„ Never climb in or out of the machine while the machine is moving.

Control of the machine during operation

While the machine is in operation, always ensure that the drivers/operators can intervene quickly at any time in the machine control. Otherwise, the machine may move in an uncontrolled manner and seriously injure or kill people.

While the machine is in operation, the driver/operator must be in the cabin or near the grinding control unit.

On-board instructors when using the machine for work (passenger seat)

On-board instructors may fall and be injured due to movements of the machine.

• Never use the passenger seat for road travel.

• Use the passenger seat for instruction purposes during operation in the field only.

Passengers

Passengers may be seriously injured by the machine or fall off the machine and run over.

Ejected objects may strike and injure passengers.

„ Never carry passengers on the machine.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 21

2

2.4

2.4.9

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Operational safety: Technically sound condition

Operation only after proper commissioning

The operational safety of the machine is not guaranteed without proper commissioning in accordance with these operating instructions. This may result in accidents and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Use the machine only after proper commissioning,

see Page 122

.

Technically sound state of the machine

Improper maintenance and setting could influence the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ All maintenance and setting work must be performed according to the chapters

“Maintenance and Setting”.

„ Before performing any maintenance and setting work, shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 34

.

Danger resulting from damage to the machine

Damage to the machine may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed. The following parts of the machine are particularly important for safety:

• Brakes

• Steering

• Safety Devices

• Connecting devices

• Lighting

• Hydraulics

• Tyres

• Universal shaft

If there are doubts about the operational safety of the machine, for example due to an unexpected change to the operational behaviour, visible damage or leaking consumables:

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

„ Immediately eliminate potential causes of damage, for example heavy soiling, or tighten slack screws.

„ Determine the cause of damage according to these operating instructions and repair the

damage, if possible, see Page 600

.

„ In case of damage which may affect operational safety and cannot be repaired according to these operating instructions: Have damage repaired by a qualified service centre.

Technical limit values

If the technical limit values of the machine are not observed, the machine may be damaged. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured. With regard to safety, it is especially important to observe the following technical limit values:

• Maximum permitted total weight

• Maximum permitted axle loads

• Maximum permitted trailer load

22

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

2.4.10

• Maximum permitted drawbar load

• Maximum permitted transport height and width

• Maximum permitted speed

„

Comply with limit values, see Page 78 .

Danger zones

If the machine is switched on, its surrounding can present a danger zone.

Avoid entering the danger zone of the machine by observing the minimum safety distance.

If the safety distance is not observed, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Do not switch on the drives and engine if the minimum safety distance has not been observed.

„ If people fail to observe the minimum safety distance, switch off the drives.

„ Switch the machine off in shunting and field mode.

The safety distance is:

For machine in shunting and field mode

In front of the machine

Behind the machine

On either side of the machine

30 m

5 m

3 m

For machine switched on without driving motion

In front of the machine 3 m

Behind the machine

On either side of the machine

5 m

3 m

The safety distances specified here are minimum distances in terms of intended use. If necessary, these safety distances must be increased according to the operating and ambient conditions.

„ Before working in the danger zone of the machine: Shut down and secure the machine,

see

Page 34 . This also applies to brief inspection work.

„ Consider the information in all relevant operating instructions:

• the operating instructions of the machine

• the operating instructions of universal shaft

• the operating instructions for the header

• the operating instructions for the transport wagon

Danger zone universal shaft

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the universal shaft.

„ Observe operating instructions of universal shaft.

„ Ensure sufficient overlap of section tube and universal shaft guards.

„ Make sure that the universal shaft guards are mounted and that they are fully functional.

„ Allow the universal shaft locks to engage. There must be no areas of the locking device on the PTO shaft fork which could cause catching or entrapment (e.g. by annular design, protective collar around the locking pin).

„ Attach chains to prevent the universal shaft guards from rotating with the shaft.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 23

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

„ Ensure that the selected speed and direction of rotation of the PTO shaft of the selfpropelled harvester match the permitted speed and direction of rotation of the header.

„ Switch off the PTO shaft when the angles between the universal shaft and the PTO shaft are too large. The machine may be damaged. Parts may be hurled up and cause injury to people.

Danger zone PTO shaft

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the PTO shaft and the driven components.

Before switching on the PTO shaft:

„ Ensure that all protective devices are mounted and brought into protective position.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

„ Switch off drives if they are not needed.

Danger zone between precision forage harvester and header

People staying between precision forage harvester and header may be seriously hurt or killed caused by precision forage harvester rolling away, carelessness or machine movements.

„ Prior to all work between the precision forage harvester and header: Stop the machine and secure it,

see Page 34

. This also applies to brief inspection work.

„ If the lifting unit has to be actuated, keep all people away from the range of movement of the header.

Danger zone when drive is switched on

When the drive is switched on, there is a danger to life caused by rotating machine parts.

Ensure that there are no persons in the danger zone of the machine.

„ Before starting the machine, instruct all people to leave the danger zone of the machine.

„ In case of dangerous situations, immediately switch off drives and instruct people to leave the danger zone.

Danger zone quick coupler

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the quick coupler and the driven components.

Before switching on the quick coupler:

„ Mount all safety devices and move them to protective position.

„ Ensure that there is no one in the danger zone of machine or universal shaft.

„ Switch off drives in case they are not needed.

Danger zone due to trailing machine parts

If machine parts are trailing, people may be seriously injured or killed.

24

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

After the drives have been switched off, the following machine parts will trail:

• Universal shaft

• Drive belt

• Fan

• Rotating screen

• Header

The following machine parts of the crop flow may coast:

• Chopping drum

• Intake rollers

• Corn conditioner

• Discharge accelerator

If all machine parts of the crop flow have still not come to a standstill 10 s after the machine has been switched off by the main drive brake, a warning signal sounds. The warning signal sounds until all machine parts have come to a standstill.

If machine parts are trailing, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

„ Do not attempt to approach the machine until all moving machine parts have come to a standstill.

2.4.11

Ensuring functionality of safety devices

If safety devices are missing or damaged, people may be seriously injured or killed by moving machine parts.

„ Replace damaged safety devices.

„ Mount dismounted safety devices and machine parts again before start-up and move them to protective position.

„ If it is doubtful whether all safety devices have been correctly installed and are functional, have a service centre check them.

2.4.12

Personal protective equipment

The wearing of personal protective equipment is an important safety measure. Missing or unsuitable personal protective equipment increases health risks and injuries.

Personal protective equipment includes, for example:

• Suitable protective gloves

• Safety shoes

• Tight-fitting protective clothing

• Hearing protection

• Protective goggles

• If dust is generated: appropriate breathing protection

„ Specify and provide personal protective equipment for the particular job.

„ Use only personal protective equipment which is in proper condition and offers effective protection.

„ Adjust personal protective equipment to the person, for example the size.

„ Remove unsuitable clothing and jewellery (e.g. rings, necklaces) and cover long hair with a hairnet.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 25

2

2.4

2.4.13

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Safety markings on the machine

Safety labels on the machine warn of hazards at danger points and are an important component of the machine's safety equipment. Missing safety labels increase the risk of serious and fatal injuries.

„ Clean dirty safety labels.

„ After each cleaning, check to ensure that the safety labels are complete and legible.

„ Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.

„ Label spare parts with the required safety labels.

Descriptions, explanations and order numbers of the safety labels,

see Page 36 .

2.4.14

Road safety

Dangers during road travel

Other road users can be put at risk when you drive on public roads and the machine is not properly illuminated and/or exceeds the maximum dimensions and weights laid down by national law.

„ Prior to driving on public roads, ensure that the maximum permissible dimensions, weights and axle, support and trailer loads are not exceeded which are applicable under national law for driving on public roads.

„ Before driving on roads, switch on the road travel lighting and ensure that it functions properly.

„ Before driving on roads, move the main mode switch to the “road mode” position.

Danger when driving on road and field

The self-propelled machine has special driving properties which also depend on the operating state and on the ground. If changed handling characteristics are not considered, the driver may cause accidents.

„ Observe measures for driving on road and field,

see Page 238

.

Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for road travel

If the machine is not prepared properly for road travel, serious accidents may occur with traffic.

„ Before driving on roads, prepare the machine for road travel,

see Page 239 .

Dangers when cornering with trailed trailer and due to the overall width

Accidents may occur when cornering due to the trailer swinging out and due to the overall width.

„ Consider the overall width of the combined tractor and machine.

„ Consider the larger swivel range when cornering.

„ Consider people, oncoming traffic and obstacles when turning.

26

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Dangers when operating the machine on slopes

The machine may tilt when it is used on slopes. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Do not work and drive on a slope unless the ground of the slope is flat and the adhesion of the tyres to the ground is ensured.

„ Turn the machine at low speed. Turn in a large arc.

„ Avoid driving across a slope because the centre of gravity of the machine will be changed by payload and by executing machine functions.

„ Avoid abrupt steering movements on slopes.

„ When driving up and down on a slope, always align the header uphill and keep it as close as possible to the ground.

„ Do not move the machine from working position to transport position or from transport position to working position as long as the machine is used across a slope.

„ Do not park the machine on slopes.

„ Observe procedures for operating the machine on slopes,

see Page 281

.

2.4.15

Parking the machine safely

An incorrectly parked and insufficiently safeguarded machine can represent a danger for people, especially children, and can be set into motion or fall over in an uncontrolled manner.

People may be injured or killed.

„ Park the machine on a horizontal and level ground capable of bearing the load.

„ Before adjusting, repairing, servicing and cleaning the machine, ensure that it is securely positioned.

„ Observe section “Parking the Machine” in chapter Driving and Transport.

see Page 256

„ Before parking: Shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 34

.

2.4.16

Consumables

Unsuitable consumables

Consumables which do not comply with the requirements of the manufacturer may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ Use only consumables which comply with the requirements of the manufacturer.

For requirements on consumables,

see Page 80

.

Contamination of hydraulic system and/or fuel system

Foreign objects and/or liquids in the hydraulic system and/or fuel system may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ Clean all connections and components.

„ Close open connections by means of protective caps.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 27

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Fuel is harmful

Fuels are carcinogenic. Swallowing fuel or inhaling fuel vapours may be harmful.

„ Do not inhale the vapours.

„ Do not swallow the fuel.

„ To prevent skin damage, avoid skin contact with the fuel.

„ Wear suitable protective gloves and protective goggles.

„ Immediately contact a doctor if Diesel fuel was swallowed.

Environmental protection and disposal

Consumables such as diesel fuel, brake fluid, antifreeze and lubricants (e.g. gearbox oil, hydraulic oil) may damage the environment and the health of people.

„ Do not release consumables into the environment.

„ Fill consumables in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.

„ Absorb leaked consumables with an absorbent material, fill them in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.

2.4.17

2.4.18

Chemicals

Keep cabin free of chemicals

Harmful and aggressive chemicals will pollute the air in the cabin. Harmful and aggressive reactive substances are for example:

• Solvents

• Fuels

• Oils and greases

• Detergents

• Acids

These chemicals may stick to clothing and enter the cabin in this way. Gases and liquids may escape even from closed tanks. The chemicals may impair health and the ability to concentrate.

As a result, accidents could be caused.

Electrical components could be damaged, for example control units and plug connections. This may result in fire and accidents caused by malfunctions, system failures or short circuits.

„ Keep the inside of the cabin clean.

„ Do not store or transport any harmful and aggressive chemicals in the cabin.

„ Before entering the cabin, remove clothing which may be contaminated with harmful and aggressive chemicals.

„ Before entering the cabin, remove soil and other substances from shoes or boots. The soil may be contaminated with chemicals.

Dangers arising from environment

Fire hazard

Combustible materials may accumulate in the machine due to operation or animals, such as rodents or nesting birds, or dust resuspension.

28

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

In case of dry usage conditions, dust, impurities and crop residue may ignite on hot parts and the resulting fire may seriously injure or kill people.

„ Check and clean the machine every day before using it for the first time.

„ Check and clean the machine regularly during the working day.

„ Regularly check hydraulic oil lines for proper condition and position with sufficient clearance to sharp edges.

„ Regularly check exhaust systems, tubes and turbocharger of engine system. Remove crop residues.

„ While refuelling, do not smoke and do not place the machine near naked flames or explosive sparks.

Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines

The machine may reach the height of overhead lines with the spout. This may cause voltage to flash over to the machine and cause a fatal electric shock or fire.

„ When folding the spout in and out, keep an adequate distance from the power transmission lines.

„ Never fold the spout in or out near pylons and power lines.

„ When spout is folded out, keep an adequate distance from the power transmission lines.

„ To avoid a potential electric shock caused by voltage flashover, never get on and off the machine under overhead lines.

Behavior in the case of voltage flashover of overhead lines

High electric voltage may be applied to electrically conducting parts of the machine due to voltage flashover. In case of voltage flashover, a voltage drop where major voltage differences are present is created on the ground around the machine. Due to major voltage differences in the ground, people may be killed by electric shocks when making big steps, laying on the ground or supporting themselves with their hands.

„ Do not leave the cabin.

„ Do not touch any metal parts.

„ Do not establish any conductive connection to the ground.

„ Warn people: Do not approach the machine. Electrical voltage differences on the ground may lead to severe electric shocks.

„ Wait for help from professional rescue teams. The overhead line must be switched off.

If people have to leave the cabin despite the voltage flashover, for example because there is an imminent danger to life due to fire:

„ Avoid simultaneous contact with machine and ground.

„ Jump away from the machine. Jump into a safe standing position. Do not touch the machine from the outside.

„ Move away from the machine in very small steps keeping your feet close together.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 29

2

2.4

2.4.19

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Sources of danger on the machine

Noise may damage your health

The noise development of the machine during operation may cause health damage such as hardness of hearing, deafness or tinnitus. When using the machine at high rotational speed, the noise level also increases. The emissions value was measured with the cabin closed under conditions according to DIN EN ISO 4254-7, Appendix C,

see Page 78 .

„ Before starting up the machine, estimate the risk caused by noise.

„ Depending on the ambient conditions, working hours and the working and operating conditions of the machine, specify and use suitable hearing protection.

„ Specify rules for the use of hearing protection and for the working time.

„ During operation keep windows and doors of the cabin closed.

„ Remove hearing protection for road travel.

Liquids under high pressure

The following liquids are under high pressure:

• Hydraulic oil

• Diesel fuel

• Engine coolant

• Refrigerant for the air conditioning system

Liquids escaping under high pressure may penetrate through the skin and cause severe injuries.

„ Shut down and safeguard the machine and contact qualified specialist workshop upon suspicion of damaged hydraulic system.

„ Never search for leaks with bare hands. Even a very pin-sized hole may lead to serious injuries.

„ When searching for leaks, use suitable aids, e.g. a piece of cardboard to avoid injuries.

„ Keep body and face away from leaks.

„ If liquids penetrate the body, immediately consult a doctor. The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible.

Hot liquids

Persons can suffer burns and/or scalding when hot liquids are drained.

„ Wear personal protective equipment when hot consumables are drained.

„ If necessary, allow liquids and machine parts to cool down before you start repair, maintenance and cleaning work.

Damaged compressor unit

Damaged compressed-air hoses of compressor unit can tear off. Hoses moving in an uncontrolled manner can cause severe injuries.

„ Contact a specialist workshop immediately if you suspect that the compressor unit is damaged.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

30

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

2.4.20

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Damaged hydraulic hoses

Damaged hydraulic hoses may tear off, burst or cause oil leaks. As a result, the machine may be damaged and people may be seriously injured.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

„ If it is suspected that hydraulic hoses are damaged, immediately contact a service centre,

see Page 561

.

2

2.4

Toxic exhaust gases

Exhaust gases can cause serious health problems or death.

„ Ensure sufficient ventilation when the engine is running so that people are not exposed to the exhaust gases for a longer period of time.

„ In closed rooms, run the engine only when a suitable extraction system is in operation.

Hot surfaces

The following components may become hot during operation and may burn people:

• Engine

• Exhaust system

• Engine piping

• Hydraulic system

• Gearbox

„ Maintain an adequate distance from hot surfaces and adjacent components.

„ Leave machine parts to cool down and wear protective gloves.

Dangers in connection with certain activities: climbing up and down

Climbing up and down safely

You can fall from the ladder if you are careless when climbing up and down. You can slip, fall and seriously injure yourself when you climb onto the machine outside the ladders provided for this purpose.

Dirt, operating fluids and lubricants can make it difficult to step or stand safely on the equipment.

„ Always keep ladder steps and platforms clean and in a proper condition so that you can step and stand on them safely.

„ Never climb up and down while the machine is moving.

„ Always climb up and down with your face towards the machine.

„ When getting on and off, ensure a three-point contact with steps and handrails (always ensure that both hands and one foot, or both feet and one hand are in contact with the machine).

„ Never use control elements as a handle when you climb up and down. Accidental actuation of control elements can start functions inadvertently that may pose a danger.

„ Never jump off the machine when you climb down.

„ To climb up and down, use only the steps and platforms specified in these operating

instructions, see Page 65

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 31

2

2.4

2.4.21

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine

Only perform work when the machine is at standstill

If the machine is not shut down and safeguarded, parts may move unintentionally or the machine may start moving. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Before carrying out any repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the machine, shutdown and safeguard it,

see Page 34

.

Maintenance and repair work

Improper maintenance and repair work endanger operational safety. Thus there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries or death.

„ Only perform work which is described in this operating instructions. Prior to any work, stop

and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

„ All other maintenance and repair work must only be performed by qualified specialist workshop.

Working at or on heights of the machine

There is a risk of falling when working at or on heights of the machine. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„

Prior to any work, stop and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Make sure you stand securely.

„ Use a suitable fall protection.

„ Secure the area below the assembly point against falling objects.

Raised machine and machine parts

The raised machine and machine parts may fall or tilt unintentionally. People may be seriously injured or killed, as a result.

„

Do not stay under the raised machine or machine parts which are not safely supported, see

Page 35 .

„ Prior to all work on raised machines or machine parts, lower the machine or machine parts.

„ Before performing any work under raised machines or machine parts, secure the machine or machine parts with rigid safety support or with hydraulic shut-off device or by supporting against lowering.

32

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Danger associated with welding work

Improper welding work will endanger the operational safety of the machine. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Never perform welding work on the following components:

• Engine

• Gearbox

• Components of the hydraulics

• Components of the electronics

• Frame or supporting components

• Running gear

„ Before carrying out welding work on the machine, obtain consent by KRONE customer service and, if required, identify alternatives.

„ Before performing welding work on headers, disconnect the header from the forage harvester. Follow the operating instructions for the header.

„ Welding work must only be performed by experienced qualified personnel.

„ Attach the earthing of the welding device near the welding points.

„ Caution when performing welding work near electric and hydraulic parts, plastic parts and pressure accumulators. The parts may be damaged, endanger people or cause accidents.

Before performing welding work on the forage harvester:

„ Switch off main battery switch.

„ Pull engine control plug out of the engine block.

„ Disconnect batteries.

„ Connect positive and negative cables of the machine by an electrical connection.

2

2.4

2.4.22

2.4.23

Dangers in connection with certain activities: checking and charging batteries

If the battery is handled incorrectly, e.g. inadvertent connection of the battery poles to a metal object, excessive charging in conjunction with a spark, the battery may explode. People may be injured or burnt by the explosion or burnt by spraying battery acid.

„ Use a suitable voltmeter to check the condition of the battery.

„ Charge the battery only in well ventilated rooms with the battery compartment cover open.

„

To charge the battery, follow these operating instructions, see Page 575 .

„ Keep fire, sparks and naked flames away from the battery.

„ To prevent acid from leaking, transport the battery in the installation position only.

Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres

Improper assembly or disassembly of wheels and tyres will endanger the operational safety. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 33

2

2.5

Safety

Safety routines

The fitting of wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and approved mounting tools.

„ If there is a lack of knowledge, have the wheels and tyres fitted by the KRONE dealer or by a qualified tyre service.

„ When fitting tyres on the rims, never exceed the maximum permitted pressure specified by

KRONE, otherwise the tyre or even the rim may explode,

see Page 78 .

„

When mounting the wheels, mount the wheel nuts with the specified tightening torque, see

Page 485

.

2.4.24

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents

Any measures not taken or incorrect measures in dangerous situations can make it difficult or impossible to rescue exposed persons. Due to the impeded conditions of rescue, the chances to help and heal injured people deteriorate.

„ As a matter of principle: Park the machine.

„ Get an overview of the existing danger and identify the reason.

„ Secure the accident site.

„ Save persons from the danger zone.

„ Leave danger zone and do not enter it again.

„ Alarm rescue workers and seek help, if possible.

„ Carry out immediate lifesaving actions.

2.5

2.5.1

Safety routines

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts

If the machine has not been shut down, machine or machine parts may move unintentionally.

As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Before leaving the operating position: Shut down and safeguard the machine.

To shut down and safeguard the machine:

„ Park the machine on a stable, horizontal and level ground.

„ Switch off the drives and wait until coasting parts have come to a complete stop.

„ Lower the header fully to the ground.

„ Secure the self-propelled machine against rolling away by applying the parking brake.

„ Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Switch off the main battery switch,

see Page 256

.

„ Use wheel chocks to secure the self-propelled machine against rolling away.

34

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

2.5.2

2.5.3

Safety

Safety routines

Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering

2

2.5

WARNING

Crushing hazard due to movement of machine or machine parts

If the machine or machine parts are not secured against lowering, the machine or machine parts may roll, fall or sag. Thus people could be squeezed or killed.

„ Lower the raised machine parts.

„ Shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 34

.

„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Secure machine or machine parts against lowering by means of hydraulic shut-off device (e.g. stop cock) on machine side.

„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Safely support machine or machine parts.

In order to safely support the machine or machine parts:

„ To support, only use suitable and sufficiently dimensioned materials that do not break or yield.

„ Bricks and hollow blocks are not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. Therefore they must not be used.

„ Car jacks are also not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. They must not be used, as well.

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely

WARNING

Safely checking the oil level and changing oil and filter element

The operational safety of the machine can be impaired if oil level check and oil and filter element changes are not carried out safely. This can lead to accidents.

„ Safely check the oil level and change oil and filter element.

To check the oil level and change oil and filter element safely:

„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling down,

see Page 35 .

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Observe the intervals for oil level check, oil and filter element changes,

see Page 440

.

„ Use only the oil grades/oil quantities specified in the consumables table,

see Page 80

.

„ Ensure that the oil and the equipment for filling are clean.

„ Clean the area around the components (for example gearbox, high-pressure filter) and make sure that no foreign objects get into the components or the hydraulic system.

„ Check installed seal rings for damage. Replace them if necessary.

„ Collect leaking oil and/or waste oil in a container provided for this purpose, and dispose of it

properly, see Page 28 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 35

2

2.6

2.5.4

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Running actuator test

WARNING

Run actuator test safely

When actuators are energised, functions are carried out directly and without a safety prompt.

This may cause the unintentional movement of machine parts, trapping and seriously or fatally injuring persons.

ü Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

ü The person performing the test must know which machine parts are activated by controlling the actuators.

„ Run the actuator test safely.

To run the actuator test safely:

„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling,

see Page 35 .

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Cordon off the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts in a clearly visible manner.

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts.

„ Switch on the ignition.

„ The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.

2.6

Safety labels on the machine

Every safety label is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the authorised KRONE dealer. Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.

When attaching safety labels, the contact surface on the machine must be clean and free of dirt, oil and grease to ensure optimum adhesion of the labels.

36

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 37

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Position and meaning of safety labels

Ladder to the cabin

1

27 022 557 0

27 022 557 0

38

BX002-400

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

1.

Ord. no. 27 022 557 0 (1x)

This safety label includes the following warnings:

Danger due to incorrect operation and lack of knowledge

Incorrect operation and lack of knowledge of the machine as well as incorrect behaviour in hazardous situations is risking the life of the operator and third parties.

„ Before starting up the machine, read and follow the operating instructions and safety notices.

Danger due to falling objects

If treads or platforms fall while the machine is moving, people may be injured.

„ Before driving the machine, always ensure that there is nobody on the steps or platforms.

Danger due to the machine starting up unintentionally

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts.

„ Before leaving the cabin, switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

Danger due to electric shock

Life-threatening injuries due to voltage flashover if machine parts come too close to overhead lines.

„ Maintain the prescribed safety distance from overhead power lines.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 39

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Danger due to the machine rolling away

If the machine has not been secured against rolling away, it may start moving and cause injuries.

„ Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks to prevent it from rolling away.

Danger due to fire

Risk of injury due to fire on the machine.

„ Do not operate the machine unless there is a functional fire extinguisher available.

Danger due to high-pressure liquid

Liquids under high pressure may penetrate the body through the skin and cause serious injuries.

„ When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to avoid the risk of injury.

„ Keep body and face away from leaks. Never search for leaks with bare hands.

„ If liquids penetrate the body, immediately consult a doctor.

The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible, as there is a risk of infection.

40

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 41

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Cabin

1

42

BX002-407

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

1.

Ord. no. 942 293 0 (1x)

Danger due to electric shock

Life-threatening injuries due to voltage flashover if machine parts come too close to overhead lines.

„ Maintain the prescribed safety distance from overhead power lines.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 43

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Area around intake and chopping drum

1

2 3

4

8

6

9 8

BX002-401

1

4

6

5

7

44

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

1.

Order no. 942 294 0 (2x)

Danger due to rotating chopping drum

While grinding the blades, there is risk of injury.

„ Before starting the grinding process, move safety device into protective position.

„ While the grinding process is running, leave the safety device in protective position.

2.

Order no. 27 017 245 0 (1x)

Danger due to sharp-edged components

When removing crop blockages, there is an increased risk of injury from the sharp-edged components of the crop flow.

„ When eliminating blockages, wear protective gloves.

3.

Order no. 27 018 003 0 (1x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

After the machine has been switched off, there is risk of injury due to coasting machine parts.

„ Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

„ Wait until the machine parts have come to a standstill.

4.

Order no. 939 410 2 (2x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

After the machine has been switched off, there is risk of injury due to coasting machine parts.

„ Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

„ Wait until the machine parts have come to a standstill.

2

2.6

5.

Order no. 27 018 053 0 (1x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When approaching the danger zone, there is a risk of being pulled in by rotating machine parts.

„ Maintain an adequate distance from rotating machine parts

6.

Order no. 27 018 010 0 (2x)

Danger due to high-pressure liquid

Hydraulic pressure tanks contain pressurised oil and gas. Risk of injury due to incorrect removal of a pressure tank or improper repairs to the hydraulic system.

„ Removal of a pressure tank or repairs to a hydraulic system may be carried out by a service centre only.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 45

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

7.

Ord. no. 27 100 068 0 (1x)

27 100 068 0

8.

Order no. 27 021 764 0 (3x)

Danger due to rotating universal shaft

There is a danger of being pulled in or caught by the rotating universal shaft.

„ Never reach into the rotating universal shaft.

„ Maintain an adequate distance from moving machine parts.

Danger due to rotating universal shaft

There is a danger of being pulled in or caught by the rotating universal shaft.

„ Never reach into the rotating universal shaft.

„ Maintain an adequate distance from moving machine parts.

9.

Order no. 942 200 1 (2x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When approaching the danger zone, there is a risk of being pulled in by rotating machine parts.

„ Maintain an adequate distance from rotating machine parts.

46

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 47

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Left-hand machine side

1 2

3

48

BX002-402

5

4

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

1.

Order no. 27 018 010 0 (1x)

Danger due to high-pressure liquid

Hydraulic pressure tanks contain pressurised oil and gas. Risk of injury due to incorrect removal of a pressure tank or improper repairs to the hydraulic system.

„ Removal of a pressure tank or repairs to a hydraulic system may be carried out by a service centre only.

2.

Order no. 942 210 0 (1x)

Danger from hot surfaces

There is a risk of burns when touching hot surfaces.

„ Keep sufficient distance as long as the surfaces are hot.

3.

Order no. 942 002 4 (1x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury due to rotating machine parts.

„ Before starting up, move the guards into their protective position.

4.

Order no. 27 021 177 0 (2x)

5.

Order no. 27 017 981 0 (1x)

Danger due to high-pressure liquid

The pressure accumulator is under gas and oil pressure.

There is a risk of injury if the pressure accumulator is not removed or repaired properly.

„ Observe the notices in the operating instructions before removing and repairing the pressure accumulator.

„ The pressure accumulator may only be removed and repaired by a specialist workshop.

Danger due to rotating fan blades

When the fan is rotating, there is a risk of injury from the moving fan blades.

„ Do not reach into the running fan.

„ Wait until the fan has come to a standstill.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 49

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Right-hand machine side

1 2

3

5

50

7

BX002-403

6

5 2 4

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

1.

Order no. 942 210 0 (1x)

Danger from hot surfaces

There is a risk of burns when touching hot surfaces.

„ Keep sufficient distance as long as the surfaces are hot.

2.

Ord. no. 27 018 003 0 (2x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

After the machine has been switched off, there is risk of injury due to coasting machine parts.

„ Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

„ Wait until the machine parts have come to a standstill.

3.

Order no. 939 410 2 (1x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

After the machine has been switched off, there is risk of injury due to coasting machine parts.

„ Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

„ Wait until the machine parts have come to a standstill.

4.

Ord. no. 27 018 010 0 (1x) for "additional axle" version

Danger due to high-pressure liquid

Hydraulic pressure tanks contain pressurised oil and gas. Risk of injury due to incorrect removal of a pressure tank or improper repairs to the hydraulic system.

„ Removal of a pressure tank or repairs to a hydraulic system may be carried out by a service centre only.

5.

Order no. 942 002 4 (2x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury due to rotating machine parts.

„ Before starting up, move the guards into their protective position.

6.

Order no. 942 291 0 (1x)

Danger due to falling

People may be injured if they fall off treads or platforms while the machine is moving.

„ Before driving the machine, always ensure that there is nobody on the steps or platforms.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 51

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

7.

Order no. 27 017 981 0 (1x)

Danger due to rotating fan blades

When the fan is rotating, there is a risk of injury from the moving fan blades.

„ Do not reach into the running fan.

„ Wait until the fan has come to a standstill.

52

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 53

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Rear area

1

54

BX002-405

2 1

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

1.

Order no. 942 210 0 (2x)

Danger from hot surfaces

There is a risk of burns when touching hot surfaces.

„ Keep sufficient distance as long as the surfaces are hot.

2.

Order no. 942 002 4 (1x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury due to rotating machine parts.

„ Before starting up, move the guards into their protective position.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 55

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

On top of the machine

1 2

56

BX002-406

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Information labels on the machine

2

2.7

1.

Order no. 27 018 010 0 (1x)

Danger due to high-pressure liquid

Hydraulic pressure tanks contain pressurised oil and gas. Risk of injury due to incorrect removal of a pressure tank or improper repairs to the hydraulic system.

„ Removal of a pressure tank or repairs to a hydraulic system may be carried out by a service centre only.

For version with “Hydraulics auxiliary tank”:

2.

Order no. 942 210 0 (1x)

Danger from hot surfaces

There is a risk of burns when touching hot surfaces.

„ Keep sufficient distance as long as the surfaces are hot.

2.7

Information labels on the machine

Each information label has an order number. You can order the labels directly from your

KRONE dealer. Replace missing, damaged and illegible information labels immediately.

Prior to attaching an information label, ensure that the contact surface on the machine is clean and free of dirt, oil and grease so that the label can adhere to properly.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 57

2

2.7

Safety

Information labels on the machine

Location and meaning of the information labels

3 4

5

2

6

1

27

16

7 21

21 26

4

7

19

20

21

22

2

7 6 8 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17 23

24

2 18

6

6

25

BXG001-135

1.

Ord. no. 27 022 606 1 (1x)

Use API-GL4-SAE 90 gear oil only,

see Page 81

.

27 022 606 1

58

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Information labels on the machine

2.

Ord. no. 942 571 0 (3x)

24 V

942 571 0

3.

Ord. no. 27 013 396 1 (1x)

There are 24-V connections on the machine that are marked with this label.

Use Mobil Glygoyle 460 gear oil only, see Page 81

.

2

2.7

4.

Ord. no. 27 019 316 0 (2x)

Danger from rotating machine parts

When stepping on or standing on machine components, there is the risk of falling due to moving machine parts.

„ Stepping on the surface is prohibited

27 019 316 0

5.

Ord. no. 27 015 794 0 (1x)

CAUTION! / ACHTUNG

Initial filling only with coolant

Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT

Mixing 1/1 max. -36 °F

Erstbefüllung nur mit Kühlmittel

Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT

Mischung 1/1 max. -38 °C

27 015 794 0

Initial filling only with coolant Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT; mixture 1/1 max. -38°C,

see Page 83

.

6.

Ord. no. 27 016 518 2 (4x)

Use only Renolin Unisyn XT 220 gear oil,

see Page 81

.

27 016 518 2

7.

Ord. no. 942 038 1 (3x)

Areas marked with this label shall be protected against splashing water. Never direct the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner at bearings and electric/electronic components.

942 038-1

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 59

2

2.7

Safety

Information labels on the machine

8.

Ord. no. 27 100 673 0 (1x)

In grass mode, the round brush should not rest against the rotating screen,

see Page 143

. In maize mode, the round brush should rest against the rotating screen,

see Page 170 .

27 100 673 0

9.

Ord. no. 27 025 218 0 (1x)

This label draws attention to the change of the fuel filter element,

see Page 460 .

27 025 218 0

10. Order no. 27 016 664 0 (1x) for version "Preparation of external silage additives unit"

Maximum current rating for supply of external silage additives unit,

see Page 280

.

12 V / 15 A

27 016 664 0

11. Ord. no. 27 014 435 0 (1x)

This label shows the routing of the driveline for driving the

Corn Conditioner, see Page 168

60

27 014 435 0

12. Ord. no. 27 023 375 0 (1x)

Do not use an impact wrench to swivel the Corn Conditioner,

see Page 138 .

27 023 375 0

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Information labels on the machine

2

2.7

13. Order no. 27 019 079 0 (1x) for version "Preparation of external silage additives unit"

The label specifies the dosing quantity of the yellow and blue nozzles of the regulated silage additives unit.

l/min

0,5 - 2

2 - 6,5

27 019 079 0

14. Order no. 27 026 394 0 (1x) for version "Preparation of external silage additives unit"

FLUSH

The label indicates the positions of the ball valve for operation

(RUN) and flushing (FLUSH) of the regulated silage additives unit.

RUN

27 026 394 0

15. Ord. no. 27 027 302 0 (1x)

This label shows how to relieve or tension the Corn Conditioner belt,

see Page 139

.

27 027 302 0

16. Ord. no. 942 134 2 (2x)

DE

EN

ES

FR

IT

Radmuttern nach erstem Einsatz nachziehen.

Retighten wheel nuts after the first use.

Apretar las tuercas de fijación de ruedas después de la primera puesta en servicio.

Resserrer les écrous de fixation de roue après la premièremise en service.

Stringere i dadi di fissaggio delle ruote dopo il primo impiego.

Wielmoeren na het eerste gebruik natrekken.

После первого использования подтянуть гайки колес.

942 134 2

This label tells you that the wheel nuts must be retightened after the first use.

17. Ord. no. 27 007 027 0 (1x)

• Betrieb nur mit:

• Use only with:

• Remplir seulement:

• Provoz pouze s:

• Alimentare solo con

DIESEL

EN 590

DIESEL

• Nicht zugelassen:

• Not approved:

• Non autor isé:

• Non ammesso:

BIODIESEL/FAME

(RME/PME)

BIODIESEL

27 007 027 0

The label shows the requirements for permissible diesel fuel,

see Page 462 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 61

2

2.7

Safety

Information labels on the machine

18. Ord. no. 27 017 738 0 (1x)

This label shows how to connect the batteries for a jump start,

see Page 609 .

24 Volt

12V

24 V

12V

27 017 738 0

19. Ord. no. 27 027 286 0 (1x)

Öl für Kältemittelkompressor / Oil for refrigerating compressor / Olie voor koudemiddelcompressor /

De l'huile pour le compresseur du fluide frigorigène

Aceite para el compresor de refrigerante /

Olio per compressore del refrigerante /

Масло для компрессора хладагента

PAG-SPA2

27 027 286 0

This label can be found on the air conditioning unit, it specifies the oil used for the refrigerant compressor.

20. Ord. no. 27 023 946 0 (1x)

Kältemittel / Refrigerant / Koudemiddel /

Fluide frigoriène / Agente frigorífico /

Refrigerante / Хладагент

Füllmenge / Filling quantity / Vulhoeveelheid /

Quantité de remplissage / Cantidad de Ilenado /

Quantità di riempimento / Заправочный объем

HGWP-Treibhauseffekt / GWP-Greenhouse effect /

GWP-Broeikaseeffect /

HGWP-Effet de serre / GWP-Efecto invernadero /

HGWP-Effetto serra / GWP-парниковый эффект

CO 2 -Äquivalent / CO 2 equivalent / CO 2 -Equivalent /

Équivalent CO 2 / Equivalente a CO 2 /

Equivalente di CO 2 / Эквивалент CO 2 g/г kg/кг

R 134a

1500

1430

2145

27 023 946 0

This label is located at the air conditioning and specifies the coolant type and filling volume.

21. Ord. no. 942 441 1 (1x)

DE

EN

ES

FR

IT

NL

RU

Kugelhahn nur bei komplett abgesenktem Hubwerk betätigen.

The ball valve may only be operated after the power lift has been fully lowered.

El grifo de bola solamente deberá operarse después de haber bajado totalmente el elevador hidráulico.

N'agir sur le robinet à boisseau spherique qu'après avoir abaissé totalement le relevage hydraulique.

Azionare il rubinetto a sfera solo dopo aver abbassato completamente il sollevatore.

Kogelkraan alleen bij compleet neergelaten hefmechanisme bedienen.

Задействовать шаровой кран только при полностью опущенном подъемном механизме.

942 441 1

22. Ord. no. 27 021 836 0 (1x)

Only actuate the ball valve when the lifting unit is lowered completely.

The ball valve actuates the hydraulic system between grass and maize mode,

see Page 143

.

1 2

27 021 836 0

23. Ord. no. 27 021 645 0 (1x)

Manually release the parking brake, see Page 258 .

P

27 021 645 0

62

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Information labels on the machine

24. Ord. no. 27 027 105 2 (1x)

Reifendruck / tyre pressure

BX201

Drehmoment Radmuttern/ torque wheel nuts

Achse axle

Reifen tyre

680/ 85 R 32

710/ 70 R 42 km/h mph

40 25

10

40

10

6

25

6

800/ 70 R 38

900/ 60 R 32

900/ 60 R 42

540/ 65 R 30

620/ 70 R 30

40

10

40

10

40

10

40

10

40

10

40

10

25

6

25

6

25

6

25

6

710/ 60 R 30

40

10

25

6

25

6

25

6

EasyFlow oder / or

Solomaschine solo maschine

(bar / psi)

1,8 /

1,1 /

2 6, 1

16, 0

EasyCollect

4 5 0 - 2

(bar / psi) (bar / psi)

1,8 /

1,1 /

2 6, 1

16, 0

6 0 0 - 2

2,0 / 29, 0

1,2 / 17, 4

1,4 /

20, 3

0,8 /

11, 6

1,4 /

0,8 /

2 0, 3

11, 6

1,5 /

0,9 /

2 1, 8

13, 1

1,9 /

1,2 /

1,0 /

2 7, 6

17, 4

14, 5

0,8 / 11,6

1,5 / 21, 8

0,9 / 13, 1

1,1 / 16, 0

0,8 /

11, 6

1,9 / 2 7, 6

1,2 / 17, 4

1,0 / 14, 5

0,8 / 11,6

1,5 / 21,8

0,9 / 13,1

1,1 / 16, 0

0,8 /

11, 6

2,1 /

1,2 /

1,1 /

0,8 /

1,6 /

1,0 /

1,2 /

0,8 /

3 0, 5

17, 4

16, 0

11,6

23,2

14 , 5

17 , 4

11, 6

2,5 / 36, 3

1,8 / 26, 1

1,7 / 2 4,7

1,0 / 14 , 5

1,8 /

2 6,1

1,2 / 17, 4

2,5 / 36, 3

1,8 /

1,7 /

26, 1

24,7

1,0 / 14, 5

1,8 /

26, 1

1,2 / 17 , 4

2,6 / 37, 7

2,0 / 29, 0

1,9 / 27,6

1,2 / 17, 4

2,0 /

2 9 , 0

1,3 / 18, 9

6 0 0 - 3

(bar / psi)

2,2 / 3 1, 9

1,3 / 18, 9

1,7 /

2 4, 7

1,0 /

14, 5

2,4 / 34, 8

1,3 / 18, 9

1,2 / 17, 4

0,8 / 11,6

1,8 / 26,1

1,3 / 18, 9

0,8 /

11, 6

2,6 / 3 7,7

2,0 / 29, 0

1,9 / 27, 6

1,2 / 17, 4

2,0 /

29, 0

1,3 / 18, 9

7 5 0 - 2 7 5 0 - 3

(bar / psi) (bar / psi)

2,1 / 30, 5

1,3 / 18, 9

1,6 /

2 3, 2

1,0 /

14 , 5

2,3 / 3 3, 4

1,2 / 17 , 4

1,2 / 17, 4

0,8 / 11,6

1,7 / 24,7

1,1 / 16, 0

1,3 / 18, 9

0,8 /

11, 6

2,8 / 40, 6

1,9 /

1,8 /

27, 6

26, 1

1,1 / 16, 0

1,9 /

27,6

1,2 / 17, 4

9 0 0 - 3

(bar / psi)

4WD

1)

2) - 7)

8) ...

1h

10h

50h

2WD

700 Nm /

516 lbf ft

450 Nm /

332 lbf ft

10 bar /

145 psi

27 027 105 2

This label tells you the tyre pressures for the individual tyre

types, see Page 84 , and the tightening torques and mainten-

ance intervals for the wheel nuts,

see Page 486

.

25. Ord. no. 27 006 778 1 (3x)

Measures before starting welding work on the machine, see

Page 33

.

Elektroschweißen

- Bei Schweißarbeiten Hauptschalter ausschalten

- Stecker der Motorregelung am Motorblock abziehen!

- Batterien abklemmen

- Plus- und Minusleitung elektrisch leitend verbinden

- Erdung des Schweißgeräts nahe der Schweißstelle

anbringen

27 006 778 1

26. Ord. no. 942 287 1 (1x)

DE

EN

ES

FR

IT

NL

RU

Beide Unterlegkeile nur an der Vorderachse verwenden.

Use both wheel chocks for the front axle only.

Use ambos calzos de rueda solo para el eje delantero.

N'utiliser les deux cales de freinage que pour l'essieu avant.

Utilizzare entrambi i cunei solo per l'assale anteriore.

Beide wielwiggen uitsluitend onder de vooras gebruiken.

Используйте оба подлокотника только на передней оси.

942 287 1

„

Use both wheel chocks only at the front wheels,

Page 255 .

see

27. Ord. no. 27 021 437 1 (1x)

0-1s

OFF

2-5s

EMERGENCY

27 021 437 1

Interrupt the power supply, see Page 256 :

„ Press the main battery switch for not more than 1 second.

Æ After approx. 120 seconds, the power supply is interrupted.

Interrupting the power supply in an emergency:

„ Press the main battery switch for more than 2 seconds.

Æ The power supply is interrupted immediately.

• Ord. no. 27 018 170 0

There are jacking points on the machine that are identified with this label,

see Page 616

.

2

2.7

• Ord. no. 27 023 958 0

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 63

2

2.7

Safety

Information labels on the machine

There are lashing points on the machine that are identified with this label,

see Page 259

.

27 023 958 0

64

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Safety

Safety equipment

2

2.8

2.8

Safety equipment

7

10

6 4 5

11 12

4

7 8

2

1

2

3

3

7

9

BXG000-106

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 65

2

2.8

Safety

Safety equipment

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Designation

Emergency exit

Ladder

Ladder lighting

Wheel chocks

Explanation

In case of an emergency, the side window on the right-hand side in the direction of travel, next to the driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door,

see Page 90

.

„ To enter the cabin safely at all timed, climb up onto the machine using the left-hand side ladder only. Use the handrails while doing so.

"Maintenance and ladder lighting" version

To enable the rungs on the ladder to be easily seen, even in the dark, the rungs can be illuminated,

see Page 102

.

Wheel chocks can be used to secure the machine from rolling away. The machine features 2 wheel chocks which are located under the rear bumper,

see Page 255 .

Main battery switch

SMV emblem

Working lights

Fire extinguisher

The Slow-Moving Vehicle emblem (SMV emblem) is affixed to slow-moving machines or vehicles travelling on public highways at a speed of less

than 40 km/h (25 mph), see Page 67 .

To ensure that the machine can be safely exited in the dark, some working lights are switched off

after a delay, see Page 102 .

The fire extinguisher is located in the direction of travel at top left of the machine and can be reached via the ladder to the cabin and the platform,

see Page 67 .

Quick-stop switch grinding control unit

The quick-stop switch on the grinding control unit is used to stop the working functions of the machine in an emergency. The diesel engine and the traction drive continue running,

see

Page 117

.

Quick-stop switch

The main battery switch is used to switch on or interrupt the machine’s power supply,

see

Page 256

.

Seat switch in driver's seat

Restraint system

The quick-stop switch in the armrest is used to stop the machine's working functions in an emergency. The traction drive remains active,

see

Page 110

.

The seat switch integrated in the driver's seat is used to check whether the driver's seat is occupied.

If the driver's seat is not occupied for longer than

7 seconds, the intake and the header are switched off. When the driver's seat is not occupied, the intake and the header cannot be switched on.

When the driver's seat is occupied again, the intake and the header can be switched on.

For version with "Restraint system incl. instructional seat"

The driver's seat and the instructional seat are fitted with a restraint system.

66

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

2.8.1

SMV emblem

For the version with “SMV emblem”

Safety

Safety equipment

2

2.8

2.8.2

KM000-567

The SMV emblem (Slow-Moving Vehicle) (1) can be mounted on slow-moving machines or vehicles. The country-specific specifications must be observed.

The SMV emblem (1) is at the rear in the centre or on left.

If the machine is transported on transport vehicles (for example lorry or train), the SMV emblem must be covered or dismounted.

Fire extinguisher

BXG000-004

INFO

The machine must not be operated without an on-board fire extinguisher which contains at least 6 kg of extinguishing agent.

The manufacturer recommends a powder fire extinguisher for fire classes A, B and C.

The support (1) for fire extinguisher is located in direction of travel left on top of the machine and can be reached via ladder and platform.

Have the fire extinguisher registered. So you can be sure that maintenance is carried out regularly and in good time (according to EN 3 at the latest every two years) and can be proven.

„ Prior to starting up the machine, check that the fire extinguisher is attached and ready for

use, see Page 488

.

„ Consider the operating instructions of the fire extinguisher and the web page of the manufacturer of the fire extinguisher.

„ Check fire extinguisher for external damage. In the event of anomalies, inform responsible maintenance company.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 67

2

2.8

Safety

Safety equipment

The inspection intervals in other countries may be different. In such a case, the prescribed inspection intervals of the country of operation apply.

„ Observe the provisions of the corresponding countries.

68

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

3

Data memory 3

Data memory

A large number of electronic components of the machine contains data memories which save temporarily or permanently technical information on machine condition, events and errors. This technical information generally documents the condition of a part, a module, a system or the environment:

• Operating states of system components (e.g. filling levels)

• Status messages of the machine and its individual components (e.g. number of revolutions of wheel, wheel speed, motion delay, lateral acceleration)

• Malfunctions and defects in essential system components (e.g. light and brakes)

• Reactions of the machine in special driving situations (e.g. activation of the stability control systems)

• Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature).

This data, which is of an exclusively technical nature, is used to identify and eliminate faults and to optimise machine functions. The data cannot be used to generate movement profiles of travelled distances.

For service activities (e.g. repair services, service processes, warranty cases, quality assurance), employees of the service network (including manufacturer) can use special diagnostic units to read this technical information from the event and error data memories. If necessary, you can obtain further information there. After the error has been eliminated, the information in the error memory is either deleted or continuously overwritten.

When using the machine, situations are possible in which this technical data, in conjunction with other information (accident protocol, damage to the machine, witness statements etc.) - if necessary with the assistance of an expert - can be related to persons.

Additional functions, which are contractually agreed with the customer (e.g. teleservice), allow the transmission of certain machine data from the machine.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 69

4

4.1

4

Machine Description

Machine overview

Machine Description

4.1

Machine overview

13

17

16

15

14

5 4 3

1

2

6

12

11

10

BX002-418

1 Fire extinguisher

9 8

2 Ladder

3 Quick-stop switch grinding control unit

4 Grinding control unit

5 Connections for header

6 Filler neck fuel tank

7 Ladder right

8 Battery compartment

9 Main battery switch

7

10 Tow coupling (for "Automatic tow coupling" version)

11 Storage compartment

12 Engine

13 Spout

14 Intake unit

15 Grinding unit

16 Central electrical system circuit board

17 Cabin

70

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Overview of crop flow

Machine Description

Machine overview

4

4.1

4.1.1

BX001-125

1 Intake roller assembly top

2 Pre-compression roller

3 Intermediate roller

4 Compression roller

5 Chopping drum

6 Corn conditioner

7 Discharge accelerator

8 Channel support

Contents of the storage compartment

9 Rear wall discharge accelerator

10 Transfer shaft

11 Drum base

12 Counterblade

13 Flat roller

14 Intermediate roller

15 Feed roller

16 Intake roller assembly bottom

1

BX002-395

The storage compartment (1) contains the following parts

• 1 measuring hose 6 m long

• 1 oil drain hose

• 1 coupling sleeve quick release fastener

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 71

4

4.2

4.2

Machine Description

Labelling

Labelling

INFO

The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or rendered illegible!

type plate

72

1

BXG000-008

The machine data can be found on type plate (1). The type plate is located on right-hand machine side on vehicle frame below the cabin.

DVG000-004

Example image

1 Series

1

2

Series

VIN

KRONE Agriculture SE

Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10

D-48480 Spelle

Max. Permissible Laden Mass

Max. Permissible Axle Mass - Axle 1

Max. Permissible Axle Mass - Axle 2

Max. Permissible Axle Mass - Axle 3

Model Year

Construction Year

With / Without KRONE Header

2 Axles kg kg kg

3 Axles kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg

3

4

5

7

6

8

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Model year

4 Year of manufacture

9 Total weight of the machine (for machines with 3 axles and additional axle on the header)

10 Admissible axle load axle 1 (for machines with 3 axles and additional axle on the header)

11 Admissible axle load axle 2 (for machines with 3 axles and additional axle on the header)

12 Admissible axle load axle 3 (for machines with 3 axles and additional axle on the header)

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Machine Description

Lighting

4

4.3

5 Total weight of the machine (for machines with 3 axles and additional axle on the machine)

6 Admissible axle load axle 1 (for machines with 3 axles and additional axle on the machine)

7 Admissible axle load axle 2 (for machines with 3 axles and additional axle on the machine)

8 Admissible axle load axle 3 (for machines with 3 axles and additional axle on the machine)

13 Total weight of the machine (for machines with 2 axles)

14 Admissible axle load axle 1 (for machines with 2 axles)

15 Admissible axle load axle 2 (for machines with 2 axles)

In case of queries about the machine and when ordering spare parts, ensure that you specify the series (1), the vehicle identification number (5) and the year of manufacture (4) of the corresponding machine. The machine number results from the last 7 digits of the vehicle identification number (5).

To ensure that the data is always available, KRONE recommends that you enter it in the boxes on the front cover of these operating instructions.

Location of the vehicle identification number

1

4.3

4.3.1

BXG001-136

The vehicle identification number (1) of the machine can be found on the right-hand side of the front axle.

Lighting

Road travel lighting

The road travel lighting is operated using the steering column switch, see Page 93 and the

keypad for wiper and warning beacon,

see Page 101

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 73

4

4.3

Machine Description

Lighting

1

4 5

2 3

10

2

5

10

6

1

4

12

4.3.2

74

11 9 8 7

BXG000-049

1 Side direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

2 Dipped beam/full beam

3 Spout tail lamp/brake lamp

4 Front position lamp

7 Rear direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

8 Brake lamp

9 Reversing light

10 Top rear direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

11 Licence plate lamp 5 Front direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

6 Rear position lamp/rear parking light 12 Warning beacon

INFO

As long as the lighting cable is connected for an EasyCollect or XCollect maize header, the front direction indicators (5) will not be lit.

Working lights

WARNING

Risk of accident from dazzling working lights

If the working lights are not switched off during road travel, road users may be blinded.

„ Switch the working lights off during road travel.

The working lights are operated via the "Lighting" menu on the terminal, see Page 374 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Machine Description

Lighting

4

4.3

2 3

1

5

6

1

5

4

4.3.3

BX002-423

1 Working lights cabin roof

2 Rear side working lights (for version with

"Full LED + maintenance/ladder")

3 Working lights spout

4 Rear working lights

5 Front working light II

6 Front working light I

Maintenance lighting

The maintenance lighting is operated via the "Lighting" menu on the terminal, see Page 374 .

BX001-212

1 Maintenance light

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 75

4

4.4

Machine Description

Function description chopping crops

Maintenance lighting (for version with "Full Halogen + maintenance/ladder" and for version with "Full LED + maintenance/ladder")

4.4

76

BXG000-067

1 Maintenance lamps left side hood

2 Maintenance lamp right side hood

3 Maintenance lamp tailgate

4 Maintenance lamp cooler compartment

Function description chopping crops

Grass mode with grass header

To use the machine in grass mode, it must be fitted with a suitable grass header, approved by the manufacturer. The crops must lay cut in a swath.

The grass header picks up the crop from the field and conveys it in front of the intake in the middle of the machine.

The intake draws in the crops with its rollers, compresses them and transports them to the foraging unit.

The foraging unit chops up the crops with the blades on its rotating chopping drum and conveys them through the grass channel to the discharge accelerator.

The discharge accelerator accelerates the crops to such an extent that they are conveyed at high speed through the spout and out of the machine, e.g. into a trailer pulled next to the machine.

Maize mode with maize header

To use maize mode, the machine must be fitted with a maize header, approved by the manufacturer.

The maize header uses its cutting unit to cut the crops and conveys them in front of the intake of the forage harvester in the middle of the vehicle.

The intake draws in the crops with its rollers, compresses them and transports them to the foraging unit.

The foraging unit chops up the crops with the blades on its rotating chopping drum and conveys them to the corn conditioner.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Machine Description

Function description chopping crops

The corn conditioner strikes the grains in the crops using two profiled rollers and conveys the crops into the discharge accelerator.

The discharge accelerator accelerates the crops to such an extent that they are conveyed at high speed through the spout and out of the forage harvester, e.g. into a trailer pulled next to the machine.

4

4.4

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 77

5

5.1

5

Technical Data

Dimensions

Technical Data

5.1

Dimensions

5.2

5.3

78

B L

BXG000-040

Dimensions

Length [L]¹

Width [B]²

Height [H]²

Maximum lifting height [Y]³

7,955–10,585 mm

3,000–3,315 mm

3,890–4,000 mm

6,376–7,195 mm

1 Depending on the version, the header used and the use of a spout extension.

2 Depending on the tyres fitted.

3 Depending on the tyres fitted and the use of a spout extension.

Weights

Weights

Weights See information on the type plate,

see Page 72

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel)

The technically permitted maximum speed may be restricted by different equipment features

(e.g. coupling device, axle, brake, tyres, etc.) or by statutory regulations in the country of use.

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel)

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel) 40 km/h

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

5.8

Technical Data

Engine data

5

5.4

Engine data

Engine data

Manufacturer

Engine type

Design

Emissions level

Displaced volume

Continuous engine performance

Continuous chopping output X-Power

Daimler Truck AG

OM473LA.E5

6 cylinders in line, common rail

EU level IIIA

15.6 L

460 kW (626 HP)

438 kW (596 HP)

Traction drive

Traction drive

Model Hydrostatic 2-wheel drive, optional 4-wheel drive with axial piston variable motors

0–25 km/h Forward speed in field mode

Electrical system

Electrical system

Alternator voltage

Alternator amperage

Battery voltage

Battery capacity

Ambient temperature

Ambient temperature

Temperature range for machine operation

24 V

150 A

24 V (2x12 V)

(2x) 135 Ah

Airborne noise emission

Airborne noise emission

Emissions value (sound pressure level)

Measurement device

Accuracy class

Measurement uncertainty (according to DIN EN ISO 11201)

74.9 dB(A)

Bruel & Kjaer, Type 2236

2

4 dB

-5 to +45 °C

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 79

5

5.9

5.9

Technical Data

Vibration values

Vibration values

Vibration values

Total vibration value (upper limbs)

RMS value of the weighted acceleration (entire body)

5.10

5.11

≤2.5 m/s²

≤0.5m/s²

tow coupling

Tow coupling (Rockinger-865B40) permitted D-value permitted drawbar load at the coupling point max. trailer load (overrun brake)

82 kN max. 2,000 kg 1

8,000 kg max. trailer load (with existing compressed air brake system in conjunction with a trailer braked by compressed air)

Permitted drawbar eyes

10,000 kg

DIN11026, 11043, 74054

1 Observe maximum permitted rear axle load!

Power supply for headers – power

Power supply for headers – power power

PTO speed

PTO shaft end

125 kW

350 ... 680 rpm

1 ¾", Z=6

5.12

5.13

Power supply for headers – hydraulics

Power supply for headers – hydraulics

Double-acting hydraulic connection

Power supply for headers – electrics

Power supply for headers – electrics

Road travel lighting

2x

24 V, 7-pin socket

5.14

Consumables

Biodegradable consumables can be used on request.

NOTICE

Machine damage due to mixing of oil

If oils, which have different specifications, are mixed with each other, the machine may be damaged.

„ Never mix oils, which have different specifications, with each other.

„ Contact your KRONE service partner before using an oil with a different specification after changing the oil.

80

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

5.14.1

Technical Data 5

Consumables 5.14

Oils

Designation

Engine oil (diesel engine)

Hydraulic oil tank

Entire hydraulic system

Power take-off gear

Transfer gearbox

Intermediate gearbox

Intermediate gearbox intake

Lower roller gearbox

Upper roller gearbox

Fan gearbox

Rotary drive gearbox spout

Filling quantity

42 L

Specification Initial filling ex works

85 L see supplied operating and maintenance manual from

MTU

Hydraulic oil

HLP 46 see supplied operating and maintenance manual from

MTU

SRS Wiolan HS 46

120 L Hydraulic oil

HLP 46

SRS Wiolan HS 46

3.4 L

4.3 L

3.3 L

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220, alternatively: Gear oil Mobile

SHC 630

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220, alternatively: Gear oil Mobile

SHC 630

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220, alternatively: Gear oil Mobile

SHC 630

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220

0.5 L

3.0 L

3.0 L

2.8 L

1.5 L

Gear oil API-

GL4-SAE90

Gear oil API-GL4-SAE90

Gear oil API-

GL4-SAE90

Gear oil API-

GL4-SAE90

Gear oil API-GL4-SAE90

Gear oil API-GL4-SAE90

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220, alternatively: Gear oil Mobile

SHC 630

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220

Gear oil Mobil

Glygoyle 460

Gear oil Mobil Glygoyle 460

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 81

5 Technical Data

5.14

Consumables

82

Designation

Wheel hub gearbox at front

Wheel hub gearbox at rear

Filling quantity

3.5 L

1.5 L

Specification Initial filling ex works

Gear oil Shell

Spirax S4 CX

50

Gear oil Shell

Spirax S4 CX

50

Gear oil Shell Spirax S4 CX

50

Gear oil Shell Spirax S4 CX

50

VariLOC chop length gearbox 3.3 L Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220, alternatively: Gear oil Mobile

SHC 630

Gear oil Renolin Unisyn

XT220

The filling quantities of the gearboxes are guide values. The correct values result from oil

change/oil level check, see Page 562 .

List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly, rapidly biodegradable HEPG pressure fluids allowed to be used for hydraulic oil tank:

HEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46 ISO viscosity class

Manufacturer

ADDINOL

AGIP

ARAL

ASEOL

AVIA

BAF 46Vitam

Aqua VG 46

Avia Hydrosynth 46

Hydraulic oil HLP 46

OSO 46

Aral Vitam GF 46

AVILUB RSL 46

Avia Fluid ZAD 46

BECHEM

BP

CASTROL

COFRAN

DEA

ELF

ENGEN

ESSO

FINA

FRAGOL

FUCHS

Hydrostar UWF 46

Biohyd PEG 46

Econa PG 46

Hydraulic oil PGK 46

Hydraulic oil D3031.46

Hydraulic TR 46

Renolin PGE 46

Energol HLP 46

HYSPIN AWS 46

Cofraline extra 46 S

Astron HLP 46

ELFOLNA 46

ELFOLNA DS 46

Engen TQH 20/46

NUTO H 46

HYDRAN 46

RENOLIN

MR 15, VG 46, B15 VG 46

Houghton

KLÜBER

KUWAIT

LIQUI MOLY

Mobil

Syntolubric 46

LAMORA HLP 46

Q8 Haydn 46, Q8 Holst 46, hydraulics S46

HLP 46 ISO

Mobil DTE 25

Mobil Hydraulic Oil Medium

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

ISO viscosity class

Manufacturer

SHELL

SRS

Stuart

Theunissen

TOTAL

TRIBOL

HEPG VG 46

Fluid BD 46

Hydrocor E46

ISOCOR E46

Technical Data 5

Consumables 5.14

HLP VG 46

Shell Tellus oil 46

Shell Hydrol DO 46

WIOLAN HS 46

WIOLAN HX 4

Cofraline extra 46 S

Azolla ZS 46

Tribol 772

Tribol ET 1140-46

Tribol 943 AW 46

Vesta HLP 46

VALVOLINE

VERKOL

Ultrasyn PG 46

5.14.2

5.14.3

Lubricating grease

Designation

Central lubrication unit

Lubrication points (manual lubrication)

Filling quantity

16.0 kg

As required 1)

Specification

Grease up to NLGI class 2 with EP additives adjusted to the outside temperatures

(thickener: Lithium Complex), basic oil viscosity at 40°C:

85 ... 180 mm²/s,

see

Page 597

.

1 Lubricate the lubrication point until grease comes out of the bearing position. After lubricating, remove the grease coming out of the bearing position.

Coolant

Consumables/Initial filling at the factory

Designation

Engine coolant

Filling quantity

56 L

Specification Initial filling at the factory

Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT see supplied operating and maintenance manual from

MTU

5.14.4

Refrigerant (air conditioning)

Designation

Refrigerant

Oil

Filling quantity

1500 g

185 cm³

Specification

R134a

PAG-SPA2

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 83

5 Technical Data

5.15

Tyres

5.14.5

Fuel

Designation

Fuel tank

Filling quantity

1215 L

Fuel additional tank (optional) 220 L

5.15

84

Specification

Refer to supplied operating and maintenance manual of

MTU company

Tyres

Tyres

Front axle

Rear axle

Additional axle

Equipment

Standard 1

Option 1

Option 1

Option 1

Option 1

Option 1

Standard 1

Option 1

Option 1

Option

Tyre dimensions

680/85R32

710/70R42

800/65R32 (N)

800/70R38

900/60R32

900/60R42

540/65R30

620/70R30

710/60R30

180/70R8

1 Restricted use depending on harvesting work

Before working on a slope, increase the tyre pressure in the front wheels by 0.5 bar more than indicated in the following table. After working on the slope, the tyre pressure must be set to the values in the table.

Before storing the machine at the end of the harvesting season, set the tyre pressure to the maximum permitted value. Before starting the new harvesting season, the tyre pressure must be set to the values in the table suitable for the header. The value for the maximum permitted tyre pressure is indicated on the tyre wall.

Tyre pressure

Tyre type

[km/h] EasyFlow or Solo machine

[bar]

EasyCollect EasyCollect/XCollect axle

450-2 600-2 750-2 600-3 750-3 900-3

[bar] [bar] [bar] [bar] [bar] [bar]

680/85

R32

40

10

1.8

1.1

1.8

1.1

2.0

1.2

2.1

1.3

2.2

1.3

2.4

1.4

2.0

1.2

Front axle

710/70

R42

40 1.4

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.9

1.6

800/65

R32 (N)

10

40

0.8

1.9

0.8

1.9

0.9

2.1

1.0

2.3

1.0

2.4

1.1

2.6

1.0

2.2

800/70

R38

10

40

1.2

1.0

1.2

1.0

1.2

1.1

1.2

1.2

1.3

1.2

1.4

1.4

1.2

1.2

900/60

R32

10

40

0.8

1.5

0.8

1.5

0.8

1.6

0.8

1.7

0.8

1.8

0.8

2.0

0.8

1.6

900/60

R42

10

40

10

0.9

1.1

0.8

0.9

1.1

0.8

1.0

1.2

0.8

1.1

1.3

0.8

1.1

1.3

0.8

1.2

1.4

0.9

1.0

1.2

0.8

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

5.16

Technical Data 5

Total weights and axle loads 5.16

Tyre pressure

Tyre type

[km/h] EasyFlow or Solo machine

[bar]

EasyCollect EasyCollect/XCollect axle

450-2 600-2 750-2 600-3 750-3 900-3

[bar] [bar] [bar] [bar] [bar] [bar]

540/65

R30

40

10

2.5

1.8

2.5

1.8

2.6

2.0

2.8

1.9

2.6

2.0

2.6

2.1

2.6

1.8

Rear axle

620/70

R30

40

10

1.7

1.0

1.7

1.0

1.9

1.2

1.8

1.1

1.9

1.2

1.9

1.2

1.7

1.0

710/60

R30

180/70

R8

40

10

40

10

1.8

1.2

10

10

1.8

1.2

10

10

2.0

1.3

10

10

1.9

1.2

10

10

2.0

1.3

10

10

2.1

1.4

10

10

1.8

1.2

10

10

Additional axle on the forage harvester

Total weights and axle loads

Depending on machine type, used additional axle and used header, the following results from the front axle load:

• the rear axle load

• the total weight

• the required counter weight behind the rear axle (with base weight, intermediate plates and end plate)

INFO

The permitted front axle load can be found in the TÜV report of the machine.

INFO

If a combination of forage harvester and attached maize header is deployed for on-road use, this combination must be entered in the vehicle papers of the forage harvester. If the maize header has not yet been entered in the vehicle documents, the details in the vehicle papers must be supplemented accordingly.

„ Ask for the required sample report from your sales partner for this purpose.

INFO

If a forage harvester with a maize header is used, the forage harvester must be additionally weighed down by a rear weight. The number of intermediate plates for the rear weight depends on the machine type, the permitted front axle load and the type of maize header.

If there are no suitable values for the number of intermediate plates in the technical data of these operating instructions for the combination of forage harvester and maize header, this information can be found in the sample report for the combination of forage harvester and maize header.

Precision forage harvester with 2 axles

Ballasting on a front axle load of 11500 kg

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 85

5 Technical Data

5.16

Total weights and axle loads

86

Without header/

With EasyFlow

Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted total weight

[kg]

8250

18000

Basic weight [quantity] -

Intermediate plate

[quantity]

-

End plate [quantity] -

With EasyCollect

450-2

9300

20500

1

-

600-2

9300

20050

1

1

1 1

Series version in the vehicle documents.

Ballasting on a front axle load of 12000 kg

Without header/

With EasyFlow

With EasyCollect

750-2

9300

600-3

8250 Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted total weight

[kg]

Basic weight [quantity]

Intermediate plate

[quantity]

End plate [quantity]

Refer to table "Ballasting on a front axle load of 11500 kg"

21000

1

3

1

20250

1

-

1

For this setup condition, the vehicle documents must be changed.

Ballasting on a front axle load of 12300 kg

Without header/

With EasyFlow

With XCollect

600-3

8700 Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted total weight

[kg]

Basic weight [quantity]

Refer to table "Ballasting on a front axle load of 11500 kg"

Intermediate plate

[quantity]

End plate [quantity]

21000

1

3

1

For this setup condition, the vehicle documents must be changed.

Ballasting on a front axle load of 12600 kg

Without header/

With EasyFlow

With EasyCollect

750-2

9300

750-3

9300 Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted total weight

[kg]

Basic weight [quantity]

Refer to table "Ballasting on a front axle load of 11500 kg"

21000

1

21500

1

1

12

1

1

9

1

750-2

10000

21500

750-3

10000

22000

900-3

10000

22600

1

1

8

1

1

7

1

600-3

10000

21000

With

XCollect

600-3

9500

21500

With XCollect

750-3

9300

21900

1

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Technical Data 5

Total weights and axle loads 5.16

Without header/

With EasyFlow

With EasyCollect

Intermediate plate

[quantity]

End plate [quantity]

Refer to table "Ballasting on a front axle load of 11500 kg"

750-2

-

1

750-3

4

1

For this setup condition, the vehicle documents must be changed.

Ballasting on a front axle load of 13000 kg

Without header/

With EasyFlow

With EasyCollect

750-3 900-3

8250 9300 Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted total weight

[kg]

Basic weight [quantity]

Intermediate plate

[quantity]

End plate [quantity]

Refer to table "Ballasting on a front axle load of 11500 kg"

21250

1

1

1

22000

1

7

1

For this setup condition, the vehicle documents must be changed.

900-3

12

1

1

3

1

With XCollect

750-3

9

1

With XCollect

750-3

8300

21300

Precision forage harvester with 3 axles

Ballasting on a front axle load of 11,500 kg

With EasyCollect

450-2 600-2

8250 8250 Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted axle load additional axle [kg]

2300

Permitted total weight

[kg]

21000

Basic weight [quantity] 1

Intermediate plate

[quantity]

-

End plate [quantity] 1

2300

21000

1

-

1

Series version in the vehicle documents.

Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted axle load additional axle [kg]

Permitted total weight

[kg]

With XCollect

600-3

8250

2300

22000

1

-

750-2

8250

2300

21000

1

750-3

8250

2300

22000

1

-

1

600-3

8250

2300

21000

1

4

1

750-3

8250

2300

22000

900-3

9300

2300

23000

1

9

1

900-3

9300

2300

22500

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 87

5 Technical Data

5.17

Released headers

With XCollect

600-3

Basic weight [quantity] 1

Intermediate plate

[quantity]

End plate [quantity] 1

750-3

1

4

1

Series version in the vehicle documents.

Ballasting on a front axle load of 12000 kg

Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted axle load additional axle [kg]

With EasyCollect

750-3

8250

2300

Permitted total weight

[kg]

22000

Basic weight [quantity] 1

Intermediate plate

[quantity]

-

End plate [quantity] 1

900-3

8250

2300

22000

1

5

1

For this setup condition, the vehicle documents must be changed.

Ballasting on a front axle load of 12600 kg

Permitted axle load at rear [kg]

Permitted axle load additional axle [kg]

Permitted total weight [kg]

Basic weight [quantity]

Intermediate plate [quantity]

End plate [quantity]

With EasyCollect

900-3

8250

2300

1

1

22000

1

For this setup condition, the vehicle documents must be changed.

Weight to ballast the rear axle

Basic weight [kg]

End plate [kg] 1

1

Intermediate plate [kg] 1

1 For the quantity required, see tables.

Weight

1260

106

136

900-3

1

16

1

With XCollect

900-3

8250

2300

22500

1

7

1

5.17

Released headers

Header type

Maize header

Version

EasyCollect 450-2

88

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Header type

Maize header

Grass header

Direct cut header

A transport trailer can be connected to some of the headers.

Technical Data 5

Released headers 5.17

Version

EasyCollect 600-2

EasyCollect 750-2

EasyCollect 600-3

EasyCollect 750-3

EasyCollect 900-3

XCollect 600-3 (BV301-10)

XCollect 750-3 (BV301-20)

XCollect 900-3 (BV301-30)

EasyFlow 300 S

EasyFlow 380 S (use is not authorised in all countries)

XDisc 620

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 89

6

6.1

6

Control and Display Elements

Overview of operating elements

Control and Display Elements

6.1

Overview of operating elements

6.2

1 2

3

4 5 6 7

12

11

10 9 8

BX002-421

1 Mirror adjuster, see Page 100

2 Keypad for wiper and warning beacon,

see Page 101

3 Switch for interior lighting/control lever

lighting, see Page 103

4 Terminal, see Page 315

5 Keypad,

see Page 107

6 Additional keypad, see Page 112

7 Ignition lock, see Page 112

8 Navigation module, see Page 110

9 Main mode switch,

see Page 109

10 Control lever,

see Page 103

11 Brake pedal,

see Page 98

12 Steering column with steering wheel,

see Page 93

Opening doors and windows of cabin

Opening right side window

In case of an emergency, the right side window can be opened as an exit door.

WARNING

Danger to life due to blocked escape route

If the right side window cannot be opened without obstruction, the escape route for the driver is obstructed.

„ Make sure prior to travel that the right platform is free.

To fully open the window on the right next to the driver's seat:

90

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Control and Display Elements

Opening doors and windows of cabin

6

6.2

BM000-067

„ Swivel the lever (1) forwards until it locks into position.

BM000-176

„ Pull the cotter pin (2) and remove it.

BM000-177

„ Open the side window (3) all the way.

Opening the cabin door

Opening the cabin door from outside

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 91

6

6.2

Control and Display Elements

Opening doors and windows of cabin

BX001-138

„ Unlock the door lock (1) with the door key.

„ Press in the door lock (1) and open the door.

Opening the cabin door from inside

1

BX001-139

„ Press up the door opening lever (1) and open the door outwards.

92

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

6.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Control and display elements on the steering column

6

6.3

2

3

BM000-035

1 Steering wheel 4 Release lever for horizontal steering column adjustment and upper pivot point,

see Page 130

Steering column switch, see Page 93

Indicator and warning lamps, see

Page 97

Unlocking pedal for steering column adjustment bottom,

see Page 130

5

6.3.1

6.3.1.1

Steering column switch

Activating horn

With retrofit kit "Compressed Air Horn" mounted:

WARNING

Hearing damage due to loud compressed air horn

The sound of the compressed air horn might damage the hearing of people nearby.

„ Before actuating the compressed air horn make sure that there is nobody in close environment of the compressed air horn.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 93

6

6.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

6.3.1.2

BM000-055

„ To actuate the horn, press the momentary switch (1) for the horn on the steering column switch (2).

Æ As long as the momentary switch is pressed, the horn sounds.

Switching direction indicators on/off

BM000-056

„ To switch on the right direction indicator, move the steering column switch (1) forwards.

Æ The right direction indicator is switched on.

„ To switch on the left direction indicator, move the steering column switch (1) backwards.

Æ The left direction indicator is switched on.

The direction indicator is switched off when the steering wheel is turned.

„ To switch off the direction indicator when the steering wheel is not turned, move the steering column switch (1) in the opposite direction.

The "Direction indicator" indicator lamp lights up when the direction indicator lamps are switched

on, see Page 97

.

94

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

6.3.1.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Switching parking light/dipped beam on/off

2 1

I

II

III

IV

6

6.3

II

III

BM000-059

The lighting setting ring gauge (2) on the steering column switch (1) can be turned to the following positions:

Pos.

I

Icon Explanation

Switches the light off.

Switches the parking light on.

Switches dipped beam on.

IV Switches the work lights on.

„ To switch on the parking light, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) one notch forwards to position II.

Æ

Front parking light and rear parking light are lit, see Page 73

.

ü

The ignition is switched on, see Page 112 .

„ To switch on the dipped beam, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) to the second notch forwards to position III.

Æ

The green "Dimmed beam" indicator lamp is lit, see Page 97 .

Æ Dipped beam, front parking light, licence plate lamp and rear position lamp are on,

see

Page 73

„ To switch off the parking light and dipped beam, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) to the last notch backwards to position I.

Æ All the lights are switched off.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 95

6

6.3

6.3.1.4

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Switching full beam on/off

6.3.1.5

BM000-057

ü The dimmed beam is switched on,

see Page 95 .

„ To switch on full beam, press the steering column switch (1) downwards.

Æ The steering column switch locks in this position and full beam is switched on.

Æ The blue "Full beam" indicator lamp lights up,

see Page 97

.

„ To switch off full beam, move the steering column switch (1) to the neutral position.

Actuating headlamp flasher

6.3.1.6

BM000-058

„ To activate the headlamp flasher, press the steering column switch (1) upwards.

Æ As long as the steering column switch is pressed upwards, the full beam and the blue "Full

beam" indicator lamp are lit, see Page 97 .

Switching windshield wipers on/off

1 2

I

II

III

IV

BM000-060

96

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

II

III

IV

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

The setting ring gauge (2) for the windshield wiper on the steering column switch (1) can be turned to the following positions:

Pos.

I

Icon Explanations

Switches the windscreen wiper off.

6

6.3

Switches on interval mode of the windscreen wiper.

Switches on continuous operation of the windscreen wiper.

Switches on the windscreen washer system.

6.3.2

„ To switch on the wiper in interval mode, turn the setting ring gauge (2) one notch forwards to position II.

Æ The windshield wiper operates in interval mode.

„ To switch on the wiper in continuous operation, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the second notch forwards to position III.

Æ The windshield wiper operates in continuous operation.

„ To switch on the windscreen washer system, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the third notch forwards to position IV.

Æ The windscreen washer system is operating.

„ To switch off the wiper, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the last notch backwards to position

I.

Æ The wiper returns to the rest position and stops.

Indicator and warning lamps

3

4

BM000-097

1

2

"Left direction indicator" indicator lamp

"Full beam" indicator lamp

"Dimmed beam" indicator lamp

Warning lamp "Charging control"

5

6

7

8

Warning lamp for "coolant temperature"

Warning lamp for "engine oil pressure" not assigned

"Right direction indicator" indicator lamp

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 97

6

6.4

6.3.3

Control and Display Elements

Actuating service brake

Switching the flashing warning light on/off

6.4

BM000-061

„ To switch on the flashing warning light, press the flashing warning light switch (1) to position

II.

Æ When the flashing warning light is switched on, all direction indicators flash simultaneously

and the warning lights for the direction indicators on the left and right are lit, see Page 97 .

„ To switch off the flashing warning light, press the flashing warning light switch (1) to position

I.

Æ The warning lights for direction indicators on the left and right go out.

Actuating service brake

WARNING

Risk of accident due to defective service brake!

If the service brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in time. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Before starting the machine, always check service brake and ensure its functionality.

98

BM000-062

„ Before driving, check the service brake, drive the machine at low speed one metre forwards and actuate the brake pedal (1).

Æ If the machine brakes, the service brake is functioning correctly.

Æ If the machine does not brake, stop driving the machine.

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34

.

„ Have a technician check and repair the service brake.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Actuate the trailer brake system (for "trailer brake system" version)

Actuate the trailer brake system (for "trailer brake system" version)

6

6.5

WARNING

Danger of death due to extended braking distance

If the machine features a trailer brake system and if both brake pedals of the service brake are not interconnected for road travel, the braking distance will be extended. If only one of the two service brakes is actuated, the individual braking effect of the service brake machine and service brake trailer will not be adequate to stop the machine/trailer unit in good time. As a result, people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Before road travel, ensure that both brake pedals are interconnected.

The trailer brake system is designed to be operated with a trailer.

BX001-880

1 Brake pedal service brake machine

2 Brake pedal service brake trailer

3 Connecting bolt

The brake pedals (1, 2) are interconnected via the connecting bolt (3).

To be able to brake the trailer separately, the connection between the two brake pedals (1, 2) can be removed via the connecting bolt (3). Both brake pedals (1, 2) may be released in field mode only.

The function of the trailer brake system must always be checked before setting off:

„

Actuate the parking brake, see Page 253 .

„ A 2nd person must check whether the brake linkage on the trailer moves.

ð If a movement on the brake linkage is observed, the trailer brake system has been correctly set.

ð If no movement on the brake linkage is observed, the machine/trailer unit consisting of forage harvester and trailer must not be moved any further.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

„ Have a technician check and repair the trailer brake system.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 99

6

6.6

6.6

Control and Display Elements

Actuating the momentary foot switches (for "Momentary foot switches in the cabin" version)

Actuating the momentary foot switches (for "Momentary foot switches in the cabin" version)

2 3 5

1

4

4

6

6.7

BX002-639

The momentary foot switches (1, 3) on the steering column (2) are programmable memory keys that can be used to activate machine functions.

In the terminal, the keys can have functions assigned as key "M5" (left momentary foot switch)

and key "M6" (right momentary foot switch), see Page 326 .

The momentary foot switches (1, 3) may also be used as footrests if they have no functions assigned:

„ For this purpose, pull the detent pins (4) outwards, swivel the momentary foot switches (1, 3) backwards in the direction of travel, and release the detent pins (4) in the desired position.

Æ The detent pins engage in one of the boreholes (5) and the momentary foot switches (1, 3) remain in position.

If you want to assign functions to the momentary foot switches (1, 3):

„ Pull the detent pins (4) outwards, press the momentary foot switches (1, 3) forwards in the direction of travel, and release the detent pins (4).

Æ The detent pins engage in the boreholes (6) and the momentary foot switches (1, 3) can

have functions assigned, see Page 326 .

Mirror adjuster

Setting outside rear-view mirrors

WARNING

Danger to life of persons next to and behind the machine due to impaired view of the driver!

If the outside rear-view mirrors are not correctly set, the driver does not have a proper view of the area around the machine, possibly placing people in danger when the machine is being driven.

„ Before driving the machine, set the outside rear-view mirrors so that the driver has maximum visibility of the rear area from the driver’s seat.

100

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1

2

3

4

Control and Display Elements

Keypad for wiper and warning beacon

6

6.8

6.8

BX002-424

„ To set the left outside rear-view mirror, turn the knob (2) on the mirror adjuster until the mark (3) is on the left mirror symbol (1).

„ Push the knob (2) in the direction in which the mirror is to be adjusted.

Æ The area of the left outside rear-view mirror moves in the desired direction.

„ To set the right outside rear-view mirror, turn the knob (2) on the mirror adjuster until the mark (3) is on the right mirror symbol (4).

„ Push the knob (2) in the direction in which the mirror is to be adjusted.

Æ The area of the right outside rear-view mirror moves in the desired direction.

Mirror heating is set via the "Mirror heating" menu on the terminal,

see Page 387

.

Keypad for wiper and warning beacon

1

4

2

3

BX002-425

Pos.

1

2

3

4

Designation

Left wiper key

Right wiper key

Warning beacon key

Rear wiper key

Explanation

Switches the left wiper on/off

Switches the right wiper on/off.

Switches the warning beacon on/off

Switches the rear wiper on/off

„ To switch on a wiper, press the respective key (1, 2, 4).

Æ The corresponding wiper wipes.

„ To switch off the wiper, press the respective key (1, 2, 4).

Æ The corresponding wiper switches to park position.

„ To perform a wipe/wash process, hold down the respective key (1, 2, 4).

Æ The nozzle of the corresponding wiper sprays water and the wiper wipes.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 101

6

6.9

Control and Display Elements

Lighting on the cabin ladder and right ladder

The warning beacons are switched on automatically. If the main mode switch is in the "Road mode" position.

„ To manually switch off the warning beacons, press the warning beacon key (3).

Æ The warning beacon is switched off.

6.9

Lighting on the cabin ladder and right ladder

For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version

To enable the rungs on the ladder up to the cabin and the ladder on the right to be easily seen, even in the dark, the rungs can be illuminated.

1

2

3

4

BXG000-041

5

102

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

6.10

Control and Display Elements 6

Interior lighting 6.10

Leaving Home function

The Leaving Home function allows the cabin to be entered safely, even in the dark.

„ To activate the "Leaving Home" function, press the "Ladder lighting" (3) key.

Æ The lights (1), (2), (4) and (5) light up for a certain amount of time.

Coming Home function

The Coming Home function allows the cabin to be left safely, even in the dark.

„ The activate the Coming Home function, turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.

Æ The lights (1), (2), (4) and (5) light up for a certain amount of time.

Interior lighting

6.11

BM000-040

The interior lamp (2) is located on the cab roof and is switched with the switch (3).

The switch has 3 positions:

Pos.

I

II

III

Explanation

The interior lamp is switched via the door contact switch.

The interior lamp has been switched off.

The interior lamp has been switched on.

Switching logic when the switch (3) is in position II:

• When the cabin door is opened, the interior lamp (2) is switched on and is switched off again after a delay.

• When the cabin door is being opened, the interior lamp (2) is switched on. As soon as

ignition stage II is switched on see Page 245 , the interior lamp (2) goes out.

• When the diesel engine has been switched off, the interior lamp (2) is switched on and goes out after a short time.

In addition to the interior lamp (2), the lighting for the control lever (1) is switched on as soon as the parking, dipped or full beam has been switched on.

Operating elements on control lever

The control lever is used to make important settings and issue commands for road and field mode of the machine.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 103

6 Control and Display Elements

6.11

Operating elements on control lever

104

BXG000-010

The keys on the control lever are used to run machine functions. The keys are assigned either to sensing mode, step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the particular key operating mode involved, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:

• Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The function is not stopped by releasing the key.

• Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.

In the description below only the keys that are used for sensing mode are identified; all other keys are used for step mode.

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

Designation

"Intake/header" key

"Reversing intake/header" key Reverses the intake/header.

"M1" key Freely assignable memory key.

"M2" key

Explanation

Switches the intake/header on/off (sensing mode).

"Automatic steering system" key

Freely assignable memory key.

Switches the automatic steering system (optional) on/off

(only for field mode with

EasyCollect) (sensing mode).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Pos.

6

8.3

8.4

9

10

7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

8.1

8.2

Control and Display Elements 6

Operating elements on control lever 6.11

Designation Explanation

"Reversing/parking spout" key When main coupling is switched on: Reverses the position of the spout (sensing mode).

When main coupling is switched off: Swivels the spout into the transport position (sensing mode).

"Spout flap up" key

"Turn spout right" key

Raises the spout flap (2 stages).

Turns the spout to the right (2 stages).

"Spout flap down" key Lowers the spout flap (2 stages).

"Turn spout left" key

"Lower lifting unit manually" key

"Raise lifting unit automatically" key

Turns the spout to the left (2 stages).

Lowers the lifting unit to the lowest position (2 stages).

Raises the lifting unit automatically to the headland position

(sensing mode).

Raises the lifting unit (2 stages).

"Raise lifting unit manually" key

"Lower lifting unit automatically" key

Lowers the lifting unit to the working position (sensing mode).

"Traction drive" activation key Releases the traction drive.

"Acceleration behaviour" switch

Switches the value for the acceleration behaviour.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 105

6 Control and Display Elements

6.11

Operating elements on control lever

Lever movements

106

BX001-656

Pos.

I

II

III

IV

V

VI

Explanation

For forward travel: Acceleration (when activation key pressed at the same time)

For reverse travel: Deceleration

Control lever in central position

For forward travel: Deceleration

For reverse travel: Acceleration (when activation key pressed at the same time)

Deceleration to 0 km/h

In field mode when activation key pressed at the same time: fast reversing

Control lever in central position

For forward travel: Switch on cruise control (when activation key pressed at the same time the current driving speed is saved)

2x taps in field mode: Activates the load limit control "ConstantPower",

see

Page 295 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

6.12

Control and Display Elements 6

Control and display elements on the keypad 6.12

Control and display elements on the keypad

BXG000-011

• The keys that can be used to select functions light up.

• The top left LED in each key flashes on and off or lights up when the selected function is executed.

The keys on the keypad are used to run machine functions. The keys are designed either for sensing mode or step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the operating mode of the keys, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:

• Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The function is not stopped by releasing the key.

• Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.

In the description below only the keys that are used for sensing mode are identified; all other keys are used for step mode.

Pos.

1

2

3

4

Designation

"Main coupling on" key

"Main coupling off" key

"Hydraulic circuit 1" keys

Explanation

Switches the main coupling on.

Switches the main coupling off.

For maize header: Folds out the maize header.

For grass header: Swivels out the guide wheels.

For maize header: Folds in the maize header.

For grass header: Swivels in the guide wheels.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 107

6 Control and Display Elements

6.12

Control and display elements on the keypad

21

22

23

17

18

19

20

7

8

9

Pos.

5

6

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

24

Designation

"Hydraulic circuit 2" keys

Explanation

For maize header: Lowers the plant divider.

For grass header: Lowers the crop press roller unit.

For maize header: Raises the plant divider.

For grass header: Raises the crop press roller unit.

Raises the spout.

Lowers the spout.

Folds in the spout extension if installed.

"Raise spout" key

"Lower spout" key

Key

"Fold in spout extension"

Key

"Fold out spout extension"

Folds out the spout extension if installed.

"Increase diesel engine speed" key

"Reduce diesel engine speed" key

"Diesel engine speed" key

Increases the speed of the diesel engine.

Reduces the speed of the diesel engine.

Switches between saved speed of the diesel engine and idle speed of the diesel engine (sensing mode).

"Eco/X-Power" key

"Parking brake" key

Switches between Eco‑Power mode and X‑Power mode

Applies the parking brake./

Releases the parking brake.

"Traction control system" key Switches between TC I and

TC II.

"Raise rear axle" key

"Lower rear axle" key

"Chop length 1" key

"Chop length 2" key

Raises the rear axle.

Lowers the rear axle.

Calls the chop length 1.

Calls the chop length 2.

"Increase working width" key Increases the working width.

"Reduce working width" key Reduces the working width.

"Lower pendulum tube on left" key

Lowers the pendulum tube on the left (sensing mode).

"Lower pendulum tube on right" key

Lowers the pendulum tube on the right (sensing mode).

108

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

6.13

Control and Display Elements 6

Main mode switch 6.13

Save speed of the diesel engine for "Diesel engine speed" key (13)

The speed of the diesel engine, which can be called via the "Diesel engine speed" key (13), is adjustable. The storable speed range is between 1700 rpm and 1900 rpm.

„ Adjust the required speed of the diesel engine via the keys "Increase diesel engine speed"

(11) and "Reduce diesel engine speed" (12).

„ To save the adjusted rotational speed, press the "Diesel engine speed" key (13) for 3 seconds. An information message "Storage successful" appears.

Repeatedly pressing the "Diesel engine rotational speed" key (13) switches between the saved rotational speed and the idle rotational speed.

Main mode switch

4

5

2

3

BM000-012

The Main Mode Switch (8) is used to select the operating mode of the machine.

Pos.

1

6

7

8

Designation

Quick-stop switch

Main Mode Switch tip

"Neutral mode" switch position

"Field mode" switch position

Main Mode Switch unlocking device

Main mode switch

Explanation

Stops the working functions. The diesel engine continues running.

Indicates the selected operating mode.

Selects neutral mode.

"Road mode" switch position

"Maintenance mode" switch position

Selects road mode.

Selects maintenance mode.

Selects field mode.

Pressed unlocking device releases the rotary switch.

Released unlocking device locks the rotary switch.

Selects the operating mode of the machine.

To select an operating mode with the Main Mode Switch (8):

„ Press and hold down the unlocking device (7) on the Main Mode Switch (8) and simultaneously turn the Main Mode Switch (8) to the required operating mode.

Æ The tip (2) indicates the selected operating mode.

To stop the working functions in an emergency:

„ Press the quick-stop switch (1).

To release the working functions again:

„ Unlock the quick-stop switch (1) by slightly turning it clockwise.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 109

6 Control and Display Elements

6.14

Quick-stop switch

6.14

Quick-stop switch

1

BXG000-006

The quick-stop switch (1) in the cabin is used to stop the working functions of the machine. The diesel engine continues running.

„ To actuate it, press down the quick-stop switch (1) until it locks into position.

Æ The working functions are stopped. The switch is locked.

1

6.15

BXG000-058

„ To release it, turn the quick-stop switch (1) clockwise until the home position is reached.

Æ The working functions are released again and can be activated again. The switch has been released.

Navigation module

110

BX001-770

The function keys (1-6) of the navigation module provide direct access to the most important keys on the display and the control unit of the automatic climate control.

The navigation scroll wheel (7) can be used to select the keys on the terminal, make settings on the machine and start and stop functions.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Control and Display Elements 6

Navigation module 6.15

Description of the keys

Pos.

1

Icon

2

3

4

5

6

7

Designation

"Step back" key

"Step forwards" key

Explanation

Goes back one input step in the terminal.

Goes forwards one input step in the terminal.

"Home" key

"Cabin temperature" key

"Air conditioning mode" key

Switches to the working screen

"Road mode" or "Field mode" in the terminal.

Press navigation button in addition:

Switches the manual setting of the cabin temperature on/off

Turn navigation button in addition:

Increases/lowers the cabin temperature

Press navigation button in addition:

Switches the automatic climate control on/off

"Fan speed" key Press navigation button in addition:

Switches the manual setting of the fan speed on/off

Turn navigation button in addition:

Increases/lowers the fan speed

Navigation scroll wheel Operates the display and the automatic climate control

"Navigation scroll wheel" function

BXG000-055

Besides inputting data through the touch display, the navigation scroll wheel can also be used to navigate on the terminal and change numerical values.

To do this, the "navigation scroll wheel" can be pressed, rotated and slid to the side.

Navigating on the terminal

• Turning: Changes the selection of keys on the terminal in the direction of rotation.

The selected key has a yellow border.

• Pushing: Changes the selection of keys on the terminal in the sliding direction.

The selected key has a yellow border.

• Pressing: Actuates the selected key.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 111

6 Control and Display Elements

6.16

Ignition lock

Changing an adjustable numerical value

„ To navigate to the required adjustable value, rotate or slide the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

Æ The selected key has a yellow border.

„ To switch the adjustable value to input mode, press the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

Æ The key has an orange background.

„ To change the value, rotate the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

„ To save the adjusted value, press the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

6.16

Ignition lock

6.17

BM000-029

The ignition key (1) can be turned to 4 different positions in the ignition lock:

Pos.

STOP

I

II

III

Explanation

The circuit is interrupted.

The circuit for the electronics is switched on.

The ignition is switched on

Start position

Additional keypad

3

2

1

4

5

6

9 8 7

BX001-802

The additional keypad is located in the right armrest of the driver's seat.

„ To access the additional keypad, open the right armrest.

The keys on the additional keypad are used to run machine functions. The keys are designed for step operating mode, i.e. the function is run for as long as the key is pressed.

112

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Control and Display Elements 6

Sockets 6.18

6

7

8

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

Designation

"Open/lift header locking" key

"Preselect hopper/plus" key

"Preselect hitch attachment/extend" key

"Preselect additional axle/minus" key

Explanation

• Selects the "Header locking" function, for version with "Hydraulic header locking with quick-coupler".

• Lifts a component.

• Selects the "Hopper" function.

• Increases a value.

• Selects the "Hitch attachment" function.

• Locks a component.

• Extends a component.

• Selects the "Additional axle" function.

• Reduces a value.

"Adjust discharge distance/home" key

• Selects the "Adjust discharge distance" function, for version with "StreamControl".

"Lower" key • Lowers a component.

"Right" key

"Retract" key

"Left" key

• Moves a component to the right.

• Releases a component.

• Retracts a component.

• Moves a component to the left.

9

To operate a function using the additional keypad:

„ Select the function using keys (1) to (5) (e.g. the "Open header locking" function).

Æ The keys are automatically lit which are available to change a value or move a component.

„ To change a value or move a component, press the corresponding key.

„ To return to function selection, press the key (5).

INFO

Step mode or continuous operation can be selected for the "Hopper" and "Hitch attachment"

functions; to do this, set the required mode in the auxiliary hydraulics "Settings" menu, see

Page 422

.

Continuous operation is only possible up to a machine driving speed of maximum 5 km/h.

6.18

6.18.1

Sockets

Cigarette lighter 12 Volt

WARNING

Risk of burns from the hot cigarette lighter

During operation the cigarette lighter generates such high temperatures that it may cause burns.

„ Do not held the cigarette lighter (1) in the depressed position.

„ Hold the hot cigarette lighter (1) by the handle only.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 113

6 Control and Display Elements

6.18

Sockets

1

6.18.2

BX001-883

Located on the right cabin side next to the ignition lock are:

• Cigarette lighter (12 V) (1)

„ Press in the cigarette lighter (12 V) (1) to heat it up:

Æ When the required lighter temperature has been reached, the cigarette lighter (12 V) (1) jumps back out automatically.

12 V socket/24 V socket

BX001-804

Located on the right side of the cabin are:

• Socket (24 V) (1)

• 3-pin socket (12 V) (2)

Electrical consumers with 24 V and maximum 20 A can be connected to the socket (24 V) (1).

Electrical consumers with 12 V and maximum 15 A can be connected to the 3-pin socket (12 V)

(2).

If the diesel engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged.

114

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Control and Display Elements 6

Sockets 6.18

6.18.3

Diagnostics sockets

2

1

6.18.4

BMG000-068

There is the following diagnostics interfaces behind the driver's seat:

• ISOBUS diagnostics socket (1)

• KRONE diagnostics socket (2)

„ Ensure that only devices authorised by KRONE are connected to the diagnostics interfaces.

In-cab socket

6.18.5

BX002-008

Located on the right side of the cabin is:

• In-cab socket (1)

„ Ensure that only devices authorised by KRONE are connected to the In-cab socket, e.g. an

ISOBUS-compatible terminal.

USB connection

BX001-207

The USB connection (1) is located in the right armrest.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 115

6 Control and Display Elements

6.19

Grinding control unit

6.19

Grinding control unit

The grinding control unit is located next to the platform at the front left side of the machine.

The grinding control unit can be used to perform a grinding process on the chopping blade and the lifting unit can be raised and lowered.

116

BX001-611

The keys on the control lever are used to run machine functions. The keys are assigned either to sensing mode, step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the particular key operating mode involved, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:

• Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The function is not stopped by releasing the key.

• Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.

In the description below only the keys that are used for sensing mode are identified; all other keys are used for step mode.

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Designation

"Raise lifting unit" key

"Lower lifting unit" key

"Right counterblade towards" key Moves the right counterblade towards the cutter drum.

"Right counterblade away" key

"Left counterblade towards" key Moves the left counterblade towards the cutter drum.

"Left counterblade away" key

Moves the right counterblade away from the cutter drum.

Moves the left counterblade away from the cutter drum.

"Automatic grinding operation" key

"Move grinding stone manually" key

"Open/close grinding flap" key

"Reversing intake/header" key

Explanation

Raises the lifting unit.

Lowers the lifting unit.

Starts an automatic grinding process (sensing mode).

Moves the grinding stone.

Opens or closes the grinding flap (sensing mode).

Reverses the intake/header.

The functions of the grinding control unit are available for different switching-on conditions.

The following is generally applicable:

ü The header is positioned fully on the ground.

ü

The machine has been safely parked, see Page 27

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

6.20

Control and Display Elements 6

Quick-stop switch grinding control unit 6.20

Function

Raise lifting unit

Lower lifting unit

Counterblade towards right

Counterblade away from right on

Counterblade towards left on

Counterblade away from left on

Automatic grinding operation on

Switching-on conditions

Maintenance mode Main coupling on/off on/off on/off on on/off on on/off on on/off on

Move grinding stone manually on

Open/close grinding flap on

Reverse intake/header

Emergency reverse intake off off on on/off on off

Quick-stop switch grinding control unit

BX001-122

The quick-stop switch (1) on the grinding control unit is used to stop the working functions of the machine. The diesel engine and the traction drive continue running.

„ To actuate it, press down the quick-stop switch (1) until it locks into position.

Æ The working functions are stopped. The switch is locked.

BX001-121

„ To release it, turn the quick-stop switch (1) clockwise until the home position is reached.

Æ The working functions are released again and can be activated again. The switch has been released.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 117

6 Control and Display Elements

6.21

Opening and closing side hoods and rear hood

6.21

Opening and closing side hoods and rear hood

WARNING

Risk of injury from moving machine parts

If the hoods for the engine compartment and crop flow are opened while the diesel engine is running or components of the material flow are coasting, there is a risk of people being injured by moving machine parts.

„ Do not open the side hoods and the rear hood until the diesel engine and the components of the crop flow still have stopped.

„ Ensure that the side hoods and the rear hood are closed when starting the diesel engine.

2 3

1

BX002-433

Opening the side hoods (2) and the rear hood (3):

„ Unlock the lock (1) anti-clockwise using a spanner (W/F 13) or a flat head screwdriver.

„ Grip under the hood and swing the hood open.

Closing the side hoods (2) and the rear hood (3):

„ Swing down the hood and press down without using a tool until the lock closes.

„ To ensure that the hood is locked, grip under the hood and pull.

Æ If the hood cannot be opened, the hood is locked.

Æ If the hood can be opened, press down the hood again until the lock (1) closes.

„ Check again whether the hood is locked and, if required, press down the hood again until the lock (1) closes.

118

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

7

7.1

Initial operation

Checklist for initial operation

Initial operation

This chapter describes assembly and adjustment work on the machine which may be carried out by qualified technicians only. Here, the notice “Personnel qualification of technicians” applies,

see Page 20

.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

7

7.1

WARNING

Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to faulty initial operation

If the initial operation is carried out incorrectly or incompletely, the machine may present defects. As a result, people may be injured or killed or the machine may be damaged.

„ Initial operation must only be carried out by authorised technicians.

„ Read in full and observe the “Personnel qualification of technicians”,

see Page 20 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

Checklist for initial operation

ü There are no leakages present in the machine.

ü All cable and plug connections are properly connected and laid.

ü All hoses are properly laid.

ü All screws and nuts are checked for tightness, and are tightened to the specified tightening

torques, see Page 451 .

ü The machine is fully lubricated,

see Page 585 .

ü

The universal shafts are lubricated, see Page 582

.

ü

The wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use, see Page 65

.

ü

The platforms, steps and standing areas are clean and in proper condition, see Page 65 .

ü The fire extinguisher is mounted,

see Page 120

.

ü

The licence plate is mounted, see Page 121 .

ü The tyres have been checked and the tyre pressure is adjusted correctly,

see Page 485

.

ü The hub covers of the rear axle have been checked for damage and tight fit (for "front wheel drive" version),

see Page 480

.

ü The enclosed operating instructions are in the drawer below the driver's seat.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 119

7

7.2

7.2

Initial operation

Mounting warning panels in operating position

Mounting warning panels in operating position

7.3

BX001-389

If the warning panels (2) are not mounted due to transport purposes, they must be mounted in operating position before the initial commissioning.

The hole pattern (3) for the screws permits 3 mounting positions.

To adapt the position of the warning panels to the width of the tyres:

„ Determine the mounting position of the warning panels such that the distance from the outer edge of the machine to the outer edge of the warning panel to the inside does not exceed

100 mm.

„ Mount the warning panels in the operating position on the supports (1), right-hand and lefthand machine side.

Mounting fire extinguisher

1

BPG000-034

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Insert the fire extinguisher (1) into the support at top left of the machine so that the operating instructions on the type plate are legible and point towards the outside.

120

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

7.4

Initial operation

Mounting licence plate

WARNING! Risk of injury due to falling fire extinguisher! In order to secure the fire extinguisher, adjust the tensioning straps with sufficient tension according to the circumference of the fire extinguisher.

„ Adjust the length of the tensioning straps according to the circumference of the fire extinguisher.

„ Shorten the length of the tensioning straps by a few millimetres and close the fasteners to guarantee that the closed tensioning straps are tensioned sufficiently.

Æ The tensioning straps have been properly adjusted if the fasteners can only be closed by means of an auxiliary tool (e. g. screwdriver).

Æ If it is possible to close the fasteners manually:

„ Shorten the length of the tensioning straps so far that the fasteners can only be closed by an auxiliary tool (e. g. screwdriver).

7

7.4

Mounting licence plate

1

2

3

BXG000-057

„ Mount the front licence plate on both support brackets (1) on the front spoiler (2) of the cabin.

„ Mount the rear licence plate in the designated indentation on the tailgate under the licence plate lighting (3).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 121

8

8.1

8

Start-up

Check before start-up

Start-up

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

8.1

Check before start-up

INFO

Compliance with the stipulated checks on the machine significantly increases the safety and the lifetime of the machine.

A machine with established defects must not be started.

„ If it is established that the machine has defects, shut down the machine and eliminate these defects or have them eliminated by technicians.

„ Before starting up the machine, carry out the inspections listed below and checks from the

maintenance table "Every 10 hours, at least daily", see Page 444 .

General

ü There are no leakages present in the machine.

ü All cable and plug connections are properly connected and laid.

ü All hoses are properly laid.

ü The safety devices are mounted and checked for completeness and damage.

ü The header has been correctly mounted and provided with appropriate safety devices,

EasyFlow see Page 203 , EasyCollect

see Page 221 , XCollect

see Page 211 .

ü

The platforms, steps and standing areas are clean and in proper condition, see Page 65 .

ü

The wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use, see Page 65

.

ü

The horn is functioning properly, see Page 93 .

ü The fire extinguisher is mounted in its support / holder and is ready for use,

see Page 488 .

Cabin

ü The position of the mirrors and the camera are set, outside rear-view mirror

see Page 100

,

interior rear-view mirror and camera see Page 123

.

ü

The driver's seat is adjusted correctly, see Page 123 .

ü

All emergency exits are freely accessible and can be opened unhindered, see Page 90

.

ü All windows and mirrors are cleaned.

ü All wiper blades are in good condition.

122

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

8.2

8.2.1

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8

8.2

Lighting and labeling

ü The lighting and the warning beacon are correctly set and function perfectly,

see Page 101

.

ü All red-white warning panels for making the machine visible are mounted in accordance with national laws.

Setting driver’s seat

Air-cushioned comfort seat

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts!

When the control lever cannot be moved freely in all directions, it is not possible to execute all functions of the control lever. It may then not be possible to respond quickly and correctly to hazardous situations.

„ After comfort seat, right armrest and steering column have been set, check whether the control lever can be moved freely in all directions.

„ Adapt the setting when the control lever cannot be moved freely in all directions.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to incorrectly set driver's seat!

When the driver's seat is not adjusted individually to the driver, the driver may damage his health due to bad posture while working.

„ Before starting up the machine, adjust the driver's seat ergonomically and individually to the driver.

WARNING

Danger of injury resulting from unintentional movement of machine parts

If the vibration damper has been set too softly, the seat may hit the floor when driving on a bad road and contact with the operating elements is no longer guaranteed. It may then not be possible to respond quickly and correctly to hazardous situations. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Always set the vibration damper of the comfort seat tightly enough to prevent the seat from hitting the floor even when driving on a bad road.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to brief distraction of the driver

When the driver's seat or steering column is adjusted while driving, the driver cannot pay adequate attention to the travel path. This may result in serious accidents.

„ Adjust the driver's seat and the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 123

8

8.2

8.2.1.1

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "Standard" version)

124

BXG000-100

3

4

1

2

5

6

Driver's seat

Seat depth adjustment

Seat angle adjustment

Longitudinal adjustment

Horizontal suspension

Height setting

7

8

9

10

11

12

Adjustment of the backrest

Left armrest

Lumbar support

Headrest

Cover cap armrest adjustment

Vibration damper setting

The air comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

„ Pull lever (6) completely upward.

ð The driver's seat (1) is moved upwards.

„ Press lever (6) completely down.

ð Move driver's seat (1) downwards.

Æ When the upper or lower end stop of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

„ To activate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the front.

„ To deactivate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the rear.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8

8.2

Longitudinal adjustment

„ Pull locking lever (4) up, push driver's seat (1) forward or backward into the desired position and permit the locking lever (4) to lock in place.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. The driver's seat must no longer be movable into another position.

Seat angle adjustment

„ Pull the key (3) up and set the inclination of the seat base by simultaneously increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat base.

Seat depth adjustment

„ Pull key (2) up and move seat base to the desired position by moving it forward and backward simultaneously.

Adjustment of the backrest

„ Pull locking lever (7) up, set the inclination of the backrest and allow the locking lever (7) to engage.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. Make sure that the backrest cannot be moved.

Weight adjustment

In order to prevent damage to health, the individual driver’s weight setting should be checked and adjusted prior to starting up the machine. The setting should be carried out whilst sitting absolutely stationary.

„ Briefly pull the lever (6) upwards.

Headrest

The headrest has been optimally set when the upper edges of the head and headrest are at the same height.

„ Pull out or push in the headrest (10) over the perceptible notches until the correct height has been reached.

Lumbar support

„ Turn the hand wheel (9) to the left or right in order to individually adjust the height as well as the intensity of the arching in the backrest.

Adjusting the vibration damper

The vibration behaviour of the driver's seat can be optimally adjusted to each driving situation from "soft" to "hard" using the infinitely adjustable vibration damper.

„ Pull (12) lever upwards to set soft seating comfort.

„ Pull (12) lever downwards to set hard seating comfort.

Setting the left armrest

BM000-047

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 125

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

„ Remove cover cap (11) to adjust the armrest height.

„ Loosen hexagon nut, move armrest into desired position and tighten hexagon nut.

„ Press cover cap (11) on hexagon nut.

Setting the right armrest

8.2.1.2

BM000-048

The right armrest (13) and the control lever form a unit.

„ To set the right armrest, raise lever (14).

„ Fold right armrest up or down, forward or backward and release the lever (14).

Æ The setting remains the same.

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "ACTIVO" version)

126

BXG000-099

3

4

1

2

Air-cushioned comfort seat

Seat depth adjustment

Seat angle adjustment

Longitudinal adjustment

8

9

10

11

Left armrest

Seat heating and air conditioning on/off

Headrest

Cover cap armrest adjustment

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8

8.2

5

6

7

Horizontal suspension on/off

Weight and height setting

Adjustment of the backrest

12

13

14

Vibration damper setting

Lumbar support setting at bottom

Lumbar support setting at top

The air comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

„ Pull lever (6) completely upward.

ð The driver's seat (1) is moved upwards.

„ Press lever (6) completely down.

ð Move driver's seat (1) downwards.

Æ When the upper or lower end stop of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

„ To activate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the front.

„ To deactivate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the rear.

Longitudinal adjustment

„ Pull locking lever (4) up, push driver's seat (1) forward or backward into the desired position and permit the locking lever (4) to lock in place.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. The driver's seat must no longer be movable into another position.

Seat angle adjustment

„ Pull the key (3) up and set the inclination of the seat base by simultaneously increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat base.

Seat depth adjustment

„ Pull key (2) up and move seat base to the desired position by moving it forward and backward simultaneously.

Adjustment of the backrest

„ Pull locking lever (7) up, set the inclination of the backrest and allow the locking lever (7) to engage.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. Make sure that the backrest cannot be moved.

Weight adjustment

The weight is automatically adjusted when the seat is loaded by the driver.

Setting the vibration damper

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 127

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

BM000-050

The oscillating behaviour of the driver’s seat can be adapted ideally to each driving situation via the adjustable vibration damper.

Damping level II is the default setting recommended by the manufacturer at average driver’s weight.

The lever (12) for the setting of the oscillating behaviour has three settings:

Pos.

I

II

III

Explanation

Soft damping

Medium damping

Hard damping

„ To set the vibration damper, turn lever (12) to desired stage and release it.

The damping behaviour can be coordinated between the damping levels by two additional setting positions each.

Lumbar support

128

BM000-051

The intensity of the arching of seat backrest can be adapted individually so that the spine is supported and the pressure on the back is relieved.

„ In order to adapt the intensity of the arching in the upper area of the backrest, press „+“ or

„-“ on switch (14) until the desired setting is reached.

„ In order to adapt the intensity of the arching in the lower area of the backrest, press on “+” or “-” on switch (13) until the desired setting is reached.

Seat heating and seat climate control

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8

8.2

BM000-052

The seat surface can be vented via seat climate control so that a cool and dry seating is enabled.

The switch (9) has three positions:

Pos.

0

I

II

Explanation

Seat heating and seat climate control OFF

Seat climate control ON (seat heating OFF)

Seat heating ON (seat climate control OFF)

„ In order to switch on seat climate control, switch the switch (9) to position I.

Æ The left light indicates the operation of seat climate control.

„ To switch on the seat heating, switch the switch (9) to position II.

Æ The right lamp indicates the operation of the seat heating.

Setting the left armrest

BM000-047

Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

„ Remove cover cap (11) to adjust the armrest height.

„ Loosen hexagon nut, move armrest into desired position and tighten hexagon nut.

„ Press cover cap (11) on hexagon nut.

Setting the right armrest

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 129

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8.2.1.3

BM000-048

The right armrest (13) and the control lever form a unit.

„ To set the right armrest, raise lever (14).

„ Fold right armrest up or down, forward or backward and release the lever (14).

Æ The setting remains the same.

Turning the driver's seat (for the "Swivel seat adapter" design)

The swivel adapter can be used to rotate the driver's seat and to lock it in 4 different positions to be able to monitor the work of the machine.

8.2.2

BX001-956 / BX001-957

„ Lift the locking lever (2) and rotate the seat (1).

WARNING! If the driver's seat is not locked in the straight-ahead position (II), the seat can rotate during road travel, which prevents the driver from operating the controls safely. Ensure that the driver's seat for road travel is in the straight-ahead position (II) and that the locking lever has audibly engaged.

„ Release the locking lever (2) and turn it until the required seat position (I–IV) has been reached and the seat locks.

Steering column adjustment

WARNING

Risk of accident due to brief distraction of the driver

When the driver's seat or steering column is adjusted while driving, the driver cannot pay adequate attention to the travel path. This may result in serious accidents.

„ Adjust the driver's seat and the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.

130

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8

8.2

BM000-054

„ To adjust the inclination of the steering column around the lower pivot point (a), actuate the unlocking pedal (1) and move the steering column (3) into the required position.

„ To lock the steering column (3), release the unlocking pedal (1).

„ To adjust the height of the steering wheel (c) and the inclination of the steering column around the upper pivot point (b), release the release lever (2) and move the steering column

(3) into the required position.

„ To lock the steering column (3), lock the release lever (2).

8.2.3

Setting the terminal

1

7 8

4

5

2

6

3

11

9

10

BXG001-114

The position of the terminal can be adjusted to the driver and to the visible conditions of the header by turning the support (11) and the terminal.

Adjusting the inclination of the terminal forwards/backwards:

„ Loosen the lever (2) and adjust the inclination of the terminal forwards/backwards (8).

„ Tighten the lever (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 131

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

Adjusting the inclination of the terminal sideways:

„ Loosen the screw (1) and adjust the inclination of the terminal sideways (7).

„ Tighten the screw (1).

Rotating the terminal to the left/right:

„ Loosen the screw (3) and rotate the terminal to the left/right (6).

„ Tighten the screw (3).

Adjusting the height of the terminal:

„ Loosen the screw (4) and rotate (10) the support (11) until the required height has been reached.

„ Tighten the screw (4).

Swiveling the terminal to the left/right:

„ Loosen the lever (5) and swivel the support (11) to the left/right (9).

„ Tighten the lever (5).

8.2.4

Monitor for camera monitoring

For "Additional camera" version

132

BM000-043

„ Manually adjust the monitor (1) for the camera monitoring system so that the road and the working area at the side and behind the machine are in full view.

POC function

The POC function (Power on Control) of the additional camera automatically switches the monitor on as soon as the ignition is turned to Level "II". The POC function has been activated ex works and can be deactivated if required.

„ Press on the monitor.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8

8.2

8.2.5

EQ002-382

„ Keep pressing until "POC" (1) has been selected.

.

„ To deactivate the POC function, press

„ To select "Close", press .

„ To leave the menu, press .

„ To re-activate the POC function, proceed in the same way.

INFO

Even when the POC function is deactivated, the monitor can be automatically switched on during reversing.

When the rear-view camera is connected to the monitor, the monitor automatically switches on during reversing. When reversing ends, the monitor automatically switches off.

When the rear-view camera is connected to the machine terminal and the adapter 200884280 has been installed, the monitor does not automatically switch on during reversing.

„ For further information, see instructions for accessories kit B352.

„ For further information, see operating instructions of the manufacturer.

Sun visor

BM000-044

„ Manually adjust the position of the sun visor (1) as required.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 133

8

8.3

8.2.6

Start-up

General aspects

Adjustable air nozzles

1 1

8.2.7

BXG000-044

Adjust the air nozzles (1) to prevent the discs from misting over.

Inside rear mirror

1

8.3

8.3.1

BM000-042

„ Manually set the inside rear mirror (1) so that the required outside area is visible in the mirror.

General aspects

Instructional seat

WARNING

Danger of accident due to distraction of the driver

The driver may be distracted by a second person in the cabin, possibly causing him not to pay adequate attention to his driving. This may result in serious accidents with personal injury.

„ The passenger seat may only be used while the driver is being instructed.

„ While the machine is being operated, there must be no other person in the cabin or on the machine except for the driver, unless the driver is being instructed.

134

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up

General aspects

8

8.3

8.3.2

BXG000-042

„ Before using the passenger seat (1), fold down its seating area.

Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox")

2

1

II

I

3

8.3.3

BX001-773

The cooling box (1) is located below the instructional seat (2) in the cabin.

„ In order to switch on the cooling box, move the switch (3) to position I.

„ In order to switch off the cooling box, move the switch (3) to position II.

Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions

BM000-085

The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the driver’s seat (1).

„ To remove the first-aid kit or the operating instructions, pull the drawer (2) forwards.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 135

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

This chapter describes the conversion from maize mode to grass mode/direct cut header.

Prerequisite for grass mode:

ü

The corn conditioner has been removed, see Page 137 .

ü The grass channel has been installed,

see Page 141

.

ü

The husk comb has been removed (version with "Husk comb"), see Page 151 .

ü The air intake is adjusted,

see Page 142 .

ü The round brushes that are used to clean the rotating screen are not in contact with the

rotating screen, see Page 143

.

ü

The hydraulic system has been set to grass mode, see Page 143 , for direct cut header: the

hydraulic system has been set to operation with direct cut header, see Page 144 .

ü

The grain capture sheet has been removed, see Page 144 .

ü The conveyor bars of the pre-compression roller have been fitted in such a way that the smooth side is used,

see Page 534

.

ü The chopping blades for grass mode have been fitted,

see Page 515

.

ü The counterblade for grass mode has been fitted,

see Page 531

.

ü The EasyFlow header has been fitted,

see Page 203

.

ü The season setting on the terminal has been set to grass mode,

see Page 428

.

ü The spout extension has been removed,

see Page 145

.

ü The camera on the auto-loading system is mounted in the grass mode/direct cut header position (version with "Auto-loading system"),

see Page 147 .

ü The rear weight has been removed,

see Page 149

.

ü The additional axle has been removed,

see Page 155

.

ü The lifting unit has been calibrated,

see Page 398

.

136

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

9.1

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Removing the corn conditioner

Removing the corn conditioner

9

9.1

Overview

1 1 2 3

7

4

6 5

BX002-440

1 Corn conditioner/grass channel lock

2 Kraftband

3 Support / holder for crank handle

4 Connecting rod

5 Assembly device with roller chain

6 Central lubrication

7 Power supply

ü The rear axle is in the top position.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

Dismounting the crop flow cover

2

1

BXG000-108

„ To remove the cover (1), unlock the quarter turn fasteners (2) with suitable tools.

Set down the cover (1) outside the machine.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 137

9

9.1

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Removing the corn conditioner

2

1

BX002-027

„ Take the crank handle (2) from the support / holder for the crank handle and place on the connecting rod (1).

For version with "Electric VariQuick"

1

2

BX002-507

„ Take the operation device (1) out of the storage compartment and connect to the socket (2).

138

BX002-018

„ Detach the cover (3).

„ Detach the lubrication lines (2).

„ Detach the plug connection (1) for the power supply.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Removing the corn conditioner

9

9.1

2 3

BX002-397

„ To relieve the kraftband (1), pull the knob (3) on the control block (2).

1

2

1

2

3

4

BXG000-107

„ In order to be able to remove the kraftband (1), insert the manual lever (3) into the sleeve (4) on the tensioning arm (2) and press the tensioning arm (2) down towards the front.

„ Remove the kraftband (2).

„ Remove the manual lever (3).

BX002-017

„ Loosen the screws (2) on both sides and rotate the lock (1) to the side.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 139

9

9.1

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Removing the corn conditioner

BX002-026

„ Turn the crank handle or, in the case of the "VariQuick electric" version, use the control unit,

see Page 303

, to swivel the corn conditioner (1) downwards until there is a distance of

X=15 cm between the lock (2) and the stop (3).

„ Mount the wheels (4).

2

1

3

BX002-025

„ Swivel the corn conditioner (1) downwards until the distance between the corn conditioner and the ground is X=30 cm.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to suspended load. Never work under a suspended load.

Mount the wheel only from the side.

„ Mount the wheel (1).

„ Remove the kraftband (3) from the pulley (2).

140

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Installing the grass channel

9

9.2

9.2

BX002-016

„ Completely rotate the corn conditioner (1) downward.

„ Remove the linch pin (6).

„ Push the corn conditioner (1) backward in the direction of travel until the corn conditioner’s retainer hook (3) is no longer on the retainer hook (5) of the roller chain.

„ Mount the linch pin (6).

„ Push out the corn conditioner (1) to the right side of the machine.

„ Plug the crank handle onto the holder for the crank handle and secure it with the spring cotter pin, or remove the control unit (for the "VariQuick electric" version) and store it in the toolbox of the machine.

Installing the grass channel

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

ü The crop flow cover is removed,

see Page 137

.

BX002-014

„ Make sure that the locking (1) on both sides are in horizontal position.

„ Insert the grass channel (4) on the handles (3) until it reaches the stop.

„ Rotate the locking (1) downward on both sides and secure them with the screws (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 141

9

9.3

9.3

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Adjusting the air intake

Adjusting the air intake

1 1 2

2

1

BXG000-091

Ex factory, the setting sheet that regulates the air flow is mounted such that the air inlet is open.

To optimise the throwing behaviour, you can adjust the cross-section of the air inlet.

The larger the air intake, the more air can enter the crop flow and entrain more forage. The throwing behaviour can deteriorate with a low forage density.

The position of the cover sheet depends on the crop and the crop density in the field.

• A small air intake is more suitable for dry, light crops and low crop volumes.

• A large air intake is more suitable for moist, heavy crops and dense crop volumes.

When a silage additive unit is used, Krone recommends opening the air intake at the discharge accelerator in order to achieve optimal mixing of the crops with the silage additives.

Adjusting the air intake cover

„ Loosen the screws (1).

„ Pull the cover sheet (2) to the required position.

„ Tighten the screws (1).

Mounting the crop flow cover

2

1

BXG000-108

„ Attach the cover (1) and lock with the quarter turn fasteners (2).

142

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

9.4

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Removing round brushes from the rotating screen

Removing round brushes from the rotating screen

1 2

3

9

9.4

4

9.5

BX002-602

„ Loosen the counter nut (2).

„ Tighten the screw (3) to remove the round brushes (4) from the rotating screen (1).

„ Tighten the counter nut (2).

Setting Lifting Unit Hydraulics

Switching the lifting unit to grass mode

I II

1

BXG000-092

The three-way ball cock (1) for switching between maize and grass mode is located under the left side hood.

• Position I = maize mode, operation with direct cut header

• Position II = grass mode

To switch the hydraulic system to grass mode:

„ Bring the machine to a standstill.

„ Lower the header to the ground.

„ Move the three-way ball cock to position II.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 143

9

9.6

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Removing grain capture sheet

Switching lifting unit to maize mode or to operation with direct cut header

9.6

I II

1

BXG000-093

The three-way ball cock (1) for switching between maize and grass mode is located under the left side hood.

• Position I = maize mode, operation with direct cut header

• Position II = grass mode

To switch the hydraulic system to maize mode or to operation with direct cut header:

„ Bring the machine to a standstill.

„ Lower the header to the ground.

„ Move the three-way ball cock to position I

Removing grain capture sheet

144

BX001-515

To dismount the grain capture sheet:

„ Loosen coach screws (3), discs, detent edged washers and locknuts to screw angle (2) and grain capture sheet (1).

„ Unscrew the hexagon head screws, detent edged washers and discs (4) and remove the grain capture sheet.

Store the grain capture sheet with screw connection material in a safe place for subsequent reinstallation.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

9.7

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Removing spout extension

9

9.7

Removing spout extension

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury from suspended load

There is a danger for persons due to falling load.

„ Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.

„ Do not stay under the suspended load.

„ If work has to be performed under the load, securely support the load.

Removing 8 / 10-row spout extension

BX001-633

ü The spout is located on the right side of the machine and is fully lowered.

ü The spout flap has been completely opened.

ü The hydraulic circuits are depressurised.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Unscrew the nut (2) and remove the cover (3).

„ Detach the plug connection (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 145

9

9.7

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Removing spout extension

BX001-632

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (5) from the hydraulic lines.

„ NOTE! The weight of the "8-row spout extension" is approx. 80 kg. The weight of the

"10-row spout extension" is approx. 112 kg.

Pick up the spout extension (1) using a suitable load handling attachment.

„ Remove the screws (4, 6).

„ Detach the spout extension (1) from the supports (3) of the "spout basic" (2) and lift to the side.

„

Attach the required spout extension, see Page 172 .

Removing 12 / 14-row spout extension

146

BX001-633

ü The spout is located on the right side of the machine and is fully lowered.

ü The spout flap has been completely opened.

ü The spout extension has been folded in.

ü The hydraulic circuits are depressurised.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Remove the nuts (2) and remove the cover (3).

„ Detach the plug connection (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Mounting camera into grass mode position (for "auto-loading system" version)

9

9.8

9.8

BX001-636

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (4) from the hydraulic lines.

„ NOTE! The weight of the "12-row spout extension" is approx. 165 kg. The weight of the "14-row spout extension" is approx. 180 kg. Pick up the spout extension (1) using a suitable load handling attachment.

„ Remove the screws (2, 6).

„ Detach the spout extension (1) from the supports (3) of the spout basic (5) and lift to the side.

„

Attach the required spout extension, see Page 172 .

Mounting camera into grass mode position (for "auto-loading system" version)

NOTICE

If there are no hole pattern or screw points for mounting the camera onto the spout, see instructions for accessories kit B386 "Auto-loading system" (150 001 104_01).

2

4

3

5

1

BX002-060

„

If the camera is mounted in maize mode position, dismount the camera, see Page 148 .

„ Mount the camera (1) in the illustrated position using the screws (4).

„ Set the camera (1) to 0° using the inclination scale (5).

„ Connect the camera cable (3), lay it in the cable duct (2) and secure it with cable ties.

„

Calibrate the spout, see Page 412 .

If the camera system is to be mounted on the 8-row spout end piece for grass mode with direct

cut header, see Page 177 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 147

9

9.9

9.9

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

Dismounting camera when in maize mode position (for "auto-loading system" version)

Dismounting camera when in maize mode position (for "autoloading system" version)

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

Spout end piece 8/10 rows

3

1

BX002-281

„ Disconnect the camera cable (2) from the camera (1).

„ Unscrew the screws (3) and remove the camera (1).

If the spout holder is to be lowered:

2

1

1

2

3

BX002-391

„ Unscrew the screws (1) from the spout holder (2).

„ Lower the spout holder (2) until the upper hole pattern (3) of the inner tube is in alignment with the hole pattern in the outer tube.

„ Mount and tighten the screws (1).

148

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Spout end piece 12/14 rows

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header 9

Removing rear weight 9.10

3

9.10

1

2

BX002-282

„ Disconnect the camera cable (2) from the camera (1).

„ Unscrew the screws (3) and remove the camera (1).

Removing rear weight

WARNING

Risk of injury from suspended load

There is a danger for persons due to falling load.

„ Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.

„ Do not stay under the suspended load.

„ If work has to be performed under the load, securely support the load.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movements when the machine is operating

If the rear weight and the front-mounted EasyCollect or XCollect header are not coordinated with each other, there is a risk that the machine may overturn when braking or when driving on slopes.

„ Do not drive the machine on the road or use it for work unless the rear weight, stipulated for the combination of machine and fitted header, has been mounted.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 149

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

9.10

Removing rear weight

Removing rear weight

BX001-646

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

„ Loosen the screws (14) on the scrapers (13).

„ Completely push back the scrapers (13) over the oblong holes and tighten the screws (14).

BX001-547

„ Unscrew the nuts (12) and remove the tow coupling.

150

BX001-546

NOTE! The rear weight has a maximum weight of approx. 2900 kg depending on the features of the machine .

„ Pick up the rear weight (2) using a suitable hoist.

In doing so,

.

• use the openings for a forklift (8) and

• use the suspension points for a lifting beam (9)

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header 9

Removing husk comb (version with "Husk comb") 9.11

Ensure that the hoist has been correctly attached to the suspension points.

„ Remove the screws (10) and the threaded rods (11) and carefully lift the rear weight (1) to the side.

9.11

9.11.1

BX001-545

„ Attach the tow coupling (4) using the 4 screws (5).

„ Attach the rubber buffers (6) with 3 screws each (7).

„

Check the tyre pressure, see Page 485

.

Removing husk comb (version with "Husk comb")

ü

The lifting unit is in the top position, see Page 261

ü The chopping drum is locked,

see Page 517

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

Removing the maintenance flap and deflector sheet

2

1

BXG000-083

ü

The machine is in a safe state, see Page 611

.

„

Open the side hood on the right, see Page 118 .

„ Loosen the quarter turn fasteners (2) and remove the cover (1).

„ Set down the cover (1) outside the machine.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 151

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

9.11

Removing husk comb (version with "Husk comb")

Maintenance flap transfer shaft

1

2

3

BXG000-085

„ Loosen the screws (1) and turn the clamping pieces (2) to the side.

„ Remove the maintenance flap (3) and put to one side.

Deflector sheet

1

BX002-076

„ Remove the deflector sheet (1) and put the mounting material to one side.

152

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

9.11.2

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header 9

Removing husk comb (version with "Husk comb") 9.11

Removing blade support and husk comb

1 2

3

4 3

BX002-070

WARNING! Danger of cuts from sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Remove the husk comb (1) and keep with the distance sheets (3), the blade carrier (2), the wedges (4) and the mounting material for subsequent re-installation.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 153

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

9.11

Removing husk comb (version with "Husk comb")

9.11.3

Removing wear plate

1

9.11.4

BX002-077

„ Remove the wear plate (1) and keep with the mounting material for subsequent reinstallation.

Mounting wear plate (without window) and deflector sheet

1

2

BX002-072

„

Mount and adjust the wear plate (2), see Page 431 .

„ Mount the deflector sheet (1).

154

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

9.11.5

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header 9

Removing additional axle 9.12

Mounting maintenance flap transfer shaft

Maintenance flap transfer shaft

1

2

3

BXG000-085

„ Insert the maintenance flap (3), turn the clamping pieces (2) in front of the maintenance flap and tighten the screws (1).

Crop flow cover

2

1

9.12

BXG000-083

„ Attach the cover (1) and lock with the quarter turn fasteners (2).

Removing additional axle

WARNING

Risk of injury from suspended load

There is a danger for persons due to falling load.

„ Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.

„ Do not stay under the suspended load.

„ If work has to be performed under the load, securely support the load.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 155

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

9.12

Removing additional axle

Removing additional axle with one person

1

2

BX001-659

ü The header has been removed.

ü The rear axle is in the top position.

ü The hydraulic system is depressurised.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Loosen the lock bolt (1) by turning it and remove the cover (2).

BX001-666

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1).

„ Disconnect the plug connection (2).

156

BX001-669

„ Centre a pallet for supporting the additional axle under the additional axle.

„ Hook the cable winch (1) into the holder (2).

„ Hook the cable (3) into the rear towing ring (4) and pretension slightly.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header 9

Removing additional axle 9.12

5 6

2 1 1 2

4

3 3

BX001-665

„ Remove the spring cotter pins (3).

„ Remove the bolts (2) and deposit the hydraulic cylinders (1) to the side.

„ Completely lower the additional axle using the cable winch and detach the cable.

BX001-667

„ Hook the deflection (1) centred above the additional axle into the swivel device of the corn conditioner.

„ Hook the cable winch (2) into the deflection (1)

BX001-668

„ Guide the cable (1) above the deflection roll (2).

„ Hook the cable (1) into the front towing ring (3) of the additional axle (4) and pretension the cable (1) slightly.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 157

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

9.12

Removing additional axle

BX001-663

„ Remove the linch pins (4).

„ Remove the bolts (3) and completely lower the additional axle using the cable winch.

„ Detach and wind up the cable.

1

2

BX001-657

„ Mount the spacer tubes (2) with the screw connections (1).

158

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header 9

Removing additional axle 9.12

BX001-667

„ Detach the cable winch (2) and the deflection (1).

1

2

BX001-659

„ Insert cover (2) and secure by means of lock bolts (1).

„ In the Drive functions, "additional axle" menu, set the parameter KMC-1669 "Additional axle installed" to "No".

Removing additional axle with two persons

1

2

BX001-659

ü The header has been removed.

ü The rear axle is in the top position.

ü The hydraulic system is depressurised.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Loosen the lock bolt (1) by turning it and remove the cover (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 159

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

9.12

Removing additional axle

BX001-666

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1).

„ Disconnect the plug connection (2).

160

BX001-669

„ Centre a pallet for supporting the additional axle under the additional axle.

„ Hook the cable winch (1) into the holder (2).

„ Hook the cable (3) into the rear towing ring (4) and pretension slightly.

5 6

2 1 1 2

4

3 3

BX001-665

„ Remove the spring cotter pins (3).

„ Remove the bolts (2) and deposit the hydraulic cylinders (1) to the side.

„ Completely lower the additional axle using the cable winch and detach the cable.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header 9

Removing additional axle 9.12

BX001-661

„ Hook the deflection (1), centred above the additional axle, into the swivel device of the corn conditioner.

BX001-662

„ Guide the cable (1) over the deflection rolls (2, 3). On the front deflection roll (2) the cable

(1) is above the deflection roll and on the rear deflection roll (3) the cable (1) is below the deflection roll.

„ Hook the cable (1) into the front towing ring (4) of the additional axle (5) and pretension the cable (1) slightly.

BX001-663

„ Remove the linch pins (4).

„ Remove the bolts (3) and completely lower the additional axle using the cable winch.

„ Detach and wind up the cable.

„ Detach the deflection.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 161

9 Start-up – Grass mode/direct cut header

9.12

Removing additional axle

1

2

BX001-657

„ Mount the spacer tubes (2) with the screw connections (1).

BX001-660

„ Detach the cable winch (1). The holder (2) can remain in the machine.

1

2

BX001-659

„ Insert cover (2) and secure by means of lock bolts (1).

„ In the Drive functions, "additional axle" menu, set the parameter KMC-1669 "Additional axle installed" to "No".

162

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

This chapter describes the conversion from grass mode to maize mode.

Prerequisites for maize mode:

ü

The grass channel has been removed, see Page 164 .

ü

The corn conditioner has been installed, see Page 165 .

ü

The husk comb has been installed (version with "Husk comb"), see Page 182 .

ü

The kraftband has been attached, see Page 168 .

ü The air intake is adjusted,

see Page 169 .

ü The round brushes that are used to clean the rotating screen are in contact with the rotating

screen, see Page 170 .

ü The hydraulic system has been set to maize mode,

see Page 171

.

ü

The grain capture sheet has been attached, see Page 171 .

ü The conveyor bars of the pre-compression roller have been fitted in such a way that the serrated side is used,

see Page 534

.

ü The chopping blades for maize mode have been fitted,

see Page 515 .

ü

The counterblade for maize mode has been fitted, see Page 531 .

ü

The EasyCollect header, see Page 221 or the XCollect header,

see Page 211

has been mounted.

ü The season setting on the terminal has been adjusted to maize mode,

see Page 428

.

ü The lifting unit has been calibrated,

see Page 398

.

ü The spout extension has been attached,

see Page 172

.

ü The camera of the auto-loading system has been mounted in the "Maize mode" position,

see Page 177

.

ü The rear weight has been mounted,

see Page 179

.

For operation with 3 axles if no additional axle has been installed on the header:

ü The additional axle has been mounted,

see Page 189

.

Access to the corn conditioner/grass channel

The corn conditioner or the grass channel is accessed from the right side of the machine, behind the side hood on the right.

Prerequisites for installation and removal

• The rear axle has been completely raised using the keypad.

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

• The side hood on the right is open.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 163

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.1

Removing the grass channel

Dismounting the crop flow cover

2

1

10.1

BXG000-108

„ To remove the cover (1), unlock the quarter turn fasteners (2) with suitable tools.

Set down the cover (1) outside the machine.

Removing the grass channel

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

ü The crop flow cover is removed,

see Page 165

.

BX002-014

„ To unlock the grass channel (4) loosen the screws (2) on both sides and rotate the lock (1) to the side.

„ Pull out the grass channel (4) on the handles (3) and set it down to the side.

164

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

10.2

Installing the corn conditioner

Overview

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Installing the corn conditioner 10.2

1 1 2 3

7

4

6 5

BX002-440

1 Corn conditioner/grass channel lock

2 Kraftband

3 Support / holder for crank handle

4 Connecting rod

5 Assembly device with roller chain

6 Central lubrication

7 Power supply

ü The rear axle is in the top position.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

Dismounting the crop flow cover

2

1

BXG000-108

„ To remove the cover (1), unlock the quarter turn fasteners (2) with suitable tools.

Set down the cover (1) outside the machine.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 165

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.2

Installing the corn conditioner

2

1

BX002-027

„ Take the crank handle (2) from the support / holder for the crank handle and place on the connecting rod (1).

For version with "Electric VariQuick"

1

2

BX002-507

„ Take the operation device (1) out of the storage compartment and connect to the socket (2).

166

BX002-016

„ Push the corn conditioner (1) from the right side of the machine and centre it under the assembly equipment (2).

„ Position the retainer hooks (5) of the roller chain above the crank handle, or for the "Electric

VariQuick" design above the operation device, see Page 303 , so that the retainer hooks (3)

of the corn conditioner can be attached.

„ Engage the retainer hooks (5) in the roller chain.

„ Secure the retainer hooks (3) of the corn conditioner with a linch pin (6).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Installing the corn conditioner 10.2

2

1

3

BX002-025

„ Swivel the corn conditioner (1) upwards until the distance between the corn conditioner and the ground is X=30 cm.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to suspended load. Never work under a suspended load.

Dismount the wheel only from the side.

„ Dismount the wheel (1).

„ Place the kraftband (3) onto the pulley (2).

BX002-026

NOTE! The roller chain may be damaged by the wheels of the corn conditioner!

„ Rotate the corn conditioner (1) upward until there is a X=15 cm clearance between the lock (2) and the stop (3).

„ Make sure that the locking (2) on both sides are in horizontal position.

„ Dismount the wheels (4).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 167

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.2

Installing the corn conditioner

BX002-017

„ Completely rotate the corn conditioner upward.

„ Rotate the locking (1) downward on both sides and secure them with the screw (2).

„ Release the strain on the roller chain by turning the crank handle (one turn).

„ Remove the crank handle, plug it onto the holder for the crank handle and secure it with the spring cotter pin.

For version with "Electric VariQuick"

„ Touch the key to lower the corn conditioner to relieve the roller chain.

„ Remove the operation device and put it into the tool box of the machine

1

2

1

2

3

4

BXG000-107

„ In order to be able to attach the kraftband (1), insert the manual lever (3) into the sleeve (4) on the tensioning arm (2) and press the tensioning arm (2) down towards the front.

„ Attach the kraftband (2).

„ Remove the manual lever (3).

„ Pull the tensioning arm (2) upwards until the belt is slightly tensioned.

168

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Adjusting the air intake 10.3

BX002-018

„ Establish the plug connection (1) for the power supply.

„ Connect the lubrication lines (2).

„ Connect the covers (3) to one another.

Mounting the crop flow cover

2

1

10.3

BXG000-108

„ Attach the cover (1) and lock with the quarter turn fasteners (2).

Calibrating corn conditioner

„

Calibrate corn conditioner, see Page 405

Adjusting the air intake

1 1 2

2

1

BXG000-091

Ex factory, the setting sheet that regulates the air flow is mounted such that the air inlet is open.

To optimise the throwing behaviour, you can adjust the cross-section of the air inlet.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 169

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.4

Pressing round brushes onto the rotating screen

The larger the air intake, the more air can enter the crop flow and entrain more forage. The throwing behaviour can deteriorate with a low forage density.

The position of the cover sheet depends on the crop and the crop density in the field.

• A small air intake is more suitable for dry, light crops and low crop volumes.

• A large air intake is more suitable for moist, heavy crops and dense crop volumes.

When a silage additive unit is used, Krone recommends opening the air intake at the discharge accelerator in order to achieve optimal mixing of the crops with the silage additives.

Adjusting the air intake cover

„ Loosen the screws (1).

„ Pull the cover sheet (2) to the required position.

„ Tighten the screws (1).

Mounting the crop flow cover

2

1

10.4

BXG000-108

„ Attach the cover (1) and lock with the quarter turn fasteners (2).

Pressing round brushes onto the rotating screen

1 2

3

4

5

BX002-601

„ Loosen the counter nut (2).

„ Loosen the screw (3) until the bristles (5) of the round brushes (4) extend 2...3 mm through the rotating screen (1).

„ Tighten the counter nut (2).

170

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

10.5

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Adjusting the lifting unit hydraulics 10.5

Adjusting the lifting unit hydraulics

Switching lifting unit to maize mode or to operation with direct cut header

10.6

I II

1

BXG000-093

The three-way ball cock (1) for switching between maize and grass mode is located under the left side hood.

• Position I = maize mode, operation with direct cut header

• Position II = grass mode

To switch the hydraulic system to maize mode or to operation with direct cut header:

„ Bring the machine to a standstill.

„ Lower the header to the ground.

„ Move the three-way ball cock to position I

Mounting grain capture sheet

BX001-515

To install the grain capture sheet:

„ Loosely attach the bracket (2) to the grain capture sheet (1) using coach screw (3), disc, detent edged washer and locknut.

„ Insert the grain capture sheet (1) in such a way that the front folded edge of the grain capture sheet is above the trough at the front.

„ Attach the grain capture sheet to the intake unit using hexagon head screws, detent edged washers and discs (4).

„ Tighten the screw connection for bracket (2) and grain capture sheet (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 171

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.7

Mounting spout extension

10.7

Mounting spout extension

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury from suspended load

There is a danger for persons due to falling load.

„ Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.

„ Do not stay under the suspended load.

„ If work has to be performed under the load, securely support the load.

When you convert from grass mode to maize mode or vice versa, the length of the spout must be adjusted to the header. The forage harvester is delivered from the factory with an "8 row spout end piece" and straight spout flap. All available spout extensions (10 ‑ 14-row) are supplied with a pre-assembled conical spout flap. To optimise the crop flow, a straight spout flap is used for grass mode and a conical spout flap is used for maize mode. A conical spout flap is included in the scope of delivery of the EasyCollect 450-2, 600-2, 600-3 and the XCollect 600-3 for the eight-row spout extension.

NOTICE

The conical spout flap should not be used in grass mode. Due to the conical shape and the other flow properties of grass, in contrast to maize, there is an increased risk of a crop blockage in the spout.

The 12 and 14-row spout extensions can be hydraulically folded on account of their length.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

Converting spout flap

When using the "8-row spout end piece", the following must be converted:

EasyFlow:

• Straight spout flap

EasyCollect, XCollect and XDisc:

• Conical spout flap

Removing spout flap

172

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Mounting spout extension 10.7

BX001-637

ü The spout is located on the right side of the machine and has been fully lowered.

ü The spout flap has been completely opened.

ü The hydraulic circuits are depressurised.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Dismount the cotter pin (8) and the bolt (7) and take the hydraulic cylinder (6) out of the support/holder.

„ Unscrew the screws (3) from the guidance (5).

„ Detach the springs (4).

„ Unscrew the screws (2) and remove the flap (1).

Attaching spout flap

BX001-637

„ Insert the flap (1) and mount the screws (2).

„ Hook in the springs (4).

„ Mount the guidance (5) with the screws (3).

„ Insert the hydraulic cylinder (6) into the support/holder, mount the bolt (7) and the cotter pin (8).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 173

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.7

Mounting spout extension

Attaching spout extension 8 / 10 rows

1

3

4

1

5

2

8

7

2

1 2

6

8 7

BX001-632

ü The spout is located on the right side of the machine and has been fully lowered.

ü The spout flap has been completely opened.

ü The hydraulic circuits are depressurised.

ü The spout extension has been removed,

see Page 145

.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ NOTE! The "spout extension 8 rows" weighs approx. 80 kg. The "spout extension 10 rows" weighs approx. 112 kg.

Use a suitable load handling attachment to pick up the preassembled spout extension (1) .

„ Hook the spout extension (1) into the holders (3) of the spout basic (2), ensuring that the lateral wear plates (7) of the spout basic (2) are in front of the wear plates (8) of the spout extension (1) to prevent a stacking edge.

„ Mount the screws (4, 6).

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (5) to the hydraulic lines.

174

BX001-633

„ Attach the plug connection (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Mounting spout extension 10.7

„ Mount the cover (3) and mount the nut (2).

„ Adjust the impact damage protection system of the spout,

see Page 176 .

„ Select on the terminal that a spout extension is mounted,

see Page 412

.

Attaching spout extension 12 / 14 rows

3

1 2

4

6

5

1 5

8

7

1 5

8 7

BX002-753

ü The spout is located on the right side of the machine and has been fully lowered.

ü The spout flap has been completely opened.

ü The hydraulic circuits are depressurised.

ü The spout extension has been removed,

see Page 145

.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ NOTE! The "spout extension 12 rows" weighs approx. 165 kg. The "spout extension

14 rows" weighs approx. 180 kg. Use a suitable load handling attachment to pick up the pre-assembled spout extension (1).

„ Hook the spout extension (1) into the holders (3) of the spout basic (5), ensuring that the lateral wear plates (7) of the spout basic (5) are in front of the wear plates (8) of the spout extension (1) to prevent a stacking edge.

„ Mount the screws (2, 6).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 175

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.7

Mounting spout extension

BX001-633

„ Attach the plug connection (1).

„ Mount the cover (3) and mount the nut (2).

BX001-636

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (4) to the hydraulic lines.

„ Adjust the impact damage protection system of the spout,

see Page 176 .

„ Select on the terminal that a spout extension is mounted,

see Page 412

.

Setting the start-up safety mechanism of spout

176

BX001-635

The start-up safety mechanism must be set via compression spring (6), matching the mounted spout extension. This prevents that the forces on the spout become too great if the start-up safety mechanism triggers.

The following table lists the setting values for the prestressing dimension X of the compression spring (6) depending on spout extension:

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

10.8

Commissioning – Maize mode

Mounting camera into maize mode position (for "auto-loading system" version)

10

10.8

Spout extension

8 rows extension

10 rows extension

12 rows extension

14 rows extension

Prestressing dimension X

124 mm

122 mm

120 mm

118 mm

Setting the prestressing dimension of the compression spring (6):

„ Loosen the counter nut (1).

„ Turn the nut (2) until the required prestressing dimension X is set. Measure the prestressing dimension X from upper side of the pressure sleeve (7) to holding sheet of the spring hanger

(5).

„ Tighten the counter nut (1).

„ Check axial play of disc (4).

ð The disc (4) does not have any axial play and cannot be turned.

„ Set the axial play of the disc via the hexagon head screw (3) to 0-1 mm.

Mounting camera into maize mode position (for "auto-loading system" version)

NOTICE

If there are no hole pattern or screw points for mounting the camera onto the spout, see instructions for accessories kit B386 "Auto-loading system" (150 001 104_04).

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

Spout end piece 8/10 rows

2

1

1

3

BX002-392

„ Unscrew the screws (1) from the spout holder (2).

„ Lift the spout holder (2) until the lower hole pattern (3) of the inner tube is in alignment with the hole pattern in the outer tube.

„ Mount and tighten the screws (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 177

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.8

Mounting camera into maize mode position (for "auto-loading system" version)

2

4

1

3 5

BX002-061

„ If the camera is mounted in grass mode position, dismount the camera,

see Page 179 .

„ Mount the camera (1) in the illustrated position using the screws (4).

„ Set the camera (1) to 0° using the inclination scale (5).

„ Connect the camera cable (3), lay it in the cable duct (2) and secure it with cable ties.

„

Calibrate the spout, see Page 412 .

Spout end piece 12/14 rows

2

4

1

3

5

BX002-062

„ If the spout holder is in the upper position, lower the spout holder,

see Page 148

.

„ If the camera is mounted in grass mode position, dismount the camera,

see Page 179 .

„ Mount the camera (1) in the illustrated position using the screws (4).

„ Set the camera (1) to 0° using the inclination scale (5).

„ Connect the camera cable (3), lay it in the cable duct (2) and secure it with cable ties.

„

Calibrate the spout, see Page 412 .

178

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

10.9

Commissioning – Maize mode

Dismounting camera when in grass mode position (for "auto-loading system" version)

10

10.9

Dismounting camera when in grass mode position (for "auto-loading system" version)

3

2

1

BX002-280

„ Disconnect the camera cable (2) from the camera (1).

„ Unscrew the screws (3) and remove the camera (1).

10.10

Attaching rear weight

INFO

After the rear weight has been attached, the roller guides for supporting the header can no longer be lowered as deeply as prior to when the rear weight was attached.

For example, it is possible that the header that was not previously detached can no longer be attached.

„ Prior to removing the header, set the support jacks on the header to be somewhat longer than usual.

WARNING

Risk of injury from suspended load

There is a danger for persons due to falling load.

„ Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.

„ Do not stay under the suspended load.

„ If work has to be performed under the load, securely support the load.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movements when the machine is operating

If the rear weight and the front-mounted EasyCollect or XCollect header are not coordinated with each other, there is a risk that the machine may overturn when braking or when driving on slopes.

„ Do not drive the machine on the road or use it for work unless the rear weight, stipulated for the combination of machine and fitted header, has been mounted.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 179

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.10 Attaching rear weight

BX001-544

If a header is used, an additional rear weight must be applied to the machine behind the rear axle. The rear weight (3) consists of the basic weight (2), the end plate (1) and the intermediate plates.

The number of required intermediate plates depends on the machine type, the admissible front axle load and the header type.

ü The required rear weight has been determined

see Page 85 .

ü The required intermediate plates are mounted on the basic weight; see the supplement to the operating instructions B258 "Additional weight".

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

Dismounting tow coupling and rubber buffers

180

BX001-545

„ To remove the tow coupling (4), unscrew the 4 screws (5).

„ To remove the both rubber buffers (6), dismount 3 screws (7) each.

Mounting the rear weight

Screw fastening material for mounting, refer to parts list in the instructions for accessories kit

“Rear Weight”.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

ü The rear weight is pre-assembled with the corresponding number of intermediate plates and the end plate; see the supplement to the operating instructions B258 "Additional weight".

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Attaching rear weight 10.10

BX001-546

NOTE! Depending on the machine configuration, the maximum rear weight is approximately 2,900 kg.

„ Using a suitable hoist, position the rear weight (3) on the bumper of the machine such that the screws (10) and the threaded rods (11) can be mounted.

In this process, use

.

• the openings (8) for a forklift

• the suspension points (9) for a lifting beam

„ Ensure that the hoist is attached properly to the suspension points.

„ Mount the basic weight (2) with the 4 screws (10) and the discs on the bumper.

„ Mount the basic weight (2) with the 4 threaded rods (11) and the centring bushings on the bumper.

BX001-547

„ Mount the tow coupling with the nuts (12) on the threaded rods (11).

„

Check the tyre pressure, see Page 485

.

BX001-646

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 181

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.11 Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb")

Mount the scrapers (13) to prevent plants from getting between the rear weight and the bumper:

„ Loosely fasten the scrapers (13) with the screws (14) on the bumper.

„ Adjust the scrapers (13) via the oblong holes such that there is no gap. Tighten the screws (14).

10.11

Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb")

INFO

If the husk comb is operated under unauthorised operating conditions, the blades will wear out more quickly and must be replaced more frequently.

„ Use the husk comb for maize crops only.

„ If a VariLOC cutting length gearbox has been installed, do not use the husk comb if the

VariLOC cutting length gearbox is in VariLOC switching stage II (low drum speed).

The husk comb is a kind of recutting ground that ensures improved chop quality when used in extremely dry maize or ground ear maize.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

ü

The lifting unit is in the top position, see Page 261

ü The chopping drum is locked,

see Page 517

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

10.11.1

Removing the maintenance flap transfer shaft and wear plate

2

1

BXG000-083

ü

The machine is in a safe state, see Page 611

.

„

Open the side hood on the right, see Page 118 .

„ Loosen the quarter turn fasteners (2) and remove the cover (1).

„ Set down the cover (1) outside the machine.

182

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance flap transfer shaft

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb") 10.11

1

2

3

BXG000-085

„ Loosen the screws (1) and turn the clamping pieces (2) to the side.

„ Remove the maintenance flap (3) and put to one side.

Wear plate and deflector sheet

2

1

3

BX002-648

„ Turn back the setting screws (1).

„ Dismount the screw connections (2).

„ Remove the wear plate (3) and keep it with the mounting material for subsequent reinstallation.

1

BX002-650

„ Dismount the deflector sheet (1) and put it aside with the mounting material.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 183

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.11 Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb")

10.11.2

Mounting wear plate

2

3

1

4

BX002-649

Pos.

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

Quantity

6x

6x

6x

6x

Designation

Countersunk screw, square M10x30 ZLÜ

Detent edged washer SKM 10 ZLÜ

Disc 11 x 34 x 3 Zn8

Locknut M10 Zn8

„ Insert the wear plate (1) from below into the transfer shaft (2) until it hits the impact stops (4), and tighten it with the screw connection material (3) (A, B, C, D).

184

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

10.11.3

Mounting husk comb

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb") 10.11

3

2

1

4

5

4

BX002-074

Pos.

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

4x

4x

4x

Quantity

4x

4x

Designation

Hexagon head screw M10 x 35 Zn8

Detent edged washer SKM 10 ZLÜ

Disc 10.5 x 20 x 2 Zn8

Disc 10.5 x 25 x 4 Zn8

Disc 10.5 x 25 x 4 Zn8

„ Insert the husk comb (1) into the transfer shaft (2), equalise the distance between the husk comb (1) and the husk comb holding fixture (5) with distance sheets (4), and tighten it with the screw connection material (3) (A, B, C, D).

„ In this process, adjust the husk comb (1) in the lateral oblong holes such that there are no retaining edges against the direction of the crop flow.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 185

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.11 Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb")

10.11.4

Mounting blade support

4

2

3

1

LH = RH

2 4 2

BX002-075

Item

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

Quantity

3x

3x

6x

6x

Designation

Hexagon head screw M8 x 120 Zn8

Locknut M8 Zn8

Detent edged washer SKM 8 ZLÜ

Disc 8.4 x 24 x 2 Zn8

WARNING! Danger of cuts from sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Insert the blade support (1) into the husk comb (2) and tighten it with the screw connection material (3) (A, B, C, D). In this process, mount the wedges (4) at the two outside screw connections.

186

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Adjusting blade support

2

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb") 10.11

1

3

1

2

2

BX002-781

Increase the engagement depth of the blades:

„ Loosen the screw connections (2) and tap on the blade support from below until the required engagement depth of the blades is reached.

„ Tighten the screw connections (2).

Reduce the engagement depth of the blades:

„ Loosen the screw connections (2).

„ Remove the wedges (3) from both sides of the machine, drive them into the openings (1) until the required engagement depth of the blades has been reached.

„ Tighten the screw connections (2).

„ Pull the wedges (3) out of the openings (1) and mount them with the screw connections (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 187

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.11 Installing husk comb (version with "Husk comb")

10.11.5

Mounting maintenance flap transfer shaft and deflector sheet

Deflector sheet

1

188

BX002-076

„ Mount the deflector sheet (1).

Maintenance flap transfer shaft

1

2

3

BXG000-085

„ Insert the maintenance flap (3), turn the clamping pieces (2) in front of the maintenance flap and tighten the screws (1).

Crop flow cover

2

1

BXG000-083

„ Attach the cover (1) and lock with the quarter turn fasteners (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Mounting additional axle 10.12

10.12

Mounting additional axle

WARNING

Risk of injury from suspended load

There is a danger for persons due to falling load.

„ Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.

„ Do not stay under the suspended load.

„ If work has to be performed under the load, securely support the load.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

Mounting additional axle with one person

1

2

BX001-657

ü The tyre pressure in the wheels of the additional axle has been set to 10 bar.

ü The header has been completely lowered to the ground.

ü The rear axle is in the top position.

ü The hydraulic system is depressurised.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

ü The swivel device of the corn conditioner has been swivelled up.

„ Unscrew the screw (1) from the locating bolt of the front axle and remove the spacer tubes (2).

„ Mount the screw (1), note the installation position of the locking washer.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 189

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.12 Mounting additional axle

BX001-658

„ Unscrew the screw (1) from the channel support.

„ Mount the cable winch holding fixture (2) with the screw (1).

1

2

BX001-659

„ Loosen the lock bolt (1) by turning it and remove the cover (2).

190

BX001-667

„ Slide the additional axle by using a lifting cart under the machine until the retainer hooks of the additional axle are located under the locating bolt of the front axle.

„ Hook the deflection (1) centred above the additional axle into the swivel device of corn conditioner.

„ Hook the cable winch (2) into the deflection (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Mounting additional axle 10.12

BX001-668

„ Route the rope (1) above the deflection roll (2).

„ Hook the rope (1) into the front drawbar eye (3) of the additional axle (4). Pretension the rope (1) slightly.

BX001-663

„ Lift the additional axle (1) with the cable winch. Ensure that the retainer hooks of the additional axle engage on both sides into the locating bolts (2) of the front axle.

„ Mount the bolt (3) and secure it with the linch pins (4).

„ Remove the tension from the rope and remove it completely from the deflection.

BX001-669

„ Disengage the cable winch (1) from the deflection and hook it into the holding fixture (2).

„ Hook the rope (3) into the rear drawbar eye (4) and pretension it slightly.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 191

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.12 Mounting additional axle

5 6

2 1 1 2

4

3 3

BX001-665

„ Align the hydraulic cylinders (1) vertically and pull up the additional axle with the cable winch.

„ Mount the hydraulic cylinders (1) with the bolts (2), and secure them with the spring cotter pins (3).

„ Detach and wind up the rope.

„ Route the hydraulic hoses and the cable harness (4) such that they are not in contact with the drive of the corn conditioner (6) and the running wheel (5) of the additional axle.

BX001-666

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (1).

„ Establish the plug connection (2).

„ Detach the deflection from swivel device.

192

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Mounting additional axle 10.12

BX001-660

„ Detach the cable winch (1). The holder (2) can remain in the machine.

1

2

BX001-659

„ Insert cover (2) and secure by means of lock bolts (1).

„ In the "Drive functions, additional axle" menu, set the parameter KMC-1669 "Additional axle installed" to "On the harvester".

Mounting additional axle with two persons

1

2

BX001-657

ü The tyre pressure in the wheels of the additional axle has been set to 10 bar.

ü The header has been completely lowered to the ground.

ü The rear axle is in the top position.

ü The hydraulic system is depressurised.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

ü The swivel device of the corn conditioner has been swivelled up.

„ Unscrew the screw (1) from the locating bolt of the front axle and remove the spacer tubes (2).

„ Mount the screw (1), note the installation position of the locking washer.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 193

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.12 Mounting additional axle

BX001-658

„ Unscrew the screw (1) from the channel support.

„ Mount the cable winch holding fixture (2) with the screw (1).

1

2

BX001-659

„ Loosen the lock bolt (1) by turning it and remove the cover (2).

194

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Mounting additional axle 10.12

BX001-660

„ Hook the cable winch (1) into the holder (2).

BX001-661

„ Push the additional axle by means of lifting cart under the machine until the retainer hooks of the additional axle are under the locating bolts of the front axle.

„ Hook the deflection (1) centred above the additional axle into the swivel device of corn conditioner.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 195

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.12 Mounting additional axle

BX001-662

„ Route the rope (1) over the deflection rolls (2, 3).

„ Hook the rope (1) into the front drawbar eye (4) of the additional axle (5). Pretension the rope (1) slightly.

BX001-663

„ Lift the additional axle (1) with the cable winch. Ensure that the retainer hooks of the additional axle engage on both sides into the locating bolts (2) of the front axle.

„ Mount the bolt (3) and secure it with the linch pins (4).

196

BX001-664

„ Slacken the cable (1) and completely remove it from the deflection.

„ Hook the cable (1) into the rear towing ring (2) and pretension slightly.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Maize mode 10

Mounting additional axle 10.12

5 6

2 1 1 2

4

3 3

BX001-665

„ Align the hydraulic cylinders (1) vertically and pull up the additional axle with the cable winch.

„ Attach the hydraulic cylinders (1) with the bolts (2) and secure with the spring cotter pins (3).

„ Detach and wind up the cable.

„ Install the hydraulic hoses and the cable harness (4) in such a way that they do not touch the drive of the corn conditioner (6) and the fan wheel (5) of the additional axle.

BX001-666

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (1).

„ Establish the plug connection (2).

„ Detach the deflection from swivel device.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 197

10 Commissioning – Maize mode

10.12 Mounting additional axle

BX001-660

„ Detach the cable winch (1). The holder (2) can remain in the machine.

1

2

BX001-659

„ Insert cover (2) and secure by means of lock bolts (1).

„ In the "Drive functions, additional axle" menu, set the parameter KMC-1669 "Additional axle installed" to "On the harvester".

198

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

11

Commissioning – Grass/maize mode for the transition period

11

Commissioning – Grass/maize mode for the transition period

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

This chapter describes the conversion for grass mode and maize mode during the transition period.

Grass mode can be operated with the installed corn conditioner only during the transition period and for a maximum of 3 days.

Grass and maize mode for the transition period (maximum 3 days)

Prerequisites for grass mode:

ü

The corn conditioner is in the parking position and is secured with the bolt, see Page 201 .

ü The grass channel has been installed,

see Page 141

.

ü The husk comb has been removed or the blades of the husk comb have been retracted

(version with "Husk comb"), see Page 186 .

ü The air intake is adjusted,

see Page 142 .

ü

The hydraulic system is set to grass mode, see Page 143

.

ü

The grain capture sheet has been removed, see Page 144 .

ü The EasyFlow header has been fitted,

see Page 203

.

ü The season setting on the terminal has been set to grass mode,

see Page 428

.

ü The lifting unit has been calibrated,

see Page 398

.

Prerequisites for maize mode:

ü

The grass channel has been removed, see Page 164 .

ü

The corn conditioner has been installed, see Page 165 .

ü The air intake is adjusted,

see Page 169 .

ü The hydraulic system has been set to maize mode,

see Page 171

.

ü

The grain capture sheet has been attached, see Page 171 .

ü

The EasyCollect header, see Page 221 or the XCollect header,

see Page 211

has been mounted.

ü The season setting on the terminal has been adjusted to maize mode,

see Page 428

.

ü The lifting unit has been calibrated,

see Page 398

.

Access to the corn conditioner/grass channel

The corn conditioner or the grass channel is accessed from the right side of the machine, behind the side hood on the right.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 199

11 Commissioning – Grass/maize mode for the transition period

Prerequisites for installation and removal

• The rear axle has been completely raised using the keypad.

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

• The side hood on the right is open.

Dismounting the crop flow cover

2

1

BXG000-108

„ To remove the cover (1), unlock the quarter turn fasteners (2) with suitable tools.

Set down the cover (1) outside the machine.

200

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Grass/maize mode for the transition period

11

Moving corn conditioner into the parking position for the transition period

1 2 3 4

7

6 5

BX002-080

„ Remove the corn conditioner (5) until it comes into contact with the guidance of the roller chains in the area (6).

„ Move the corn conditioner (5) further until it can be seen in the borehole (3) of one of the oblong holes in the gear rim (4).

„ Reinsert the bolt (2) into the borehole (3) on both sides of the machine.

„ Lower the corn conditioner (5) until the bolt (2) is positioned on the gear rim (4). In doing so, ensure that the roller chains (7) are not under tension.

„

Mount the grass channel (1), see Page 141 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 201

11 Commissioning – Grass/maize mode for the transition period

Moving the corn conditioner from the parking position into the position for maize mode

1 2 3

4

202

5

BX002-081

„

Remove the grass channel (1), see Page 164 .

„

Using the crank handle or the "VariQuick electrical" version via operating unit, see

Page 303

, move the corn conditioner (5) upwards until the bolt (2) can be pulled out of the borehole (3).

„ Reinsert the bolt (2) into the position (4).

„ Install the corn conditioner (5),

see Page 165

.

„ Move the grass channel (1) into the parking position for the transition period.

Moving the grass channel into the parking position for the transition period

2

1

3

BX002-115

„ Remove the screws (2) from the bottom sheet (3) of the maintenance area.

„ Using both screws (2), mount the grass channel (1) on the bottom sheet (3) of the maintenance area.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

12

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow 12

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the header and moving components!

There is an increased risk of injury when attaching and removing headers to or from the machine.

„ Switch off the forage harvester engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

„ Wait until all machine parts have come to a standstill.

„ Ensure that there is nobody between the forage harvester and header.

„ Ensure that nobody reaches into the clearance between the header and machine.

„ Before working under or on the raised header, support the header securely.

„ While the header is being swivelled from the transport into the working position and vice versa, there must be nobody in the swivel range.

WARNING

Risk of injury or machine damage due to incorrectly connected, confused or improperly installed connection lines

Incorrectly connected or improperly laid connection lines of header and trailer can break or be damaged. This can cause severe accidents. Confused connection lines can inadvertently trigger functions that can also cause severe accidents.

„ Correctly connect and secure hoses and cables.

„ Lay the hoses, cables and ropes such that they do not rub, are not stretched, pinched or in contact with other components (e.g. tyres), especially when turning corners.

„ Couple and connect the hoses and cables to the designated connections as described in the operating instructions.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 203

12 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow

12.1

Mounting EasyFlow

NOTICE

Damage to the machine by turning the quick connector without attached header

If the quick connector is driven without the header attached, the machine may be damaged, as the clutch disc of the quick connector is not controlled.

„ Ensure that the quick connector is not driven unless a header has been attached.

„ If the intake is to be run without a header for maintenance purposes, remove the universal shaft from the forage harvester beforehand.

Only those headers may be attached which have been type tested by the manufacturer and approved for use,

see Page 88

.

When operating the forage harvester with a header, read and follow the operating instructions supplied with the header before using it.

Prerequisites for attaching and removing a header:

ü

The machine has been safely parked, see Page 27

.

ü There must be adequate room to manoeuvre the forage harvester.

ü All prerequisites for grass mode / operation with the direct cut header

see Page 136

or maize mode

see Page 163

are met.

12.1

12.1.1

Mounting EasyFlow

Preparing the intake

1

3

BX001-522

2

To prepare the forage harvester for attachment of the header:

„ Lower the intake (1) of the forage harvester all the way.

„ Align the pendulum tube (2) horizontally on the intake.

Version with "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft":

„ Remove the locking pins (3).

204

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow 12

Mounting EasyFlow 12.1

Prepare quick-coupler (for "Hydraulic comfortable header locking with quickcoupler" version)

1 2

12.1.2

BX001-523

To prepare the coupling for the attachment of the header:

„ Clean the clutch disc (1) on the header.

„ Clean the coupling journal (2) on the machine.

Connecting EasyFlow

For "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version

2

3

1

4

BX001-524

ü The header has been prepared for attachment, see operating instructions for the header.

ü

The intake has been prepared for attachment, see Page 204 .

WARNING! Crush hazard due to moving machine parts! Ensure that there is nobody between the machine and the header.

„ Drive the machine up to the header until the roll guides (1) are under the pendulum crossbar

(2).

„ Slowly raise the lifting unit and ensure that the pendulum crossbar (2) is correctly and completely supported by the roll guides (1).

During the lifting process the centring triangles (3) run into the locking sheets (4).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 205

12 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow

12.1

Mounting EasyFlow

1 2

6

7

4

5

3

BX001-862

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Check whether the centring triangles (1) are on the contour (5) of the locking sheets (2) and whether the pendulum crossbar (7) is completely in the grooves of the roller guides (6).

„ Fit the locking pins (3) and secure them with a screw connection (4) each.

„ Slide the universal shaft out of the holder on the forage harvester and onto the drive journal of the header until the slider pin engages.

„ Secure the universal shaft guard on the forage harvester against turning with the supporting chain.

For "Hydraulic comfortable header locking with quick-coupler" version

2

3

1

4

BX001-524

ü The header has been prepared for attachment, see operating instructions for the header.

ü

The intake has been prepared for attachment, see Page 204 .

Crush hazard due to moving machine parts! Ensure that there is nobody between the machine and the header.

„ Drive the machine up to the header until the roll guides (1) are under the pendulum crossbar

(2).

„

Unlock the header locking via the additional keypad, see Page 112 .

„ Slowly raise the lifting unit and ensure that the pendulum crossbar (2) is correctly and completely supported by the roll guides (1).

During the lifting process the centring triangles (3) run into the locking sheets (4).

206

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1 2

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow 12

Mounting EasyFlow 12.1

4

5

12.1.3

3

BX001-525

„ Release the "Open header locking" key.

ð Lock the locking pins (3).

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Check whether the centring triangles (1) are positioned on the locking sheets (2), the locking pin (3) is locked and the roll guides (4) are positioned on the pendulum crossbar (5).

If not:

„ The locking sheets of the header must be set, see operating instructions for the header

– initial start-up "Setting locking sheets".

„ Note the setting of the clutch disc on the header, see operating instructions for the header – initial start-up "Aligning clutch disc".

Connecting hydraulic hoses

WARNING

Risk of injury from unexpected movements of the header

If the hydraulic hoses are interchanged when connecting them, the header will not function correctly.

„ Identify hydraulic connections (hose markings).

„ Check that the hose connections are fitted correctly.

1

2

3

BX001-528

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (1) to the corresponding plug-in connectors on the grass header. Connect the hydraulic hose I to the plug-in connector I, etc.

„ Fix the plug X 139.2 (2) in the support (3) on the grass header.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 207

12 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow

12.2

Removing EasyFlow

12.1.4

Moving parking jacks on right/left into transport position

3

12.2

3

4

5

4

BX001-529

„ On both sides swivel the socket pin (3) of the support jacks (4) 180° upwards and pull it out.

„ Push the support jacks (4) upwards and secure them in the borehole (5) with the socket pin

(3). Lock the socket pins (3) by turning them 180° downwards

„ Fold in the support wheels.

Removing EasyFlow

WARNING

Risk of injury from movement of the header

If people are in the area of the header when it is being raised or lowered and folded in or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the header or the lifting unit.

„ When the header is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the header or the lifting unit.

3 3

4

4

BX001-530

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ On both sides swivel the socket pins (3) of the support jacks (4) 180° upwards and pull them out.

„ Pull out the support jacks (4) and lock with the socket pin (3) in the fifth hole from the bottom by turning it 180° downwards.

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Fold out the support wheels and lower the grass header onto the ground.

208

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow 12

Removing EasyFlow 12.2

6 1 5

3

2

4

BX001-531

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 164 .

„ Loosen the screw (4) and open the lock (5) of the hose support.

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) from the plug-in connectors and place in the hose support (2) on the intake of the forage harvester.

„ Disconnect the plug connection (3) from the machine and place with attached protective cap

(6) in the hose support (2).

„ Close the lock (5) of the hose support and tighten the screw (4).

For "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version

1 2

6

7

4

5

3

BX001-862

„ Press the slider pin of the universal shaft and remove the universal shaft from the drive journal of the header.

„ Place the universal shaft in the support/holder on the forage harvester.

„ Dismount the screw connection (4) and the locking pins (3).

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Lower the lifting unit of the forage harvester until the roll guides (6) are not in contact with the pendulum crossbar (7).

„ Move the forage harvester back.

For version with “Hydraulic comfort header locking with quick coupler”

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 209

12 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyFlow

12.3

Putting Down EasyFlow

12.3

BX001-532

„ Start diesel engine.

„ Unlock the locking pins (1) via additional keypad.

„ Lower the lifting unit of the forage harvester so that the roll guides (2) cannot collide with the mounting chute (3).

„ Move the forage harvester back.

Putting Down EasyFlow

3 1

2 2

BX001-524

Set the EasyFlow (1) down, with support jacks (2) extended, on a solid and level surface and in a dry and clean place.

„ To bring the support jacks into working position: See the operating instructions for the header, chapter Operation – Dismantling the machine "Bring right/left support jacks into working position".

„

Park the machine safely, see Page 27 .

210

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

13

Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect 13

Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the header and moving components!

There is an increased risk of injury when attaching and removing headers to or from the machine.

„ Switch off the forage harvester engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

„ Wait until all machine parts have come to a standstill.

„ Ensure that there is nobody between the forage harvester and header.

„ Ensure that nobody reaches into the clearance between the header and machine.

„ Before working under or on the raised header, support the header securely.

„ While the header is being swivelled from the transport into the working position and vice versa, there must be nobody in the swivel range.

WARNING

Risk of injury or machine damage due to incorrectly connected, confused or improperly installed connection lines

Incorrectly connected or improperly laid connection lines of header and trailer can break or be damaged. This can cause severe accidents. Confused connection lines can inadvertently trigger functions that can also cause severe accidents.

„ Correctly connect and secure hoses and cables.

„ Lay the hoses, cables and ropes such that they do not rub, are not stretched, pinched or in contact with other components (e.g. tyres), especially when turning corners.

„ Couple and connect the hoses and cables to the designated connections as described in the operating instructions.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 211

13 Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect

13.1

Attaching XCollect

NOTICE

Damage to the machine by turning the quick connector without attached header

If the quick connector is driven without the header attached, the machine may be damaged, as the clutch disc of the quick connector is not controlled.

„ Ensure that the quick connector is not driven unless a header has been attached.

„ If the intake is to be run without a header for maintenance purposes, remove the universal shaft from the forage harvester beforehand.

Only those headers may be attached which have been type tested by the manufacturer and approved for use,

see Page 88

.

When operating the forage harvester with a header, read and follow the operating instructions supplied with the header before using it.

Prerequisites for attaching and removing a header:

ü

The machine has been safely parked, see Page 27

.

ü There must be adequate room to manoeuvre the forage harvester.

ü All prerequisites for grass mode / operation with the direct cut header

see Page 136

or maize mode

see Page 163

are met.

13.1

13.1.1

Attaching XCollect

Preparing the intake

1

3

BX001-522

2

To prepare the forage harvester for attachment of the header:

„ Lower the intake (1) of the forage harvester all the way.

„ Align the pendulum tube (2) horizontally on the intake.

Version with "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft":

„ Remove the locking pins (3).

212

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect 13

Attaching XCollect 13.1

Prepare quick-coupler (for "Hydraulic comfortable header locking with quickcoupler" version)

13.1.2

BX001-693

To prepare the coupling for the attachment of the header:

„ Clean the clutch disc (1) on the header.

„ Clean the coupling journal (2) on the machine.

Connecting XCollect

For "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version

INFO

The accessories kit B490 "Additional universal shaft" is required so that an XCollect header can be used with a BX201 or BX404 forage harvester with the "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version.

2

3

1 4

BX002-104

ü The header has been prepared for attachment, see operating instructions for the header.

ü

The intake has been prepared for attachment, see Page 212 .

WARNING! Crush hazard due to moving machine parts! Ensure that there is nobody between the machine and the header.

„ Drive the machine up to the header until the roll guides (1) are under the pendulum crossbar

(2).

„ Slowly raise the lifting unit and ensure that the pendulum crossbar (2) is correctly and completely supported by the roll guides (1).

During the lifting process the centring triangles (3) run into the locking sheets (4).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 213

13 Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect

13.1

Attaching XCollect

1 2

6

7

5

4

3

BX002-105

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Check whether the centring triangles (1) are on the contour (5) of the locking sheets (2) and whether the pendulum crossbar (7) is completely in the grooves of the roller guides (6).

„ Fit the locking pins (3) and secure them with a screw connection (4) each.

„ Slide the universal shaft out of the holder on the forage harvester and onto the drive journal of the header until the slider pin engages.

„ Secure the universal shaft guard on the forage harvester against turning with the supporting chain.

For "Hydraulic comfortable header locking with quick-coupler" version

2

3

1

4

BX002-104

ü The header has been prepared for attachment, see operating instructions for the header.

ü

The intake has been prepared for attachment, see Page 212 .

Crush hazard due to moving machine parts! Ensure that there is nobody between the machine and the header.

„ Drive the machine up to the header until the roll guides (1) are under the pendulum crossbar

(2).

„

Unlock the header locking via the additional keypad, see Page 112 .

„ Slowly raise the lifting unit and ensure that the pendulum crossbar (2) is correctly and completely supported by the roll guides (1).

During the lifting process the centring triangles (3) run into the locking sheets (4).

214

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1 2 3

Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect 13

Attaching XCollect 13.1

4 5

13.1.3

BX002-106

„ Release the "Open header locking" key.

ð Lock the locking pins (3).

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Check whether the centring triangles (1) are positioned on the locking sheets (2), the locking pin (3) is locked and the roll guides (4) are positioned on the pendulum crossbar (5).

If not:

„ The locking sheets of the header must be set, see operating instructions for the header

– initial start-up "Setting locking sheets".

„ Note the setting of the clutch disc on the header, see operating instructions for the header – initial start-up "Aligning clutch disc".

Connecting hydraulic hoses

WARNING

Risk of injury from unexpected movements of the header

If the hydraulic hoses are interchanged when connecting them, the header will not function correctly.

„ Identify hydraulic connections (hose markings).

„ Check that the hose connections are fitted correctly.

1

2

3

BX002-108

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (1) to the corresponding plug-in connections on the XCollect.

Connect the hydraulic hose I to the plug-in connector I, etc.

„ Establish the plug connection (2) for the lighting and the sensors with the socket (3) on the maize header.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 215

13 Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect

13.1

Attaching XCollect

INFO

The identification of plug-in connectors (I – IV) on the machine can also be found on the hydraulic hoses of forage harvester.

Version with "Integrated additional running gear" on the XCollect:

2

4

3

II 1

5

13.1.4

I

1

BV000-026

„ Ensure that the stop cock (1) is closed; to do this, turn the lever to position I.

„ Connect the hydraulic hose (2) to the connection (4) on the forage harvester.

„ Connect the hydraulic hose (3) to the connection (5) on the forage harvester.

„ Open the stop cock (1); to do this, turn the lever to position II.

Moving support jacks on right/left into transport position

Rear support jacks on the right/left:

3

1 2

3

2

BX002-109

„ Remove the spring cotter pin (3) and pull out the bolt (2).

„ Push in the support jack (1) and secure with the bolt (2) and the spring cotter pin (3).

216

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

13.1.5

Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect 13

Removing XCollect 13.2

Enabling additional axle on the terminal

KMC-1669 KMC-1669

1

2

13.2

EQ002-458

„ In the main menu -> Drive functions menu -> Additional axle menu -> set the parameter

"Additional axle installed" (1) to "On the header" (2).

The additional axle on the header is automatically activated.

„ In the main menu -> Drive functions menu -> Additional axle menu -> set the parameter

"Additional axle installed" (1) to "Yes" (2).

The additional axle on the header is automatically activated.

Removing XCollect

WARNING

Risk of injury from movement of the header

If people are in the area of the header when it is being raised or lowered and folded in or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the header or the lifting unit.

„ When the header is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the header or the lifting unit.

Moving parking jacks at rear right/left into support position

3

1

2

3

2

BX002-112

„ Remove the spring cotter pin (3) and pull out the bolt (2).

„ Push in the support jack (1) and secure with the bolt (2) and the spring cotter pin (3).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 217

13 Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect

13.2

Removing XCollect

1

3

3

2

6 1 5

4

BX002-383

ü The maize header has been folded in.

ü The lifting unit has been completely raised.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

„ Lower the lifting unit completely onto the ground.

„ Loosen the screw (4) and open the lock (5) of the hose support.

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) from the plug-in connectors and place in the hose support (2) on the intake of the forage harvester.

„ Disconnect the plug connection (3) and place with attached protective cap (6) in the hose support (2).

„ Close the lock (5) of the hose support and tighten the screw (4).

Version with "Integrated additional running gear" on the XCollect:

2

4

3

II 1

5

I

1

BV000-026

„ Close the stop cock. To do this, turn the lever to position I.

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hose (2) from the connection (4) on the forage harvester.

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hose (3) from the connection (5) on the forage harvester.

218

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect 13

Removing XCollect 13.2

Disconnecting header

For "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version

1 2

6

7

5

4

3

BX002-105

„ Press the slider pin of the universal shaft and remove the universal shaft from the drive journal of the header.

„ Place the universal shaft in the support/holder on the forage harvester.

„ Dismount the screw connection (4) and the locking pins (3).

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Lower the lifting unit of the forage harvester until the roll guides (6) are not in contact with the pendulum crossbar (7).

„ Move the forage harvester back.

For version with "Hydraulic comfort header locking with quick coupler"

1 2 3

4 5

BX002-106

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Unlock the locking pin (3) via the additional keypad.

„ Lower the lifting unit of the forage harvester until the roll guides (4) are not in contact with the pendulum crossbar (5).

„ Move the forage harvester back.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 219

13 Commissioning – Attaching and removing XCollect

13.3

Parking XCollect

13.3

Parking XCollect

1

BX002-113

„ Set the maize header down with rear support jacks extended (1) in a dry and clean place and on a solid and level surface.

220

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

14

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect 14

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the header and moving components!

There is an increased risk of injury when attaching and removing headers to or from the machine.

„ Switch off the forage harvester engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

„ Wait until all machine parts have come to a standstill.

„ Ensure that there is nobody between the forage harvester and header.

„ Ensure that nobody reaches into the clearance between the header and machine.

„ Before working under or on the raised header, support the header securely.

„ While the header is being swivelled from the transport into the working position and vice versa, there must be nobody in the swivel range.

WARNING

Risk of injury or machine damage due to incorrectly connected, confused or improperly installed connection lines

Incorrectly connected or improperly laid connection lines of header and trailer can break or be damaged. This can cause severe accidents. Confused connection lines can inadvertently trigger functions that can also cause severe accidents.

„ Correctly connect and secure hoses and cables.

„ Lay the hoses, cables and ropes such that they do not rub, are not stretched, pinched or in contact with other components (e.g. tyres), especially when turning corners.

„ Couple and connect the hoses and cables to the designated connections as described in the operating instructions.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 221

14 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect

14.1

Mounting EasyCollect

NOTICE

Damage to the machine by turning the quick connector without attached header

If the quick connector is driven without the header attached, the machine may be damaged, as the clutch disc of the quick connector is not controlled.

„ Ensure that the quick connector is not driven unless a header has been attached.

„ If the intake is to be run without a header for maintenance purposes, remove the universal shaft from the forage harvester beforehand.

Only those headers may be attached which have been type tested by the manufacturer and approved for use,

see Page 88

.

When operating the forage harvester with a header, read and follow the operating instructions supplied with the header before using it.

Prerequisites for attaching and removing a header:

ü

The machine has been safely parked, see Page 27

.

ü There must be adequate room to manoeuvre the forage harvester.

ü All prerequisites for grass mode / operation with the direct cut header

see Page 136

or maize mode

see Page 163

are met.

14.1

14.1.1

Mounting EasyCollect

Preparing the intake

1

3

BX001-522

2

To prepare the forage harvester for attachment of the header:

„ Lower the intake (1) of the forage harvester all the way.

„ Align the pendulum tube (2) horizontally on the intake.

Version with "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft":

„ Remove the locking pins (3).

222

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect 14

Mounting EasyCollect 14.1

Prepare quick-coupler (for "Hydraulic comfortable header locking with quickcoupler" version)

14.1.2

BX001-693

To prepare the coupling for the attachment of the header:

„ Clean the clutch disc (1) on the header.

„ Clean the coupling journal (2) on the machine.

Connecting EasyCollect

For "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version

BX001-535

ü The header has been prepared for attachment, see operating instructions for the header.

ü

The intake has been prepared for attachment, see Page 223 .

WARNING! Crush hazard due to moving machine parts! Ensure that there is nobody between the machine and the header.

„ Drive the machine up to the header until the roll guides (1) are under the pendulum crossbar

(2).

„ Slowly raise the lifting unit and ensure that the pendulum crossbar (2) is correctly and completely supported by the roll guides (1).

During the lifting process the centring triangles (3) run into the locking sheets (4).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 223

14 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect

14.1

Mounting EasyCollect

1 2

6

7

4

5 3

BX001-673

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Check whether the centring triangles (1) are on the contour (5) of the locking sheets (2) and whether the pendulum crossbar (7) is completely in the grooves of the roller guides (6).

„ Fit the locking pins (3) and secure them with a screw connection (4) each.

„ Slide the universal shaft out of the holder on the forage harvester and onto the drive journal of the header until the slider pin engages.

„ Secure the universal shaft guard on the forage harvester against turning with the supporting chain.

For "Hydraulic comfortable header locking with quick-coupler" version

224

BX001-535

ü The header has been prepared for attachment, see operating instructions for the header.

ü

The intake has been prepared for attachment, see Page 223 .

Crush hazard due to moving machine parts! Ensure that there is nobody between the machine and the header.

„ Drive the machine up to the header until the roll guides (1) are under the pendulum crossbar

(2).

„

Unlock the header locking via the additional keypad, see Page 112 .

„ Slowly raise the lifting unit and ensure that the pendulum crossbar (2) is correctly and completely supported by the roll guides (1).

During the lifting process the centring triangles (3) run into the locking sheets (4).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1 2 3

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect 14

Mounting EasyCollect 14.1

4 5

14.1.3

BX001-536

„ Release the "Open header locking" key.

ð Lock the locking pins (3).

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Check whether the centring triangles (1) are positioned on the locking sheets (2), the locking pin (3) is locked and the roll guides (4) are positioned on the pendulum crossbar (5).

If not:

„ The locking sheets of the header must be set, see operating instructions for the header

– initial start-up "Setting locking sheets".

„ Note the setting of the clutch disc on the header, see operating instructions for the header – initial start-up "Aligning clutch disc".

Connecting hydraulic hoses

WARNING

Risk of injury from unexpected movements of the header

If the hydraulic hoses are interchanged when connecting them, the header will not function correctly.

„ Identify hydraulic connections (hose markings).

„ Check that the hose connections are fitted correctly.

1

3

2

BX001-538

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (1) to the corresponding plug-in connections on the

EasyCollect. Connect the hydraulic hose I to the plug-in connector I, etc.

„ Establish the plug connection (2) for the lighting and the sensors with the socket (3) on the maize header.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 225

14 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect

14.1

Mounting EasyCollect

INFO

The identification of plug-in connectors (I – IV) on the machine can also be found on the hydraulic hoses of forage harvester.

14.1.4

Moving parking jacks on right/left into transport position

EasyCollect 450-2, 600-2, 750-2

2

5

6

2

3

1

2

4

4

1

2

BX001-736

Rear support jacks on the right/left

„ Remove the spring locking pins (2) and pull the rear support jacks (4) out of the guidance.

„ Push the rear support jacks (4) into the holders (5) of the lateral frames in such a way that no plant remnants can collect in the area (6) above the support jacks.

„ Secure the position of the rear support jacks (4) with the spring locking pins (2).

Front support jacks on the right/left

„ Remove the spring locking pins (2) and pull the front support jacks (1) out of the guidance.

„ Push the foot of the front support jacks onto the guide pins (3) in the holders on the lateral frames.

„ Secure the position of the front support jacks (1) with the spring locking pins (2).

EasyCollect 600-3, 750-3, 900-3

226

BX001-738

Rear support jacks on right/left

„ Remove the spring locking pins (2) and push in the rear support jacks (1).

„ Secure the position of the rear support jacks (1) with the spring locking pins (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

14.2

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect 14

Removing EasyCollect 14.2

Front support jacks on right/left

„ Remove the spring locking pins (2) and pull the front support jacks (3) out of the insert pockets.

„ Insert the front support jacks (3) into the insert pockets (4) on the main frame.

„ Secure the position of the front support jacks (1) with the spring locking pins (2).

Removing EasyCollect

WARNING

Risk of injury from movement of the header

If people are in the area of the header when it is being raised or lowered and folded in or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the header or the lifting unit.

„ When the header is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the header or the lifting unit.

Moving parking jacks on right/left into support position

EasyCollect 450-2, 600-2, 750-2

1

2

BX001-739

To ensure that the forage harvester can accommodate the maize header, the height of the roller guides on the forage harvester must be matched to the height of the pendulum crossbar on the maize header. For this purpose, the rear support jacks must be differently aligned depending on the tyre diameter.

• If the front axle tyres on the forage harvester are 34 inches or less, insert the spring locking pin into the upper hole pattern (1).

• If the front axle tyres on the forage harvester are 38 inches or more, insert the spring locking pin into the upper hole pattern (2).

5

2

2

3

1

2

4

4 2

1

BX001-735

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 227

14 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect

14.2

Removing EasyCollect

Rear support jacks on the right/left

„ Remove the spring locking pins (2) and pull the rear support jacks (4) out of the holders (5) on the lateral frame.

„ Push the rear support jacks (4) into the rear guidances on the lateral frames.

„ Secure the position of the rear support jacks (4) with the spring locking pins (2).

Front support jacks on the right/left

„ Remove the spring locking pins (2) and pull the front support jacks (1) from the guide pins

(3) and take out of the holders on the lateral frames.

„ Push the front support jacks (1) into the front guidances on the lateral frames.

„ Secure the position of the front support jacks (1) with the spring locking pins (2).

EasyCollect 600-3, 750-3, 900-3

2

2

5

1

1

4

3

2 3

BX001-737

Rear support jacks on the right/left

„ Remove the spring locking pins (2) and pull out the rear support jacks (1) .

„ Secure the position of the rear support jacks (1) with the spring locking pins.

Front support jacks on the right/left

„ Remove the front support jacks (3) from the insert pockets (4) and place them in the front holders.

„ Secure the position of the front support jacks (3) with the spring locking pins (2).

228

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

3

Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect 14

Removing EasyCollect 14.2

1 6 1 5

3

2

4

BX001-541

ü The maize header has been folded in.

ü The lifting unit has been completely raised.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

„ Fold out the maize header (only EasyCollect 450-2, 600-2, 750-2).

„ Lower the lifting unit completely onto the ground.

„ Loosen the screw (4) and open the lock (5) of the hose support.

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) from the plug-in connectors and place in the hose support (2) on the intake of the forage harvester.

„ Disconnect the plug connection (3) and place with attached protective cap (6) in the hose support (2).

„ Close the lock (5) of the hose support and tighten the screw (4).

For "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version

1 2

6

7

4

5 3

BX001-673

„ Press the slider pin of the universal shaft and remove the universal shaft from the drive journal of the header.

„ Place the universal shaft in the support/holder on the forage harvester.

„ Dismount the screw connection (4) and the locking pins (3).

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Lower the lifting unit of the forage harvester until the roll guides (6) are not in contact with the pendulum crossbar (7).

„ Move the forage harvester back.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 229

14 Start-up – Attaching and removing EasyCollect

14.3

Putting down EasyCollect

For version with "Hydraulic comfort header locking with quick coupler"

1 2 3

14.3

BX001-542

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Unlock the locking pin (1) via the additional keypad.

„ Lower the lifting unit of the forage harvester until the roll guides (2) are not in contact with the pendulum crossbar (3).

„ Move the forage harvester back.

Putting down EasyCollect

1

2

2

2

BX001-543

Set the EasyCollect (1) down, with support jacks (2) extended, on a solid and level surface and in a dry and clean place.

„ To bring the support jacks into working position: See the operating instructions for the header, chapter Operation – Dismantling the machine "Bring right/left support jacks into support position".

„

Park the machine safely, see Page 27 .

230

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc 15

15 Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the header and moving components!

There is an increased risk of injury when attaching and removing headers to or from the machine.

„ Switch off the forage harvester engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

„ Wait until all machine parts have come to a standstill.

„ Ensure that there is nobody between the forage harvester and header.

„ Ensure that nobody reaches into the clearance between the header and machine.

„ Before working under or on the raised header, support the header securely.

„ While the header is being swivelled from the transport into the working position and vice versa, there must be nobody in the swivel range.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine by turning the quick connector without attached header

If the quick connector is driven without the header attached, the machine may be damaged, as the clutch disc of the quick connector is not controlled.

„ Ensure that the quick connector is not driven unless a header has been attached.

„ If the intake is to be run without a header for maintenance purposes, remove the universal shaft from the forage harvester beforehand.

Only those headers may be attached which have been type tested by the manufacturer and approved for use,

see Page 88

.

When operating the forage harvester with a header, read and follow the operating instructions supplied with the header before using it.

Prerequisites for attaching and removing a header:

ü

The machine has been safely parked, see Page 27

.

ü There must be adequate room to manoeuvre the forage harvester.

ü All prerequisites for grass mode / operation with the direct cut header

see Page 136

or maize mode

see Page 163

are met.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 231

15 Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc

15.1

Mounting XDisc

15.1

Mounting XDisc

15.1.1

Preparing the intake

BX001-522

To prepare the forage harvester for attachment of the header:

„ Lower the intake (1) of the forage harvester all the way.

„ Align the pendulum tube (2) horizontally on the intake.

Version with "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft":

„ Remove the locking pins (3).

Prepare quick-coupler (for "Hydraulic comfortable header locking with quickcoupler" version)

15.1.2

BX001-648

To prepare the coupling for the attachment of the header:

„ Clean the clutch disc (1) on the header.

„ Clean the coupling journal (2) on the machine.

Connecting XDisc

For "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version

INFO

The retrofit kit "mechanical universal shaft coupling" (20 295 134 1) is required to enable the

XDisc to be connected to a forage harvester without a quick coupling.

232

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc 15

Mounting XDisc 15.1

BX001-649

ü The header has been prepared for attachment, see operating instructions for the header.

ü

The intake has been prepared for attachment, see Page 232 .

WARNING! Crush hazard due to moving machine parts! Ensure that there is nobody between the machine and the header.

„ Drive the machine up to the header until the roll guides (1) are under the pendulum crossbar

(2).

„ Slowly raise the lifting unit and ensure that the pendulum crossbar (2) is correctly and completely supported by the roll guides (1).

During the lifting process the centring triangles (3) run into the locking sheets (4).

1 2

6

7

3

4

5

BX001-708

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Check whether the centring triangles (1) are on the contour (5) of the locking sheets (2) and whether the pendulum crossbar (7) is completely in the grooves of the roller guides (6).

„ Fit the locking pins (3) and secure them with a screw connection (4) each.

„ Slide the universal shaft out of the holder on the forage harvester and onto the drive journal of the header until the slider pin engages.

„ Secure the universal shaft guard on the forage harvester against turning with the supporting chain.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 233

15 Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc

15.1

Mounting XDisc

For "Hydraulic comfortable header locking with quick-coupler" version

BX001-649

ü The header has been prepared for attachment, see operating instructions for the header.

ü

The intake has been prepared for attachment, see Page 232 .

Crush hazard due to moving machine parts! Ensure that there is nobody between the machine and the header.

„ Drive the machine up to the header until the roll guides (1) are under the pendulum crossbar

(2).

„

Unlock the header locking via the additional keypad, see Page 112 .

„ Slowly raise the lifting unit and ensure that the pendulum crossbar (2) is correctly and completely supported by the roll guides (1).

During the lifting process the centring triangles (3) run into the locking sheets (4).

234

BX001-650

„ Release the "Open header locking" key.

ð Lock the locking pins (3).

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Check whether the centring triangles (1) are positioned on the locking sheets (2), the locking pin (3) is locked and the roll guides (4) are positioned on the pendulum crossbar (5).

If not:

„ The locking sheets of the header must be set, see operating instructions for the header

– initial start-up "Setting locking sheets".

„ Note the setting of the clutch disc on the header, see operating instructions for the header – initial start-up "Aligning clutch disc".

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

15.1.3

Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc 15

Removing XDisc 15.2

Moving parking jacks on right/left into transport position

15.2

BX001-652

„ On both sides pull out the socket pin (3) of the parking jacks (4).

„ Push the parking jacks (4) upwards and secure them in the borehole (5) with the socket pin

(3).

Removing XDisc

WARNING

Risk of injury from movement of the header

If people are in the area of the header when it is being raised or lowered and folded in or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the header or the lifting unit.

„ When the header is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the header or the lifting unit.

BX001-653

ü The lifting unit is in the top position.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ On both sides pull out the socket pin (3) of the parking jacks (4).

„ Pull out the parking jacks (4) and secure with the socket pins (3) in one of the boreholes so that the XDisc can be set down.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 235

15 Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc

15.2

Removing XDisc

For "Mechanical header locking with universal shaft" version

1 2

6

7

3

4

5

BX001-708

„ Press the slider pin of the universal shaft and remove the universal shaft from the drive journal of the header.

„ Place the universal shaft in the support/holder on the forage harvester.

„ Dismount the screw connection (4) and the locking pins (3).

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Lower the lifting unit of the forage harvester until the roll guides (6) are not in contact with the pendulum crossbar (7).

„ Move the forage harvester back.

For version with “Hydraulic comfort header locking with quick coupler”

BX001-654

„ Start diesel engine.

„ Unlock the locking pin (1) via additional keypad.

„ Lower the lifting unit of the forage harvester so that the roll guides (2) cannot collide with the mounting chute (3).

„ Move the forage harvester back.

236

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

15.3

Putting down XDisc

Start-up – Attaching and removing XDisc 15

Putting down XDisc 15.3

BX001-655

„ With the support jacks (2) extended and secured, set the XDisc (1) down on solid and level ground and in a dry and clean place.

„ To move the parking jacks into the working position, see the operating instructions for the header, chapter Operation – Dismantling the machine "Moving right/left parking jacks into working position".

„

Set down the XDisc securely, see Page 27

.

If the XDisc is to be loaded onto the transport wagon:

„ Load the XDisc onto the transport wagon, see operating instructions for the transport wagon.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 237

16 Driving and Transport

16 Driving and Transport

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury when driving on public highways

Due to the large dimensions of the machine, the unusual driving behaviour and the option of riding on the outside of the machine while it is being driven, the risk of accidents for machine personnel and third parties is increased.

„ Swivel the header into the transport position.

„ Swivel the spout into the transport position.

„ When driving on public highways, observe the provisions of the Road Traffic Licensing

Regulations (lighting, identification).

„ Ensure that nobody is riding on the machine.

„ Always adapt the driving speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

„ When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to environmental conditions.

„ Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

238

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

16.1

16.1.1

Driving and Transport 16

Preparing the machine for road travel 16.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

ü Soiling and crop residue have been removed from the machine, in particular from the lighting and identification elements.

ü If a maize header is front-mounted: Mount the guards and the lighting on the header, see instructions for use for the header, and swivel the header with the lifting unit into the

transport position, see Page 240 or set down the header on a transport wagon, hitch the

transport wagon and swivel the intake into the transport position using the lifting unit, see

Page 242

.

ü If a grass header is front-mounted: Swivel the header into the transport position using the lifting unit,

see Page 240

.

ü If a direct cut header is front-mounted: Set down the direct cut header on the transport wagon, hitch the transport wagon and swivel the intake into the transport position using the lifting unit,

see Page 242

.

ü If no header is front-mounted: Swivel the intake into the transport position using the lifting

unit, see Page 242 .

ü Swivel spout into transport position,

see Page 242 .

ü Remove the wheel chocks from the wheels and place them in the supports,

see Page 255

.

ü For version with "Swivel seat adapter": The driver's seat has been aligned in straight-ahead position,

see Page 130

.

ü The area around the machine must be inspected,

see Page 100

and

see Page 134

.

ü No warning message is displayed on the terminal.

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Road mode" position,

see Page 109

.

ü If a trailer brake system is installed: The function of the trailer brake system has been checked.

Transport position

1

3 2

BXG000-069

For road travel, the spout (1) and the attached header (3) or the intake (2) (without an attached header) must be in transport position.

„

Bring the header (3) into the transport position, see Page 240 .

„ Bring the intake (2) into the transport position,

see Page 242

.

„

Bring the spout (1) into the transport position, see Page 242 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 239

16 Driving and Transport

16.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

16.1.2

Moving header to transport position

WARNING

Risk of injury from movement of the header

If people are in the area of the header when it is being raised or lowered and folded in or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the header or the lifting unit.

„ When the header is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the header or the lifting unit.

ü The driver's seat is occupied.

ü The diesel engine has been started.

ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.

ü There is adequate space for lifting and lowering.

Grass header

BX001-563

„ Press the "Manually raise lifting unit" (1) key until the dimension X=400-450 mm (distance from the lower edge of the header (2) to the ground) has been reached.

„ Move the crop press roller unit (3) into the lower position.

„ Completely fold in the guide wheels (4).

When driving on roads, active vibration damping operates continuously which is also active if the operator button has not been pressed after the diesel engine has been switched on.

Maize header

240

BX001-564

To ensure that the maize header can be folded in, the plant divider must be swivelled up and the pendulum tube horizontally aligned.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Driving and Transport 16

Preparing the machine for road travel 16.1

Swivelling up the plant divider (depending on the header used)

„ Press the "Swivel up plant divider" key (3) on the keypad until the plant divider (1) has been completely swivelled up.

Folding in the maize header

The pendulum tube is automatically aligned horizontally when the "Fold in maize header" key is pressed.

„ Hold down the "Fold in maize header" key (4) on the keypad until the side parts (5, 6) have been completely folded in.

„ Attach the left and right guards and the front guard, see operating instructions for the header, chapter Operation, "From working position to transport position".

INFO

If the pendulum tube is no longer horizontal during the folding-in process, an information message appears on the terminal and the folding-in process is interrupted.

To fold in the maize header when the pendulum tube is not horizontal:

„ Press the "Fold in maize header" key on the keypad again and hold down.

ð The maize header folds in.

BX001-566

To raise the header (3):

„ Press and hold down the "Manually raise lifting unit" key (1).

The header (3) is raised as long as the key is pressed.

When the maize header has been folded in, the lifting height is limited to 60% of the maximum lifting unit height.

To lower the header (3):

„ Press and hold down the "Manually lower lifting unit" key (2) on the control lever.

The header (3) is lowered as long as the key is pressed.

When driving on roads, active vibration damping operates continuously which is also active if the operator button has not been pressed after the diesel engine has been switched on.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 241

16 Driving and Transport

16.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

16.1.3

Moving intake into transport position

16.1.4

BX001-620

If the machine should be driven on roads without header, the lower edge of intake must be set to a height of X = 400 mm ±100 mm .

ü The driver's seat is occupied.

ü The diesel engine has been started.

ü The main mode switch is in the “Field mode” position.

ü There is adequate space for lifting and lowering.

ü There is nobody in the area of the intake.

„ Raise or lower the intake by using the “Manually raise lifting unit” and “Manually lower lifting unit” keys (1) until the dimension X = 400 mm ±100 mm from lower edge of intake to ground is reached.

„ Set the main mode switch to “road mode”.

Swivelling spout into transport position

WARNING

Crush hazard due to the moving spout

People, who are near the slewing ring of the spout when the spout is being swivelled, may be injured.

„ When swivelling the spout, ensure that there is nobody near the slewing ring.

WARNING

Risk of injury caused by deposited spout (with mounted spout extension)

With mounted spout extension (optional), the spout flap extends so far downwards when the spout has been deposited that road users are endangered during road travel.

„

For road travel, fold in the spout extension, see Page 287 .

ü The driver's seat is occupied

ü The diesel engine has been started

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Field mode" position

ü The main coupling is off

242

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Driving and Transport 16

Starting engine 16.2

16.1.5

BXG000-098

To swivel the spout into the transport position:

„ Press the "spout in transport position" key (1).

The spout (2) moves automatically into the transport position.

„ Visually check the exact parking position of the spout (2) on the support bearing (3).

If the spout (2) is not centred on the support bearing:

„

Use the manual control to move the spout into the correct position, see Page 287 .

Opening the stop cock additional running gear on the XCollect

1

II

16.2

I

BV000-029

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Open the stop cock (1) for road travel. To do this, move the lever to position II.

Starting engine

WARNING

Risk of poisoning from toxic exhaust gases

If the machine is operated in closed rooms without adequate ventilation, the pollutant load increases in the air.

Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms.

„ Vent the room sufficiently.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 243

16 Driving and Transport

16.2

Starting engine

WARNING

Impact and crushing hazard for people in the vicinity of the machine due to movement of the machine!

When the machine is put into motion, there is a risk for people in the vicinity of the machine of being overrun or crushed by the machine.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

„ Actuate the horn before starting the engine.

„ Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

WARNING

Risk of injury during operation

If the driver is not protected from the engine noise while working, his hearing will be permanently damaged.

„ Make sure that the doors and windows of the cabin are closed while the machine is used.

NOTICE

Damage to the diesel engine caused by load on cold engine

If the diesel engine, after starting, with a coolant temperature below approx. 50° C, is heavily loaded, the diesel engine may be damaged.

„ Load the diesel engine only slightly while the coolant temperature is below approx. 50° C.

INFO

The diesel engine may not run smoothly directly after it is started when outside temperatures are low. This behaviour is normal and will disappear as soon as the coolant has warmed up.

„ If the engine was shut down beforehand for longer than 30 days, take measures to start up and start the engine following shutdown,

see Page 469

.

1

2

3

BXG000-059

ü The Main Mode Switch (2) is in the "Neutral" position (3),

see Page 109

.

„ Press the main battery switch (1) to close the circuit,

see Page 256

.

Æ The main battery switch LED is lit.

244

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Driving and Transport 16

Starting engine 16.2

16.2.1

BMG000-005

„ Turn the ignition key (1) in the ignition lock clockwise to position "II".

Æ The "Charging control" warning lamp (2), the "Coolant temperature" warning lamp (3) and the "Engine oil pressure" warning lamp (4) light up. After approx. 2 s the "Coolant temperature" warning lamp (3) and the "Engine oil pressure" warning lamp (4) go out.

„ Turn the ignition key in the ignition lock to position "III".

When the engine starts:

„ Immediately release the ignition key.

Æ The ignition key automatically jumps to the operating position.

Æ Warning lamp "Charging control" (2) goes out.

„ Check the indicator and warning lamps (2, 3, 4).

„ Leave the engine to idle until the temperature display coolant rises.

If one or more of the indicator and warning lamps (2, 3, 4) light up:

„ Switch off the engine and eliminate the malfunction.

If the engine does not start within 30 s:

„ Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.

„ After a 1 minute delay repeat the starting process.

If the engine still does not start:

„ Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.

„ Rectify the cause of the poor starting behaviour, see applicable engine manufacturer operating instructions.

Observing indicator and warning lamps

BMG000-006

„ As long as the diesel engine is running, the indicator and warning lamps on the steering column must be observed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 245

16 Driving and Transport

16.3

Behaviour after the engine has stalled

Warning lamp "Charging control" (1):

The "Charging control" warning lamp lights up briefly after the diesel engine has been started and when the ignition key is turned to ignition stages I and II.

If the warning lamp "Charging control" is lit continuously while the diesel engine is running, the output voltage of the alternator is not adequate to charge the batteries.

„ Check the cables and connections on the alternator and the batteries, alternator

see

Page 580

, batteries see Page 576 .

„ Check the V-belt on the alternator,

see Page 580

.

"Coolant temperature" warning lamp (2):

If the "Coolant temperature" warning lamp lights up, cooling of the engine is no longer ensured and the engine may be damaged.

„ Immediately switch off the engine.

„ Check coolant level and top up if required.

„ Check the condition and attachment of coolant hoses and air intake hoses.

"Engine oil pressure" warning lamp (3)

If the "Engine oil pressure" warning lamp lights up, lubrication of the diesel engine is no longer ensured and the engine may be damaged.

„ Immediately switch off the engine.

„ Check the engine oil level.

16.3

Behaviour after the engine has stalled

NOTICE

Heat accumulation after the engine has stalled

If a warm engine stalls, the heat accumulation, caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the engine.

„ Immediately start again when a warm engine is stalled.

„ Before finally switching engine off, allow it to run at idle speed for at least 3 minutes.

16.4

Starting up machine

WARNING

Danger to life by movements of the machine

People are at risk from the large movements of the machine, unusual driving behaviour and the option of riding on the outside of the machine while it is being driven.

„ Make sure that there is no second person on the machine when travelling.

„ Adapt driving speed of machine on road and field to the given conditions.

„ When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to environmental conditions.

„ Make sure when driving around curves that the machine does not swing out.

246

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Driving and Transport 16

Starting up machine 16.4

16.4.1

Setting the acceleration behaviour

1

16.4.2

2

IV

III

I

II

IV

III

II

I

3

3

TC km/h

12.0

BXG000-016

Four different acceleration stages can be selected, even while driving, with the "Acceleration stage" switch (2) attached to the control lever (1).

If the control lever (1) is actuated constantly in one direction and at a constant engine speed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration stage

IV.

„ Switch to the required acceleration stage using the "Acceleration stage" switch (2).

Æ The selected acceleration stage (3) is displayed on the working screen of the terminal.

Notes on driving the machine

BX001-553

„ Adapt driving behaviour to the modified handling of the machine due to rear steering.

„ Take into consideration the different ways the machine handles in acceleration stages 1 - 4.

„ Respond to the different handling of the machine in road mode and field mode

„ If an error message is indicated on the terminal, immediately stop and eliminate the error. If this is not possible, inform a KRONE service partner.

„ Adapt driving behaviour to the particular terrain and ground conditions,

see Page 281

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 247

16 Driving and Transport

16.4

Starting up machine

Emergency steering forces

The steering also operates when the engine has stopped. However, considerably more force must be applied.

16.4.3

Driving forwards and stopping

BM000-018

Driving forwards from standstill:

„ Set the main mode switch to "road mode" or "field mode" position,

see Page 109

.

„

Release the parking brake, see Page 253 .

„ Press and hold down the activation key for traction drive (2).

„ Push the control lever (1) forwards.

Æ The machine moves forwards and accelerates.

„ Release the control lever (1) to keep the speed at a constant level.

Æ The control lever automatically returns to the central position (0).

„ To slow down the machine, pull the control lever (1) backwards while driving or depress the brake pedal.

Æ The machine is decelerated until it stops.

16.4.3.1

Cruise control

The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards.

When cruise control is activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the speed saved for operation with the cruise control.

248

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Saving speed for operation with cruise control

Driving and Transport 16

Starting up machine 16.4

1 2

3

3

TC km/h

12.0

BXG000-017

„ Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.

„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2) and at the same time, move the control lever (1) to the right and back to the central position.

Æ The current driving speed is saved.

The saved speed (3) is displayed on the working screen of the terminal display.

The speed is saved for the operating mode the machine is currently in. One speed each can be saved for road travel and field mode.

If the operating mode (“Road mode”/”Field mode”) is changed, the display switches to the value saved for the corresponding operating mode (road or field speed).

Activating cruise control

BX001-555

„ While driving, actuate the control lever (1) to the right.

Æ The machine is started with the set speed.

The icon with the value of the set speed appears on the display.

Deactivating cruise control

Cruise control is deactivated by overriding the control lever, actuating the service brake or switching off the traction drive.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 249

16 Driving and Transport

16.5

Stopping the machine

16.4.4

Driving backward and stopping

16.5

BM000-018

Reverse from standstill:

„

Set the main mode switch to “road mode” or “field mode” position, see Page 109 .

„

Release the parking brake, see Page 253 .

„ Press and hold down the activation key for traction drive (2).

„ Pull control lever (1) to the rear.

Æ The machine moves backward and accelerates.

„ Release the control lever (1) to keep the speed at constant level.

Æ The control lever automatically returns to central position (0).

„ To decelerate the machine, push control lever (1) to the front while driving.

Æ The machine is decelerated until it is at standstill.

NOTICE

An acoustic warning signal sounds when reversing.

Stopping the machine

The machine can be stopped with both control lever and service brake.

250

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

16.5.1

Stopping machine by using control lever

Stopping from forward travel

Driving and Transport 16

Stopping the machine 16.5

BX001-556

„ Pull the control lever (1) backwards while driving.

Æ The machine decelerates until it stops.

Stopping from reverse travel

BX001-557

„ Push the control lever (1) forwards while driving.

Æ The machine decelerates until it stops.

Quickly braking the machine

BX001-558

„ To brake the machine quickly, move the control lever (1) to the left while driving.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 251

16 Driving and Transport

16.5

Stopping the machine

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)

When fast reversing during forward travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates backwards to 70% of the previous driving speed.

When fast reversing during reverse travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates forwards to 100% of the previous driving speed.

Fast reversing is possible in field mode only.

16.5.2

BMG000-007

ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.

To activate fast reversing:

„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2), move the control lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.

Stopping machine with the service brake

WARNING

Risk of injury due to defective service brake

If the service brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in time and people and material assets are at risk.

„ Before starting the machine, always check service brake and ensure its functionality.

Braking the machine slightly

„ Depress the foot brake slightly.

Æ When the brake pedal is released, the machine continues moving at the reduced driving speed.

Braking the machine forcefully (hazard braking)

„ Depress the service brake very forcefully.

Æ The machine is braked to an immediate standstill.

252

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

16.6

Driving and Transport 16

Couple brake pedals (for "trailer brake system" version) 16.6

Couple brake pedals (for "trailer brake system" version)

WARNING

Danger of death due to extended braking distance

If the machine features a trailer brake system and if both brake pedals of the service brake are not interconnected for road travel, the braking distance will be extended. If only one of the two service brakes is actuated, the individual braking effect of the service brake machine and service brake trailer will not be adequate to stop the machine/trailer unit in good time. As a result, people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Before road travel, ensure that both brake pedals are interconnected.

16.7

BX001-879

Before starting road travel, connect the brake pedal of the foot brake (3) to the brake pedal of the trailer brake (2):

„ Turn the connecting bolt (1) upwards.

„ Push in the connecting bolt (1) as far as it will go.

„ Engage the connecting bolt (1) by turning it downwards.

Applying parking brake

WARNING

Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away

If the unsecured machine starts moving, there is a risk of people being struck or run over.

„ When the “Parking brake” key has been pressed, check the status of the parking brake on the terminal or via the LED in the “Parking brake” key.

INFO

If the "Parking brake" key is pressed while driving, the traction drive is braked and, when the machine has stopped, the parking brake is applied.

The parking brake is automatically released or applied under certain operating conditions and can be manually actuated by pressing the "Parking brake" key (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 253

16 Driving and Transport

16.7

Applying parking brake

254

BXG000-013

To apply the parking brake manually via the keypad:

„ Press the "Parking brake" key (1).

To release the parking brake manually via the keypad:

„ When the diesel engine is running, depress the brake pedal.

„ Press the "Parking brake" key (1).

The status of the parking brake is indicated by the LED in the "Parking brake" key:

„ The parking brake has been applied when the LED is lit.

„ The parking brake has been released when the LED is not lit.

3

3

P

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-020

The status of the parking brake is also displayed on the working screen of the terminal:

• The parking brake has been applied when the "Parking brake"  indicator lamp appears on the terminal.

• The parking brake has been released when the "Parking brake" indicator lamp is not lit on the terminal.

Automatic actuation of the parking brake:

• The parking brake is automatically applied when the driver's seat is not occupied.

• The parking brake is automatically applied when the diesel engine is switched off.

• The parking brake is automatically released when the machine starts.

• The parking brake is automatically released when the brake pedal is depressed

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

16.8

Driving and Transport 16

Switching off the engine 16.8

Switching off the engine

NOTICE

Engine will be damaged by heat accumulation

If the engine is immediately switched off after operation under load, the heat accumulation, caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the engine.

„ Before switching off the engine, let it run at idle speed for at least 3 minutes.

„ Stop the machine,

see Page 250 .

„ To cool down the engine, leave the engine running for three minutes at a low idle speed.

16.9

BM000-029

„ Turn the ignition key (1) anti-clockwise to the "STOP" position.

„ Move the main mode switch into the "Neutral" position,

see Page 109

.

„

If the engine will be shut down for longer than 30 days, take measures to shut it down, see

Page 469

.

Fitting wheel chocks

1

2

BXG000-003

The wheel chocks (1) secure the machine against rolling away. 2 wheel chocks are affixed to the machine.

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Loosen the tension springs (2) and remove the wheel chocks (1).

„ Place the wheel chocks (1) tightly in front of and behind the same wheel of the front axle to prevent the machine from rolling away.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 255

16 Driving and Transport

16.10 Main battery switch

16.10

Main battery switch

2

1

BXG000-002

The main battery switch (2) is used to switch on or interrupt the machine’s power supply.

„ After using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs, interrupt the power supply.

The main battery switch (2) is designed as a momentary switch with integrated LED and can be found in the battery compartment (1) in the rear bumper.

The power supply is automatically interrupted after 24 hours.

If the main battery switch is pressed for not longer than 1 second, the power supply is automatically interrupted after a delay of about 120 seconds.

If the main battery switch is pressed for longer than 2 seconds, the power supply is interrupted immediately. There is no run-down time.

„ Open the flap (1) of the battery compartment.

„ To switch on or interrupt the power supply, press the main battery switch (2):

Æ When the LED is lit, the power supply is switched on

Æ If the LED is flashing, the run-down time is running (approx. 120 seconds).

Æ When the LED is not lit, the power supply is interrupted.

„ To interrupt the power supply as quickly as possible in an emergency, press the main battery switch and hold it down for 2 seconds.

Æ The power supply is interrupted immediately.

16.11

Parking the machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away

If the machine is not secured against rolling away when it has been switched off, there is a risk of people being injured by the machine rolling away in an uncontrolled manner.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

To park the machine safely and secure it against rolling away:

„ Stop the machine on a level, solid surface.

„ Place the header on the ground.

„ Set the main mode switch to “neutral mode”.

„ To tighten the parking brake, actuate the “Parking brake” key.

256

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Driving and Transport 16

Towing the machine 16.12

„ To allow the engine to cool off, let it run at lower idle for three minutes.

„ Turn the ignition key anti-clockwise to the “STOP” position, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Mount the both wheel chocks.

16.12

Towing the machine

WARNING

Risk of accident due to increased steering and braking forces.

If the machine is being towed a longer distance, there is a danger that the driver will loose control of the machine, because the diesel engine is stopped, which increases steering and braking forces. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone.

„ Tow the machine out of the danger zone only and never tow over prolonged distances.

„ Note that steering and braking forces are increased when the diesel engine is stationary.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrect operation

If the machine is not towed correctly, power transmission components or the diesel engine may be damaged.

„ Do not tow the machine unless absolutely essential.

„ Tow the machine by pushing it with the attached tow bar only.

„ Tow the machine at maximum 8 km/h and for not longer than 45 min.

„ Turn the main mode switch to "Neutral mode".

„ Release the parking brake, if required release manually,

see Page 258

.

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„ Switch on the ignition so that the direction indicators/flashing warning lamps and the brake lamps function.

„ Pull the fuses F98 and F29 so that the hydraulic motors are at idle,

see Page 603

.

For towing, choose either the tow coupling or, depending on the fitted header, suitable suspension points at the front side of the machine.

„ Pull the fuses F98 and F29,

see Page 603

.

„ Turn the main mode switch to "Neutral mode".

„ Release the parking brake.

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„ Turn the ignition key in the ignition lock to position "I" so that the direction indicators/flashing warning lamps and the brake lamps function.

If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure required for releasing the parking brake:

„ Release the parking brake manually,

see Page 258

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 257

16 Driving and Transport

16.12 Towing the machine

16.12.1

Releasing the parking brake manually

1

2

I

II

3

2 4

4

5

5 6 7

4

5

BXG000-062

Securing the machine against rolling away:

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

The parking brake can be released with the hand pump (2).

Version with knob handle

If the hand pump (2) is equipped with a knob handle (1):

„ Pull and release the knob handle (1) of the valve.

Æ The knob handle remains in the pulled position.

„ Pull the spring cotter pin (6) out of the mounting bracket above the air filter housing (7), and remove the pump lever (5) from the mounting bracket.

„ Insert the pump lever (5) into the lever holder (4) on the hand pump (2).

„ Release the parking brake by pumping the hand pump.

If the effort during pumping increases considerably:

„ Tow the machine slowly to check if the brake is released.

Æ The parking brake is released as long as the knob handle (1) of the valve is in the pulled position.

Restoring the braking function on the parking brake:

„ Press the knob handle (1) of the valve.

258

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Driving and Transport 16

Preparing the machine for shipment 16.13

Version with stop cock

If the hand pump (2) is equipped with a stop cock (3):

„ Turn the stop cock (3) to the closed position (II).

„ Pull the spring cotter pin (6) out of the mounting bracket above the air filter housing (7), and remove the pump lever (5) from the mounting bracket.

„ Insert the pump lever (5) into the pump holder (4) on the hand pump.

„ Release the parking brake by pumping the hand pump.

If the effort during pumping increases considerably:

„ Tow the machine slowly to check if the brake is released.

Æ The parking brake is released as long as the stop cock (3) is in closed position (II).

To restoring the braking function on the parking brake:

„ Turn the stop cock (3) to the open position (I).

16.13

Preparing the machine for shipment

NOTICE

Risk of accident if machine not correctly prepared

If the machine is not correctly prepared for transportation by vehicle, this may result in accidents and damage to the machine.

„ Carry out the following measures to prepare for conveyance of the machine.

ü No header has been mounted on the machine.

„

Move the spout into transport position, see Page 242 .

„ Move the intake into transport position,

see Page 242

.

„ Ensure that the rear axle is in the middle position so that the vehicle chassis is horizontal. If required, raise or lower the rear axle using the keypad,

see Page 107

.

„ After parking the machine, shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 34

.

„ Ensure that the cabin door, the side window and the hoods have been closed and locked.

„

Interrupt the power supply by pressing the main battery switch, see Page 256 .

„ Secure the machine using suitable lashing material at the designated lashing points,

see

Page 259

.

ü For "SMV emblem" version : The SMV emblem is covered or removed,

see Page 67 .

16.13.1

Lashing the machine

WARNING

Danger to life caused by uncontrolled machine movement

If the machine is not properly lashed for transportation by vehicle, the machine may move in an uncontrolled manner and endanger people.

„ Before transporting the machine, secure it properly to the designated lashing points using suitable lashing material.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 259

16 Driving and Transport

16.13 Preparing the machine for shipment

1

4

2

5

3

6 7

BX001-619

Appropriate lashing points are provided on the machine for attachment of the lashing material.

1 Front axle lashing point on outside right

2 Front axle lashing point on right

3 Front axle lashing point on left

4 Rear axle lashing point on left

5 Rear axle lashing point on right

6 Bumper lashing point on left

7 Bumper lashing point on right

16.13.2

Removing the machine wheels

Remove the wheels if this is necessary to transport the machine. The machine may only be jacked up by a KRONE service partner; see manual for service technicians.

260

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

17

17.1

Operation device 17

Raising and lowering lifting unit 17.1

Operation device

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts

If people remain in or enter the danger zone of the machine during operation, there is an increased risk of injury.

„ Do not start the machine until all safety devices have been fitted and are in sound condition.

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of the machine (safety distance: 3 m at the side, 5 m behind the machine).

If people enter the danger zone:

„ Stop machine immediately.

„ Turn off PTO shaft.

„ Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

„ Do not restart the machine until there is nobody in the danger zone.

Special instructions on the use of the particular header attached can be found in the operating instructions for the header.

The settings for field mode, such as operating mode, working width, header, intake, silage fodder addition, lifting unit, corn conditioner and customer data,

see Page 320

and

see

Page 351

.

Raising and lowering lifting unit

WARNING

Risk of injury from movement of the header

If people are in the area of the header when it is being raised or lowered and folded in or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the header or the lifting unit.

„ When the header is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the header or the lifting unit.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 261

17 Operation device

17.2

Aligning pendulum tube horizontally

17.2

BX001-585

ü The driver's seat is occupied.

ü The diesel engine has been started.

ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.

ü There is adequate space for lifting and lowering.

ü There is nobody in the area of the intake

To raise the header (3):

„ Press and hold down the "Manually raise lifting unit" key (1) on the control lever.

The header (3) is raised as long as the key is pressed.

When grass header is mounted, the maximum height which can be reached is the upper position of the intake.

When the maize header is folded in, the lifting height is limited to 60% of the maximum lifting height of the intake.

To lower the header (3):

„ Press and hold down the "Manually lower lifting unit" key (2) on the control lever.

The header (3) is lowered as long as the key is pressed.

The lowest height is reached when the header touches the ground.

Aligning pendulum tube horizontally

INFO

The position and the status of pendulum tube can be displayed in the information area of the terminal,

see Page 345

.

The pendulum tube can be raised and lowered on the left or right so that the movement of header can be adjusted to the ground contours.

262

BX001-586

The pendulum tube must be adjusted horizontally for attachment of header.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

17.3

Operation device 17

Releasing header locking 17.3

To lower the pendulum tube (3) on the left and raise it on the right:

„ Press and hold down the “Lower pendulum frame on left” key (1) until the pendulum tube is aligned horizontally.

To lower the pendulum tube (3) on the right and raise it on the left:

„ Press and hold down the “Lower pendulum frame right” key (2) until the pendulum tube has been aligned horizontally.

Releasing header locking

For version with “Hydraulic comfort header locking with quick coupler”

The header locking lock fixes the headers if they have been supported by the roll guides of the forage harvester.

The locking is implemented by locking pins which move into a hole pattern in the locking sheets of the headers.

When fitting header to the machine for the first time and whenever changing the header, check the position of the locking sheets and the coupling disc and adjust if required. To adjust, see the header operating instructions.

BX001-587

To attach and remove header, the locking bolts (1) must be retracted. When selecting the

“Header locking” function, the pendulum frame is automatically aligned horizontally.

ü The header drive is switched off.

To open header locking, first select “Header locking” function in the additional keypad:

„ Press “Open header locking” (2) key.

ð The “Header locking” function is selected and the “Retract” key is lit.

„ Press the “Retract” key (3) and hold it down.

ð After 4 seconds, the locking bolts are pulled towards the middle of the vehicle and the header locking is opened.

The header locking remains open as long as the “Retract” key is pressed.

To close header locking again:

„ Release the “Retract” key (3).

Æ The locking pins move outwards and the header locking is locked.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 263

17 Operation device

17.4

Trailer operation

17.4

Trailer operation

WARNING

Risk of injury due to incorrect connection

The risk of accidents is increased by an incorrect connection.

„ Connect only trailers which have a service brake system.

„ Connect trailer to the hitch only.

„ Observe the specifications in the operating instructions for the machine and trailer.

„ When connecting and disconnecting a trailer, proceed particularly carefully and prudently.

„

Ensure that the Technical limit values for trailer operation are observed, see Page 22

and

see Page 80 .

NOTICE

Damage to the tow coupling and the parts of the drive

If stuck vehicles are retrieved using the tow coupling or are towed over prolonged distances, parts on the machine may be damaged.

„ Tow the machine using the tow coupling at maximum 6 km/h and for not longer than 50 min.

„ Do not use the tow coupling to retrieve the stuck machine.

„ Do not use the tow coupling to tow other vehicles.

„ Do not use the tow coupling to retrieve stuck vehicles.

The forage harvester is equipped as standard with a hitch.

Only trailers which have their own service brake system may be used.

264

BXG000-015

1 Tow coupling

2 12 volt socket for lighting

(optional)

3

4

Compressed air connections for

Dual line brake (optional)

Auxiliary hydraulics (optional)

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

17.4.1

Operation device 17

Trailer operation 17.4

Connecting trailer

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-roadworthy trailer/tractor combination

If the support, axle and trailer loads are exceeded during operation, the trailer/tractor combination is no longer roadworthy.

„ When operating with the trailer, ensure that the permitted support, axle and trailer loads are not exceeded.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movements of machine and trailer

If there are people between the machine and trailer during the coupling process and if the uncoupled trailer moves in an uncontrolled manner, there is a risk of injury.

„ Make sure that there is no one between machine and trailer.

„ Secure trailer against rolling away.

I

1

II

2

3

BX001-589

To connect the trailer:

„ Secure the trailer against rolling away.

„ Adjust the drawbar eye of the trailer to the height of the tow coupling.

„ To open the tow coupling, press the hand lever (1) upwards as far as the locking point.

„ Clean the tow coupling.

„ Slowly reverse the machine until the drawbar eye engages in the tow coupling.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to insecurely locked trailer. After making the connection, ensure that the bolt (2) is completely engaged.

„ Check whether the control pin (3) locks flush with the surface of the housing.

„ Connect the power supply plugs and check the lighting system of the trailer.

If the trailer has a supporting wheel:

„ Raise the support wheel.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 265

17 Operation device

17.4

Trailer operation

For "Compressed air brake system trailer brake system" version

1 2

17.4.2

BX002-646

The machine features a dual-line compressed air braking system. The coupling heads are connected to the machine for attachment of the supply line (2) (red coupling head) and brake line (1) (yellow coupling head) of the tractor.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

Connecting

Observe the correct order when connecting the compressed air lines.

„ Firstly, connect the brake line (1) (yellow coupling head).

„ Then connect the supply line (2) (red coupling head).

Disconnecting trailer

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movements of machine and trailer

If there are people between the machine and trailer during the coupling process and if the uncoupled trailer moves in an uncontrolled manner, there is a risk of injury.

„ Make sure that there is no one between machine and trailer.

„ Secure trailer against rolling away.

1

2

BX001-591

„ Secure the trailer against rolling away.

„ Remove the power supply plugs.

If the trailer has a supporting wheel:

„ Lower the support wheel.

266

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Additional axles 17.5

To disconnect the trailer:

„ To open the tow coupling, press the hand lever (1) upwards as far as the locking point.

„ Slowly move the machine forwards until the drawbar eye has been removed from the tow coupling.

WARNING! Injuries to hands caused by descending locking pin. Do not actuate the release lever (2) by hand. Actuate the tow coupling by hand using the hand lever (1) only.

To protect the aperture of the locking pin from soiling:

„ Lock the tow coupling by pressing the hand lever (1) downwards.

For "Compressed air brake system trailer brake system" version

1 2

17.5

BX002-646

The machine features a dual-line compressed air braking system. The coupling heads are connected to the machine for attachment of the supply line (2) (red coupling head) and brake line (1) (yellow coupling head) of the tractor.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

Disconnecting

Observe the correct order when disconnecting the compressed air lines.

„ Firstly, disconnect the supply line (2) (red coupling head).

„ Then disconnect the brake line (1) (yellow coupling head).

Additional axles

The forage harvester types BX201 can be operated with different additional axles:

• The forage harvester can be equipped with an internal additional axle.

• Some of the header types can be equipped with an integrated running gear on the header.

The additional axles relieve the front drive axle of the forage harvester during road travel. This reduces the front axle load of the forage harvester during road travel.

Internal additional axle:

The internal additional axle is active in maize mode only and the function is not available until the attached header is detected by the machine electronics.

When the additional axle is lowered, the relief pressure is monitored, even when the machine is at a standstill. If the pressure exceeds the set maximum value, the additional axle is relieved.

„ Ensure that the plug connection of header is connected.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 267

17 Operation device

17.5

Additional axles

Additional axle on the header:

Additional running gear on the header is available for some maize header types.

After the plug connection for the sensors has been connected, when attaching the header to the forage harvester, the machine electronics of the forage harvester detects the header and the additional running gear.

The relief of the front axle load is controlled by the machine electronics of the forage harvester.

„ Ensure that the plug connection of header is connected.

„ Select on the terminal in the chapter Drive functions -> Additional axle that an additional axle has been installed.

17.5.1

Maize mode

Road mode

Internal additional axle and additional axle on the 3-part XCollect:

When the machine is moving forwards faster than approx. 10 km/h, the additional axle will be lowered if it has not yet been lowered. Then the hydraulic pressure of the additional axle is adjusted.

If the machine moves backwards in road mode, the additional axle is relieved.

Additional axle on the 2-part EasyCollect:

The additional axle is mounted for road mode. If the machine is moving forwards faster than approx. 5 km/h, the additional axle will be lowered if it has not yet been lowered. Then the hydraulic pressure of the lifting unit is adjusted.

Field mode

Internal additional axle and additional axle on the 3-part XCollect:

In principle, the additional axle is raised in field mode.

Additional axle on the 2-part EasyCollect:

The additional axle is dismounted for field mode.

17.5.2

17.5.3

Grass mode

In the “grass” mode, it is not possible to control the additional axle.

Diagnostics and maintenance of additional axle is not possible. Only the “Raise additional axle” function is available.

In “grass” mode, the additional axle must be moved manually into the upper end position or removed.

XDisc operating mode

In “XDisc” mode, it is not possible to control the additional axle.

Diagnostics and maintenance of additional axle is not possible. Only the “Raise additional axle” function is available.

In “XDisc” mode, the additional axle must be moved manually into the upper end position or removed.

268

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

17.6

Operation device 17

Silage additives unit 17.6

Silage additives unit

WARNING

Risk of injury due to silage additives

If handled improperly, the chemicals used in the silage additives unit may cause damage to health.

„ The silage additives unit may only be operated by persons who are familiar with these

Operating Instructions and the safety data sheet of the manufacturer of the silage additives. The safety instructions issued by the silage additive manufacturer must be followed.

„ The operator must be instructed in the safe handling of the chemicals used.

NOTICE

Damage to the silage additives unit due to low exterior temperatures

If there is any water left in the silage additives unit prior to it being stored for the winter, the unit is at risk of being damaged by frost.

„ Fill the silage additives tank with a biological, non-aggressive frost protection agent prior to storing it for the winter and allow the silage additives unit to pump in "continuously active" mode for 2 minutes with a dosing quantity of 50%.

„ After the winter, before the season begins, fill the silage additives tank with clear water and allow the silage additives unit to pump in "continuously active" mode for 10 minutes with a dosing quantity of 75%.

17.6.1

Internal silage additives unit coarse dosing (for version with "Controlled silage additives unit")

NOTICE

Damage to the silage additives unit by using incorrect silage additives

If the silage additives unit is operated with aggressive or corrosive silage additives, parts of the silage additives unit may be damaged.

„ Do not use aggressive or corrosive silage additives in the silage additives unit.

1

2

BX002-445

The internal silage additives unit coarse dosing is a controlled silage additives unit with a silage additives tank (1) on the right cabin platform. The pump (2), the valves and the filter of the silage additives unit are located on the right side in the cooler compartment.

For operating and setting the silage additives unit on the terminal, .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 269

17 Operation device

17.6

Silage additives unit

Technical data

Pump

Electrical Connection

Maximum power consumption

Enclosure material (of the components that come into contact with the silage additives)

Material of the gearwheels

Maximum operating pressure of the pump

Material of the valves

Maximum media temperature

Delivery capacity (discharge accelerator injection point)

Maximum suction height

Type of application/duration

24 V direct voltage

5 A

Stainless steel

Teflon

4 bar

Polypropylene

+70° C

0.5 l/min to 7.2 l/min

1.5 m

Intermittent/continuous operation

Flow sensor

Housing/cover material

Temperature range

Measuring range

Maximum operating pressure/bursting pressure

Operating temperature

PVDF

0° C to +120° C

0.5 l/min to 10 l/min

6 bar / >16 bar

-10° C to +120° C

Operating internal silage additives unit

1

II

I

2

BX002-446

During operation the silage additives pump (2) draws silage additives out of the silage additives tank.

„ Set the three-way stopcock (1) to position I (RUN).

Æ The silage additives is pumped out of the silage additives tank.

270

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Silage additives unit 17.6

Operating silage additives unit coarse dosing

For operating and setting the silage additives unit, see Page 411 .

„ When operating a silage additives unit, check whether the mounted nozzle is suitable for the set dosing quantity (blue nozzle: up to 2.5 L/min and white nozzle over 2.5 L/min). If required, replace the nozzle.

„

If the nozzle was replaced, recalibrate the silage additives unit, see Page 412 .

„ Calibrate the silage additives unit always with the nozzle installed and the silage additives unit flushed.

Settings in the Silage additives unit menu Coarse dosing

1

2

3

EQG003-102

Mode (1)

Inactive

Continuously active

No silage additive is injected.

Silage additive is injected if the main mode switch is in the

"Field mode" position.

Automatic mode Silage additive is injected if the main coupling, the intake and the header are switched on at the same time and the header is in the working position at the same time and the machine moves forwards.

Crop flow cleaning headland Silage additive is injected if the main coupling, the intake and the header are switched on at the same time and the header is in the headland position at the same time.

"Crop flow cleaning headland" mode is used to prevent the crop flow plates from sticking due to crops which contain sugar. "Crop flow cleaning headland" mode is the most effective method of cleaning the crop flow plates, provided the "Water injection" retrofit kit (20 429 353 *) has been installed. If the "water injection" retrofit kit has not been installed, water will come out of the silage additives nozzle only and the sheets in the crop flow will not be wetted with water.

Dosing quantity (2)

1,000 L/min

1,000 L/t

Rate of the injected silage additive per minute

Rate of the injected silage additive per tonne

The dosing quantity of the injected silage additive switches to the unit "litres per minute" or

"litres per tonne" depending on the set control type.

Control type (3)

Dosing quantity per unit of time

Dosing quantity per unit of weight

Sets the "dosing quantity" parameter to the unit "litres per minute"

Sets the "dosing quantity" parameter to the unit "litres per tonne"

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 271

17 Operation device

17.6

Silage additives unit

Conditions for the control type "dosing quantity per unit of weight"

• The control type "dosing quantity per unit of weight" is available for the "CropControl (yield recording)" version only.

• "CropControl" must have been calibrated.

• If the "CropControl" does not record and output any yield, no silage additive is injected in this setting. If silage additive is nevertheless to be injected, the control type must be set to

"dosing quantity per unit of time".

Cleaning nozzle of the silage additives unit

The nozzles of the silage additives unit are mounted on the right side of the discharge accelerator.

1 2

3 4

BXG000-129

„ Loosen the screws (2) and pull the cover sheet (1) of the air intake from the rear.

„ Remove the screws (4) and remove the support (3).

1 2

3

4

1

BX002-090 / BX002-091

„ Remove the nozzle (1) from the support / holder (2).

„ Clean the nozzle (1), the seal (4) and the ball check valve filter (3).

„ After cleaning the nozzle (1), insert with the seal (4) and the sieve filter (3) into the support / holder (2).

272

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

2

3

Operation device 17

Silage additives unit 17.6

4

1

BXG000-130

„ Mount the support (1) on the right side of the discharge accelerator using the screws (2).

„ Push the cover sheet (3) of the air intake to the required position and tighten the screws (2).

„ If required, calibrate the silage additives unit,

see Page 412

.

Cleaning internal silage additives unit

NOTICE

Damage to the flow sensor due to incorrect cleaning

If the flow sensor is cleaned with compressed air, components may be damaged.

„ Do not clean flow sensor with compressed air.

NOTICE

Damage to the environment caused by silage additives

If the silage additives and the rinsing water leak into the ground or the surface water, the environment will be damaged

„ Dispose of the silage additives residue and the rinsing water properly.

2

1

3

4

5

6

BXG001-115

1 Silage additives tank

2 Drain cock

2 Silage additives pump

4 Suction filter element

5 Three-way stopcock

6 Flow sensor

The silage additives unit must be cleaned after each use:

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 273

17 Operation device

17.6

Silage additives unit

1 2

3

BXG001-116

„ Take the rinsing hose (1) out of the storage compartment, connect it to the drainage nozzle (2) of the silage additives tank and drain the silage additive into a suitable container.

„ Clean the suction filter element (3).

1

2

3

I

II

17.6.2

BXG001-117

„ Provide a tank containing 10 l of fresh water.

„ Connect the rinsing hose (1) to the rinsing nozzle (2) of the silage additives unit and place the other end in the tank containing the water.

„ Move the three-way stopcock (3) to position "I".

„ Switch on the machine’s ignition.

„ Set the main mode switch to the "field mode" position.

„

Set the silage additives unit to "continuously active", see Page 411 .

„ After rinsing, turn the three-way stopcock (3) to position "II" and remove the rinsing hose (1) from the rinsing nozzle (2) of the silage additives unit.

For operating and setting the silage additives unit, see Page 411 .

Internal silage additives unit fine dosing (for "regulated silage additives unit fine dosing" version)

NOTICE

Damage to the silage additives unit by using incorrect silage additives

If the silage additives unit is operated with aggressive or corrosive silage additives, parts of the silage additives unit may be damaged.

„ Do not use aggressive or corrosive silage additives in the silage additives unit.

274

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Silage additives unit 17.6

INFO

The atomiser of the silage additives unit is also operative when the silage additives unit is not working. In this case, compressed air only flows through the atomiser to prevent clogging.

1

BX002-724

The internal silage additives unit fine dosing is a regulated silage additives unit in which the silage additives are remove from a tank (1) on the left-hand platform, next to the cabin.

For operating and setting the silage additives unit on the terminal,

see Page 410

.

Operating internal silage additives unit fine dosing

1

2

1

2

BX002-725 / BX002-726

„ Unscrew the cover (2) from the silage additives tank (1).

„ Fill the silage additives tank (1) with silage additives and fresh water.

„ Screw the cover (2) back on the silage additives tank (1).

1 2

BX002-727 / BX002-728

„ Unscrew the cover (1) from the water tank.

„ Fill the water tank (1) with water to flush the silage additives unit.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 275

17 Operation device

17.6

Silage additives unit

„ Screw the cover (1) back on the water tank.

1

BX002-729

„ Set the levers (1) of the ball valves to position "Spraying silage additives".

„ Enter the type of the installed crimp hose in the hose pump on the terminal, and operate the

silage additives unit via the terminal, see Page 410 .

Cleaning the internal silage additives unit fine dosing

The silage additives unit fine dosing must be cleaned after each use.

1

2

276

BX002-731

Cleaning the silage additives unit fine dosing with water from the water tank (1):

„ Set the levers (2) of the ball valves to position "Flushing water".

„ Operate the silage additives unit via the terminal and allow the system to pump for

5 minutes in "Continuously active" mode at a dosing quantity of 75%,

see Page 410

.

1 2 3 4 5 6

2

3

BX002-029

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Silage additives unit 17.6

Cleaning the atomiser (6):

„ Loosen the screws (2), pull the cover sheet (1) of the air intake backwards, and tighten the screws (2).

„ Remove the screws (4) and remove the support (3).

„ Loosen the screw connection (5) and remove the atomiser (6).

„ Rinse out the atomiser (6) with clear water.

„ Re-attach the atomiser (6) and tighten the screw connection (5) with your fingers.

„ Mount the support (1) on the right side of the discharge accelerator using the screws (2).

„ Mount the support (3) with the screws (4).

Changing the delivery rate

The silage additive is conveyed to the atomiser via a hose pump.

When the crimp hose is used with the yellow adapter, the hose pump has a delivery rate of 1.8

L/h to 8.4 L/h.

When the crimp hose is used with the blue adapter, the hose pump has a delivery rate of 0.9 L/ h to 3.0 L/h.

To change the delivery rate, the installed crimp hose must be replaced by the crimp hose comprised in the delivery.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to contact with silage additives. Wear personal protective equipment to avoid injury.

„ Empty the pump hose of hose pump and the supply lines.

1 2

BXG001-137

„ Remove the cover (1) of the hose pump (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 277

17 Operation device

17.6

Silage additives unit

1 2 3

5

4

BX002-659

WARNING! Crush hazard due to turning rotor. Ensure that the main battery switch has been switched off.

„ Disconnect the inlet and the outlet from the connections (5) of the hose pump.

„ Set the rotor (2) of the hose pump so that the left-hand side is free.

„ Lift the left-hand side of the connector (4).

„ Turn the rotor (2) so that the top part is free while taking the hose (1) on the top out of the pump housing (3).

„ Continue turning the rotor (2) so that the right-hand side is free, taking the hose (1) out of the pump housing (3) on the right-hand side.

„ Lift the right-hand side of the connector (4) and take the crimp hose (1) out of the pump housing (3).

„ Mount the other crimp hose in the reverse order.

„ Re-connect the inlet and the outlet to the connections (5) of the hose pump.

1 2

278

BXG001-137

„ Re-attach the cover (1) of the hose pump (2).

„ Enter the type of the currently installed crimp hose in the hose pump on the terminal.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Silage additives unit 17.6

Calibrating internal silage additives unit fine dosing

To determine the released quantity of silage additives, the Internal silage additives unit fine dosing can be calibrated if required.

ü The yellow nozzle has been installed.

ü A suitable measuring cup with a capacity of at least 2 litres is ready to hand.

ü The silage additives tank is filled with water.

ü The type of mounted nozzle has been entered on the terminal,

see Page 410

.

ü

The main mode switch is in the "Field mode" position, see Page 109 .

ü The driver is sitting on the driver's seat.

EQ002-367 / EQ002-470

• The "Crop flow" main menu or the "Silage additives unit" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

„ To switch to the "Calibration" menu, press .

„ To run the calibration using the Dialogue menu, press the "Start calibration" key and follow the instructions in the Dialogue menu step by step

Emptying the silage additives tank

NOTICE

Damage to the environment caused by silage additives

If the silage additives and the rinsing water leak into the ground or the surface water, the environment will be damaged

„ Dispose of the silage additives residue and the rinsing water properly.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 279

17 Operation device

17.6

Silage additives unit

1

BX002-734

„ Position a sufficiently large and suitable container below the silage additives drain (1), behind the left front wheel.

I II

1 1

17.6.3

BX002-733

To empty the silage additives tank (I):

„ Set the levers (1) of the ball valves to position "Emptying silage additives".

Æ The silage additives run through a drain hose into the container provided.

To empty the water tank for flushing the silage additives unit (II):

„ Set the levers (1) of the ball valves to position "Emptying water".

Æ The water runs through a drain hose into the container provided.

Connecting an additional silage additives unit (for "External silage additives unit" version)

280

BX001-592

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

17.7

Operation device 17

Field mode on slopes 17.7

An external silage additives unit can be connected. The electrical connection (1) for the dosing unit is located behind the right side guard (2).

„ To remove the right side guard (2), open the right side hood (3) and remove the right side guard.

„ Connect the plug X224.2 (1) to the external dosing unit.

„ Mount the guard (2).

Pin assignment:

Pin 1: +12 volt supply voltage

Pin 2: +12 volt control signal

Pin 3: Ground

The maximum amperage is 15 A.

For operating and setting the silage additives unit, see Page 410 .

Field mode on slopes

17.8

BX001-908

„ When using the forage harvester with a maize header, do not bring the maize header from working position into transport position or from transport position into working position as long as the machine is on a diagonal to the slope.

„ Before working on a slope, increase the tyre pressure in the front wheels by 0.5 bar more than indicated in the tyre pressure table,

see Page 84

.

„ After working on the slope, the tyre pressure must be set to the values in the tyre pressure table,

see Page 84

.

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)

When fast reversing during forward travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates backwards to 70% of the previous driving speed.

When fast reversing during reverse travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates forwards to 100% of the previous driving speed.

Fast reversing is possible in field mode only.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 281

17 Operation device

17.9

Operating intake/header

17.9

BMG000-007

ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.

To activate fast reversing:

„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2), move the control lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.

Operating intake/header

WARNING

Risk of injury from moving components of intake or header

When the intake and header are switched on, unforeseeable movements of the intake rollers and header may occur and endanger people.

„ Ensure that people are at an adequate distance from the intake and the header.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine by turning the quick connector without attached header

If the quick connector is driven without the header attached, the machine may be damaged, as the clutch disc of the quick connector is not controlled.

„ Ensure that the quick connector is not driven unless a header has been attached.

„ If the intake is to be run without a header for maintenance purposes, remove the universal shaft from the forage harvester beforehand.

To adjust the setpoint speed of header and the chop length, see Page 341 .

282

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Operating intake/header 17.9

Switching on intake/header

BX001-593

ü The driver's seat is occupied.

ü The engine has been started.

ü

The header profile which matches the header has been set, see Page 395 or

see Page 428

.

ü The main mode switch (2) is in the "Field mode" position (3).

ü The main coupling has been switched on (1).

INFO

When the intake and header are switched on for the first time, the intake rollers and the header must be reversed by the driver to remove any soiling. Only then can the intake and header be switched on.

BX000-324

To switch on the intake/header:

„ Press the "Reverse intake/header" key (2) on the control lever.

Reverse the header and the intake rollers.

„ Press the "Intake/header on" key (1) on the control lever.

The header and the intake rollers are switched on.

Switching off intake/header

„ Press the "Intake/header on/off" key (1) on the control lever.

The header and the intake rollers are switched off.

Reversing intake/header

To remove blockages and faults in the crop flow, which occur during operation, the intake and the header can be reversed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 283

17 Operation device

17.10 Lifting unit control

BX000-324

To reverse the intake/header from the driver's seat:

„ Press and hold down the "Reverse intake/header" key (2) on the control lever.

The header and the intake rollers will reverse for as long as the "Reverse intake/header" key (2) is pressed.

The "Reverse intake/header" key (2) on the control lever can be pressed even when the intake/ header is switched on. Then the intake/header must be switched on again.

17.10

Lifting unit control

To optimise field mode, the position of the header is controlled via the lifting unit of the forage harvester. To have the best conditions for the particular application, one of the three following lifting unit controls can be selected.

• Lifting unit position control

When the lifting unit position control is active, the control unit sets the height of the header to a constant value relative to the machine.

• Lifting unit bearing pressure control

When the lifting unit bearing pressure control is active, the control unit adjusts the pressure of the header on the ground to a constant value

• Lifting unit distance control (optional)

When the lifting unit distance control is active, the control unit constantly adjusts the height of the header relative to the ground by active oscillation and automatic raising/lowering of the lifting unit. The lifting unit distance control can be activated only in conjunction with an attached maize header and with attached ground contour sensors.

To set the lifting unit control and the setpoint pressure or setpoint height,

see Page 341

.

Activating the lifting unit position control

284

BXG000-019

ü The lifting unit position control is set in the terminal.

ü The lifting unit position control is currently inactive.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Lifting unit control 17.10

To lower the lifting unit:

„ Press the "Lower lifting unit" key (1).

The lifting unit is lowered. The key has two levels. In the first level, the stroke speed runs slowly and in the second level, the stroke speed runs fast.

To raise the lifting unit:

„ Press the "Raise lifting unit" key (2).

The lifting unit is raised. The key has two levels. In the first level, the lifting speed runs slowly and in the second level, the lifting speed runs fast.

Changing and saving the setpoint height (working height) on the control lever

„ Use the "Raise lifting unit" (2) or "Lower lifting unit" (1) keys to move to the new setpoint height.

„ Press the "Automatic lifting unit" key (3) for 3 seconds.

The new setpoint height is saved and a corresponding information message appears on the terminal.

Activating the set setpoint height

„ Press the "Automatic lifting unit" key (3).

The lifting unit is raised or lowered to the set setpoint height. The icon with the set setpoint height on the terminal. The lifting unit position control is active.

is indicated

Deactivating the lifting unit position control

The lifting unit position control is deactivated:

• If the lifting unit is manually controlled with keys (1) and (2).

• If the diagnostic electronics detect an error.

Setting and saving the lifting height for the headland

BX000-321

„ Press the "Raise lifting unit" (2) or "Lower lifting unit" (1) keys to move to the lifting height.

„ Press the "Raise lifting unit to top" key (4) for 3 seconds.

The lifting height is saved and a corresponding information message appears on the terminal.

Repeat the process for a new lifting height.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 285

17 Operation device

17.10 Lifting unit control

Raising lifting unit to the headland position

„ Press the "Raise lifting unit to top" (4) key.

The lifting unit is raised to the set lifting height.

Activating the lifting unit bearing pressure control

BXG001-020

The following sequences: activation, control, activate setpoint pressure and change and save setpoint pressure on the terminal correspond to the procedure used for the lifting unit position control.

Raising and lowering the lifting unit for the lifting unit bearing pressure control

286

BX000-320

„ Use the "Raise lifting unit" (2) or "Lower lifting unit" (1) keys.

When the key (1 or 2) has been released, the position controller keeps the lifting unit at a constant lifting height.

To activate the lifting unit bearing pressure control:

„ Press the "Automatic lifting unit" key (3).

The lifting unit, controlled by positioned, is lowered to the ground and is automatically set to the lifting unit bearing pressure control.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Activating the lifting unit distance control (optional)

Operation device 17

Setting spout 17.11

BXG001-020

The following sequences: activation, control, activate setpoint height and change and save setpoint height on the terminal correspond to the procedure used for the lifting unit position control.

17.11

Setting spout

WARNING

Risk of injury caused by deposited spout (with mounted spout extension)

With mounted spout extension (optional), the spout extends so far downwards when the spout has been deposited that road users are endangered during road travel.

„ For road travel, fold in the spout extension.

The spout has been designed in such a way that it can be operated in trailer operation as well as with forage transport wagons driving in parallel alongside on the right and left.

The movements of the spout are controlled with the control lever and the keypad.

BX001-596

3

4

5

Pos.

1

2

Designation

"Turn spout left" key

"Turn spout right" key

"Spout flap down" key

"Spout flap up" key

"Reversing/parking spout" key

Explanation

Turns the spout to the left

Turns the spout to the right

Lowers the spout flap

Raises the spout flap

When main coupling is switched on: Reverses the position of the spout

When main coupling is switched off: Swivels the spout into the transport position

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 287

17 Operation device

17.12 Adjusting discharge distance

8

9

Pos.

6

7

Designation

"Raise spout" key

"Lower spout" key

"Fold in spout extension" key

"Fold out spout extension" key

Explanation

Raises the spout.

Lowers the spout.

Folds in the spout extension (optional).

Folds out the spout extension (optional)

17.12

Adjusting discharge distance

For "StreamControl" version

1

2

BXG000-045

The StreamControl is implemented via the discharge accelerator rear wall (1) and consists of an adjustable deflector sheet (2) which can be swivelled into the flow of the crops. The deflection of the crop flow affects the discharge distance of the chopping crops.

The StreamControl is operated with the additional keypad, see Page 112 .

In addition, the "M1" and "M2" keys of the control lever can be assigned with the adjustment of the discharge distance,

see Page 381

.

The dimension, by which the adjustable deflector sheet is swivelled into the crop flow, can be set on the terminal,

see Page 406

.

17.13

TractionControl/Traction control system

TractionControl is a connectable traction control system which can be adjusted in two stages.

TC I allows only little slip (spinning wheels). This setting is usually used in grass mode to protect the sward.

TC II allows increased slip. This setting is normally used in maize mode to ensure adequate propulsion even under difficult conditions.

The selection of the traction control system stage does not depend on the operating mode

(grass/maize) set on the terminal.

288

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Automatic steering system 17.14

BXG000-021

To activate the traction control system and adjust the sensitivity:

„ Press “Traction control system” (1) key until the desired status is reached.

The status of traction control system is displayed on the terminal by the “indicator lamp for

TractionControl” (2), see Page 348 .

17.14

Automatic steering system

WARNING

Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine

The forage harvester with activated automatic steering system is automatically controlled and is monitored only by the driver while driving. This means that people near the machine and along the route of the machine are in danger.

„ Use the automatic steering system in open country exclusively for automatically guiding the forage harvester on a row of thin-stemmed plants or with a GPS-based steering system.

„ Do not use the machine with activated automatic steering system on public highways, in yard areas or near people.

WARNING

Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine

If the automatic steering system is incorrectly installed or if the components of the automatic steering system have been tampered with, people near the forage harvester, which has an activated automatic steering system, are in danger, as the machine may make unexpected movements.

„ The automatic steering system must only be mounted by authorised specialist workshop.

„ Do not make any changes to the safety-relevant elements of the automatic steering system or to hydraulic, electrical or electronic components of the automatic steering system.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 289

17 Operation device

17.14 Automatic steering system

WARNING

Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine

Before starting up the automatic steering system, check that the controllable safety elements function.

„ Check whether the automatic steering system switches off if the steering wheel is moved abruptly or if the driver leaves the driver's seat.

„ Visually check that the row tracers, steering angle sensor as well as the visible hoses and wiring are in full working order (i.e. free of mechanical damage and leaks).

WARNING

Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine

When working with the automatic steering system activated, the driver must act particularly carefully and prudently so that he/she can respond if people and material assets are at risk.

„ Ensure that there is nobody near the forage harvester, within a radius of 50 m.

„ The driver must not leave the cabin of the machine during operation of automatic steering system.

„ While the automatic steering system is in operation, the driver must regularly check the direction in which the machine is moving and its travel path to be able to take over manual control of the forage harvester immediately in the event of a hazardous situation or if obstructions or interruptions come up in the vehicle's path.

INFO

When the rear axle has been completely raised or completely lowered, the automatic steering system operates less precisely. As a result, the tips of the header will not run exactly in the middle of the rows of maize plants.

To ensure precise guidance along the row of plants by the automatic steering system:

„ Ensure that the rear axle is in the middle position (the vehicle chassis is horizontal).

The automatic steering system is an optional additional feature which automatically guides the forage harvester on a row of thin-stemmed plants.

The automatic steering system is available only in maize operating mode with a mounted

EasyCollect or XCollect maize header and for the version with "Automatic steering system".

ü The diesel engine is running.

ü The driver's seat is occupied.

ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.

ü The machine is on a level surface.

Perform chaffing preferably in "Row tracer automatic steering system" mode.

Now, the following modes can be used:

• ISO row tracer

• Row tracer automatic steering system

To set row tracer mode,

see Page 424

.

290

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Setting chop length 17.15

BXG000-022

To activate the automatic steering system:

„ Move the forage harvester parallel to the rows of plants; the automatic steering system can be switched on after 1 metre.

„ Press the "Automatic steering system" key (2) on the control lever (1).

On the terminal the "Automatic steering system" (3) indicator lamp shows the current status of the automatic steering system. When the indicator lamp is pressed, the "Automatic steering system settings" menu opens,

see Page 424

.

The automatic steering system now takes over the task of guiding the forage harvester along the row of plants in the selected mode via the row tracers on the maize header. In the case of short gaps in the maize crop the automatic steering system ensures that the machine drives straight ahead.

To deactivate the automatic steering system:

„ Move the steering wheel abruptly.

Deactivation of the automatic steering system is indicated by an acoustic warning signal.

WARNING

Danger to life due to uncontrolled machine

When the automatic steering system has been deactivated, the driver must take control of the machine again, otherwise the forage harvester is not controlled.

„ After the automatic steering system has been deactivated, actively take control by using the steering wheel.

The automatic steering system is also automatically deactivated if:

• the driver's seat is left,

• the steering wheel is moved,

• the "Automatic steering system" key is pressed again,

• the Main Mode Switch is moved to "Road mode",

• one of the two quick-stop switches is pressed,

• the forage harvester stops for 1 min,

• if the system components of the automatic steering system are defective.

17.15

Setting chop length

The current chop length can be selected on the terminal.

• Via "Field mode" direct input on the terminal working screen

• Via the "Chop length" parameter in the main menu

Two values can be saved which can be called up during operation via the control lever or on the keypad.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 291

17 Operation device

17.15 Setting chop length

BXG000-023

Select the current chop length via direct input:

„ To reduce the chop length, press in the "Change chop length" field (1).

„ To increase the chop length, press in the "Change chop length" field (1).

Selecting values for the 1st and the 2nd saved chop length:

„ In the main menu -> "Crop flow" menu-> "Intake settings" menu, set the parameters "1st saved chop length" and "2nd saved chop length".

The two saved chop lengths can be called up via the "Chop length 1" and "Chop length 2" keys of the keypad.

BX001-601

Calling up the stored value for the 1st saved chop length:

„ On the keypad, press the "Chop length 1" key.

Calling up the stored value for the 2nd saved chop length:

„ On the keypad, press the "Chop length 2" key.

The saved chop lengths can also be called up via the control lever.

292

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Metal detection 17.16

BXG000-046

This requires the saved chop lengths to be assigned to the function keys on the control lever (2,

3):

„ In the main menu -> Cabin menu -> "Settings" submenu, allocate the "Call up saved chop length" value to the "Function assignment keys M1/M2" parameter.

Calling up the stored value for the 1st saved chop length:

„ On the control lever, press the "M1" key.

Calling up the stored value for the 2nd saved chop length:

„ On the keypad, press the "M2" key.

17.16

Metal detection

The metal detection protects the machine from metal parts drawn in with the crops. The detectors are located in the lower feed drive roller.

If the system detects metal in the crops, the intake and header are immediately stopped.

3

3

TC km/h

12.0

BXG000-024

On the terminal the "Foreign object detection" (3) indicator lamp shows the current status of the metal detection and RockProtect. When the indicator lamp is pressed, the menu "Foreign object detection settings" opens.

Adjusting the sensitivity of the metal detection:

„ In the main menu -> menu Crop flow -> menu "Foreign object detection settings" set the sensitivity value.

When metal detection is triggered, intake and header stop immediately.

To rectify the problem:

„ Reverse the intake and the header.

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Remove the metal part from the intake.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 293

17 Operation device

17.17 RockProtect

WARNING

Risk of injury from exposed, rotating chopping drum

If the chopping drum is engaged without intake and header, there is an increased risk of injury due to the rotating chopping drum which is not covered.

„ When the metal detection is defective, only engage the chopping drum with removed intake via special switching routine.

INFO

If the chopping drum does not engage due to an error in the metal detection of the chopping drum although there is no metal in the intake, it is nevertheless possible to engage the chopping drum by means of a special switching routine.

To engage the chopping drum in spite of defective metal detection:

„ Switch on the diesel engine.

„ Move the main mode switch to “Maintenance operation”.

„ Press the “Main coupling on” key in the keypad for at least 5 s.

An information message appears in the terminal and the follow-up alarm is heard.

„ Release the “Main coupling on” key and take note of the information message.

„ Press the “Main coupling on” key for at least 2 s.

The chopping drum is engaged and the follow-up alarm goes out.

„ Set the main mode switch to “Field mode” and work as usual.

17.17

RockProtect

RockProtect is a rock detection system which protects the machine from damage by larger foreign objects (e.g. stones). If the system detects a foreign object in the crops, the intake and header are immediately stopped.

The sensitivity of the rock detection must be adjusted to the particular working conditions, as even swathes of different sizes can trigger the rock detection.

294

3

3

TC km/h

12.0

BXG000-025

Activating the rock detection (RockProtect):

„ In the main menu -> menu Crop flow -> menu "Foreign object detection settings" set the status of RockProtect to "active".

On the terminal the "Foreign object detection" (3) indicator lamp shows the current status of the metal detection and the rock detection (RockProtect). When the indicator lamp is pressed, the menu "Foreign object detection settings" opens,

see Page 397

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

ConstantPower 17.18

Adjusting the sensitivity of RockProtect:

„ In the main menu -> menu Crop flow -> menu "Foreign object detection settings" set the sensitivity value of RockProtect.

When rock detection is triggered, intake and header stop immediately.

To rectify the problem:

„ Reverse the intake and the header.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Remove the foreign object from the intake.

Deactivating the rock detection (RockProtect):

„ In the main menu -> menu Crop flow -> menu "Foreign object detection settings" set the status of RockProtect to "inactive".

17.18

ConstantPower

The ConstantPower load limit control controls the travelling speed of the machine depending on the diesel engine load and provides constant machine load at a lower fuel consumption. This means that the machine travels automatically quicker for a weaker crop and automatically slower for a stronger crop.

Load limit control is possible in field mode only.

BXG000-047

To change a parameter:

„ In the main menu -> Menu Engine -> Menu "ConstantPower" select a parameter and change the setting with the selection box.

To be able to activate the load limit control with the control lever:

„ In the main menu -> Menu Engine -> Menu "ConstantPower" select the "Activation Constant

Power" parameter and allow or do not allow activation with the selection box.

To activate the load limit control:

„ Tap the control lever (1) 2x briefly to the right.

The load limit control can be deactivated by doing one of the following:

„ Actuate the control lever (accelerate / decelerate).

„ Turn the main mode switch to "Road mode".

„ Press the brake pedal.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 295

17 Operation device

17.19 Engine speed management

17.19

Engine speed management

With the engine speed management, the diesel engine speed is automatically adjusted in field mode for certain operating conditions. If the machine is stationary or the intake is switched off, e.g, the diesel engine speed is automatically reduced. When the intake is switched on and the machine is started up again, the rated speed of the diesel engine is activated.

EQ002-395 / EQ002-541

Activating the engine speed management:

„ In the main menu -> Engine menu -> "Diesel engine" menu, set the status of the "Engine speed management in field mode activated/deactivated" to "yes".

The following parameters can be set:

• KMC-688: Time after which the engine speed is reduced when the machine is stationary.

• KMC-731: Idle speed in field mode when the chopping drum is not rotating.

• KMC-733: Idle speed in field mode when the chopping drum is rotating and the header has been switched off.

1 2

296

3

BX002-754

When the engine speed management is active, the diesel engine speed cannot be adjusted manually via the "Increase diesel engine speed" (1) or "Decrease diesel engine speed" (3) keys.

If the rated speed of the diesel engine is to be adjusted:

„ Deactivate the engine speed management.

„ Using the "Increase diesel engine speed" (1) and "Reduce diesel engine speed" (3) keys, set the desired rated speed of the diesel engine.

„ To save the set rated speed, press the “Diesel engine speed” key (2) for 3 s.

Æ An information message appears on the terminal stating that the rated speed of the diesel engine has been saved.

„ If required, re-activate the engine speed management.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

AutoScan 17.20

17.20

AutoScan

The AutoScan system controls the chop length depending on the degree of maturity of the plants which are harvested by the EasyCollect or XCollect.

Using the AutoScan sensor in the central tip of the EasyCollect or the XCollect, the system detects the degree of maturity of the maize plants and calculates the optimum chop length of the maize plants based on the values input previously for the minimum and maximum chop length and controls the speed of the pre-compression rollers accordingly.

The AutoScan system is available for maize mode only.

1

BXG000-048

The AutoScan system controls according to four specifications:

• The minimum chop length

• The maximum chop length

• The degree of maturity at which the automatic chop length adjustment starts.

• The degree of maturity at which the automatic chop length adjustment ends.

To change the parameters for these specifications:

„ In the main menu -> Menu Crop flow -> Menu "AutoScan" select a parameter and change

the setting with the selection box, see Page 396 .

To activate the AutoScan system:

„ In the main menu -> Menu Crop flow -> Menu "AutoScan" set the chop length calculation

mode (1) to "Moisture measurement", see Page 396 .

To deactivate the AutoScan system:

„ In the main menu -> Menu Crop flow -> Menu "AutoScan" set the chop length calculation

mode (1) to "Manual setting", see Page 396 .

17.21

CropControl

The CropControl system permits full yield recording and documentation of the harvested fields.

3

3

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-047

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 297

17 Operation device

17.21 CropControl

INFO

The CropControl system is not a measuring system under the terms of German metrology and calibration law.

INFO

The counter only indicates the laden weight precisely when CropControl has been calibrated for the field by means of counterweighing and when the crop on the field is homogeneous in terms of moisture. Otherwise major discrepancies may occur.

„ To access the menu "CropControl", press in the Main menu -> Menu Crop flow -> Menu

CropControl, see Page 408 .

On the terminal the "CropControl" (3) indicator lamp shows the current status of the counterweighing. When the indicator lamp is pressed, the menu "CropControl counterweighing"

opens, see Page 321 .

Counterweighing and calibration

To ensure that the yield measurement is accurate, the CropControl system must be calibrated.

Carry out a counterweighing for each area and type of crop.

To receive correct measured values, carry out a counterweighing after chaffing.

When counterweighing is complete and the entered weight of the counterweighing has been applied, the correction factor is recalculated.

ü The path sensor has been calibrated,

see Page 408

.

ü An empty tractor/wagon combination with a known empty weight is available.

ü The machine is stopped.

The following conditions must be met for counterweighing to ensure that the yield measurement is accurate:

• select a trailer load corresponding to the average of the total field,

• drive at average driving speed and engine load.

Perform counterweighing:

„ Position the empty tractor/wagon combination next to the machine.

„ To start the counterweighing, press , in the following dialogue field press

and start chopping.

„ Load the tractor/wagon combination.

NOTE! Ensure that all harvested chopping crops are loaded on the tractor/wagon combination.

„ When the tractor/wagon combination has been loaded, stop the counterweighing.

„ To stop the counterweighing, press .

„ Weigh the tractor/wagon combination.

NOTE! Ensure that no loss of crops occurs when driving to the weighing scale.

298

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

PowerSplit 17.22

Chopping can not continue while the weighing is being weighed.

„ Determine the laden weight of the tractor/wagon combination (full weight minus empty weight of the tractor/wagon combination).

„ To enter the value of the laden weight as a counterweighing value, press

and enter the value via the value input field.

Æ Counterweighing is complete. The correction factor is automatically determined from this counterweighing and from then is taken as a basis for the yield recording.

NOTE! Delete current counterweighing.

„ To delete the current counterweighing, press .

Æ The counterweighing implemented beforehand is displayed and the correction factor, determined from this counterweighing, is taken from then as a basis for the yield recording.

17.22

PowerSplit

The PowerSplit is used to increase the efficiency of the machine. The continuous engine performance is adjusted to the application conditions and therefore helps to optimise the fuel consumption.

The PowerSplit automatically switches between ECO-Power and X-Power, depending on the speed of the diesel engine.

ECO-Power automatically switches to X-Power if the engine speed drops below 1700 rpm during chopping.

X-Power automatically switches to ECO-Power when the engine speed exceeds 1700 rpm again and the engine load is above the switchover load (factory basic setting 80%).

X-Power always switches back to ECO-Power mode abruptly as soon as the engine is relieved to the necessary extent.

EQG002-064

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 299

17 Operation device

17.23 Contents sensor system

EQG002-065

Setting the PowerSplit:

„ In the main menu -> Menu Engine -> Submenu "Diesel engine settings" set the status of the

"PowerSplit" to "Discontinuous switchover" or "Continuous switchover".

In the case of discontinuous switchover, the switchover occurs abruptly at the set rotational speed.

In the case of continuous switchover, the switchover occurs continuously and starts 100 rpm before the set rotational speed.

1

3

A

XPWR

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-066

Following activation of the PowerSplit, the indicator lamp on the terminal is lit for the engine management (1) or for the automatic switchover of the engine management.

As soon as the "ECO/X-Power" key for manual ECO-Power/X-Power switchover is pressed on the keypad, the automatic operation of the PowerSplit is interrupted and the selected engine characteristic ECO-Power or X-Power is retained.

17.23

Contents sensor system

There are 2 systems for measuring the contents in the crops:

• Measurement of moisture in crops (for "CropControl, NIR sensor including printer" version)

The NIR sensor is installed in the spout and measures the moisture in the crops.

• Measurement of contents and moisture in crops (for "CropControl, AgriNIR online sensor including printer" version)

The AgriNIR online sensor is installed in the spout and measures the moisture and the content of starch, protein, ADF, NDF, ash and crude fat in the crops.

• Crop contents measurement (in "KRONE NIR Control dual" version)

The KRONE NIR Control dual sensor is installed in the spout and, depending on the crop, measures the moisture, dry matter and the content of starch, crude ash, crude fat, crude protein, crude fibre, NDF, ADF, sugar and ELOS in the crops.

300

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Contents sensor system 17.23

The values for the moisture (using the NIR sensor) and the content of starch, crude ash, crude fat, crude protein, crude fibre, NDF, ADF, sugar and ELOS in the crops (using KRONE NIR

Control dual) are displayed on the customer counter and can also be displayed in the information section.

NOTICE

Stones in the crop flow will damage the sensor window

If fields contain a lot of stones, there is a risk that the sensor window will be scratched and the system will no longer be able to determine correct data.

„ If fields contain a lot of stones, dismount NIR sensor or KRONE NIR Control dual and mount the cover sheet instead.

NIR sensor (for "CropControl, NIR sensor including printer" version)

The NIR sensor system is ready to measure only in the chopping process with adequate crop material in the crop flow.

EQG003-108

„ In the menu "Crop flow" -> "Contents sensor" -> "Settings" place the used moisture sensor on "NIR sensor".

„ Select the type of crop.

Æ The NIR sensor is operational and starts taking measurements as soon as an adequate amount of crop material in the crop flow is flowing in front of the sensor.

INFO

To obtain more precise measurement values with the moisture sensor (NIR sensor), carry out a basic calibration before the start of the season. In doing so, the machine is calibrated once for the crop types maize and grass.

Please contact your dealer to make an appointment at least 5 working days before the start of operations.

AgriNIR online sensor (for "CropControl, AgriNIR online sensor including printer" version)

The AgriNIR online sensor system is ready to measure only in the chopping process with adequate crop material in the crop flow.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 301

17 Operation device

17.23 Contents sensor system

EQG003-108

„ In the menu "Crop flow" -> "Contents sensor" -> "Settings" place the used moisture sensor on "AgriNIR sensor".

„ Select the type of crop.

Æ 2 min after starting, the AgriNIR sensor is operational and starts taking measurements as soon as an adequate amount of crop material in the crop flow is flowing in front of the sensor.

The system is automatically calibrated approximately every 15 min. This occurs depending on the engine load, usually in the headland.

The values of the contents can be sent by CCI.Control Mobile to an appropriately configured

Apple iPad.

KRONE NIR Control dual sensor

The KRONE NIR Control dual system is ready to measure only in the chopping process with adequate crop material in the crop flow.

302

EQG003-108

„ In the menu "Crop flow" -> "Contents sensor" -> "Settings" place the used moisture sensor on "KRONE NIR Control dual".

„ Select the crop type.

Æ The KRONE NIR Control dual sensor is operational and starts taking measurements as soon as an adequate amount of crop material in the crop flow is flowing in front of the sensor.

INFO

If the KRONE NIR Control dual is not to be used to measure contents, KRONE recommends dismounting the KRONE NIR Control dual and mounting the cover sheet instead. This reduces wear on the sensor and increases the lifetime of the system.

„ Store the sensor in a dry place, protected from frost and direct sunlight.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Operating VariQuick electrically 17.24

17.24

Operating VariQuick electrically

With the "Electrical VariQuick" version, the corn conditioner can be lifted and lowered electrically by means of an operation unit. This makes start-up in grass mode or maize mode easier.

1

2

3 4

5

6

BX002-205 / BX002-206

„ Connect the operation unit (1) with the socket (2) of the forage harvester.

„ In order to switch on the operation unit, press key (6).

Æ The LED (3) lights up.

„ In order to lift the corn conditioner, press key (4).

„ In order to lower the corn conditioner, press key (5).

„ In order to switch off the operation unit, press key (6).

Æ The LED (3) goes out.

17.25

Operating VariLOC chop length gearbox

NOTICE

Machine will be damaged by an unapproved use of the VariLOC chop length gearbox

If the VariLOC chop length gearbox is not used with a complete set of blades and not for corn crops, the machine may be damaged.

„ Use the VariLOC chop length gearbox only with the MaxFlow chopping drum and with a complete set of blades consisting of 28 or 36 blades.

„ Use the VariLOC chop length gearbox for corn crops only.

The VariLOC chop length gearbox is an additional gearbox in the belt pulley of the chopping drum. The cutting length range of the chopping drum can be increased by up to 53 % by switching the drum speed from 1,250 rpm to 800 rpm using a standard open-ended spanner. It is therefore possible to choose quickly between long and short cut.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 303

17 Operation device

17.25 Operating VariLOC chop length gearbox

304

BEI000-248

Number of blades

Chop length for a non-reduction gearbox (transmission ratio 1:1)

28 4–22 mm

36 3-17 mm

Chop length for a reduction gearbox

(transmission ratio 1:1.5)

10-30 mm

10-24 mm

Prerequisite

It must be known in which position the VariLOC chop length gearbox is.

If the position is not known:

„ Start the machine.

„ Switch on the chopping drum and leave the diesel engine running at idle speed (1,100 rpm).

„ Read off the chopping drum speed on the terminal.

„ Read off the gearbox position in the table for the chopping drum speed which has been read off.

Chopping drum speed

660–760 rpm

440–506 rpm

Gearbox position

Gearbox position I (transmission 1:1)

Gearbox position II (transmission 1:1.5)

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Operating VariLOC chop length gearbox 17.25

17.25.1

Switching VariLOC cutting length gearbox

BX001-865

„

Relieve the main belt, see Page 516 .

„ Remove the screw connections (1) and remove the belt guard (2).

BX001-866

„ Place the hexagon wrench (1) on the gearbox.

„ Place the wrench (WAF 36) (2) on the nut in the centre of the gearbox so that it is situated at the height of the middle arrow.

„ If the position of the wrench is not in alignment with the arrow, turn the belt pulley using the hexagon wrench until the positions are in alignment.

„ Lock the cutter drum,

see Page 517 .

NOTICE

Damage to the VariLOC chop length gearbox due to incorrect operation

If the wrench (2) is re-attached during the adjustment or is moved with excessive force or if the gearbox is operated in the neutral position, the VariLOC chop length gearbox may be damaged.

„ Do not re-attach the wrench (2) during the adjustment.

„ Do not move the wrench (2) with excessive force (maximum 60 Nm).

„ Operate the gearbox only in gearbox stages I (transmission ratio 1:1) or II (transmission ratio 1:1.5).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 305

17 Operation device

17.25 Operating VariLOC chop length gearbox

BX001-867

„ Turn the wrench (2) into the required position until it is at the height of the arrow.

ð The coupling clicks into place.

ð The coupling does not engage correctly.

„ Turn the belt pulley using the hexagon wrench until the coupling clicks into place.

„ To check the gearbox position, move the wrench (2) into the required position until resistance is felt.

ð If the wrench (2), when released, is pressed back by spring force, the coupling is correctly engaged.

ð It must not be possible to turn the belt pulley with the hexagon wrench, as the chopping drum is locked.

„ Remove the wrench and the hexagon wrench.

BX001-865

„ Attach the belt guard (2) and secure with the screw connections (1).

„ Unlock the chopping drum,

see Page 517

.

17.25.2

VariLOC cutting length gearbox settings on the terminal

The mechanically set transmission ratio of the VariLOC cutting length gearbox must be set on the terminal.

• Automatic mode: Here the gearbox position is determined independently of the machine.

• Normal mode: Transmission ratio 1:1

• Gearbox geared-down: Transmission ratio 1:1.5

306

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Operating VariLOC chop length gearbox 17.25

Setting the transmission ratio using automatic mode

1

2

EQG003-103

„ In the main menu -> Crop flow menu -> Main coupling menu -> set the VariLOC transmission ratio (1) to "Automatic mode" (2).

1

EQG003-120

When the main coupling has been switched on, the machine control automatically detects the gearbox position of the VariLOC cutting length gearbox.

On the status line the "VariLOC cutting length gearbox" key (1) shows the set transmission ratio of the VariLOC cutting length gearbox must be set on the terminal.

Icon Explanation

VariLOC chop length gearbox transmission ratio 1:1

VariLOC cutting length gearbox transmission ratio 1:1.5

Automatische Erkennung Schaltstellung VariLOC nicht möglich. Bitte im manuellen Betrieb wechseln.

1

2

EQG003-121

If no gearbox position of the VariLOC cutting length gearbox is detected, an information message (2) appears and the "VariLOC cutting length gearbox" key (1) is highlighted in red.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 307

17 Operation device

17.25 Operating VariLOC chop length gearbox

If the information message (2) is displayed:

„ Manually set the transmission ratio for the VariLOC cutting length gearbox.

Setting the transmission ratio manually

After each switching process on the VariLOC cutting length gearbox, the VariLOC transmission ratio must be reset on the terminal.

1

EQG002-075

„ In the main menu -> Crop flow menu -> Main coupling menu -> set the VariLOC transmission ratio (1) for non-reduction gearbox to "Normal mode" (2) or for reduction gearbox to "Reduction gearbox" (3).

The transmission ratio can be set alternatively in the season settings:

2

3

1

2

3

EQG002-076

„ In the season settings -> VariLOC transmission ratio -> set the VariLOC transmission ratio (1) for non-reduction gearbox to "Normal mode" (2) or for reduction gearbox to

"Reduction gearbox" (3).

Perform a function test

Perform a function test to ensure that the setting on the VariLOC cutting length gearbox matches the setting on the terminal:

„ Start the machine.

„ Switch on the chopping drum and allow the diesel engine to run at idle speed (1,100 rpm).

„ Check the rotational speed of the chopping drum on the terminal and use that value to find the related gearbox position in the table.

308

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Operating the auto-loading system 17.26

Chopping drum speed

660 ... 760 rpm

440 ... 506 rpm

Gearbox position

Gearbox position I (transmission ratio 1:1)

Gearbox position II (transmission ratio 1:1.5)

„ Check whether the gearbox position in the table matches the setting on the terminal.

ð The setting on the terminal does not match the actual setting on the VariLOC cutting length gearbox.

„ Change the setting on the VariLOC cutting length gearbox or the setting on the terminal.

Information message

If the gearbox setting does not match the setting on the terminal, a message will be displayed on the terminal as soon as the main coupling is connected or the grinding process is started.

EQG002-077

If the information message is displayed:

„ Change the setting on the VariLOC cutting length gearbox or the setting on the terminal.

17.26

Operating the auto-loading system

17.26.1

Camera monitor status display

2 3

4

1

8

EQ003-204

6 7 6 5

The keys in the status line display the current status of the corresponding parts via colours and icons.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 309

17 Operation device

17.26 Operating the auto-loading system

(1) Filling level line

Symbol

Green

Orange

Explanation

The filling level in this area is not higher than the "Maximum filling level for the first pass-through" which was set with the filling strategy "from front to rear and then from rear to front" or "from rear to front and then from front to rear".

The filling level in this area has reached or exceeded the "Maximum filling level".

(2) Wagon opening

Symbol green line

Explanation

Represents the wagon opening detected by the camera.

When the wagon is full: Change from the green line to an orange line.

(3) Destination

Symbol Explanation

Destination which the automatic system attempts to aim for.

(4) end stop of the spout

Symbol orange line

Explanation

The line shows the end stop of the spout. The spout can not reach the hatched area. When the spout reaches the end stop, the orange line blinks and the filling direction is changed automatically after a waiting time of 2 s.

(5) Target point shifting

The transverse movement moves the target point towards the width of the forage transport wagon.

(6) Driving speed

Symbol Explanation

The driving speed of the transport vehicle must be increased. The autoloading system cannot control the destination because the spout is reaching the end stop.

The driving speed of the transport vehicle must be reduced. The autoloading system cannot control the destination because the spout is reaching the end stop.

310

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Operation device 17

Operating the auto-loading system 17.26

(7) Error states

Symbol Explanation

The camera unit glass is dirty and must be cleaned.

It is too dark, the headlights on the machine must be switched on.

The camera is overexposed. Switch the disruptive light source off or turn it away.

(8) Filling strategy

Filling the forage transport wagon from the front to the rear to "maximum filling level".

Filling the forage transport wagon from the rear to the front to "maximum filling level".

Filling the forage transport wagon from the front to the rear to "maximum filling level in the first pass-through", then filling it from the rear to the front to "maximum filling level".

Filling the forage transport wagon from the rear to the front to "maximum filling level in the first pass-through", then filling it from the front to the rear to "maximum filling level".

With the automatic spout flap system, the spout flap is directed towards a desired target.

17.26.2

Activating/deactivating auto-loading system

WARNING

Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine

Automatically controlled machine functions must be monitored by the driver. When using automatic functions, the driver must pay particular attention to ensuring that people near the machine and along the travel path are not endangered.

„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine.

„ The driver must not leave the cabin during operation.

„ The driver must continuously observe automatic functions which are in operation so that he can immediately resume manual control if any hazards, obstructions or interruptions occur.

ü The intake and the header are switched on.

ü The spout is aligned with the centre of the transport vehicle.

ü The machine header is located at the height of the transport vehicle drawbar.

ü Input 3 of the camera monitor is selected.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 311

17 Operation device

17.26 Operating the auto-loading system

1

2

3

BX002-645

„ Press the "Mirror/park spout" button (2) once to activate the auto-loading system.

„ To deactivate the auto-loading system, press one of the keys "Turn spout left/right" (3)

(level 2) or " Spout flap up/down" (1) (level 2).

17.26.3

Selecting filling strategy

„ To select the required filling strategy, select the menu "Crop flow", "Auto-loading system",

"Settings" on the terminal.

ð The transport vehicle is automatically filled.

Changing the filling strategy

The filling strategy can be changed during operation.

„ To select the required filling strategy, select the menu "Crop flow", "Auto-loading system",

"Settings" on the terminal.

ð The automatic system starts with the first phase of the new filling strategy. The filling levels available of the forage transport wagon are taken into account here.

Manual override

The automatic function can be overridden manually if areas of the forage transport wagon are not filled correctly.

„ Press the "Rotate spout CW" (level 1) or "Rotate spout CCW" (level 1) on the control lever until the required segment of the loading and forage transport wagon is reached.

ð The selected segment of the loading and forage transport wagon is filled up to the set target height. Next, the automatic system returns to the original strategy.

Using automatic spout flap

With the automatic spout flap system, the spout flap is directed towards a desired target.

„ Press the "Rotate spout CW" (level 1) or "Rotate spout CCW" (level 1) on the control lever to rotate the spout.

„ Press the "Spout flap" (level 1) button on the control lever to adjust the target point on the longitudinal axis of the wagon.

„ To deactivate the automatic spout flap system, press the "Spout flap" key (level 2) on the drive lever.

312

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

17.26.4

Transverse movement of the destination

Operation device 17

Operating the dirt seal 17.27

EQ002-525

The transverse movement moves the target point towards the width of the forage transport wagon.

• With a value of "0", the centre of the forage transport wagon is aimed at.

• With a value of "-10", the forage transport wagon side wall facing the machine is aimed at.

• With a value of "10", the forage transport wagon side wall facing away from the machine is aimed at.

„ To move the target point, press the key "Spout flap down" (level 1) or "Spout flap up" (level

1) until the required position is reached.

Æ After releasing the key, the automatic system resumes control.

17.27

Operating the dirt seal

1 2

1

3

BX002-735

When the "dirt seal" accessories kit is mounted, a roller (1) can be used to protect the area between cabin and intake against contamination during the chopping process.

ü The lifting unit is lowered until the header rests on the ground.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Hold the roller (1) by the handles (2), pull it down and hook it into the support (3).

If, for example due to maintenance, the area between cabin and intake must remain free:

„ Hold the roller (1) by the handles (2), pull it out of the mounting brackets (3) and let it retract.

Dismounting the roller

The roller can be dismounted if necessary.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 313

17 Operation device

17.27 Operating the dirt seal

1

2 3

2

BX002-736

ü The lifting unit is lowered until the header rests on the ground.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ To unlock the locking pins (3) of the roller, pull the handles (1) on both sides of the machine towards the centre of the machine and remove the roller (2) from below.

Mounting the roller back on

2

1

3

BX002-737

ü The lifting unit is lowered until the header rests on the ground.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Insert the roller (1) from below into the holding fixtures (2) on both sides of the machine, until the locking pins (3) engage.

314

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

18

18.1

Terminal 18

Display design 18.1

Terminal

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

INFO

The working screens and menus in the following chapters show all possible machine versions. Therefore, the working screen and the menus on the terminal of your machine may differ.

Display design

1

2

EQG002-015

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Display

"On/Off" key

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Explanation

Touch display and input interface on the terminal.

Switches the display on/off.

As the terminal is switched on and off via the ignition, do not press the "On/Off" key until the terminal does not respond when the ignition is switched on/off.

315

18 Terminal

18.2

Description display

18.2

Description display

18.3

EQG002-014

The display is used for displaying and entering data. It provides information about the current operating status of the machine. Settings can be made and different functions can be run.

To provide menu guidance and entry of values/data, the terminal is equipped with a touchcapable display. Touching the display enables you to call up and change values.

„ To run a specific function, press the appropriate key on the display.

„ To change a value quicker, press the respective key for more than 2 seconds.

„ To scroll in selection windows, drag a finger over the display.

Possible terminals

I II

316

EQG003-140

An 8" terminal (I) or a 12" terminal (II) (for version with "Premium-Comfort cabin") can be installed in the forage harvester.

The following description is explained in the example of the 12" terminal (II), but applies to both terminals. However, menus or displays may be arranged differently on the 8" terminal (I).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

18.4

Terminal 18

Input window 18.4

Input window

If a parameter with a numerical value is selected in a menu, an input window opens. The input window can be used to enter and then to release a new setpoint value for the parameter via a keypad.

EQG000-008

Operate input window

EQG002-061

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Icon

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Designation

Cancel

Save

Value

Explanation

Cancels the entry and closes the input window without saving the entry.

Saves the entered value and closes the input window.

Indicates the currently saved or newly entered value, in this example the value 50%.

Deletes the last digit of the value.

Delete last digit

Delete value Deletes the input value.

Standard value (example) Sets the value to the preset standard value (in this example the value

50).

Point Inputs a decimal point.

317

18 Terminal

18.5

Selection window

Pos.

8

9

10

11

Icon

-

Designation

Keys "0" to "9"

Plus/minus

-100 (example)

-10 (example)

Explanation

Input the numerical values 0 to 9.

Switches the algebraic sign of the value.

• Each time the key is pressed, the current value is increased or reduced by the indicated value.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value changes continuously by the indicated value.

12

13

+10 (example)

+100 (example)

14

15

Minimum/maximum value Indicates the minimum and maximum value of the parameter.

Parameter designation Indicates the parameter designation, in this example "sensitivity".

If a value is input which is less than the minimum value, the value cannot be saved and the minimum value (14) is shown in red.

If a value is input which is greater than the maximum value, the value cannot be saved and the maximum value (14) is shown in red.

„ Input the required value via the keys (7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13).

ð The value appears in the "Value" display range (3).

„ To save the entered value, press .

18.5

Selection window

If there are several selection options for an input field, a corresponding selection window opens.

1 2

3

4

5

EQG002-060

318

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

2

3

4

5

Pos.

1

Icon Designation

Cancel

Save

Slide controller

Possible selection

Current selection

Terminal 18

Selection window 18.5

Explanation

Cancels the entry and closes the selection window without saving the entry.

Saves the entered value and closes the selection window.

Moves the list up and down with the selection options.

Can be selected.

Indicates the selection made or the saved setting

„ To choose the required setting, press

ð The chosen selection is highlighted with

.

.

„ To save the chosen selection, press .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 319

19 Terminal machine functions

19 Terminal machine functions

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

~~~

2 3 2

1 1

~~~

3

6

4

6

3

5

TC km/h

12.0

5

3

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-011

After switching on the ignition the working screen "Road mode" or the working screen "Field mode" is opened in the main window, depending on the position of the Main Mode Switch.

• The working screen "Road mode" shows the most-important engine and driving data.

• The working screen "Field mode" shows information about the field mode. Several settings for the field mode can be made when in the working screen.

The working screen is divided up into the following display ranges:

Pos.

1

Designation

Status line

2

3

4

5

6

Malfunction warning panel

Title bar

Direct input field mode

Information section

Engine and driving data

Explanation

Shows the current states of the machine, see

Page 321

.

Indicates error states of malfunctions.

Is only visible when malfunctions occur,

see

Page 326

.

Keys for counter menu, error menu and main

menu, see Page 327 .

Keys for direct input of the most important settings in field mode (on "Field mode" working

screen only), see Page 341 .

Freely assignable keys, see Page 345

Indicates current fuel levels, engine and traction

drive data, see Page 345

.

320

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Status line 19.1

19.1

Status line

~~~

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

3

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-044

The keys in the status line display the current status of the corresponding parts via colours and icons.

The status line only displays keys for the functions which are installed on the machine or released. This means that the status line could also include a smaller number of keys.

(1) Surface counter

Icon Explanation

The customer counter is inactive.

The customer counter is active.

The surface counter is active.

When a key is pressed, the "Counter" menu opens, see Page 328 .

(2) CropControl (optional)

Icon Explanation

No counterweighing has been performed.

The counterweighing is completed (after entering the value of the counterweighing).

Counterweighing has started.

Counterweighing has stopped.

When a key is pressed, the CropControl "Counterweighing" menu opens.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 321

19 Terminal machine functions

19.1

Status line

(3) Header

Icon Explanation

The header is inactive.

The header is active.

The header is active and reversed.

322

When a key is pressed, the header "Settings" menu opens,

see Page 395 .

(4) Lifting unit control

Icon Explanation

The lifting unit bearing pressure control is inactive.

The lifting unit bearing pressure control is active.

The control regulates the pressure of header on the ground to a constant value.

The lifting unit distance control is inactive.

The lifting unit distance control is active.

The control constantly sets the height of the header relative to the ground (optional, only in conjunction with attached ground contour sensor system).

The lifting unit position control is currently inactive.

The lifting unit position control is active.

The control constantly adjusts the height of header relative to the machine.

If a key is pressed, the "Calibration" sub-menu of the "Lifting Unit" menu opens,

see Page 398 .

(5) Foreign object detection

The foreign object detection key shows the status of metal detection and of RockProtect (for the

"RockProtect" design).

Icon Explanation

The metal detection or RockProtect (for "RockProtect" version) are not available.

Metal detection and RockProtect (for "RockProtect" version) are active.

The metal detection detected metal in the intake, or RockProtect (for the

"RockProtect" version) detected a stone in the intake.

The intake stops abruptly.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Status line 19.1

Icon Explanation

The metal detection unit detected metal in the intake.

The intake stops abruptly.

RockProtect (for "RockProtect" version) detected a stone in the intake.

The intake stops abruptly.

The metal detection or RockProtect (for "RockProtect" version) are inactive.

The intake continues to run if the metal detection detects metal in the intake of if RockProtect detects a rock in the intake.

When a key is pressed, the foreign object detection "Settings" menu opens, see Page 397 .

(6) Automatic steering system (option)

Icon Explanation

ISOBUS automatic steering system is inactive.

ISOBUS automatic steering system is ready.

The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release switches have been actuated.

ISOBUS automatic steering system is active.

The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release switches and the "Automatic steering system" key have been actuated.

Row tracer automatic steering system is inactive.

Row tracer automatic steering system is ready.

The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release switches have been actuated.

Row tracer automatic steering system is active.

The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release switches and the "Automatic steering system" key have been actuated.

When a key is pressed, the automatic steering system "Settings" menu opens, see Page 424

.

(7) Silage additives unit

The silage additives unit key shows the status of the external silage additives unit, the silage additives unit fine dosing or the silage additives unit coarse dosing if one or more of these silage additives units are attached.

If only one silage additives unit is attached, the key for this silage additives unit is shown on the status line.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 323

19 Terminal machine functions

19.1

Status line

Icon Explanation

The attached silage additives units are inactive

The attached silage additives units are active are in automatic mode

External silage additives unit is inactive.

External silage additives unit is permanently active

Automatic mode switched off, external silage additives unit is inactive

Automatic mode switched on, external silage additives unit is active

Silage additives unit coarse dosing is inactive

Silage additives unit coarse dosing is permanently active

Automatic mode switched on, silage additives unit coarse dosing is inactive

Automatic mode switched on, silage additives unit coarse dosing is active

When a key is pressed, the "Silage additives unit" menu opens, see Page 410 .

(8) Auto-loading system

Symbol Explanation

The auto-loading system is deactivated.

The auto-loading system is inactive, no transport vehicle was detected.

The spout must be manually controlled.

The auto-loading system is inactive, a transport vehicle was detected.

Activation is possible.

The auto-loading system is active. The transport vehicle is being filled.

The auto-loading system is active. The transport vehicle is full.

The auto-loading system is active. No transport vehicle was detected.

As soon as a transport vehicle is detected, the auto-loading system takes over filling of the transport vehicle.

324

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Status line 19.1

(9) VariLOC cutting length gearbox

Icon Explanation

VariLOC chop length gearbox transmission ratio 1:1

VariLOC cutting length gearbox transmission ratio 1:1.5

Transmission ratio cannot be specified

(10, 11) Assignment of control lever keys M1 and M2

The control lever keys can be assigned with all functions (the table shows the assignment using the example of the M1 key):

Icon

M1

Explanation

Key assignment M1 and M2 inactive

M1

M1

M1

1

M1

M1

Maize header: Raise/lower plant divider

Grass header: Raise/lower holding-down clamp

Increase/reduce working width

Change saved chop length

Increase/reduce header speed

Swivel pendulum frame left/right

M1

M1

Increase/reduce discharge distance of the discharge accelerator (for

"StreamControl" version)

Raise/lower spout

M1

M1

Pressing and holding the key: Saving the spout flap position

Pressing the key briefly: Retrieving the spout flap position

Warning beacon (optional) /horn on

M1

M1

M1

Raise/lower hitch attachment (for version with "additional double-acting hydraulic connection at rear")

Raise/lower hopper (for version with "Additional double-acting hydraulic connection at rear")

Activate/deactivate auto-loading system (for "Auto-loading system" version)

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 325

19 Terminal machine functions

19.2

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel

When a key is pressed, the Control lever menu "Settings" opens, see Page 381 .

(12) assignments of momentary foot switches M5 and M6

All functions can be assigned to the momentary foot switches:

Icon

M5/M6

Explanation

Key assignment M5 and M6 inactive

M5/M6

M5/M6

M5/M6

M5/M6

M5/M6

M5/M6

M5/M6

M5/M6

M5/M6

M5/M6

Maize header: Raise/lower plant divider

Grass header: Raise/lower holding-down clamp

Unlock header (only left momentary foot switch)

Maize header: Fold header in / out

Grass header: Fold guide wheels in / out

Turn pendulum frame left/right

Rotate spout

Raise/lower spout

Pressing and holding the key: Saving the spout flap position

Pressing the key briefly: Retrieving the spout flap position

Increase/reduce discharge distance of the discharge accelerator (for

"StreamControl" version)

Warning beacon / horn ON

Lift / lower additional axle (for "Additional axle" version)

19.2

The Momentary foot switch menu "Settings" opens when you press a key, see Page 387

.

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel

!

326

EQG002-021

3

TC km/h

12.0

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

19.3

Terminal machine functions 19

Keys in the title bar 19.3

The following warnings and faults may appear in the “Malfunction warning panel” display range:

Icon Designation Explanation

"Torque reduction" indicator lamp Indicates that the diesel engine torque is being reduced

Yellow "Engine" warning lamp The engine electronics have detected a fault with the engine.

Red "Engine" warning lamp The engine electronics have detected a serious fault with the engine.

„ Immediately stop the engine and eliminate the fault.

"Intermediate gearbox lubrication" warning lamp

In addition, a horn sounds for 5 s and the prompt to stop the machine and to immediately switch off the main coupling appears in an error dialogue window

"Limited operation" warning lamp If the control electronics establish a fault with the traction drive, the speed of the machine is limited to 0 to 20 km/h depending on the severity of the fault.

WARNING! In addition, the traction control system, cruise control and anti-lock braking system functions are deactivated. Eliminate the error immediately. Restricted operation is used only for recovery of the machine.

"Pressure monitoring trailer brake" warning lamp

The required pressure for the trailer brake is not reached

"Frost protection mode" indicator lamp

Frost protection mode is activated when the ambient temperature and the engine coolant temperature fall below a defined limit. In frost protection mode, the engine speed is limited. A progress bar below the indicator lamp shows for how long the frost protection will continue to be active.

The indicator and warning lamps on the malfunction warning panel are only visible when the electronics detect a fault in the engine or in the traction drive.

The indicator and warning lamps are visible on all screens on the terminal, i.e. also in the main menu and the submenus.

Keys in the title bar

3

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-022

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 327

19 Terminal machine functions

19.3

Keys in the title bar

Icon Designation

"Counter" menu

"Error" menu

Main menu

19.3.1

“Counters” menu

Explanation

Opens the "Counter" menu.

Opens the "Error" menu.

Opens the main menu.

3

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-083

Current machine data can be retrieved via sub-menus in the “Counters” menu.

ü The working screen is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Counters” menu with its sub-menus.

“Customer Counter” menu

328

EQG002-055

Customer records can be created in the “Customer Counter” menu.

ü The “Counters” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The list with the created customers is displayed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Creating customer data record

Terminal machine functions 19

Keys in the title bar 19.3

EQG002-056

„ To create a customer data record, press .

ð The alphanumeric input field "Last name" opens.

„ Enter or change the data of the customer in the alphanumeric input field.

Operation alphanumeric input field

„ To change from capital letters to lower case letters and vice versa, press

„ Press to change from alphabetical to numerical keyboard.

„ To change from numerical to alphabetical keyboard, press .

„ Press to enter special sign.

„ To save the customer record, press .

„ To cancel the entry and keep the old setting, press .

.

EQG003-027

„ To enter more customer data, press .

ð The menu with the input fields for the customer record is displayed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 329

19 Terminal machine functions

19.3

Keys in the title bar

EQG003-029

„ To enter the customer data, press the appropriate key.

„ Enter the data via the alphanumeric input field.

EQG003-028

Æ The created customer data records are indicated in a list on the customer counter.

„ To create another customer data record, press .

„ To select a customer data record, press .

„ To select the surface counter for a customer, press .

330

EQG003-032

Æ The display shows the "Surfaces" overview for the particular customer.

Æ One "Surface 01" is automatically created for each new customer.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Keys in the title bar 19.3

Renaming surface

„ To open the “Details surface” window, press .

EQG003-020

„ To rename a surface, press the corresponding key; in this example, press

.

Æ The alphanumeric input field opens.

„ Rename the surface in the alphanumeric input field,

see Page 329

.

„ To delete the surface, press .

Creating a surface

EQG003-021

„ To create a surface for the customer, press .

Æ The alphanumeric input field opens.

„ Enter the name for the new surface in the alphanumeric input field,

see Page 329 .

Æ The created surfaces are displayed in a table in the "Surfaces" window.

If several surfaces are created for a customer, a line with the total values for the created surfaces of the customer appears at the end of the table.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 331

19 Terminal machine functions

19.3

Keys in the title bar

Deleting a surface

EQG002-074

„ To delete one or more surfaces, press .

Æ A selection view opens.

„ Select the surface or the surfaces that are to be deleted in the square at the end of the line.

„ To delete the selected surfaces, press .

332

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Starting and stopping surface counter

Terminal machine functions 19

Keys in the title bar 19.3

EQG003-022

„ To start the counter for each surface, press in the "Surfaces" window or

in the "Surface details" window.

Æ The counter starts and records the surface data until the counter is stopped again.

EQG002-059

Æ The currently recorded surface is shown in the "Customer counter" window and the

"Surfaces" window in the "Active customer counter" area The icon for the surface and for the customer is highlighted in green

„ To stop the counter, press

"Surface details" screen.

in the "Surfaces" window or in the

INFO

If the key is pressed for a surface, although the customer counter has been started for another surface, a direct change is made to the surfaces being recorded. In other words, the counter of the previously recorded surface is stopped and - at the same time

- the counter for the other surface is started.

Viewing current surface data

The “Details surface” window displays the current surface data.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 333

19 Terminal machine functions

19.3

Keys in the title bar

EQG003-020

Resetting the area counter

Each area counter can be reset in the "Area details" window so that all area data has the value zero.

EQ002-272 / EQ002-542

„ Select the area for which the area counter is to be reset.

„ To open the “Area details” window, press the required area

„ To reset the values of the area in the area counter, first press

Æ A selection window opens.

„ To reset the values of the area in the area counter, press

Æ The values of all this area data are set to zero.

.

.

.

334

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Keys in the title bar 19.3

"Day counter" menu

EQG003-024

ü The "Counter" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ Three day counters are shown that permanently record the current work and consumption data of the machine for the three currently running working periods. Date and time show when the day counters were last reset.

„ Press to complete the work periods and to reset the day counter.

in the corresponding line.

„ To select the values for a day counter, press

Æ The "Day counter details" window opens.

EQG003-023

The "Day counter details" window shows the following current data for the selected work period:

• Operating hours of the diesel engine

• Fuel consumption

• Fuel consumption per area

• Odometer (road, field, total)

• Area counter

• Operating hours of chopping drum

• Operating hours with header

The work periods can be reset individually so that each counter starts counting the data again from 0.

„ Press to complete the work period and to reset the day counter.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 335

19 Terminal machine functions

19.3

Keys in the title bar

“Total Counter” menu

EQG002-012

ü The “Counters” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The current work and consumption data of the machine is displayed.

The following current data is displayed:

• Operating hours of diesel engine, total number and depending on header.

• Chopping drum hours, total number and depending on header.

• Header hours, total number and depending on header.

• Surface counter, total number and depending on header.

• Fuel consumption and total consumption.

• Odometer (road, field, total distance).

For the "CropControl" version

336

EQG002-062

The printer (1) can be used to print out customer, day or total counter.

„ Select the counter which is to be printed out.

„ To start printing, press .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Keys in the title bar 19.3

19.3.2

“Error” menu

3

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-024

ü The working screen is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Errors” menu with its sub-menus.

“Active Errors” menu

EQG003-025

ü The “Errors” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Active Errors” menu with the active errors on the machine with error number and error designation.

„ To call up information on an error, press next to the error message.

Æ The window for the error description is shown.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 337

19 Terminal machine functions

19.3

Keys in the title bar

EQG003-026

1 Selected error number

2 Brief description of the error

„ To close the error description, press .

3 Description of the error

4 "Close" key

"Error history" menu

The error history can be cleared by a KRONE service technician only.

338

EQG003-090

ü The "Error" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Error history" menu with error messages that have occurred since the error history was last cleared.

„ To call up information on an error, press next to the error message.

Æ The window for the error description is shown.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Keys in the title bar 19.3

EQG003-026

1 Selected error number

2 Brief description of the error

„ To close the error description, press .

3 Description of the error

4 "Close" key

"Control units overview" menu

The "Control units overview" menu displays the control units of the machine on a diagram.

FM1

0

KMC

0

DRC

0

AKP

0

FM2

0

LUC

0

NM

0

LC

0

FM3

0

KP1

0

CE

0

KP2

0

SCS

0

EQG002-048

„ To open the overview, press .

The respective brief descriptions are on the squares for the control units.

The status of the individual control units is indicated by the colour of the squares.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 339

19 Terminal machine functions

19.3

Keys in the title bar

Icon Designation

Green square

Explanation

CAN activity available, no errors

Yellow square

Red square

CAN activity available, with one or more errors

No CAN activity available, error can not be determined

„ To open the overview of the control units of the engine bus, press .

KMC

0

CPC4

0

MCM

0

EQG002-041

„ To open the overview of the control units of the AUX bus, press

KMB1

0

GC

0

KMC

0

KMB2

0

KMB4

0

ASC

0

MRDT

0

AGC

0

.

EQG002-063

„ To call up information about a control unit, press the key on the respective control unit.

The corresponding information screen is displayed.

340

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Direct input “Field mode” 19.4

EQ002-433

„ To exit the information screen, press

19.3.3

Main menu

.

3

TC km/h

12.0

19.4

EQG002-013

ü The working screen has been selected.

„ To open the main menu, press .

For menu structure and to navigate in the menus,

see Page 351 .

Direct input “Field mode”

3

TC km/h

12.0

4

2

1

3

5

EQG002-018

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 341

19 Terminal machine functions

19.4

Direct input “Field mode”

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

Designation

Temporarily change working width or number of rows.

Changing the header speed

Change chop length

Change the lifting unit default value.

Change the corn conditioner roller distance.

Explanation

Temporarily change the working width (grass mode) or number of rows (maize mode).

Reduce or increase the specified speed for the header drive.

Set the chop length manually or automatically with "AutoScan".

Reduce or increase the default value for regulating the lifting unit.

Reduce or increase the default value for the corn conditioner roller distance (only for maize header).

The "Direct input field mode" can be used to make settings directly from the "Field mode" working screen without having to open the submenu.

To change the specified setting values, press or .

19.4.1

Pressing reduces the set value:

• By a specified value each time the key is pressed.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value is gradually reduced.

• If the key is held down for longer, the value is reduced more quickly.

Pressing increases the set value:

• By a specified value each time the key is pressed.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value is gradually increased.

• If the key is held down for longer, the value is increased more quickly.

Temporarily change working width or number of rows

The setting of the current working width is required to calculate the surface.

Depending on the header enabled in the parameters, the icon appears during direct input for the corresponding header and the enabled working width or the number of rows.

Grass mode

For the "EasyFlow" grass header and the "XDisc" direct cut header the working width in the upper field is in cm or inches (for the grass header the raked width).

Maize mode

For the "EasyCollect" and "XCollect" maize headers the number of set rows is in the upper field.

„

To temporarily change the default value for the working width, see Page 342

.

Æ The change is immediately accepted and displayed as a temporarily changed value in the upper field. The area is calculated with the temporarily set default value.

342

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Direct input “Field mode” 19.4

INFO

The value "Working width" or "Number of rows" in the season settings is not modified with this adjustment.

If the lifting unit is raised in the headland position, the parameter is reset to the value for the season settings.

19.4.2

Changing the header speed

The upper field on the left indicates the actual value and in the centre is the setpoint value for the speed of the header drive in rpm.

19.4.3

„

To temporarily change the default value for the rotational speed, see Page 342 .

Æ The change is immediately accepted and displayed on the left in the upper field.

Change chop length

Depending on the selected setting for the chop length (manually or via AutoScan), the icon for the corresponding chop length setting appears during direct input.

Manual setting

The upper field shows the value for the chop length in mm or inches.

The default value for the chop length can be adjusted depending on the number of blades on the chopping drum and the diesel engine type.

The setting range with the minimum and maximum chop length in mm can be found in the following table:

28

36

40

48

Number of blades

14

18

20

Minimum chop length

8 mm

6 mm

5 mm

4 mm

3 mm

2.5 mm

2 mm

Maximum chop length

45 mm

35 mm

31 mm

22 mm

17 mm

15 mm

12 mm

„ To change the default value for chop the length

see Page 342

.

Æ The change is immediately accepted and displayed on the left in the upper field.

Setting via "AutoScan"

The default value for the chop length is continuously modified automatically depending on the degree of maturity of the maize with the setting via the "AutoScan" system.

„ To switch from the setting via the "AutoScan" system to the manual setting, press

.

or

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 343

19 Terminal machine functions

19.4

Direct input “Field mode”

19.4.4

Changing the lifting unit control default value

Depending on the lifting unit control set in the parameters, the corresponding icon appears during direct input. The actual value (top left) and the setpoint value (top centre) for the lifting unit control is displayed in %.

Lifting unit bearing pressure control

The lifting unit ground pressure control regulates via control the pressure of header on the ground to a constant value.

• The setpoint value is stated as a percentage of the header dead weight.

For grass mode, the value can be set between -25 % (header sways over the ground) and

50 % (header presses with 50 % of its dead weight on the ground).

For maize mode, the value can be set between -25 % (header sways above the ground) and 25 % (header presses with 25 % of its dead weight on the ground).

Lifting unit position control

When the lifting unit position control is active, the control regulates the height of the header to a constant value relative to the machine.

Lifting unit distance control

Via the control, the lifting unit distance control constantly regulates the header height relative to the ground (only in connection with mounted ground tracers).

19.4.5

„

To temporarily change the default value for the lifting unit control, see Page 342 .

Æ The change is immediately accepted and displayed on the left in the upper field.

Changing Corn Conditioner Roller Distance

(Only for maize header)

INFO

The direct input “Change corn conditioner roller distance” is only active when corn conditioner is mounted.

The upper field on the left indicates the actual value and in the centre is the setpoint value for the roller distance of the corn conditioner.

„ To temporarily change the default value for the roller distance,

see Page 342 .

Æ The change is immediately accepted and displayed on the left in the upper field.

344

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal machine functions 19

Information area 19.5

19.5

Information area

3

TC km/h

12.0

1

19.6

EQG000-007

The keys in the information section can be freely assigned via a selection box.

Assigning keys

ü The working screen has been selected.

„ Press the key to be assigned.

ð The selection box opens up.

„ Select the required assignment.

„ To save the assignment, press .

„ To cancel the entry, press .

When the selection is saved, the existing assignment is overwritten.

Engine and driving data display range

The "Engine and driving data" display range shows the machine's current fuel levels, engine and driving data.

4

~~~

6 10 8 6 10

1

2

5 7

1

2

9 7

3

TC km/h

12.0

3

TC km/h

12.0

2

3

EQG002-016

Pos.

1

Designation

Display coolant temperature

Display fuel level

Display speed in digital format

Explanation

Indicates the current coolant temperature in °C

(digital and analogue).

Indicates the current fuel level as a % (digital and analogue).

Indicates the current speed in digital format in km/ h or mph.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 345

19 Terminal machine functions

19.6

Engine and driving data display range

Pos.

4

5

6

7

8

9

Designation Explanation

Display speed in analogue format Indicates the current speed in analogue format in km/h or mph (in "Road mode" working screen only).

Display engine speed in digital format

Displays the current engine speed in digital format in rpm (min ⁻ ¹).

Display engine speed in analogue format

Display engine load in digital format

Display engine load in analogue format

Switchover rear-view camera

Displays the current engine speed in analogue format in rpm (min ⁻ ¹).

Indicates the current engine load as % in digital format (in "Field mode" working screen only).

Indicates the current engine load as % in analogue format (in "Field mode" working screen only).

Optional analogue indication of the current engine performance in kW. Prerequisite: PowerSplit or XtraPower. The display can then be changed in the terminal at Cabin -> Terminal -> Engine round instrument work screen (only in the "Field operation" working screen).

Shows the display range for the rear-view camera and the camera for the auto-loading system.

Warning lamps for engine and fuel levels

Warning lamp for coolant temperature (1)

Icon Explanation

Coolant temperature OK.

Coolant temperature is in critical range.

Warning lamp for fuel level (2)

Icon Explanation

Fuel tank filling level greater than 10 %.

Fuel tank filling level less than 10 %.

346

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Display camera images on the terminal (9)

Terminal machine functions 19

Engine and driving data display range 19.6

1

2

3

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-084

The camera images can be displayed on the terminal.

„ To display the camera images on the terminal, press .

Æ The terminal shows the camera image that was most recently selected.

Select the camera (1)

Icon Explanation

The image of the rear-view camera is selected.

The image of the rear-view camera is displayed.

The image of the spout camera is selected.

The image of the spout camera is displayed.

3

TC km/h

12.0

Display on the terminal (2)

Icon Explanation

The mirroring of the camera image is selected.

The camera image is displayed as a mirror image

The display range for the camera image is increased.

The display range for the camera image is reduced.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 347

19 Terminal machine functions

19.7

Traction drive indicator lights

3

TC km/h

12.0

1

0

2

0.0

km/h

3

0 rpm

EQG002-085

The camera image can be zoomed in on the terminal.

„ To increase the display range for the camera image, press .

If the display range for the camera image is increased, the engine load (1), the speed (2) and the engine speed (3) are displayed digitally in the lower area of the display.

„ To reduce the display range for the camera image, press .

3

TC km/h

12.0

19.7

EQG002-086

„ To hide the camera image, press .

Traction drive indicator lights

The indicator lamps in the main display area for the traction drive provide information about the current engine and drive settings.

1

2

3

4

5

3

P

TC km/h

12.0

EQG002-017

348

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Display for acceleration behavior (1)

Indicates the current value for the acceleration behavior.

Icon Explanation

Low acceleration

1

Medium acceleration

2

High acceleration

3

Maximum acceleration

4

Terminal machine functions 19

Traction drive indicator lights 19.7

Indicator lamp for direction of travel and parking brake (2)

Indicates the direction of travel and the status of the parking brake.

Icon Explanation

Direction of travel forwards

Neutral mode (idle)

Direction of travel backwards

Parking brake is applied

Indicator lamp for engine management (3)

Indicates the status of the Power mode.

Icon Explanation

Manual "Eco-Power mode"

The diesel engine works in energy saving mode.

Manual "X-Power mode"

The diesel engine works in maximum power mode.

Automatic switchover between "Eco-Power mode" and "X-Power mode".

Indicator lamp for traction control system (TC) (4)

Displays the status of the traction control system (TC).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 349

19 Terminal machine functions

19.7

Traction drive indicator lights

Icon Designation

Traction control system

(TC) inactive

Explanation

Traction control system

(TC) stage I active

Traction control system

(TC) stage I regulates actively

Traction control system

(TC) stage II active

Traction control system

(TC) stage II regulates actively

The drive torque on the wheels is controlled.

Traction control system (TC) stage I allows only low slip (spinning wheels).

Connected traction control system (TC) stage I preserves the sward.

The drive torque on the wheels is controlled.

Traction control system (TC) stage II allows high slip (spinning wheels).

Traction control system (TC) stage II ensures that sufficient traction is provided even under difficult conditions.

Display for cruise control (5)

Indicates the status of the cruise control and the stored speed when operating with the cruise control.

Icon Designation

Cruise control is inactive

Explanation

The stored speed when the cruise control is operated is 12 km/h.

CONSTANT

POWER

CONSTANT

POWER

12.0 km/h

12.0 km/h

Cruise control active is active

Traction drive is at the power limit

ConstantPower load limit control is active

ConstantPower load limit control is active and the traction drive is at the power limit

The traction drive is at the power limit. The machine cannot be accelerated as long as this icon is shown. The icon can also show when the cruise control system is inactive.

The driving speed is controlled via the selected parameter of the ConstantPower load limit control,

see Page 295

.

The traction drive is at the power limit. The machine cannot be accelerated as long as this icon is shown.

350

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

20

20.1

Terminal - Menus 20

Menu structure 20.1

Terminal - Menus

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

Menu structure

The menu structure is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration.

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Machine, see Page 364

Electronics,

see Page 366

eSolutions

Activated add-ons

History

Telemetry

Telemetry

Diagnostics

Settings

Active errors

Error history

Overview of control units

CAN 2: Machine bus

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 351

20 Terminal - Menus

20.1

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

352

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

CAN 3: Engine bus

CAN 4: Aux bus

CAN 1: ISOBUS

Control unit versions

Software

Hardware

Information

Information

Lighting,

see Page 374

Working lights

Diagnostics

Key test

Camera systems

Camera system

Settings

Explanation

Cabin,

see Page 376

Terminal, see Page 378

Settings

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal - Menus 20

Menu structure 20.1

Explanation

Information

Armrest, see Page 379

Diagnostics

Key test

Control lever,

see Page 381

Settings

Key test

Background lighting, see Page 382

Settings

Control unit versions,

see Page 372

Control unit versions software

Control unit versions hardware

Printer,

see Page 384

Settings

Automatic climate control

Graphic

Settings

Diagnostics

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 353

20 Terminal - Menus

20.1

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

Remote maintenance, see Page 367

Remote maintenance

Diagnostics

Settings

Wiper,

see Page 386

Settings

Mirror heating

Settings

Momentary foot switch

Settings

Explanation

Lubrication

Central lubrication

Settings

Diagnostics

Service & maintenance

Intermediate gearbox lubrication

Diagnostics

354

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

Menu structure 20.1

Explanation

Crop flow

Header

Settings

Diagnostics

Header drive

Settings

Diagnostics

AutoScan

Overview

Settings

Intake

Settings

Diagnostics

Foreign object detection

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Lifting unit

355

20 Terminal - Menus

20.1

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

356

Explanation

Settings

Calibration

Diagnostics

Grinding device and counterblade

Settings

Diagnostics

Service & maintenance

Key test GC

Main coupling

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Corn conditioner

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Discharge accelerator

Settings

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal - Menus 20

Menu structure 20.1

Explanation

Diagnostics

Content material sensor

Settings

Diagnostics

CropControl

Counterweighing

Settings

Calibration

Diagnostics

Silage additives units

External silage additives unit

Settings

Silage additives unit fine dosing

Settings

Diagnostics

Silage additives unit coarse dosing

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 357

20 Terminal - Menus

20.1

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Explanation

Spout

Spout

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Auto-loading system

Measurements

Settings

Explanation

Engine

Diesel engine,

see Page 416

Settings

Diagnostics

Service & maintenance

ConstantPower

358

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal - Menus 20

Menu structure 20.1

Explanation

Settings

Compressed air cleaning

Diagnostics

Service & maintenance

Explanation

Hydraulics,

see Page 420

Header locking

Settings

Diagnostics

Working hydraulics, see Page 421

Settings

Diagnostics

Auxiliary hydraulics

Settings

Diagnostics

Explanation

Drive functions,

see Page 422

Automatic steering system,

see Page 424

Settings

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 359

20 Terminal - Menus

20.1

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

Diagnostics

Traction drive,

see Page 424

Diagnostics

Calibration

Additional axle

Settings

Diagnostics

Rear axle

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Trailer brake

Settings

Diagnostics

Explanation

Season settings

User level, see Page 429

360

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

Bringing up menu level 20.2

20.2

Bringing up menu level

EQ002-260

Depending on how the machine is equipped, the main menu is divided into the following menus:

Icon Designation

"Machine" menu

"Cabin" menu

"Central lubrication" menu

"Crop flow" menu

“Spout” menu

"Engine" menu

"Auxiliary Hydraulics" menu

"Drive Functions" menu

"Season settings" menu

"User level" menu

INFO

Touching the coloured parts of the machine illustration in the display directly opens the corresponding menus.

„ To bring up the menu level from the working screen, press .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 361

20 Terminal - Menus

20.3

Navigating in menus

20.3

Navigating in menus

The functions of the terminal are divided into menus. Navigate through the menu structure by using the keys in the individual menus.

„ To open the main menu from the working screen, press .

„ To open a menu from the main menu, press the key of the corresponding menu.

„ To open sub-menus from a menu, press the key of the corresponding sub-menu.

„ To change from one sub-menu to another one, press the key of sub-menu in the footer.

„ To leave the current menu, press .

„ To open the main menu from a menu, press selected.

repeatedly until the main menu is

„ To go one step forwards again after a step back, press .

„ To open the working screen from the main menu or a menu, press .

20.3.1

Changing/saving parameter

„ To change a parameter, press the corresponding parameter key.

Æ A value input field or a selection box opens depending on the setting menu.

„ If a value input field opens, change the value of the parameter.

„ If a selection box opens, change the selection of the parameter.

„ To save the setting, press .

„ To cancel the entry and keep the old setting, press .

20.4

“Diagnostics” menu explanation

INFO

The purpose of this chapter is to explain in general terms how to handle the diagnostics masks. The diagnostics masks which can be selected in the individual menus are no longer listed in detail.

The sensors/actuators and the readable process values of the menu component are listed in the

"Diagnostics" menus.

The applied voltages/currents can be read off for these components/values.

362

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Diagnostics” menu explanation 20.4

EQG002-050

1 Icon for the component type/process value

2 Number of the sensor/actuator

4 Status of the sensor/actuator

3 Designation of the sensor/actuator

5 Key for opening the sensor graphic display

6 Graphic display of the applied and permitted currents of the selected sensor/ actuator

„ To open the graphic display of a sensor or actuator, press .

INFO

This screen is needed in case of a contact with customer service as the service technician can conclude errors on the forage harvester from the values in this screen.

Component type/process value

Icon Explanation

Sensor

Actuator

Process value

Sensor/actuator status displays

Icon Explanation

Sensor/actuator active

Sensor/actuator inactive

Sensor attenuated

Sensor unattenuated

OK

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 363

20 Terminal - Menus

20.5

"Machine" menu

Icon Explanation

Not OK

Momentary switch pressed, switch closed

Momentary switch not pressed, switch not closed

Cable break

Short circuit

Cable break/short circuit

Other error

Status not available

20.5

"Machine" menu

364

EQG002-087

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the "Machine" menu, .

Æ The display shows the "Machine" menu with its menus.

The "Machine" menu is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration:

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Machine" menu 20.5

Explanation

Machine, see Page 364

Electronics,

see Page 366

eSolutions

Activated add-ons

History

Telemetry

Telemetry

Diagnostics

Settings

Active errors

Error history

Overview of control units

CAN 2: Machine bus

CAN 3: Engine bus

CAN 4: Aux bus

CAN 1: ISOBUS

Control unit versions

Software

365

20 Terminal - Menus

20.5

"Machine" menu

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Hardware

Information

Information

Lighting,

see Page 374

Working lights

Diagnostics

Key test

Camera systems

Camera system

Settings

20.5.1

"Electronics" menu

In the menu, you can display and select information about the electronic system, the lighting control and the camera system.

366

EQG002-090

ü The "Machine" main menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press and then

Æ The display shows the "Electronics" menu.

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Machine" menu 20.5

20.5.1.1

"E-Solutions" menu

"Activated add-ons" menu

The menu shows information on telemetry, faults and control units. It allows add-ons to be downloaded and activated add-ons to be displayed.

EQG002-091

ü The "Machine" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press and then

Æ The display shows the "E-Solutions" menu.

20.5.1.2

"Telemetry" menu

.

"Telemetry telemetry" menu

The "Telemetry" menu permits the data which is displayed on the terminal in the machine also to be displayed on the screen at the place of work of a KRONE customer service employee.

This requires the machine to be equipped with "SmartConnect" (for the "Smart Connect" version), which connects to the KRONE customer service through the mobile network, and transmits the data.

Telemetrie

EQG003-052

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press , then (telemetry).

Æ The display shows the "Telemetry telemetry" menu.

„ To start the remote maintenance, press Starten .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 367

20 Terminal - Menus

20.5

"Machine" menu

EQG002-046

During remote maintenance the mobile network used and the reception quality are displayed with icons.

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press and then .

Æ The display shows the "Telemetry diagnostics" menu.

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

"Telemetry settings" menu

The settings for the teleservice parameters are displayed in the "Telemetry settings" menu, and can be changed there.

368

EQG002-072

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, press first, then (Settings).

Æ The display shows the "Telemetry settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Machine" menu 20.5

20.5.1.3

"Active errors" menu

EQG002-093

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press and then .

Æ The display shows the "Active errors" menu with the active errors on the machine, together with error number and error designation

„ To call up information on an error, press next to the error message.

Æ The window for the error description is shown.

EQG003-026

1 Selected error number

2 Brief description of the error

„ To close the error description, press .

3 Description of the error

4 "Close" key

20.5.1.4

"Error history" menu

The error history can be cleared by a KRONE service technician only.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 369

20 Terminal - Menus

20.5

"Machine" menu

EQG002-094

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press and then .

Æ The display shows the "Error history" menu with error messages that have occurred since the error history was last cleared.

„ To call up information on an error, press next to the error message.

Æ The window for the error description is shown.

EQG003-026

1 Selected error number

2 Brief description of the error

„ To close the error description, press .

3 Description of the error

4 "Close" key

20.5.1.5

"Control units overview" menu

The "Control units overview" menu displays the control units of the machine in a schematic diagram

370

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Machine" menu 20.5

FM1

KMC DRC

AKP

FM2

LUC

NM

LC

FM3

KP1

CE

FM4

KP2

SCS

EQ002-504 / EQ002-536

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press and then .

Æ The display shows the "Control units overview" menu of the machine bus.

The respective brief descriptions are on the squares for the control units.

The status of the individual control units is indicated by the colour of the squares.

Icon Explanation

CAN activity present, no errors.

CAN activity present, with one or more errors.

No CAN activity present, error cannot be determined.

„ To open the overview of the engine bus control units, press .

KMC

CPC4

EQ002-537

„ To open the overview of the of the AUX bus control units, press .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 371

20 Terminal - Menus

20.5

"Machine" menu

ASC

AFC

INS

KMB1 KMC

GC

KMB2 KMB4

KMB3

MRDT

EQ002-538

„ To open the overview of the control units of the ISOBUS, press .

GSNC KMC

EQ002-539

„ To retrieve information about a control unit, press the key on the respective control unit

The corresponding information screen is displayed.

EQ002-433

„ To exit the information screen, press .

20.5.1.6

"Control unit versions" menu

"Control unit versions software" menu

The "Control unit versions software" menu displays the current software versions of the control units.

372

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Machine" menu 20.5

EQG002-095

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press and then .

Æ The display shows the "Control unit versions software" menu.

"Control unit versions hardware" menu

The "Control unit versions hardware" menu displays the current hardware versions of the control units.

EQG002-051

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, first press and then .

Æ The display shows the "Control unit versions hardware" menu.

20.5.1.7

"Information" menu

The menu displays the following information about the machine: Machine type, machine variant, machine number, engine variant.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 373

20 Terminal - Menus

20.5

"Machine" menu

20.5.2

EQG002-092

ü The "Electronics" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, press.

Æ The display shows the "Information" menu.

"Camera systems" menu

"Camera system settings" menu

20.5.3

EQ002-303 / EQ002-431

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, first press and then .

Æ The display shows the "Camera system settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

"Lighting" menu

"Working lights lighting" menu

In the "Working light lighting" menu the working lights and the maintenance lighting can be switched on the machine. The lights are switched which are installed in the positions shown.

374

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Machine" menu 20.5

EQ002-502 / EQ002-503

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Lighting settings" menu.

Icon Explanation

The side working lights are switched off.

/

The side working lights are switched on.

/

The rear/spout working lights are switched off.

The rear/spout working lights are switched on.

The maintenance lighting is switched off.

The maintenance lighting is switched off

„ To switch on the respective working light, press

„ To switch off the respective working light, press

„ To switch on the maintenance lighting, press .

, or .

, or .

„ To switch off the maintenance lighting, press .

„ To open the "Key test" menu, press .

"Key test" menu

The LEDs on the keypad for wiper and warning beacon can be tested in the menu.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 375

20 Terminal - Menus

20.6

“Cabin” menu

EQ002-503 / EQ002-505

„ Press a key on the wiper and warning beacon keypad and check the background colour of the depressed key on the terminal.

The colours of the keys on the terminal indicate whether there is an error between the wiper and warning beacon keypad and the control unit.

Icon Explanation

Key not pressed.

Key pressed.

Error recognized.

20.6

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

“Cabin” menu

.

376

EQG002-025

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the "Cabin" menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Cabin" menu with its menus.

The "Cabin" menu is divided up into the following menus depending on the machine configuration:

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Cabin,

see Page 376

Terminal, see Page 378

Settings

Information

Armrest, see Page 379

Diagnostics

Key test

Control lever,

see Page 381

Settings

Terminal - Menus 20

“Cabin” menu 20.6

Key test

Background lighting, see Page 382

Settings

Control unit versions,

see Page 383

Control unit versions software

Control unit versions hardware

Printer,

see Page 384

Settings

Automatic climate control

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 377

20 Terminal - Menus

20.6

“Cabin” menu

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Graphic

Settings

Diagnostics

Remote maintenance, see Page 367

Remote maintenance

Diagnostics

Settings

Wiper,

see Page 386

Settings

Mirror heating

Settings

Momentary foot switch

Settings

20.6.1

“Terminal” menu

"Terminal settings" menu

The current settings of the terminal for language, day/night design, units of measurement, date and time are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

The background colour of the display can be changed for the day/night design. In this way the driver can easily read the display without being dazzled even if the ambient light changes.

378

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Cabin” menu 20.6

EQG002-026

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Terminal settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

"Terminal information" menu

The software version is displayed in the "Terminal information" menu.

20.6.2

EQG002-057

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Terminal information" menu.

“Armrest” menu

"Armrest diagnostics" menu

Data on the quick-stop switch in the cabin and on the quick-stop switch for the grinding control unit are indicated in the menu.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 379

20 Terminal - Menus

20.6

“Cabin” menu

EQG002-027

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Armrest diagnostics" menu.

Further information

see Page 362 .

"Armrest key test" menu

The keys on the keypad, the additional keypad, the main mode switch and the navigation module can be tested in the menu.

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Armrest key test" menu.

EQG003-051

380

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Cabin” menu 20.6

Name of the key

Key test KP1

Key test KP2

Key test AKP

Key test MMS

Key test NM

Explanation

Key test left half of the keypad

Key test right half of the keypad

Key test additional keypad

Key test Main Mode Switch

Key test navigation module

„ To select an operating element, which is to be tested, press the key for the corresponding operating element

ð The operating element is displayed on the terminal.

„ Press the key, which is to be tested, and check the background colour of the key on the terminal.

The colours of the keys on the terminal indicate whether there is an error between the operating element and the control unit.

Icon Explanation

Key not pressed.

Key pressed.

Error recognized.

20.6.3

“Control Lever” menu

"Control lever settings" menu

The M1 and M2 memory keys on the control lever can be assigned with functions in the menu.

EQG002-028

Possible assignments of the memory keys:

• Raise/lower plant divider (for maize header) or holding-down clamp (for grass header)

• Increase/reduce working width

• Switch between value 1 and value 2 for the chop length

• Increase/reduce header speed

• Turn pendulum frame to the left/right

• Increase/reduce discharge distance of the discharge accelerator

• Raise/lower spout

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 381

20 Terminal - Menus

20.6

“Cabin” menu

• Activate/deactivate auto-loading system (version with "Auto-loading system")

• Warning beacon/horn switched on

• Raise/lower hitch attachment

ü The "Cabin" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Control lever settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the "Key test" menu, press .

"Control lever key test" menu

The keys of the control lever can be tested in the menu.

EQG002-067

„ Press a key on the control lever and check the background colour of the depressed key on the terminal.

The colours of the keys on the terminal indicate whether there is an error between the control lever and the control unit.

Icon Explanation

Key not pressed.

Key pressed.

Error recognized.

20.6.4

“Background Lighting” menu

"Background lighting settings" menu

The "Background lighting settings" menu can be used to set the intensity of the background lighting of operating elements and control levers.

382

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Cabin” menu 20.6

20.6.5

EQG002-029

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Background lighting settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

“Control Unit Versions” menu

"Control unit versions software" menu

The "Control unit versions software" menu displays the current software versions of the control units.

EQG002-030

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Control unit versions software" menu.

"Control unit versions hardware" menu

The "Control unit versions hardware" menu displays the current hardware versions of the control units.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 383

20 Terminal - Menus

20.6

“Cabin” menu

20.6.6

EQG002-051

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Control unit versions hardware" menu.

“Printer” menu

"Printer settings" menu

The current printer type is shown in the "Printer settings" menu. The printer type can be changed.

20.6.7

EQG002-068

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Printer settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

"Automatic climate control" menu

"Automatic climate control graphic" menu

The "Automatic climate control graphic" menu displays the setting of the automatic climate control and allows the automatic climate control to be operated.

384

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Cabin” menu 20.6

EQ002-303 / EQ002-314

ü The "Cabin" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, first press and then .

ð The display shows the "Automatic climate control graphic" menu.

Icon Explanation

The automatic climate control has been switched off

The automatic climate control has been switched on

The refrigerant compressor has been switched off

The refrigerant compressor has been switched on

The automatic ventilation has been switched off

The automatic ventilation has been switched off

„ To switch on automatic climate control, press .

ð The display shows the power of the ventilation, the setpoint temperature in the cabin and whether the refrigerant compressor and the automatic ventilation have been switched on.

„ To increase the ventilation power or the setpoint temperature in the cabin, press .

„ To lower the ventilation power or the setpoint temperature in the cabin, press .

„ To switch on the refrigerant compressor, press .

„ To set the automatic ventilation and the refrigerant compressor, press .

ð As the ventilation can no longer be set manually, the field for the manual setting of the ventilation is no longer active.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 385

20 Terminal - Menus

20.6

“Cabin” menu

To switch to the "Settings" menu, press .

"Automatic climate control settings" menu

The settings for the automatic climate control parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

20.6.8

EQ002-315

ü The "Automatic climate control" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

The display shows the "Automatic climate control settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

"Wiper" menu

"Wiper settings" menu

386

EQG002-078

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Wiper settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

20.6.9

Terminal - Menus 20

“Cabin” menu 20.6

"Mirror heating" menu

"Mirror heating" settings menu

INFO

Battery voltage is dropping

If the "Active" setting is selected, the mirror heating is permanently switched on, even when the diesel engine is switched off. As long as the circuit is not interrupted with the main battery switch, power is taken from the battery of the forage harvester. It is therefore possible that the battery voltage of the forage harvester will drop too far.

EQ002-303 / EQ002-513

ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Wiper settings" menu

Selection options in the selection window:

Inactive

Active

Automatic

The mirror heating is switched off.

The mirror heating is permanently switched on. This also applies when the diesel engine is switched off.

The mirror heating is switched on for 5 min when the machine is started.

„ To set the mirror heating, select the desired setting.

20.6.10

"Momentary foot switch" menu

"Momentary foot switch settings" menu

In the menu, you can assign functions to the memory keys M5 (left momentary foot switch) and

M6 (right momentary foot switch) on the steering column.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 387

20 Terminal - Menus

20.7

"Lubrication" menu

20.7

EQ002-303 / EQ002-521

Possible assignments of the memory keys:

• Warning beacon/horn switched on

• Pendulum frame turn/left/right

• Unlock header

• Increase/reduce discharge distance of the discharge accelerator (for "StreamControl" version)

• Fold header (with maize header) or guide wheels (with grass header) in/out

• Raise/lower plant divider (for maize header) or holding-down clamp (for grass header)

• Rotate spout

• Raise/lower spout

• Retrieve/save spout flap

• Lift / lower additional axle (for "Additional axle" version)

ü The "Cabin" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Momentary foot switch settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

"Lubrication" menu

The lubricant quantity for the central lubrication can be changed in the menu and a lubrication process can be started.

The status can be displayed during lubrication of the intermediate gearbox and the central lubrication.

388

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Lubrication" menu 20.7

EQG002-070

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the "Lubrication" menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Lubrication" menu with its menus.

The "Lubrication" menu is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration:

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Lubrication

Central lubrication

Settings

Diagnostics

Service & maintenance

Intermediate gearbox lubrication

Diagnostics

20.7.1

"Central lubrication" menu

"Central lubrication settings" menu

The lubricant quantity for a lubrication cycle of the central lubrication system can be adjusted in the menu.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 389

20 Terminal - Menus

20.7

"Lubrication" menu

EQG002-071

ü The "Lubrication" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Central lubrication settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

"Central lubrication maintenance" menu

The "Central lubrication maintenance" menu displays the maintenance status for the central

lubrication. The Main Mode Switch is in the "Maintenance" position, see Page 109 .

390

EQG002-053

ü The "Central lubrication" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Central lubrication maintenance" menu.

„ To start intermediate lubrication using the central lubrication system, press

and follow the instructions on the dialogue menu step-by-step.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

20.7.2

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

"Intermediate gearbox" menu

"Intermediate gearbox diagnostics" menu

Data of the sensors and actuators of the intermediate gearbox is displayed in the menu.

20.8

EQG002-088

ü The "Lubrication" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

The display shows the "Intermediate gearbox diagnostics" menu.

Data of the sensors and actuators of the intermediate lubrication is displayed in the

"Intermediate gearbox diagnostics" menu.

Further information

see Page 362 .

"Crop flow" menu

The components in the crop flow can be set in the menu.

Calibrations and maintenance work can be started on individual components in the crop flow.

EQG003-054

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the "Crop flow" menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Crop flow" menu with its menus.

The "Crop flow" menu is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration:

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 391

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

Menu Sub-menu

392

Explanation

Crop flow

Header

Settings

Diagnostics

Header drive

Settings

Diagnostics

AutoScan

Overview

Settings

Intake

Settings

Diagnostics

Foreign object detection

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Lifting unit

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

Explanation

Settings

Calibration

Diagnostics

Grinding device and counterblade

Settings

Diagnostics

Service & maintenance

Key test GC

Main coupling

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Corn conditioner

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Discharge accelerator

Settings

393

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Diagnostics

Content material sensor

Settings

Diagnostics

CropControl

Counterweighing

Settings

Calibration

Diagnostics

Silage additives units

External silage additives unit

Settings

Silage additives unit fine dosing

Settings

Diagnostics

Silage additives unit coarse dosing

394

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

20.8.1

“Header” menu

"Header settings" menu

The settings for header parameters are displayed in the "Header settings" menu and can be changed.

Mais EasyCollect 2-teilig

20.8.2

EQG003-053

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Header settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

“Header Drive” menu

"Header drive settings" menu

The settings for the header drive parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 395

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

20.8.3

EQG003-055

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Header drive settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

"AutoScan" menu

"AutoScan graphic" menu

The settings for the AutoScan are displayed as values and in a graphic in the menu. The settings can be changed.

396

EQG003-056

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "AutoScan Graphic" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

To switch to the "Settings" menu, press .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

"AutoScan settings" menu

The settings for AutoScan parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

20.8.4

EQG003-057

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

“Intake” menu

"Intake settings" menu

The settings for intake parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

20.8.5

EQG003-058

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Intake settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

"Foreign object detection" menu

"Foreign object detection settings" menu

The settings for the foreign object detection parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 397

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

20.8.6

EQG003-101

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Foreign object detection settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

“Lifting Unit” menu

"Lifting unit settings" menu

398

EQG003-061

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

„ The display shows the "Lifting unit settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To switch to the "Calibration" menu, press .

"Lifting unit calibration" menu

The menu is used to determine the upper and the lower end position of the lifting unit as well as the weight of the header.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

EQG003-062

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of parts

During the calibration process, there is risk of injury for persons staying in the area of the lifting unit, header and spout.

„ Ensure that there is no one in the swivel range and range of movement of lifting unit, header and spout while the calibration process is performed.

INFO

The lifting unit must be calibrated only after working on the lifting unit or after replacing the electronics.

The calibration values are stored separately for the grass headers, maize header and direct cut header. Therefore the calibration must be run with each appropriate header.

ü A header has been mounted.

ü The "Grass header" / "Maize header" / "Direct cut header" operating mode has been set

according to the mounted header, see Page 395 .

ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance" position,

see Page 109

.

ü For maize header: The maize header is in the working position, see separate operating instructions for maize header.

ü The header is placed on the ground on an even surface and is aligned horizontally,

see

Page 262

.

„ To run the calibration using the Dialogue menu, press the "Start calibration" key and follow the instructions in the Dialogue menu step by step.

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

"Grinding device and counterblade" menu 20.8.7

"Grinding device and counterblade settings" menu

The settings for the grinding device are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 399

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

EQG003-063

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To switch to the "Maintenance" menu, press .

"Grinding device and counterblade maintenance" menu

The menu can be used to check the status of the grinding device and to start the grinding processes.

The complete grinding process is described in the chapter Maintenance – Feed system, see

Page 500

.

EQG003-064

400

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Icon

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

Explanation

Counterblade and chopping blade are in contact (for the version with

"automatic counterblade adjustment")

Counterblade and chopping blade are not in contact (for the version with

"automatic counterblade adjustment")

Grinding stone position

Grinding stone position unknown

„ To reset the wear counter, press the “Reset wear counter” key.

„ To change to “Key Test GC”, first press and then .

"Grinding device and counterblade key test GC" menu

The keys of the grinding control unit can be tested in the menu.

EQG003-065

2 people are required to run the test.

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.

ü The parking brake is applied.

ü The lifting unit is in the lower position.

ü The main coupling is switched on

„ An operator presses a key on the grinding control unit.

„ A second operator checks the background colour of the depressed key on the terminal.

The colours of the keys on the terminal indicate whether there is an error between the grinding control unit and the control unit.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 401

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

Icon Explanation

Key not pressed.

Key pressed.

Error recognized.

20.8.8

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

“Main Coupling” menu

"Main coupling settings" menu

The menu can be used to adjust the transmission ratio of the VariLOC chop length gearbox.

402

EQG003-066

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

„ The display shows the "Main coupling settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To switch to the "Calibration" menu, press .

"Main coupling calibration" menu

The "Main coupling calibration" menu is used to determine the coupling point of the main coupling.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

EQG003-067

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected start-up of the chopping drum

The chopping drum is switched on during the calibration process. This poses a risk of injury for people staying in the area of the chopping drum.

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the area of the chopping drum during the calibration process.

ü

The quick-stop switch grinding control unit is released, see Page 117 .

ü

The quick-stop switch armrest is released, see Page 109 .

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Field mode" position,

see Page 109

.

ü The driver is sitting on the driver's seat.

„ To run the calibration using the Dialogue menu, press the "Start calibration" key and follow the instructions in the Dialogue menu step by step.

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

20.8.9

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

“Corn Conditioner” menu

.

"Corn conditioner overview" menu

Provided that temperature sensors are installed, the menu displays the temperature status in the bearings of the corn conditioner.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 403

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

EQG003-148

ü The "Crop flow" main menu is open

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Corn conditioner overview" menu

Icon Explanation

The temperature in the bearing is within the admissible working range.

The temperature in the bearing is increased.

Cleaning the bearing housings is recommended.

The temperature in the bearing is critical.

Cleaning the bearing housings is necessary.

Fault: Cable harness/short circuit

To switch to the "Settings" menu, press .

"Corn conditioner settings" menu

The settings for corn conditioner parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

404

EQG003-068

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Corn conditioner settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

"Corn conditioner calibration" menu

WARNING

Danger of injury resulting from unintentional movement of machine parts

While actuating machine functions, the machine may carry out unexpected movements. As a result, people in the operating area of the machine parts may get hurt or objects could be damaged.

„ Secure the machine against rolling away.

„ Make sure that there are no people, objects or animals in the area that is affected by machine parts.

„ Machine functions must only be actuated by qualified personnel.

The menu is used to equalise the setpoint and the actual distance between the rollers of the corn conditioner.

The corn conditioner must always be calibrated

• if the corn conditioner was removed and re-installed.

• if the corn conditioner was repaired.

• If the actual value of the roller distance differs from the setpoint value.

EQG003-069

ü

The machine is parked safely, see Page 27 .

ü

The corn conditioner is in the rear position (move backwards from the working position), see

Page 139

.

ü The corn conditioner is electrically connected.

ü The "Corn conditioner calibration" menu has been selected.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 405

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

BX001-418

„ Using a feeler gauge, measure the distance (X) between the rollers (1, 2) on the left and right.

„ To run the calibration using the Dialogue menu, press the "Start calibration" key and follow the instructions in the Dialogue menu step by step.

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

„ If the distance (X) between the corn conditioner rollers (1, 2) differs from the information on the terminal or the distance (X) on the left and right is not the same, adjust the corn conditioner,

see Page 554

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

20.8.10

“Discharge Accelerator” menu

"Discharge accelerator settings" menu

The settings for discharge accelerator parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

EQG003-071

406

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Discharge accelerator settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

20.8.11

"Content material sensor" menu

There are 3 systems for measuring the content materials:

• Measurement of moisture in crops (for "CropControl, NIR sensor including printer" version)

The NIR sensor is installed in the spout and measures the moisture in the crops.

• Measurement of contents and moisture in crops (in "CropControl, AgriNIR online sensor including printer" version)

The AgriNIR online sensor is installed in the spout and measures the moisture and the content of starch, protein, ADF, NDF, ash and crude fat in the crops.

• Crop contents measurement (in "KRONE NIR Control dual" version)

The KRONE NIR Control dual sensor is installed in the spout and, depending on the crop, measures the moisture, dry matter and the content of starch, crude ash, crude fat, crude protein, crude fibre, NDF, ADF, sugar and ELOS in the crops.

"Content material sensor measurements" menu

The menu is displayed only for "CropControl, NIR sensor including printer" version.

A sample of the content materials can be taken in the menu.

EQG003-107

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Content material sensor measurements" menu.

To start sampling, press.

Content material sensor menu "Settings"

The settings for parameters of the crop content material sensor are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 407

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

Depending on whether and if yes which of the two sensor systems has been installed, different parameters are displayed in the menu.

EQG003-108

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the contents sensor "Settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press .

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

INFO

To obtain more precise measurement values with the moisture sensor (NIR sensor), carry out a basic calibration before the start of the season. In doing so, the machine is calibrated once for the crop types maize and grass.

Please contact your dealer to make an appointment at least 5 working days before the start of operations.

20.8.12

"CropControl" menu

"CropControl counterweighing" menu

The menu can be used to run a counterweighing process and to enter the counterweighing value.

408

EQG003-072

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

ü The "Crop flow" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "CropControl counterweighing" menu.

The complete counterweighing process is described in the chapter "Field mode operation", see

Page 297

.

„ To switch to the "Settings" menu, press .

"CropControl settings" menu

The settings for CropControl parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

EQG003-073

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To switch to the "Calibration" menu, press .

"CropControl calibration" menu

The menu is used to determine the zero position of the pre-compression rollers.

EQG003-074

„ To calibrate using the dialogue menu, press instructions in the dialogue menu step-by-step.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

and follow the

409

20 Terminal - Menus

20.8

"Crop flow" menu

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

„ To switch to the "Diagnostics" menu, first press and then

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

20.8.13

"Silage additives units" menu

If only one silage additives unit is installed on the machine, the menu for the installed silage additives unit appears in the "Crop flow" menu.

If two or more silage additives units are installed, the "Silage additives unit" menu appears in the

"Crop flow" menu.

20.8.13.1

"External silage additives unit" menu

"External silage additives unit settings" menu

The settings for external silage additives unit parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

EQG003-075

ü The "Crop flow" main menu or the "Silage additives unit" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "External silage additives unit settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

20.8.13.2

"Silage additives unit fine dosing" menu

"Silage additives unit fine dosing settings" menu

The settings for parameters of fine dosing of the silage additives unit are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

410

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Schlauchtyp

Terminal - Menus 20

"Crop flow" menu 20.8

Gelber Schlauch

EQ002-367 / EQ002-419

ü The "Crop flow" main menu or the "Silage additives unit" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the Internal silage additives unit fine dosing "Settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

20.8.13.3

"Silage additives unit coarse dosing" menu

"Silage additives unit coarse dosing settings" menu

The settings for parameters of coarse dosing of the silage additives unit are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

EQG003-076

ü The "Crop flow" main menu or the "Silage additives unit" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Internal silage additives unit settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To switch to the "Calibration" menu, press .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 411

20 Terminal - Menus

20.9

"Spout" menu

"Silage additives unit coarse dosing calibration" menu

The menu is used to determine the released quantity of silage additives of coarse dosing.

20.9

EQG003-077

WARNING

Risk of injury due to silage additives

If handled improperly, the chemicals used in the silage additives unit may cause damage to health.

„ The silage additives unit may only be operated by persons who are familiar with these

Operating Instructions and the safety data sheet of the manufacturer of the silage additives. The safety instructions issued by the silage additive manufacturer must be followed.

„ The operator must be instructed in the safe handling of the chemicals used.

ü

The quick-stop switch grinding control unit is released, see Page 117 .

ü

The quick-stop switch armrest is released, see Page 109 .

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Field mode" position,

see Page 109

.

ü The driver is sitting on the driver's seat.

„ To run the calibration using the Dialogue menu, press the "Start calibration" key and follow the instructions in the Dialogue menu step by step.

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

"Spout" menu

The settings for spout parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed and data of the auto-loading system can be recorded on a USB storage medium.

412

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Spout" menu 20.9

EQG003-078

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the "Spout" main menu, press .

Æ The display shows the spout "Settings" menu.

The "Spout" menu is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration:

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Spout

Spout

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Auto-loading system

Measurements

Settings

20.9.1

"Spout" menu

"Spout settings" menu

The settings for spout parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 413

20 Terminal - Menus

20.9

"Spout" menu

EQG003-079

ü The "Spout" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Header drive settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To switch to the "Calibration" menu, press .

Spout "Calibration" menu

The Spout "Calibration" menu:

• determines the left and the right stop positions of the spout

• calibrates the centre position of the spout

• calibrates the upper and lower positions of the spout

• calibrates the end stops of the spout flap

EQG003-080

414

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"Spout" menu 20.9

WARNING

Risk of injury and/or material damage from unexpected machine movements

The automatically executing calibration process and the resulting pivoting movements of the spout can cause injuries and/or serious damage to the machine.

„ Prior to starting calibration, ensure that there is sufficient distance from overhead electrical lines when the spout is moving.

„ Ensure that there is nobody within the swivel and movement range of the spout during the calibration process.

„ Interrupt the calibration process immediately if persons enter the area inside the safety distance.

„ Ensure that there are no obstacles within the radius of movement of the spout.

ü The spout is located on the spout holder.

„ To run the calibration using the Dialogue menu, press the "Start calibration" key and follow the instructions in the Dialogue menu step by step.

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

20.9.2

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

"Auto-loading system" menu

"Auto-loading system measurements" menu

In the menu data of the auto-loading system can be recorded onto a USB storage medium.

EQG003-109

This menu is required when in contact with customer service, as the technicians can use the recorded data to draw conclusions on the operation of the auto-loading system.

To switch to the "Settings" menu, press .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 415

20 Terminal - Menus

20.10 “Engine” menu

20.10

“Engine” menu

EQG002-031

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

The "Cabin" menu is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration:

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Engine

Diesel engine,

see Page 416

Settings

Diagnostics

Service & maintenance

ConstantPower

Settings

Compressed air cleaning

Diagnostics

Service & maintenance

20.10.1

“Diesel Engine” menu

"Diesel engine settings" menu

The settings for diesel engine parameters are shown in the "Diesel engine settings" menu where they can also be changed.

416

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Engine” menu 20.10

EQG002-032

ü The "Engine" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Diesel engine settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

Diesel engine "Maintenance" menu

The "Diesel engine maintenance" menu displays the remaining operating hours of the diesel engine until the next maintenance date.

The display counts down the operating hours of the diesel engine until the next maintenance date of the diesel engine.

EQG003-081

ü The "Engine" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Diesel engine maintenance" menu.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 417

20 Terminal - Menus

20.10 “Engine” menu

NOTICE

Next maintenance date

25 operating hours before reaching the next maintenance date, the terminal issues a warning in an information window. An information window is also displayed when the diesel engine has a residual runtime of less than 25 operating hours until the next maintenance date when the diesel engine starts.

20.10.2

“ConstantPower” menu

"ConstantPower settings" menu

The settings for parameters of the diesel engine load limit control are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

EQG002-033

ü The "Engine" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "ConstantPower settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

20.10.3

"Compressed air cleaning" menu

"Compressed air cleaning settings" menu

The settings for compressed air cleaning are displayed in the "Compressed air cleaning settings" menu and can be changed.

418

EQG003-083

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

ü The "Engine" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Compressed air cleaning settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To switch to the "Maintenance" menu, press .

Terminal - Menus 20

“Engine” menu 20.10

"Compressed air cleaning maintenance" menu

The "Compressed air cleaning maintenance" menu can be used to check the time until the next cleaning and the set cleaning duration.

Compressed air cleaning of the engine can be started.

EQG003-084

ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance" position,

see Page 109

.

„ To clean the engine with compressed air using the Dialogue menu, press the "Start cleaning" key.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 419

20 Terminal - Menus

20.11 “Hydraulics” menu

20.11

“Hydraulics” menu

420

EQG002-034

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the "Hydraulics" menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Hydraulics" menu with its menus.

The "Hydraulics" menu is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration:

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Hydraulics,

see Page 420

Header locking

Settings

Diagnostics

Working hydraulics, see Page 421

Settings

Diagnostics

Auxiliary hydraulics

Settings

Diagnostics

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Hydraulics” menu 20.11

20.11.1

“Header Locking” menu

"Header locking diagnostics" menu

Data of the sensors and actuators of the header locking is displayed in the "Header locking diagnostics" menu.

EQG003-085

ü The "Hydraulics" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Header locking diagnostics" menu.

„ Further information

see Page 362

.

20.11.2

“Work Hydraulics” menu

"Working hydraulics diagnostics" menu

The "Working hydraulics diagnostics" menu displays the sensor and actuator data for the working hydraulics.

EQG002-035

ü The “Hydraulics” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

The display shows the “Working Hydraulics Diagnostics” menu.

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 421

20 Terminal - Menus

20.12 “Drive Functions” menu

20.11.3

“Auxiliary Hydraulics” menu

Auxiliary hydraulics "Settings" menu

The settings for auxiliary hydraulics parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

EQG003-086

ü The "Hydraulics" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the auxiliary hydraulics "Settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

20.12

“Drive Functions” menu

The "Driving functions" menu can be used to make settings on the running gear components.

422

EQG002-036

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Driving functions" menu with its menus.

The "Driving functions" menu is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration:

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal - Menus 20

“Drive Functions” menu 20.12

Explanation

Drive functions,

see Page 422

Automatic steering system,

see Page 424

Settings

Diagnostics

Traction drive,

see Page 424

Diagnostics

Calibration

Additional axle

Settings

Diagnostics

Rear axle

Settings

Diagnostics

Calibration

Trailer brake

Settings

Diagnostics

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 423

20 Terminal - Menus

20.12 “Drive Functions” menu

20.12.1

“Automatic Steering System” menu

"Automatic steering system settings" menu

The settings for automatic steering system parameters are displayed in the "Automatic steering system settings" menu and can be changed.

EQG002-037

ü The "Driving functions" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Automatic steering system settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

"Automatic steering system diagnostics" menu

ü The "Driving functions" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Automatic steering system diagnostics" menu.

„ Further information

see Page 362

.

20.12.2

“Traction Drive” Menu

"Traction drive calibration" menu

In the “Traction Drive Calibration” menu the brake pedal is checked for plausibility.

424

EQG002-038

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Drive Functions” menu 20.12

ü The "Driving functions" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Traction drive calibration" menu.

„ To run the calibration using the Dialogue menu, press the "Start calibration" key and follow the instructions in the Dialogue menu step by step.

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

ü The "Driving functions" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press first, then .

Æ The display shows the "Traction drive diagnostics" menu.

„ Further information

see Page 362

.

20.12.3

“Additional Axle” menu

"Additional axle settings" menu

The settings for the additional axle parameters are displayed in the "Additional axle settings" menu and can be changed.

EQG002-089

ü The "Driving functions" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Additional axle settings" menu.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 425

20 Terminal - Menus

20.12 “Drive Functions” menu

20.12.4

“Rear Axle” menu

"Rear axle calibration central position" menu

The "Rear axle calibration central position" menu is used to determine the central position of the rear axle.

EQG003-087

ü The "Driving functions" main menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Rear axle calibration central position" menu.

„ To calibrate the central position using the dialogue menu, press follow the instructions in the dialogue menu step-by-step.

and

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

„ To switch to the "Rear axle calibration end positions" menu, press .

"Rear axle calibration end positions" menu

The "Rear axle calibration end positions" menu is used to determine the upper and the lower end positions as well as the position of the rear axle in road mode.

426

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

“Drive Functions” menu 20.12

EQG003-088

„ To calibrate the end positions using the dialogue menu, press follow the instructions in the dialogue menu step-by-step.

and

INFO

The calibration process is supported by the terminal. Missing requirements for calibration are displayed in the terminal.

„ To open the “Diagnostics” menu, press

„ Further information,

see Page 362 .

20.12.5

"Trailer brake" menu

.

"Trailer brake diagnostics" menu

Data of the sensors and actuators of the trailer brake is displayed in the menu.

ü The "Driving functions" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the menu "Trailer brake diagnostics".

Further information, see Page 362 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 427

20 Terminal - Menus

20.13 “Season Settings” menu

20.13

“Season Settings” menu

Mais EasyCollect 3-teilig

EQG003-089

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Season settings" menu.

The values for the most important settings for header, lifting unit and intake are displayed in the

"Season settings" menu and can be changed.

INFO

The working width can also be changed temporarily via the quick access "Temporarily adjust working width". The setting of the working width in the season setting is not changed.

INFO

If a grass header or a direct cut header is enabled as a header, the working width is entered in cm or inches.

If a maize header is enabled as a header, the working width is determined by the number of rows and the row spacing. A value for the working width in cm or inches is not displayed and cannot be entered.

„ To change and save the parameter,

see Page 362

.

428

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Terminal - Menus 20

"User level" menu 20.14

20.14

"User level" menu

EQG002-039

ü For The menu level is active,

see Page 361

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "User level" menu.

INFO

Changes to this mask can be made only by KRONE service technicians using a PIN.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 429

21 Settings

21.1

Optimising crop flow

21 Settings

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury from sharp chopping blades and sharp screw bars (for version with

MaxFlow chopping drum)

When performing maintenance work on the chopping drum, there is a risk of the operators being injured by the sharp chopping blades or the sharp screw bars.

„ When working on the chopping drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.

„ Wear protective gloves when working on the chopping drum.

„

Turn the chopping drum clockwise using the chopping drum turning lever only see

Page 517 and, when the required position has been reached, lock with the locking bolt, see Page 517

.

21.1

Optimising crop flow

How header speed depends on chop length

If the header speed is too low, it may be that the intake rollers are pulling the crops in clumps from the header and the crop flow is stopping.

The header speeds depend to a great extent on e.g.: crops, driving speed, crop mass and degree of maturity of the crops. The speed should be set so that the crop flow is homogeneous.

If the rotational speed of the EasyCollect or the XCollect is too high in maize mode, crop blockages may occur.

430

BXG000-026

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

21.2

21.2.1

Settings 21

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine 21.2

Grass mode

• Guide value for the header speed: 400–420 rpm

Depending on the application conditions, however, a header speed of 300–600 rpm may also be advisable.

Maize mode

• Guide value for the header speed: 380–420 rpm

The header speed should be set as low as possible.

XDisc mode

• Header speed: 680 min -1

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine

Adjusting overhang of chopping blades

21.2.2

BX001-571

The discharge capacity of the machine is determined by the chopping drum among other things.

Depending on how far the chopping blade edge (1) extends beyond the chopping drum housing

(2), there will be correspondingly more or less discharge capacity.

The maximum overhang of the chopping blade edge (1) relative to the chopping drum housing

(2) is 89 mm (3).

During operation, the chopping blades close, thus becoming shorter. Wear leads to a drop in the volume beneath the chopping blades. The discharge capacity of the machine deteriorates due to this reduced volume.

„ Move the chopping blades with the greatest possible overhang.

„

Re-adjust the chopping blades more frequently, see Page 515 .

Setting drum base

INFO

An incorrectly set drum base will result in an increased fuel consumption as well as an increased wear of machine components.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 431

21 Settings

21.2

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine

4

1

2

3

BXG000-077

Another way to improve the discharge capacity is to fine-tune the setting of the drum base (1) by adjusting the drum base (2).

The drum base is adjusted in the factory.

• The distance from the blades (4) to the drum base at the rear (3) is X=6-8 mm.

• The distance from the blades to the drum base at the front is automatically adjusted by the counterblade.

The nature of the crop (for example, a dry crop) may require readjustment of the drum base.

Setting the distance between the drum base and cutter

432

BXG000-078

„ Adjust drum base equally on both sides.

To reduce the distance between the drum base and blades, on the right and left sides of the machine:

„ Loosen the counter nut (1).

„ Unscrew the screw (2) a little.

„ Retighten the counter nut (1).

To increase the distance between the drum base and blades, on the right and left sides of the machine:

„ Loosen the counter nut (1).

„ Screw in the screw (2) a little

„ Retighten the counter nut (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Measuring the distance

Settings 21

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine 21.2

BX001-574

After adjusting the drum base, measure the distance from the drum base to the blades.

„ At the rear edge of the drum base (3), use a hexagon socket to check along the entire length that the distance to the blades (4) is the dimension X = 6-8 mm (5).

Setting the spring force of the drum base

BXG000-079

The factory setting dimension of the compression spring is X = 45 mm.

To reduce the spring force of the drum base, on the right and left sides of the machine:

„ Loosen the counter nut (1).

„ Unscrew the nut (2) a little.

„ Retighten the counter nut (1).

To increase the spring force of the drum base, on the right and left sides of the machine:

„ Loosen the counter nut (1).

„ Screw in the nut (2) a little.

„ Retighten the counter nut (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 433

21 Settings

21.2

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine

Adjusting the drum base tension spring

21.2.3

BX001-576

The tension spring (1) prevents the drum base from oscillating. The factory setting dimension of the tension spring is X = 175 mm.

To reduce the spring force:

„ Loosen the nut (2), on the right and left machine sides.

To increase the spring force:

„ Tighten the nut (2), on the right and left machine sides.

Setting the rear wall of the discharge accelerator

NOTICE

Increased wear and increased fuel consumption caused by incorrectly set rear wall of discharge accelerator

An incorrectly set distance between discharge accelerator (1) and rear wall (2) will result in increased fuel consumption and wear of machine components.

„ Set the distance from rear wall of discharge accelerator to the discharge scoops so that the discharge capacity is optimised.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

434

BX002-487

To reach the optimum distance between the discharge accelerator (1) and the rear wall (2), the position of the rear wall can be set at the top via rubber buffers and adjusted at the bottom using an oblong hole.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Settings 21

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine 21.2

BX001-917

Reducing or increasing the distance (X) between the rear wall (1) and the discharge scoops (2) may either improve or reduce the discharge capacity depending on the crop.

Default factory setting:

• Grass: X = 3-4 mm

• Maize: X = 3-4 mm

Preparing forage harvester for setting the gap between the discharge scoops and rear wall

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

3

2

1

BXG000-072

To access the setting elements of the discharge accelerator rear wall (3):

„ Loosen the quarter turn fasteners (2) and remove the crop flow cover (1).

Measuring the distance between the discharge scoops and rear wall

BXG000-074

3

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 435

21 Settings

21.2

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine

To measure the distance between rear wall and discharge scoops:

„ Remove the channel support cover (3).

WARNING! Risk of crushing from rotating discharge accelerator rotor. If the discharge accelerator rotor is rotated by hand, there is a risk of being crushed between the discharge accelerator scoops and the housing, the rear wall and the scraper. As a result, people may be injured. Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone.

„ Rotate the discharge accelerator rotor by hand until the lowest gap X is reached.

„ Measure the gap X between the discharge accelerator scoops (1) and rear wall (2).

Adjusting the distance between discharge accelerator and rear wall at the bottom

2 3 4

1

6

5

BX002-491 / BX002-490

„ Set the discharge accelerator and rear wall equally on both sides.

To set the discharge accelerator and rear wall at the bottom (1) on the right and left sides of the machine:

„ Loosen the nut (2).

„ Set the distance between the discharge accelerator and rear wall by adjusting the nuts (3, 4) until the surfaces (5, 6) are parallel.

„ Tighten the nuts (3, 4).

„ Tighten the nut (2).

„

Check the transition between grass channel/corn conditioner – discharge accelerator, see

Page 436

.

Checking transition between grass channel/corn conditioner – discharge accelerator

436

BXG000-075

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Settings 21

Optimising discharge capacity of the machine 21.2

At the transition between the grass channel/corn conditioner (2) and the discharge accelerator

(1) the crop flow must not form a retaining edge. The chopping crops may back up on a retaining edge and cause crop flow problems or crop blockages.

„ When setting the rear wall of discharge accelerator, ensure that there is no retaining edge at the transition (3) between the grass channel/corn conditioner (2) and the discharge accelerator (1).

„ Remove the cover from the channel support.

WARNING! Crush hazard from rotating discharge accelerator. If the discharge accelerator is rotated by hand, there is a risk of being crushed between the discharge accelerator scoops and the housing, the rear wall and the scraper. As a result, people may be injured. Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone.

„ Check the transition (3); if required, turn the discharge accelerator by hand.

ð There is a retaining edge.

„ Check the installation position and the lock of the grass channel/corn conditioner.

„

Reset the distance of the lower rear wall of discharge accelerator, see Page 436 .

Setting the distance of the upper rear wall of discharge accelerator

3

BXG001-126

To reduce the gap between the discharge accelerator rear wall (1) and the discharge scoops, on the right and left sides of the machine:

„ Loosen the counter nut (2) on the rubber buffer (3).

„ Screw the rubber buffer (3) on both sides in or out by the same dimension.

„ Retighten the counter nut (2).

„ To reset the spring force of the discharge accelerator rear wall, keep turning the screw (4) until the rear edge of the disc (5) is flush with the front edge of the control sheet (6).

„

Check the transition between discharge accelerator and channel support, see Page 436 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 437

21 Settings

21.3

Setting deflector sheet on the corn conditioner

Checking transition between discharge accelerator and channel support

21.3

BXG000-076

At the transition between the discharge accelerator (1) and the channel support there must be no retaining edge in the crop flow, even when the rear wall of discharge accelerator has completely sprung back. The chopping crops may back up on a retaining edge and cause crop flow problems or crop blockages.

Factory basic setting:

• X=15-18 mm

„ When setting the rear wall of discharge accelerator, ensure that there is no retaining edge at the transition between the rear wall of discharge accelerator (2) and the channel support (1).

„ Remove the cover from the channel support.

„ Check the transition between the rear wall of discharge accelerator (2) and the channel support (1) when the rear wall of discharge accelerator (2) has completely sprung back.

ð There is a retaining edge. The rear wall of discharge accelerator (2) is located behind the channel support (1).

„

Setting the distance of the upper rear wall of discharge accelerator, see Page 437 .

Setting deflector sheet on the corn conditioner

1 2 3

438

X

2

1

BX002-063 / BX002-064

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

To prevent part of the chopped material from flowing around the roller (1) of the corn conditioner, the deflector sheet (2) can be adjusted as required.

To adjust the deflector sheet (2):

„ Loosen the screws (3).

„ Move the deflector sheet (2) until the dimension between the roller (1) and the deflector sheet (2) is X=2 mm over the entire length.

„ Tighten the screws (3).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

22

Maintenance - General Information 22

Maintenance - General Information

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury during trial run of the machine

If a trial run is conducted after repairs, maintenance, cleaning work or technical adjustments, the machine could respond unpredictably. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

ü The machine is in working position.

„ Make certain there are no persons in the danger zone when the engine and header drive start.

„ Start the trial run of the machine from the driver’s seat only.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrectly performed or unfinished maintenance work

If maintenance work is not carried out by qualified personnel, the machine could be damaged.

A qualified service centre has the required technical knowledge, qualifications and tools to perform the required work on the machine in a proper manner. This applies in particular to safety-relevant work.

„ Always have the following work performed by a qualified specialist workshop:

- Safety-relevant work

- Service and maintenance work

-Repair work

- Modifications as well as installations and conversions

- Working on electronic parts

„ This chapter does not list all the necessary maintenance work of the engine. It is necessary to observe the maintenance instructions of engine manufacturer. The maintenance instructions are available at each qualified specialist workshop having access to the Workshop Information System (WIS) or after having participated in motor training at KRONE premises.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 439

22 Maintenance - General Information

22.1

Maintenance table

22.1

Maintenance table

22.1.1

Maintenance – Before the season

Hydraulic system

Check hydraulic hoses

Check hydraulic tank oil level

see Page 561

see Page 559

Brake

Check service brake function

Check function of the trailer brake (for "Trailer brake system" version)

see Page 482

see Page 98

see Page 99

Components for crop flow

Check the conveyor bars of the pre-compression roller

Checking the intake unit tension springs

see Page 534

see Page 539

Check counterblade for damage and wear

see Page 531

Check chopping blade for damage and wear

see Page 515

Check corn conditioner for wear

see Page 549

Check discharge scoops for damage and wear

see Page 551

see Page 553

Check the scrapers of the discharge accelerator

Check grinding stone for damage

see Page 509

Universal shafts

Maintain the universal shaft of the header (for the version with "hydraulic comfortable header locking with quick coupling")

see Page 584

Gearbox

Transfer gearbox, check oil level

Check oil level on intermediate gearbox

Intake intermediate gearbox, check oil level

Bottom roller gearbox, check oil level

see Page 563

see Page 564 see Page 564

see Page 565

Top roller gearbox, check oil level

see Page 566

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear, check oil level

see Page 568

Rotary drive gearbox spout, check oil level

Check oil level of the fan gearbox

Check oil level of the engine output

VariLOC cutting length gearbox, check oil level

see Page 570

see Page 571

see Page 572

see Page 573

440

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - General Information 22

Maintenance table 22.1

Engine

Check engine oil level

Check coolant level

Check the coolant hoses for leaks

Clean/replace air filter

Check that detachable connecting elements

(screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) are tight and retighten if required

Take measures to start up and start the engine following shutdown of the engine.

see Page 458

see Page 464 see Page 464

see Page 468

see Page 466

see Page 469

Air conditioning/heating

Change receiver-dryer unit To be performed by an authorised technician only

General maintenance work

Check all wear plates

Check all screws/nuts to make certain they are tight and retighten them, if necessary

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart

Check the lighting

see Page 541

see Page 585

Electrical system

Clean battery

see Page 577

Check the charge state of the batteries and recharge, if required.

see Page 577

Check the electrical connection cables and, if necessary, have them repaired or changed by a KRONE service partner

Wheels / tyres

Visually inspect tyres for cuts and breaks

Check tyre pressure

Fire extinguisher

Maintain fire extinguisher

see Page 485 see Page 485

see Page 488

22.1.2

Maintenance – After the season

General maintenance work

Clean the machine

Park the machine in a weatherproof and dry location which is not in close proximity to corrosive substances

Set the tyre pressure to the maximum permitted value

Protect the tyres against external influences such as oil, grease or direct sunlight

see Page 454

see Page 485

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 441

22 Maintenance - General Information

22.1

Maintenance table

General maintenance work

Manually lubricate the bearings of the discharge accelerator

see Page 551

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart. Then leave the machine running until a grease circle has formed on the outside of the bearing positions. Do not wipe off this grease as it offers additional protection against moisture.

Grease the threads of the setting screws

see Page 582

Release the springs

Grease the uncoated piston rods of all hydraulic cylinders and insert as far as possible

Lightly coat with oil all those lever joints and bearing positions which cannot be lubricated

Touch up damaged paint and preserve uncoated areas with rust protection agent

Check that all moveable components move freely. If required, dismount, clean, grease and remount.

see Page 582

Lubricating universal shafts

Lower the intake as far as possible

Remove the kraftband from the corn conditioner

Remove the corn conditioner, clean it thoroughly and coat with grease or a preservative paint to protect it against corrosion

After cleaning and preserving, reinstall the corn conditioner and run the diesel engine for

5 min to ensure that any water is pressed out of the bearings.

For version with "silage additives unit": Fill the silage additives tank with a biodegradable frost protection agent and allow the system to run for 10 min.

Drain condensation water out of the compressed air tanks of the compressed air brake

Take measures to shutdown the diesel engine.

see Page 471

see Page 469

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play

see Page 480

22.1.3

Maintenance - once after 1 hour

Wheels / tyres

Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels

see Page 486

442

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - General Information 22

Maintenance table 22.1

22.1.4

Maintenance - once after 4 hours

Drive belt

Check belt tension of all drive belts

see Page 483

22.1.5

Maintenance - once after 10 hours

Components for crop flow

Retightening screws on the chopping blades

see Page 515

Retightening screws on the discharge scoops

see Page 551

Retightening screws

Check screws on the steering cylinder

Check screws on the track rod

Central lubrication

Check lines for firm attachment

see Page 479

see Page 592

22.1.6

Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours

Tyres

Tighten the wheel nuts on front wheels/rear wheels

see Page 486

22.1.7

Maintenance - Once after 50 hours

Gearbox

Wheel hub gearbox front/back, change oil

Changing power take-off gear oil

Changing intermediate gearbox intake oil

see Page 567

see Page 572

see Page 564

Engine

Check coolant hoses for leaks

see Page 466

Fuel system (engine)

Check fuel lines for leaks

Check detachable connecting elements

(screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) for firm attachment and retighten them, if necessary

see Page 467

Cooling system (engine)

Check the concentration of anticorrosion agent and antifreeze

see Page 463

Check coolant hoses for leaks

Check detachable connecting elements

(screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) for firm attachment and retighten them, if necessary

see Page 466

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 443

22 Maintenance - General Information

22.1

Maintenance table

Panels

Checking the gaps at the mudguards

see Page 488

22.1.8

Maintenance – Once after 200 hours

Gearbox

Change transfer gearbox oil

see Page 563

22.1.9

Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play

see Page 480

22.1.10

Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a day

Hydraulic system

Check hydraulic tank oil level

see Page 559

Check the hydraulic hoses for leaks and, if necessary, have them replaced by a KRONE service partner.

see Page 561

Brake

Check service brake function

Check function of the trailer brake (for "Trailer brake system" version)

see Page 482

see Page 98

see Page 99

Components for crop flow

Check counterblade (damage, wear)

Check chopping blades (damage, wear)

Check discharge scoops (damage, wear)

Check grinding stone (damage)

Check the blade of the husk comb for wear

("Husk comb" version).

Engine

Clean engine compartment

Visual inspection of the entire engine piping for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage.

Check engine oil level

Engine fuel system

Drain condensation water from the fuel prefilter with water separator.

Drain condensation water from fuel filter (on the engine side)

Check fuel level

see Page 531

see Page 515

see Page 552

see Page 509

see Page 555

see Page 457

see Page 466

see Page 458

see Page 460

By qualified specialist workshop only. See engine operating instructions, "Venting and

Draining the Fuel System".

Display on the terminal, fill fuel

see Page 462

444

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - General Information 22

Maintenance table 22.1

Cooling system (engine)

Check coolant level

Clean cooler, cooler compartment and sieve drum

Clean/replace air filter

Cabin

Clean fresh air filter

Top up windscreen washer system

Check indicator lamps

Check lighting function

see Page 464

see Page 477

see Page 468

see Page 476

see Page 473

see Page 245

see Page 374

Air conditioning/heating

Clean capacitor

Central lubrication

Check filling level of reservoir

General maintenance work

Clean the entire machine

Check the fire extinguishers

see Page 477

see Page 598

see Page 454

see Page 488

Camera (for "Auto-loading system" version)

Clean the camera glass

Contents sensor (for "CropControl, NIR sensor including printer", "CropControl, AgriNIR online sensor including printer" versions or for "KRONE NIR Control dual")

Clean disc of the contents sensor

Ensure that the disc of the contents sensor is not damaged. If required, replace.

Silage additives unit

Clean silage additives unit

Tyres

Visually check tyres for cuts and breaks

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub covers for damage and that they are secure

see Page 269

see Page 485

see Page 480

22.1.11

Maintenance – Weekly

Gearbox

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear, check oil level

see Page 568

Front/rear wheel hub gearbox, perform visual inspection

Wheels / tyres

Check tyre pressure

see Page 485

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 445

22 Maintenance - General Information

22.1

Maintenance table

Compressor unit

Drain condensation water from compressed air storage tank

see Page 471

22.1.12

Maintenance – Every 30 hours

Content sensor (in "KRONE NIR Control dual" version)

Check setting of the KRONE NIR Control dual in the spout

See operating instructions for KRONE NIR

Control dual

22.1.13

Maintenance - Every 50 hours

Gearbox

Transfer gearbox, check oil level

Check oil level on intermediate gearbox

Intake intermediate gearbox, check oil level

see Page 563

see Page 564 see Page 564

Bottom roller gearbox, check oil level

Top roller gearbox, check oil level

see Page 565

see Page 566

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear, check oil level

see Page 568

Rotary drive gearbox spout, check oil level

see Page 570

Check oil level of the fan gearbox

Check oil level of the engine output

VariLOC cutting length gearbox, check oil level

see Page 571

see Page 572

see Page 573

Wheels / tyres

Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels

see Page 486

Check tyre pressure

see Page 485

22.1.14

Maintenance - every 100 hours

Cabin

Clean circulation filter

see Page 477

Air conditioning/heating

Check refrigerant condition and filling quantity

(dryer)

see Page 475

General maintenance work

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart

see Page 582

22.1.15

Maintenance - every 250 hours

Crop flow components

Check scraper of flat roller (wear, distance dimension)

Check scraper of discharge accelerator

see Page 535

see Page 551

446

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - General Information 22

Maintenance table 22.1

Drive belts

Check main drive belt

Check sieve drum belt

Check corn conditioner belts

see Page 483

Tighten screws

Check the screws of the steering cylinders

Check the screws of the track rod.

Air conditioning/heating

Check collector

see Page 479

Fire extinguisher

Maintain fire extinguisher

see Page 475

General maintenance work

Check wear plate of tow coupling

Check coupling bolt of tow coupling

Check the turning capacity of the coupling jaw

Perform manual lubrication according to lubrication chart

see Page 487

see Page 582

see Page 488

22.1.16

Maintenance - Every 500 hours

Hydraulic system

Change hydraulic oil in the hydraulic oil tank

see Page 559

Change return suction filter

Change hydraulic oil filter (high-pressure filter) in the working hydraulics

see Page 560

Oil change in gearbox

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

see Page 567

Fuel system (engine)

Drain condensation water from fuel prefilter by using the water separator

see Page 460

Change fuel prefilter with water separator

Check fuel lines for leaks

Check detachable connecting elements

(screws, hose clamps, pipe unions, hoses) for firm attachment

see Page 460

see Page 467

Cooling system (engine)

Check the concentration of anticorrosion agent and antifreeze

Check pipework in the air intake and charge air for leaks

Check coolant hoses for leaks

see Page 463

see Page 466

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 447

22 Maintenance - General Information

22.1

Maintenance table

Cooling system (engine)

Check detachable connecting elements

(screws, hose clamps, pipe unions, hoses) for firm attachment

see Page 466

Electrical system

Check the state of the control unit bearing.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Drive belt

Check the belt tension of all drive belts.

Pulleys

Check all pulleys

Cabin

Replace the fresh air filter.

Replace circulation filter.

Check the functions of the driver's seat.

see Page 483 see Page 483

see Page 476

see Page 477

see Page 123

General maintenance work

Check fire extinguisher

Electrical system

Clean battery

see Page 67

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play

see Page 577

Brake

Check service brake function

Check function of the trailer brake (for "Trailer brake system" version)

see Page 482

see Page 98

see Page 99

see Page 480

22.1.17

Maintenance – every 500 hours, at least before the start of the season

Engine

Change engine oil

Change the engine oil filter

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

22.1.18

Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the end of the season

Hydraulic system

Change oil filter of gearbox oil cooling

see Page 564 ,

448

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - General Information 22

Maintenance table 22.1

Oil change in gearbox

Transfer gearbox

Intermediate gearbox

Intermediate gearbox intake

Lower roller gearbox

Upper roller gearbox

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

Rotary drive gearbox spout

Fan gearbox

Power take-off gear

VariLOC gearbox

Engine

Check all lines, hoses and electric cables for chafe marks

Cooling system (engine)

Clean/replace air filter

see Page 563

see Page 564 see Page 564

see Page 565

see Page 566

see Page 567

see Page 570

see Page 571

see Page 572

see Page 573

see Page 468

22.1.19

Maintenance - every 3 years

Cooling system (engine)

Change coolant

Replace safety cartridge of air filter

see Page 463

see Page 478

see Page 469

22.1.20

Maintenance - as required

Hydraulic system

Change return suction filter

Change hydraulic oil filter (high-pressure filter) of work hydraulics

see Page 559

see Page 560

Brake

Check service brake function

Check function of the trailer brake (for "Trailer brake system" version)

see Page 482

see Page 98

see Page 99

Components for crop flow

Check the conveyor bars of the pre-compression roller

Checking the intake unit tension springs

Check counterblade (damage, wear)

Check chopping blades (damage, wear)

Check corn conditioner (wear)

see Page 534

see Page 539

see Page 531

see Page 515

see Page 549

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 449

22 Maintenance - General Information

22.1

Maintenance table

Components for crop flow

Check discharge scoops (damage, wear)

Check the scrapers of the discharge accelerator

Check grinding stone (damage)

Engine

Clean engine compartment.

Clean cooler, cooler compartment and sieve drum

see Page 551 see Page 551

see Page 511

see Page 458

see Page 477

Fuel system (engine)

Drain condensation water from fuel prefilter by using the water separator

Drain condensation water from the fuel filter

(on the engine side)

Vent fuel system, fuel prefilter

see Page 460

By qualified specialist workshop only. See engine operating instructions, “Venting and

Draining the Fuel System”.

see Page 463

Cooling system (engine)

Check the coolant hoses for leaks.

Check that detachable connecting elements

(screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) are tight and retighten if required

Clean/replace air filter

Replace safety cartridge air filter

see Page 466

see Page 468

see Page 469

Drive belts

Change main belt

Replace sieve drum drive

Change corn conditioner belt

Cabin

Clean fresh air filter

Clean circulation filter

Top up windscreen washer system

Air conditioning/heating

Clean capacitor

Central lubrication

Check filling level of reservoir

General maintenance work

Check all wear plates

Electrical system

Clean battery

see Page 483

see Page 476

see Page 477

see Page 473

see Page 477

see Page 598

see Page 541

see Page 577

450

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

22.2

Maintenance - General Information 22

Tightening torques 22.2

Tightening torques

Deviating tightening torques

All screw connections must in general be tightened with the listed tightening torques following.

Deviations from the tables are marked accordingly.

Metric thread screws with control thread

INFO

The table does not apply to countersunk screws with hexagon socket in case the countersunk screw is tightened via hexagon socket.

M16

M20

M22

M24

M27

M30

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

DV000-001

X Thread size

X Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

3.0

5.9

10

29

42

25

49

85

135

210

425

571

730

1,100

1,450

1 Strength class on screw head

10.9

310

610

832

1,050

1,550

2,100

4.4

8.7

15

36

72

125

200

12.9

365

710

972

1,220

1,800

2,450

5.1

10

18

43

84

145

235

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 451

22 Maintenance - General Information

22.2

Tightening torques

Metric thread screws with fine thread

DV000-001

X Thread size

X

M12 x 1.5

M14 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M18 x 1.5

M20 x 1.5

M24 x 2

M27 x 2

M30 x 1.5

Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

88

145

222

368

465

787

1,148

800

1 Strength class on screw head

10.9

130

213

327

525

662

1,121

1,635

2,100

12.9

152

249

382

614

775

1,312

1,914

2,650

Metric thread screws with countersunk head and hexagon socket

INFO

The table applies only to countersunk screws with hexagon socket and metric thread tightened via hexagon socket.

452

DV000-000

X Thread size 1 Strength class on screw head

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - General Information 22

Tightening torques 22.2

X

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

M16

M20

Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

2.5

4.7

8

23

34

20

39

68

108

168

340

10.9

3.5

7

12

29

58

100

160

248

488

12.9

4.1

8

15

35

67

116

188

292

568

Locking screws on the gearboxes

INFO

The tightening torques only apply to assembly of locking screws, viewing glasses, ventilation and breather filters and bleed valves in gearboxes with cast housings or aluminium or steel housings. The term “locking screw” includes the drain plug, the inspection screw as well as the ventilation and breather filters.

This table applies only to locking screws with external hexagon in connection with copper seal ring and for bleed valves made of brass with shaped seal ring.

Thread

M10x1

M12x1.5

G1/4“

M14x1.5

M16x1.5

45

M18x1.5

50

M20x1.5

Locking screw and sight glass with copper ring 1

Bleed valve made of brass

Ventilation/breather filter made of steel

Steel and cast Aluminium

Ventilation/breather filter made of brass

Steel and cast

Maximum tightening torque (Nm) (±10%)

Aluminium

8

14

14

40

45

16

24

30

32

24

30

G1/2“

M22x1.5

M24x1.5

G3/4“

M33x2

G1“

M42x1.5

G1 1/4“

32

35

60

60

80

80

100

100

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 453

22 Maintenance - General Information

22.3

Cleaning the machine

1  Always replace copper rings.

22.3

Cleaning the machine

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!

When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.

„ Keep persons away from working range.

„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).

NOTICE

Machine damaged by water from a high-pressure cleaner

Bearings and electric or electronic components can be damaged if you aim the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner directly at them during cleaning.

„ Never direct the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner at bearings, electric/electronic components or safety labels.

„ Replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ After each use, remove husk and dust from the machine.

Under very dry working conditions, repeat the cleaning several times a day.

„ For cleaning the engine compartment,

see Page 458

.

„ For cleaning the batteries,

see Page 577

.

„ For cleaning the cooler and the cooler compartment;

see Page 477

.

„ To clean the bearings of the discharge accelerator

see Page 551

.

„ If wheels are to be raised or removed to make it easier to clean the machine,

see Page 616

.

„ Manually lubricate the deflection roll of the corn conditioner belt drive after the machine has been cleaned with water,

see Page 549 .

„ After the machine has been cleaned with water, lubricate all manually lubricated lubrication

points, see Page 585 .

„ After the machine has been cleaned with water, carry out a manual intermediate lubrication

with the central lubrication unit, see Page 599 .

Next, allow the machine to run for approx. 15 minutes in chopping process and perform several manual intermediate lubrications during this time.

454

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

22.4

Maintenance - General Information 22

Compressed air connections to clean with compressed air 22.4

Compressed air connections to clean with compressed air

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!

When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.

„ Keep persons away from working range.

„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).

To clean the machine with compressed air, there is a blow-out gun with hose in the tool storage compartment. This blow-out gun can be connected to compressed-air connections on the machine.

1

2

3

4

BX001-216

1 Compressed-air connection in the engine compartment

2 Compressed-air connection in the cooler compartment

3

4

Compressed-air connection in the area of the intake

Compressed air connection on the machine

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 455

23 Maintenance - Engine

23 Maintenance - Engine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrectly performed or unfinished maintenance work

If maintenance work is not carried out by qualified personnel, the machine could be damaged.

A qualified service centre has the required technical knowledge, qualifications and tools to perform the required work on the machine in a proper manner. This applies in particular to safety-relevant work.

„ Always have the following work performed by a qualified specialist workshop:

- Safety-relevant work

- Service and maintenance work

-Repair work

- Modifications as well as installations and conversions

- Working on electronic parts

„ This chapter does not list all the necessary maintenance work of the engine. It is necessary to observe the maintenance instructions of engine manufacturer. The maintenance instructions are available at each qualified specialist workshop having access to the Workshop Information System (WIS) or after having participated in motor training at KRONE premises.

456

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - Engine 23

Engine overview 23.1

23.1

Engine overview

4 5

1

2

3

8

23.2

10

9

7

6

BX002-450

1 Refrigerant compressor

2 Alternator 24 volts

3 Starter 24 volts

4 Oil dipstick

5 Oil filler neck

6 Fuel filter

7 Oil filter

8 Variable displacement pump (working hydraulics / steering)

9 Hydraulic pump (circulation)

10 Engine control (MCM)

Dirt deposits in engine compartment

WARNING

Risk of fire due to dirt deposits in the engine compartment

A mixture of dust, oil and plant residue inside the engine compartment is a source of fire and presents an increased fire hazard.

„ Always keep the engine compartment clean.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 457

23 Maintenance - Engine

23.3

Engine oil level

23.2.1

Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!

When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.

„ Keep persons away from working range.

„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).

23.3

Engine oil level

NOTICE

Engine damage due to excessively low or high oil level

If the oil level is too low, the amount of oil in the engine is too low, the lubrication points in the engine are not adequately supplied and there is a risk of engine damage. If the oil level is too high, the engine may be damaged.

„

Check oil level according to maintenance table of engine, see Page 440 .

„ Check oil level only when machine is in a horizontal position.

„ Do not start the engine if the oil level is below the bottom mark (min. mark) of the oil dipstick.

„ Drain or extract oil which has been topped up too much.

To check the engine oil, the machine must be on a level surface and the main frame must be aligned horizontally.

1

BXG001-118

To facilitate horizontal alignment of the main frame, a spirit level (1) is located in the engine compartment.

„ Align the main frame horizontally using the keys on the keypad by raising or lowering the rear axle.

458

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

23.3.1

Checking engine oil level

Maintenance - Engine 23

Engine oil level 23.3

1

23.3.2

max.

min.

BXG000-029

ü The main frame of the machine has been aligned horizontally.

ü 5 to 10 minutes have elapsed after the engine was switched off.

ü A lint-free cloth is available to clean the oil dipstick (1).

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 35

.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the oil dipstick (1).

„ Pull out the oil dipstick (1), clean it and push it in all the way.

„ Pull out the oil dipstick (1) and check the engine oil level.

The engine oil level is correct when it is between the "min" and "max" marks.

„ Push in the oil dipstick (1).

If the engine oil level is below the "min" mark:

„

Top up the engine oil, see Page 459 .

Topping up engine oil

1

2 max.

min.

BXG001-119

1 Upper oil filler neck 2 Oil filler neck on the right side of the machine

The engine features two filler necks for the engine oil, either of which can be used.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 459

23 Maintenance - Engine

23.4

Fuel prefilter/water separator

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 35

.

„ Remove the cover (1, 2).

„ Top up engine oil via the oil filler neck up to the "max." mark.

„ Screw on the cover (1, 2).

„ Run the engine at a low idle speed for a short time and switch off the engine.

„ After approx. 5 to 10 minutes check the engine oil level,

see Page 459

INFO

For further information, refer to the provided documents “Operating instructions” and “Fuel specification” of engine manufacturer, chapter Engine Oil.

The diesel engine is filled ex works with engine oil of SAE class 5W-30 according to

Mercedes-Benz specification (sheet 228.51/sheet 228.5).

These engine oils are characterised by higher standard of quality and have favourable effects on

„ Length of oil change interval

„ Engine wear

„ Fuel consumption

„ Exhaust emissions

23.4

Fuel prefilter/water separator

1

2

3

4

5

5

460

BXG000-030

23.4.1

Changing the fuel filter element

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

ü Provide a new filter element and a new O-ring seal from HYDAC.

ü A suitable vessel for collecting the draining fuel is available.

„ Follow the instructions in the supplied document: operating instructions Water separator/

Fuel prefilter HDP 600, chapter "Changing filter element".

„ Unscrew the screw cover (1) with filter element (3) and pull slightly out of the filter housing (2). Drain the fuel.

„ Pull the screw cover (1) with filter element (3) completely out of the filter housing (2).

„ Unclip the filter element (3) from the screw cover (1).

„ Replace the O-ring seal on the screw cap (3) with the new O-ring seal.

„ Clip the new filter element (3) into the screw cover (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - Engine 23

Fuel prefilter/water separator 23.4

„ Wet the O-ring seals on the filter element (3) and on the screw cover (1) with fuel.

„ Screw on the screw cover (1) with filter element (3) and tighten to 40 Nm.

„ If required, clean the sight glass (4), see chapter Maintenance-Engine, "Cleaning sight glass fuel prefilter".

„

Bleed the fuel system, see Page 463

, and check the filter for leaks.

23.4.2

Cleaning the fuel prefilter sight glass

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

ü A new sealing ring from HYDAC is available.

ü A suitable vessel for collecting the draining fuel is available.

„ Follow the instructions in the supplied document: operating instructions Water separator/

Fuel prefilter HDP 600, chapter "Maintaining water collecting chamber".

„ Hold the suitable vessel under the drain plug (5), slowly unscrew the drain plug (5) and drain the fuel into the vessel.

„ Remove the drain plug (5).

„ Unscrew the sight glass (4) from the filter housing (2).

„ Clean the sight glass (4) with a brush but without using cleaning agents. Replace the sight glass (4) if required.

„ Mount the new sealing ring on the sight glass (4) and wet with fuel.

„ Screw the sight glass (4) onto the filter housing (2) and tighten to maximum 10 Nm.

„ After cleaning the sight glass (4), insert the drain plug (5) and tighten to 2 Nm.

„ Fill the fuel filter with diesel and check the filter for leaks.

„

Vent the fuel system, see Page 463 .

23.4.3

Draining condensation water out of the fuel prefilter

The condensation water in the fuel is collected in the sight glass (4).

„ Check daily whether condensation water has collected in the inspection glass (4).

If condensation water has collected in the inspection glass, the condensation water must be drained.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

„ Hold a suitable container under the drain plug (5).

„ Open the drain plug (5).

„ Drain the water/fuel mixture into the container.

„ Close the drain plug (5).

„ Dispose of the water/fuel mixture according to the applicable regulations.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 461

23 Maintenance - Engine

23.5

Refuelling

23.5

Refuelling

NOTICE

Engine damage is unauthorised or contaminated fuel is used.

If refuelling with unauthorised or contaminated fuel or with fuel which has a high sulphur content, the engine will be damaged.

„ Only refuel with commercial, sulphur-free diesel fuel, pursuant to EN 590.

„ Do not refuel with contaminated fuel.

„ Observe the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer, chapter "Refuelling"

„ Do not use the following fuels:

- Fuels with a sulphur content exceeding 0.005% (50 ppm) sulphur

- Marine diesel fuel

- jet fuel

- heating oil

- fatty acid methyl ester FAME (bio- diesel fuels)

NOTICE

Machine damage by water in the fuel

If the machine is parked with tank unfilled, condensation water may form and when it is cold, freezing could result.

„ Refuel daily at the end of operation.

1

BMG000-009

Filling quantity: see Page 80

„ Follow the instructions in the following, supplied document: Engine operating instructions,

"Refuelling" section.

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Clean around the filler neck (1).

„ Unscrew the tank cap.

„ Fill the fuel tank with fuel.

„ Close the tank cap tight.

462

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - Engine 23

Vent fuel filter 23.6

23.6

Vent fuel filter

1 2

BXG000-031

It may be necessary to vent the fuel filter

• after the filter element on the fuel prefilter was changed

• after prolonged machine standstill

• after filling the previously drained fuel system

• after initial operation

The vent the fuel filter:

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Follow the instructions in the following, supplied document: Engine operating instructions, chapter "Venting the fuel system".

„ To allow air to escape, unscrew the venting screw (2).

„ Turn the activation lever (1) to the left until the activation lever (1) can be moved freely upwards.

„ Pump the activation lever (1) until fuel comes out of the venting screw (2).

„ If fuel comes out, guide the activation lever (1) downwards and lock by turning it to the right.

„ Screw in the venting screw (2) and clean up any fuel which has run out.

23.7

Engine coolant

NOTICE

Damage to the cooling system by using incorrect coolant

If a mixture of coolant containing silicate and a silicate-free coolant is used, this may cause damage to the cooling system of the diesel engine.

„ Never use a mixture of coolant containing silicate and a silicate-free coolant as an engine coolant.

The engine cooling system is filled ex works with a coolant according to Mercedes-Benz specification (sheet 325,5 / sheet 326,5) which ensures protection against freezing and corrosion as well as other protective effects.

The engine coolant is a mixture of water, anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

The engine coolant has the following properties:

• Heat transfer

• Corrosion protection

• Cavitation protection (protection against pitting)

• Frost protection

• Increasing the boiling point

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 463

23 Maintenance - Engine

23.8

Checking the engine coolant level

Irrespective of the time of year, the engine coolant must remain in the engine cooling system, even in countries with high outdoor temperatures.

When you change the engine coolant, ensure that

• only clean auxiliaries are used for filling.

• the engine coolant contains 50% by volume anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

This corresponds to a frost protection down to -37° C.

• the percentage of anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent in the engine coolant does not exceed 55% by volume. This corresponds to a frost protection down to -45° C. Higher values would deteriorate frost protection and heat transfer.

• the engine coolant is not mixed with a different anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

• a low coolant level is not topped up only with water, but also with the correct percentage of an approved anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

23.8

Checking the engine coolant level

WARNING

Risk of fire from frost protection agent

If frost protection agent comes into contact with hot components in the warm engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries.

„ Leave the engine to cool down before filling with anti-freeze.

„ Keep anti-freeze away from the filler neck.

„ Before starting the engine, thoroughly clean components contaminated with frost protection agent.

WARNING

Danger of injury due to scalding

The engine cooling system is under pressure, especially when the engine is warm. If the cover is opened when the engine is warm, hot coolant may spray out. There is risk of injury.

„ Leave the engine to cool down before opening the cover.

„ When opening the cover, wear suitable gloves and goggles.

„ To relieve the pressure, open the cover by a half turn.

464

BXG000-032

The reservoir (1) for the coolant is located behind the side hood on the right in the centre on top of the machine compartment. The filling cover (2) is accessible from the top of the machine behind the spout under the cover (3).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - Engine 23

Checking the engine coolant level 23.8

The coolant level is monitored by a sensor. If the coolant level is too low, an error message is indicated on the display. The coolant level must be topped up immediately.

„ Follow the instructions in the following supplied document: operating instructions Engine, chapter Consumables "Coolant".

Checking engine coolant level:

The coolant level must be visible in the filler neck.

Topping up the engine coolant:

„ Follow the instructions in the following supplied document: operating instructions Engine, chapter Consumables "Coolant".

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Remove the cover (3) and place to one side.

„ To relieve residual pressure, open the cover (2) by a half turn.

„ Unscrew the cover (2).

„ Pour in coolant until the fluid level in the filler neck is visible.

„ Screw on the cover (2).

„ Attach and close the cover (3).

Filling quantity: see Page 80

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 465

23 Maintenance - Engine

23.9

Checking engine piping

23.9

Checking engine piping

23.9.1

Checking pipework in the air conditioning and heating system

23.9.2

BXG000-080

„ Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.

„ Ensure that all clamps are tight. Tighten if necessary.

Checking tubing in engine cooling system

466

BXG000-081

„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and replace if required.

„ Attach the hose clamps of the joint bolts during the initial installation with a tightening torque of 9 Nm.

„ Warm up the machine.

„ Retighten the joint bolt hose clamps with a tightening torque of 10-11 Nm.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

23.9.3

Checking pipework in air intake and charge air

Maintenance - Engine 23

Checking engine piping 23.9

23.9.4

BXG000-082

„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition. Replace if necessary.

„ Mount the hose clamps of the joint bolts with a tightening torque of 10 ... 12 Nm.

Checking fuel lines

3

2

1

BX001-226

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 467

23 Maintenance - Engine

23.10 Cleaning air filter

1 Fuel tank

2 Additional tank

3 Fuel prefilter

„ Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.

23.10

Cleaning air filter

NOTICE

Engine damage caused by dirty or damaged air filter or safety cartridge

If the machine is operated with a soiled or damaged air filter or safety cartridge, the diesel engine may be damaged.

„ Clean or replace the air filter and the safety cartridge according to the maintenance table,

see Page 440

.

„ Immediately replace a damaged air filter or a damaged safety cartridge.

„ Do not clean and reuse the safety cartridge but always replace it by a new one.

468

BMG000-010

Interval for testing and changing:

see Page 440

.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Release the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1).

„ By gently turning the filter element (3), carefully pull it out of the filter housing (4).

„ Clean the interior area and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing (4).

„ Blow out the filter element (3) with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside.

If the filter element is excessively soiled or damaged, replace the filter element. If the installation date of the filter element is 4 years old, replace the filter element.

„ Install the cleaned or a new filter element (3).

„ Attach the cover (1) so that the extraction hose is aligned with the middle of the machine.

„ Secure the cover (1) with the clamps (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - Engine 23

Replacing safety cartridge 23.11

23.11

Replacing safety cartridge

NOTICE

Engine damage caused by dirty or damaged air filter or safety cartridge

If the machine is operated with a soiled or damaged air filter or safety cartridge, the diesel engine may be damaged.

„ Clean or replace the air filter and the safety cartridge according to the maintenance table,

see Page 440

.

„ Immediately replace a damaged air filter or a damaged safety cartridge.

„ Do not clean and reuse the safety cartridge but always replace it by a new one.

BMG000-011

Interval for checking and changing:

see Page 440

.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Release the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1).

„ By gently turning the filter element (3), carefully pull it out of the filter housing (4).

„ Unscrew the safety cartridge (5).

„ Clean the interior area and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing (4).

„ Screw in a new safety cartridge (5).

„ Install the cleaned or a new filter element (3).

„ Attach the cover (1) so that the extraction hose is aligned with the middle of the machine.

„ Secure the cover (1) with the clamps (2).

23.12

Shutting down the diesel engine

INFO

For information concerning procedures which must be performed on the engine prior to putting the machine into storage, see supplied operating instructions of the engine manufacturer, chapter Cleaning and Care and chapter Storing When not in Use.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 469

23 Maintenance - Engine

23.12 Shutting down the diesel engine

Measures for shutting down the engine for a period of 30 days to 6 months

To avoid deposits by the 7% biodiesel contents in the diesel fuel as well as the consequential damage or problems which may arise from this when restarting, observe the following points when shutting down the machine (in addition to the measures stated in the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer:

• The engine must be run monthly for approx. 10 min at max. 900 rpm with air conditioning and heating switched on.

• Before starting, it is essential to check engine oil level and coolant level. In addition, the water separator on the fuel prefilter must be drained.

• When starting or running the engine, it is essential to pay attention to the oil pressure as well as the coolant and oil temperature.

INFO

The monthly engine start may be omitted if the engine was operated with FAME-free fuel (B0 diesel fuel) and shut down.

If the engine system has been operated beforehand with normal diesel fuel according to DIN

EN 590 with 7% biodiesel contents, it is sufficient in this case to pump down the remaining fuel in the tank and to fill it with sufficient B0 fuel, but at least 50 l.

Before shutdown, the engine system must at least be operated 30 min with this fuel so that all fuel-conducting parts are flushed.

The B0 requirement is currently fulfilled e.g. by fuels such as Aral Ultimate Diesel and BP

Ultimate Diesel.

These measures are valid in conjunction with operating instructions, version 01‑14 of the engine manufacturer.

470

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

24

24.1

Maintenance – Compressed Air System 24

Drain condensation water from the compressed air tank 24.1

Maintenance – Compressed Air System

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

WARNING

Risk of injury from escaping compressed air

The compressor unit is under high pressure. Escaping compressed air may seriously injure skin, limbs and eyes.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

Drain condensation water from the compressed air tank

WARNING

Risk of injury from corroded or damaged compressed air reservoirs

Damaged or corroded compressed air reservoirs may burst and cause serious injuries.

„ Observe the inspection intervals according to maintenance table,

see Page 440 .

„ Have damaged or corroded compressed air reservoirs replaced immediately by a specialist workshop.

NOTICE

Damage to compressed air reservoir caused by water in the compressor unit

Water in the compressor unit leads to corrosion which damages the compressed air reservoir.

„ Check and clean drain valve according to maintenance table,

see Page 440

.

„ Immediately replace a defective drain valve.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 471

24 Maintenance – Compressed Air System

24.2

Retighten tensioning straps at the compressed air tank

1

24.2

2

DVG000-014

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

WARNING! Risk of eye injury due to spurting condensation water! Wear suitable protective goggles.

ü A suitable container is available for escaping condensation water.

„ Open the drain valve (2).

Æ Allow compressed air and condensation water to escape out of the compressed-air tank (1).

„ Visually inspect the drain valve (2) to ensure that it is not defective or soiled.

Æ If the drain valve (2) is defective and is no longer sealed, immediately have the drain valve (2) replaced by a KRONE service partner.

Æ If the drain valve (2) is soiled, clean the drain valve (2).

Retighten tensioning straps at the compressed air tank

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

1

2

DVG000-015

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34

.

„ Check that the tensioning straps (1) are firmly attached.

If the compressed-air tank cannot be turned by hand, the tensioning straps (1) have been correctly set.

If the compressed-air tank can be turned by hand, the tensioning straps (1) must be retensioned.

„ To tension the tensioning straps (1), tighten the nuts (2).

472

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

25

25.1

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system 25.1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system

1

1 2

BMG000-012

The reservoir (1) for the windscreen washer system is behind the right side hood.

The cover (2) is on top of the machine and is reached via the platform on the right side of the machine.

„ Check the level of the windscreen washer system daily.

If the cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, the fluid level is correct.

If no cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, refill:

„ Open the cover (2) and add cleaning fluid.

„ Close the cover (2).

INFO

„ To achieve a better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add windscreen cleaner/anti-freeze.

„ In winter drain the washer system or fill with special anti-freeze.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 473

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating

25.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating

WARNING

Risk of injury from getting in contact with refrigerant

During repair, service, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, there can be liquid or gaseous refrigerant emissions that are hazardous to persons and environment.

„ Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Secure the machine against rolling away.

„ Take suitable protective measures (e.g. wear protective goggles and protective gloves).

„ Only authorised specialists are allowed to perform repair, service, maintenance and cleaning work.

„ Always see a doctor if you suffer burns from refrigerant.

„ Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the cooling system.

„ During refill and repair work, do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into a recycling container.

„ The spare parts used for the machine must satisfy the technical requirements of the machine manufacturer. For this reason, use only KRONE original spare parts.

„ Be extremely careful when you perform welding work in the vicinity of the air conditioning system.

NOTICE

Environmental damage due to chemicals

The air conditioning is operated with refrigerant R134a (tetrafluorethane). This substance contains no chlorine atoms, and thus is not harmful to the ozone in the atmosphere of the world. Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not be drained; it must be collected at a recycling plant.

„ Collect the refrigerant with a recycling plant.

„ Thus do NOT separate the connecting pipes beforehand.

„ Have all maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning carried out only by your

KRONE dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.

25.2.1

Components of air conditioning

The air conditioning components and their position in the machine.

Compressor

Capacitor

Dryer/collector

Evaporator

Pressure switch

On the right behind the engine, driven by a V-belt

Behind the rotating screen, can be accessed from the right side of the machine

Behind the rotating screen, can be accessed from the right side of the machine

In the cabin roof

On the capacitor, behind the rotating screen

Expansion valve At the evaporator inlet

Control panel for automatic climate control

On the terminal

474

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

25.2.2

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Maintaining air conditioning and heating 25.2

Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/dryer

1

2

BMG000-018

The receiver (2) with pressure switch (1) is located behind the rotating screen in the left cooler box.

As the receiver (2) is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container regulations during production and testing. According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance with the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.

According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of tanks in use. In combination with the inspection the receiver (2) must be visually inspected twice a year. Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct state, it must be replaced by a qualified service centre for safety reasons to ensure sufficient protection to the user and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurised containers.

INFO

The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally

+1°Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.

25.2.3

Checking the condition and filling quantity of refrigerant

Regularly check the dryer/receiver unit and replace it when required, but at least once a year.

BX001-239

Check the filling quantity

Interval for checking refrigerant level: see Page 440

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 475

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating

The amount of refrigerant is checked on the sight glass (2) via the white float (5).

„ Start the engine.

„ Switch on the air conditioning and set to maximum cooling.

If the white float (5) is at the top, the refrigerant level is correct.

If the white float (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be topped up by a qualified service

centre, filling quantity see Page 83

.

Checking the refrigerant condition

Checking the interval for refrigerant condition:

see Page 440

.

„ Observe the label (4) on the dryer (1).

If the indicator perl (3) is orange, the refrigerant condition is OK.

If the indicator perl (3) has turned colourless, the dryer/receiver unit must be changed by a specialist workshop.

25.2.4

Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter

476

BX001-984

INFO

If filters are not properly maintained, the fresh air filter may become very soiled and it can no longer be guaranteed that adequate fresh air will flow into the cab.

A fresh air filter (4) is located in the upper cabin area behind the ventilation grid (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. The fresh air filter protects the driver in the cabin against airborne contamination outside the cabin.

Always check the fresh air filter before starting to drive the machine.

„ Open the closing device (1) by turning it 90° clockwise and remove the gill screen (2).

„ To remove the fresh air filter (4), remove the knurled head screw (3).

„ Pull out the fresh air filter (4), check for soiling and clean if required.

Shake out the fresh air filter (4); never use compressed air. If heavily soiled, replace the fresh air filter (4).

„ Reinsert the fresh air filter (4).

„ Attach the fresh air filter with the knurled head screw (3).

„ Insert the ventilation grid (2) and close using the closing device (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

25.2.5

Replacing/cleaning circulation filter

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment 25.3

1

25.3

2

BMG000-019

„ To clean the circulation filter, loosen the screws (2) and remove the ventilation grid (1) together with the filter element.

„ Clean filter element with compressed air and replace it, if necessary.

„ Mount the ventilation grid (1) together with the filter element, ensuring that the filter element is correctly inserted.

„ Press in the screws (2).

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment

1

2

BX001-242

The right side hood is used to access the cooler, the maintenance flaps of the crop flow and the right side of the engine compartment.

„ Open the side hood (1) and enter the cooler compartment via the right ladder (2).

„ Every day remove dirt from around the area of the engine compartment and the cooler and clean the ambient area to prevent the risk of fire and wipe off any oil residue.

„ If there is a large accumulation of dust and if the crops are very dry, clean the above locations more frequently.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 477

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.4

Draining coolant

1

2

3

4

25.4

BXG000-033

Water cooler, oil cooler, charge air cooler and capacitor are located behind the sieve drum in the machine compartment.

Preferably clean the cooler and the capacitor while the engine is cold.

„ Open the snap locks (2) on the rotating screen (1) and open the rotating screen.

„ Blow out the coolers (3) with compressed air from the engine compartment in the direction of travel. Ensure that the blades are not damaged.

„ Blow out the capacitor (4) with compressed air from the cooler compartment against the direction of travel. Ensure that the blades are not damaged.

„ Close the rotating screen (1) and lock with the snap locks (2).

Draining coolant

The drain sleeve is located at the back on the left side of the machine.

1

478

BXG000-034

ü The left side hood is open.

„ Place a suitable container under the drain sleeve (1).

„ Remove the end cap of the drain sleeve (1).

„ Remove the drain hose from the storage compartment and hold the open end in the container provided.

„ Screw on the screw connection for the drain hose onto the drain sleeve (1) and allow the coolant to flow into the container.

„ Once the coolant has fully drained out, remove the drain hose and place the end cap onto the drain sleeve (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

25.5

25.5.1

Maintaining chassis

Checking attachment of steering cylinder

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Maintaining chassis 25.5

25.5.2

BMG000-021

Check the screws of the steering cylinder with the following tightening torque:

„ Check the screws (1) of the steering cylinder with a tightening torque of 730 Nm.

Checking fitting of track rod

BMG000-020

Check the screws of the track rod on both sides of the machine with the following tightening torques:

„ Check the screw (1) on the axial ball joint with a tightening torque of 350 Nm.

„ Check the clamping screw (2) of the track rod with a tightening torque of 60 ... 70 Nm.

„ Check the castle nut (3) of the track rod end with a tightening torque of 450 +50 Nm. Check the seat of the cotter pin.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 479

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.5

Maintaining chassis

25.5.3

Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version

25.5.4

480

BM000-270

Check the hub covers (1) for damage and tight fit:

„ Replace lost or worn hub covers (1) immediately to prevent dirt entering the interior of the hub and damaging the bearing.

If a hub cover is missing or if a hub cover is dismounted, the seal must be replaced before a new installation.

Check the screws of the hub covers:

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Make sure the hub covers have been mounted correctly and are in a perfect state.

„ Check the screws of the hub cover for tight fit.

Checking the hub bearing of the rear axle, for the front-wheel drive version

The hub bearings of the rear axle are subject to wear. The lifetime of the bearings depends on the working conditions, load, speed, setting and lubrication of the bearings.

Checking hub bearings of the wheels for wear:

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„

Raise the respective wheel until the wheel is no longer in contact with the ground, see

Page 616

.

„ Rotate the wheel in both directions to detect any hard spots or resistance.

„ Quickly rotate the wheel to detect any noises, vibrations or runouts.

ð Wear is determined on a hub bearing.

„ Replace the hub bearing and all oil seals.

Determining bearing clearance of the hubs:

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 34 .

„

Raise the respective wheel until the wheel is no longer in contact with the ground, see

Page 616

.

„ Take hold of the wheel from the top and bottom and check the clearance by carrying out a wobble test. (To check the clearance, it may be helpful to use a lever between the wheel and ground.)

„ Make sure the clearance does not originate from the suspension or the steering knuckles.

ð Clearance is determined at a hub bearing.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

25.5.5

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Maintaining chassis 25.5

„ Have a qualified service centre set the bearing clearance.

Checking attachment of wheel hub gearbox

BX002-021 / BX002-020

Test the screws of the wheel hub gearbox at the front axle on both sides of the machine with the following tightening torques:

„ Test the 2 screws (1) connecting the wheel hub gearbox and the adjusting motor with a tightening torque of 415 Nm.

„ Test the 20 screws (2) connecting the wheel hub gearbox and the adapter plates with a tightening torque of 610 Nm.

„ Test the 14 M22 screws (3) connecting the adapter plates and the vehicle frame with a tightening torque of 550 Nm.

„ Test the 2 M20 screws (4) connecting the adapter plates and the vehicle frame with a tightening torque of 410 Nm.

„ Test the 2 screws (5) of the oil holes with a tightening torque of 65 Nm.

BX002-023 / BX002-022

Test the screws of the wheel hub gearbox at the rear axle on both sides of the machine with the following tightening torques:

„ Test the 2 screws (1) connecting the wheel hub gearbox and the adjusting motor with a tightening torque of 230 Nm.

„ Test the 18 screws (2) connecting the wheel hub gearbox and the steering knuckle with a tightening torque of 210 Nm.

„ Test the 2 screws (3) of the oil holes with a tightening torque of 65 Nm.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 481

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.6

Maintaining brake (Bosch)

25.6

Maintaining brake (Bosch)

NOTICE

Failure of the service brake caused by malfunctions of brake as well as thermal overload

If malfunctions occur or there is a thermal overload, the multi-disc brake may fail.

„ After a malfunction or thermal overload, always replace the blades, springs and sealing elements.

„ If repairs are required due to malfunctions or thermal overload, they may be performed by trained personnel or employees of the BOSCH-REXROTH service department only.

ð BOSCH-REXROTH will accept no liability for any damage which occurs due to noncompliance with these instructions.

NOTICE

Damage to the multi-disc brake

If the outer and inner discs of the multi-disc brake are replaced during maintenance/repair work but are not wetted with lubricating oil prior to installation, the discs, which have not been wetted with a film of lubricating oil, may become severely worn when the brakes are directly applied. This may cause the multi-disc brake to fail.

„ When repairing the multi-disc brake, generally replace the entire multi-disc pack, the springs and the sealing elements. It is not permitted to replace individual discs.

„ Prior to installation, wet all replaced discs with lubricating oil according to the enclosed lubricating oil recommendation.

„ Ensure that the discs are completely wetted with a film of lubricating oil.

Daily or before moving off

„ Always check the function of the service brake before moving off,

see Page 98

.

Checking within the limits of the national regulations:

„ Regularly check the function of the multi-disc brake according to the national statutory regulations.

This check can be conducted for example during a TÜV vehicle inspection. In this case, have the brake deceleration measured. The target value must correspond with the vehicle specification.

After emergency braking

Irrespective of the maintenance intervals, the brake must be completely inspected following emergency braking when the hydrostats have failed.

„ Contact KRONE customer service.

482

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Maintaining belt drives 25.7

25.7

Maintaining belt drives

Overview of belt drives

3

1 2

10

11

4

5

9 6

7

8

BX001-871

1

2

Belt drive engine output fan

Belt tensioner fan drive

7

8

Hydraulic pump intake/header

Belt drive for intermediate gearbox cutter drum

3 Drive pump

4 Belt tensioner for belt drive of engine output intermediate gearbox

9 Chopping drum

10 Discharge accelerator

5 Belt drive for engine output intermediate gearbox

6 Intermediate gearbox

11 Belt tensioner for belt drive of intermediate gearbox cutter drum

BX001-248

1 Corn conditioner belt drive

2 Belt pulley discharge accelerator

3 Belt tensioner for corn conditioner

4

5

6

Belt pulley "Roller at front"

Deflection roll "Roller at rear"

Belt pulley deflection

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 483

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.7

Maintaining belt drives

Slackening drive belt of intermediate gearbox cutter drum and drive belt of corn conditioner

25.7.1

BX001-255

The relief button (1) is located on the right side of the ladder. The tensioning arms of the belt drives are relieved by pressing the relief button.

„ To be able to press the belt tensioner easily forwards, pull and hold the relief button (1) and simultaneously press the belt tensioner all the way forwards.

The belt tensioners can be pushed back.

Checking kraftband

BX001-250

INFO

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Visually check the kraftbands on the inside (1) and outside (2) for wear and damage (e.g.

tears, stones) and replace if required.

„ Check each kraftband for soiling (oil, grease) and clean or replace it, if necessary.

484

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Maintaining tyres and wheels 25.8

25.7.2

Checking pulley

BX001-249

INFO

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Check the edges of the pulley (1) for wear and, if required, have them replaced by your

KRONE service partner.

„ Check the pulley (1) for damage and replace if required.

„ Check the pulley (1) for soiling (oil, grease) and clean if required.

Maintaining tyres and wheels 25.8

25.8.1

Checking/maintaining tyres

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

Inspect the tyres visually

„ Visually inspect tyres for cuts or breaks.

Æ If there are cuts or breaks in the tyres, have the tyres repaired or replaced by a KRONE service partner.

Maintenance intervals for visual inspection of the tyres,

see Page 440

.

Checking/adapting the tyre pressure

„

Check the tyre pressure, see Page 84 .

Æ If the tyre pressure is too high, deflate air.

Æ If the tyre pressure is too low, increase the tyre pressure.

Check the maintenance intervals for tyre pressure, see Page 440 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 485

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.8

Maintaining tyres and wheels

25.8.2

Retighten wheel nuts

25.8.3

4WD

700 Nm /

516 lbf ft

550 Nm /

405 lbf ft

2WD

700 Nm /

516 lbf ft

450 Nm /

332 lbf ft

1)

2) - 7)

8) ...

1h

10h

50h

BX001-959

„ Retighten the nuts for attaching the wheels crosswise

For machines with four-wheel drive:

„ Retighten the nuts on the front axle to 700 Nm.

„ Retighten the nuts on the rear axle to 550 Nm.

For machines with two-wheel drive:

„ Retighten the nuts on the front axle to 700 Nm.

„ Tighten the nuts on the rear axle with 450 Nm.

Intervals at which the nuts on the wheels must be tightened,

see Page 440 .

Running direction of tyres

INFO

If machines have front wheel drive only, the left and right tyres on the rear axle are deliberately interchanged for reasons of traction. (The left wheel is mounted on the right and the right wheel is mounted on the left.)

25.8.4

Changing tyre size

INFO

Before switching the tyre size when changing the tyres, check beforehand the reliability of the new tyre size for the vehicle and adjust parameters in the terminal. To do this, contact

KRONE customer service.

486

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Maintaining tow coupling 25.9

25.9

Maintaining tow coupling

X

4

2

1

5

3

BX001-258

Maintenance work on the tow coupling:

Wear plate:

„ Check the thickness of the wear plate (1).

If the wear plate is thinner than 6 mm:

„ Have the wear plate replaced by a specialist workshop.

Coupling bolt:

„ Check the diameter of the coupling bolt at the thickest point.

If the diameter of the coupling bolt is less than 37 mm:

„ Have the coupling bolt replaced by a specialist workshop.

Coupling gap:

„ Check the degree of wear of the coupling gap.

If the coupling gap is worn by more than 1.5 mm or the gap (a) between the coupling jaw (3) and the coupling carrier (4) is greater than 3 mm at any point:

„ Replace tow coupling.

6

BX001-259

„ Check the turning capacity of the coupling jaw (3).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 487

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.10 Checking the fire extinguisher

If the coupling jaw (3) is stiff:

„ Loosen the screw (5).

„ Lubricate the grease nipple (6).

„ Turn the connecting jaw (3) by one turn and tighten the screw (5) to a torque of 35 – 50

Nm.

25.10

Checking the fire extinguisher

1

BPG000-034

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Ensure that the fire extinguisher (1) is mounted on the machine.

„ Ensure that access to and view of the fire extinguisher (1) are not obstructed.

„ Ensure that the fire extinguisher (1) is filled by weighing the fire extinguisher (1).

„ Ensure that the seal on the extinguishing head and the security seal are neither defective nor missing.

„ Ensure that the operating instructions on the type plate of the fire extinguisher (1) are legible and face outwards.

„ Check the fire extinguisher for visible material damage, corrosion, leakage, a clogged hose and/or nozzle.

„ Ensure that the pressure gauge pointer indicates the green area.

25.11

Checking the gaps at the mudguards

It is possible that the panels on the machine settle after the first few operating hours, which can cause a contact between the lateral tanks and the mudguards.

X

1 2

3

488

BX001-720

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

„ Measure the distance between the mudguard (2) and the lateral tanks (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Basic Machine 25

Checking the gaps at the mudguards 25.11

The setting of the mudguard is correct if X=20 ... 25 mm.

The position of the mudguard must be adjusted if the distance is X<20 mm. Adjust the width of the front and the rear gap between tank (1), mudguard (2) and lamp support (3) to the same value.

1

3 1 2

2

BX001-722

To adjust the position of the mudguard on both sides of the machine:

„ Check whether the oblong holes permit the mudguard (2) to be moved towards the side hood (1).

If the oblong holes permit the mudguard (2) to be moved in the correct direction towards the side hood (1):

„ Loosen the screw connections (3) and adjust the mudguard (2) to the side hood (1) such that the gap between the mudguard (2) and the tank is X=20 mm.

If the oblong holes do not permit the mudguard (2) to be moved to the extent that the gap between the mudguard (2) and the tank is X=20 mm:

1 2

2

BX001-723

„ Loosen the screws (1) on the hinges (2) of the side hoods by 2 turns.

„ Move the hinges forwards/backwards in increments of 5 mm.

„ Close the side hood and check the gaps.

„ Repeat this process until the gap between the mudguard and the tanks is X=20 mm and the gaps at the front and at the rear have the same width.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 489

25 Maintenance – Basic Machine

25.11 Checking the gaps at the mudguards

1

2

BX002-730

„ Once the gap between mudguard and tanks has been adjusted to X=20 mm, loosen the screw connection (2) at the locking bolt (1) on the left side of the machine.

„ Adjust the locking bolt (1) for the new position of the padlock, and tighten the screw connection (2).

Contact KRONE customer service if the gap between mudguard and tanks cannot be adjusted to X=20 mm, or if the front and the rear gap do not have the same width.

490

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

26

26.1

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Removing intake unit with mounting cart 26.1

Maintenance – Feed System

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

Removing intake unit with mounting cart

ü The header is removed.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

Hydraulically relieve tension on the pendulum frame

BXG000-088

The relief button (1) is located on the right side of the ladder. Tension is hydraulically relieved on the pendulum frame by pressing the relief button.

„ To hydraulically relieve tension on the hydraulic system of the pendulum frame, pull the relief button (1) and let it go again.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 491

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.1

Removing intake unit with mounting cart

Removing universal shaft

492

BX001-261

„ Remove the lower universal shaft (1) on the forage harvester side.

„ Remove the upper universal shaft (2) on the forage harvester side, pull the universal shaft half (3) out of the universal shaft and put it to one side.

Disconnecting cables and lines

1 3

2

BX001-263

Right-hand machine side

„ Separate the plug connection (1) and mount the dummy plug on both sides.

„ Lay the cable harness down on the intake unit and secure it against falling down.

Left-hand machine side

„ Disconnect the lubrication line (2).

„ Detach the hydraulic lines (3) (C1, C2, D1, D2).

„ Insert the lubrication line (2) and the hydraulic lines (3) into hose support on the intake unit and lock it.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Placing intake unit on the mounting cart

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Removing intake unit with mounting cart 26.1

BX001-262

ü The holder (1) of the mounting cart is swivelled down, the securing pins and the spring cotter pins (2) have been put to one side, on the right and left.

ü Remove the cotter pins (5) and the bolts (6).

„ Push the mounting cart centred in front of the intake unit.

„ Lower the lifting unit with the keys of the grinding control unit until the locking pins (3) are centred in front of the holders (4).

„ Slide the mounting cart onto the locking pins and secure with bolt (6) and cotter pins (5).

BXG000-102

„ Lower the lifting unit using the keys on the grinding control unit until the locking pins (1) have been relieved.

„ Pull out the locking pins (1) and set them aside.

„ Raise the lifting unit until the support (2) of the mounting cart can be folded up.

„ Fold up the support and secure with bolt (3) and spring cotter pin (4), on the right and left.

„ Lower the lifting unit until the holding claw (5) is under the support device (6).

Push out the intake unit forwards and store in a safe place for subsequent reinstallation.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 493

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.2

Mounting intake unit with installation cart

26.2

Mounting intake unit with installation cart

BXG000-102

„ Lower the lifting unit on the grinding control unit until the holding claw (5) is under the holding mechanism (6).

„ Push the intake unit centred in front of the chopper unit.

„ Raise the lifting unit until the support (2) of the mounting cart can be folded down.

WARNING! Risk of injury; if the holding claw (5) does not pick up the holding mechanism

(6) correctly, the intake unit may fall down. Ensure that the holding mechanism is held securely in the holding claw.

„ Pull out the spring cotter pin (4) and remove the bolts (3) on the right and left.

„ Fold down the support (2).

„ Lower the lifting unit until the locking pins (1) can be inserted.

„ Insert and secure the locking pins (1).

494

BX001-267

„ Remove the cotter pins (1) and bolts (2) from the mounting cart.

„ Raise or lower the lifting unit so that the mounting cart can be pushed down off the locking pins (3).

„ Push out the mounting cart forwards and store in a safe place for subsequent re-installation.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Connecting the cables and lines

1

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Mounting intake unit with installation cart 26.2

3

2

BX001-263

Right-hand machine side

„ Establish the plug connection (1).

Left-hand machine side

„ Unlock the locking of the hose support on the intake unit.

„ Clean the coupling sleeves and coupling plugs of the lubrication line (2).

„ Connect the lubrication line (2). In doing so, tighten the screw connection until the stop is reached.

„ Clean the coupling sleeves and coupling plugs of the hydraulic lines (3).

„ Connect the hydraulic lines (3) (C1,C2,D1,D2).

Mounting universal shafts

BX001-268

Universal shaft halves can only be pushed together in one position. Observe the marking (I) on the universal shaft!

„ Insert the universal shaft half (3) into the upper universal shaft (2).

„ Attach the upper universal shaft on the forage harvester side until the slider pin engages.

„ Attach the lower universal shaft (1) on the forage harvester side until the slider pin engages.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 495

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.3

Removing intake unit with header

26.3

Removing intake unit with header

For the "EasyFlow" version

ü The EasyFlow is situated on a solid and level surface with the support jacks extended and the supporting wheels unfolded, see operating instructions for EasyFlow "Removing the machine".

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

Hydraulically relieve tension on the pendulum frame

BXG000-088

The relief button (1) is located on the right side of the ladder. Tension is hydraulically relieved on the pendulum frame by pressing the relief button.

„ To hydraulically relieve tension on the hydraulic system of the pendulum frame, pull the relief button (1) and let it go again.

Removing universal shaft

496

BX001-261

„ Remove the lower universal shaft (1) on the forage harvester side.

„ Remove the upper universal shaft (2) on the forage harvester side, pull the universal shaft half (3) out of the universal shaft and put it to one side.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Removing intake unit with header 26.3

BX001-269

The support jacks (1), which support the intake unit, are located behind the rear hood, on the right of the engine frame.

„ Open the rear hood.

„ Remove the support jacks and place them next to the intake unit.

„ Close the rear hood.

Disconnecting cables and lines

1 3

2

BX001-263

Right-hand machine side

„ Separate the plug connection (1) and mount the dummy plug on both sides.

„ Lay the cable harness down on the intake unit and secure it against falling down.

Left-hand machine side

„ Disconnect the lubrication line (2).

„ Detach the hydraulic lines (3) (C1, C2, D1, D2).

„ Insert the lubrication line (2) and the hydraulic lines (3) into hose support on the intake unit and lock it.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 497

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.4

Mounting intake unit with header

BXG000-089

„ Lower the lifting unit on the grinding control unit until the locking pins (1) have been relieved.

„ Pull out the locking pins (1) and set them aside.

„ Raise the lifting unit until the support jacks (2) can be fitted.

„ Attach the support jacks to the perforated bars (3) of the intake unit with the bolts (4) and secure the bolts with the linch pins (5).

„ Lower the lifting unit until the intake unit is on the support jacks.

26.4

BXG000-101

„ Lower the lifting unit until the holding claw (1) is under the support device (2).

„ Move backward carefully with the forage harvester.

Mounting intake unit with header

498

BXG000-101

„ Lower the lifting unit until the holding claw (1) is under the support device (2).

„ Move the forage harvester carefully centred in front of the intake unit.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Mounting intake unit with header 26.4

BXG000-090

Raise the lifting unit until the support jacks (2) can be removed.

„ Remove the support jacks from the perforated bars (3) of the intake unit and put to one side.

„ Lower the lifting unit until the locking pins (1) can be inserted.

„ Insert and secure the locking pins (1).

BX001-269

The suspension for the support jacks (1) is located behind the rear hood on the right of the engine frame.

„ Open the rear hood.

„ Hook the support jacks (1) into the suspension of the engine frame and secure with bolt (2) and linch pins (3).

„ Close the rear hood.

Connecting the cables and lines

1 3

2

BX001-263

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 499

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.5

Grinding chopping blades

Right-hand machine side

„ Establish the plug connection (1).

Left-hand machine side

„ Unlock the locking of the hose support on the intake unit.

„ Clean the coupling sleeves and coupling plugs of the lubrication line (2).

„ Connect the lubrication line (2). In doing so, tighten the screw connection until the stop is reached.

„ Clean the coupling sleeves and coupling plugs of the hydraulic lines (3).

„ Connect the hydraulic lines (3) (C1,C2,D1,D2).

Mounting universal shafts

26.5

BX001-268

Universal shaft halves can only be pushed together in one position. Observe the marking (I) on the universal shaft!

„ Insert the universal shaft half (3) into the upper universal shaft (2).

„ Attach the upper universal shaft on the forage harvester side until the slider pin engages.

„ Attach the lower universal shaft (1) on the forage harvester side until the slider pin engages.

Grinding chopping blades

WARNING

Risk of injury from exposed, rotating chopping drum

The chopping blade can be ground only when the chopping drum is rotating. During the grinding process not all rotating parts of the chopping drum and drive can be completely encased. This means there is an increased risk of injury.

„ During the grinding process ensure that all other safety devices are in the protective position and that all maintenance openings are closed.

„ During the grinding process the operator must be either on the driver's seat in the cabin or in the area of the grinding control unit on the left next to the platform.

„ During the grinding process ensure that nobody is in the area of the chopping drum or reaches into the rotating chopping blades.

500

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Grinding chopping blades 26.5

WARNING

Risk of injury from sharp chopping blades and sharp screw bars (for version with

MaxFlow chopping drum)

When performing maintenance work on the chopping drum, there is a risk of the operators being injured by the sharp chopping blades or the sharp screw bars.

„ When working on the chopping drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.

„ Wear protective gloves when working on the chopping drum.

„

Turn the chopping drum clockwise using the chopping drum turning lever only see

Page 517 and, when the required position has been reached, lock with the locking bolt, see Page 517

.

WARNING

Risk of fire due to deposits in the grinding channel

A mixture of dust, grass and chaff in the grinding channel is a source of fire and means an increased fire risk during the grinding process.

„ Before grinding the chopping blades, check the automatic readjustment of the grinding stone and clean the grinding channel.

NOTICE

Damage to the grinding stone due to water retention

The grinding stone must not become wet, as water retention in freezing temperatures will cause the grinding stone to break during the grinding process.

„ Do not wet the grinding stone with water.

„ Open the cover hood for maintenance work only, otherwise keep it closed.

INFO

Optimising the grinding process

If untypical grinding noises in connection with grinding stops can be heard during blade grinding, you can optimise the grinding process by gradually increasing or decreasing the engine speed.

Frequency and duration of the grinding process for chopping blades:

Dull cutting blades and too great a distance between the cutting blade and the counterblade will result in an unnecessarily high power demand, poor chop quality and high wear on the cutting elements.

Therefore the worn cutting blades must be ground with the grinding device of the forage harvester and then the counterblade must be re-adjusted.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 501

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.5

Grinding chopping blades

The frequency and the duration of the grinding process depend on the application conditions. In principle, short grinding intervals with a short grinding duration and corresponding counterblade adjustment are recommended.

• To ensure that the cutting blades for the maize operation achieve a very good selfsharpening effect, they must not be "fully ground", i.e. the blade should not be ground down to the cutting edge. This will cause the base material to wear more quickly than the coating and an aggressive cutting edge will be formed, the so-called "mouse tooth".

• On account of the application conditions, the self-sharpening effect of the cutting blades for grass operation is difficult to achieve, as is the case with the cutting blades for maize operation. The blades must therefore be "fully ground", i.e. the blade should be ground down to the cutting edge.

Before grinding the cutting blades, check the automatic re-adjustment of the grinding stone and clean the grinding channel.

26.5.1

Grinding the chopping blades when intake is not mounted

WARNING

Risk of injury from exposed, rotating chopping drum.

When grinding the chopping blades, there is a risk of injury in particular if the grinding process is performed without intake. There is an increased risk of injury due to the chopping drum which is not running with cover.

„ Close off the area in front of the machine well visible.

„ Warn all persons in the proximity against the open running chopping drum and the relevant dangers before starting grinding.

„ During the grinding process ensure that nobody is in the area of the chopping drum or reaches into the rotating chopping blades.

The chopping blades must be ground when a set of blades is readjusted on the chopping drum.

It may be useful to operate the chopping drum without mounted intake in order to make the evaluation of the chopping blade grinding pattern as simple as possible. To ensure that the unprotected chopping drum does not start unintentionally, a special start-up procedure is provided for this application for safety reasons.

ü The intake has been removed.

ü The machine has been secured against rolling away.

ü The area in front of the machine, which is closed off, is clearly visible.

ü People in the vicinity have been informed about the open running chopping drum and the associated risks.

ü The diesel engine has been switched on.

To engage the chopping drum without intake:

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

„ Press the "Main coupling on" key on the keypad for at least 5 s.

An information message appears on the terminal and the follow-up alarm is heard.

„ Release the "Main coupling on" key and comply with the information message.

„ Press the "Main coupling on" key for at least 2 s.

The chopping drum is engaged and the follow-up alarm stops.

The grinding process can be performed as described in chapter Maintenance - Feed System

"Grinding the Chopping Blades", see Page 500

502

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

26.5.2

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Grinding chopping blades 26.5

Checking the grinding stone and cleaning the grinding channel

BX001-272

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

To open the grinding device flap:

WARNING! Risk of injury from exposed, rotating chopping drum. Do not open the flap on the grinding device until the chopping drum has come to a standstill.

„ Unlock the lock (2) by turning it anti-clockwise using a flat head screwdriver and swivel up the flap (1).

BX001-273

„ Clean the grinding channel (1) (e.g. blow out with compressed air).

„ Measure the visible thread length of the grinding device (dimension X).

If dimension X is ≥ 5 mm, the setting of the grinding stone (2) is correct and the grinding process can be started.

„ Close the flap of the grinding device again.

If dimension X is < 5 mm, the grinding stone (2) must be re-adjusted or replaced, see Page 509 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 503

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.5

Grinding chopping blades

26.5.3

Performing grinding process

BX001-274

ü The machine has been secured from rolling away with wheel chocks.

ü The engine has been started and is idling.

ü The parking brake (2) has been applied.

ü The main coupling (1) has been switched on.

ü The main mode switch (3) is in the "Maintenance" position (4).

BX001-275

The header must be on the ground for the grinding process:

„ Press the "Manually lower lifting unit" key (8a) on the control lever until the header is on the ground.

504

EQG003-091

To change the setting of the grinding device:

„ On the terminal open the Crop flow main menu -> Grinding device and counterblade menu

"Settings", see Page 399 .

„ Change the setting if required.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Grinding chopping blades 26.5

To run a grinding process from the driver's seat

EQG003-092

„ On the terminal open the Crop flow main menu -> Grinding device and counterblade menu

"Maintenance",

see Page 399

.

„ Press the "Start grinding" key.

To run a grinding process from the grinding control unit.

26.5.4

BX001-278

„ Press the "Automatic grinding operation" key (7).

„ During the grinding process wear hearing protection.

The set number of grinding cycles is run. At the end of the grinding process the grinding stone moves to the parking position on the right side of the grinding device.

Readjusting the counterblade

When the grinding process is complete, the counterblade must be readjusted or adjusted while the chopping drum is running.

Prerequisite with mounted header:

ü The lifting unit is lowered until the header rests on the ground.

Readjusting or adjusting the counterblade from the driver's seat (for "Automatic counterblade adjustment" version):

The counterblade can be readjusted or adjusted from the driver's seat in two different ways:

• With "Readjust counterblade" the counterblade is moved up to the chopping drum (duration approx. 30 s).

• With "Adjust counterblade" the counterblade is moved up to the chopping drum and aligned with the chopping blades (duration approx. 2 min).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 505

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.5

Grinding chopping blades

To readjust the counterblade from the driver's seat:

EQG003-097

„ On the terminal open the Crop flow main menu -> Grinding device and counterblade menu

"Maintenance",

see Page 399

.

„ Press the "Start readjusting counterblade" key.

„ Wait until an information message appears which shows that the readjusting process has successfully concluded or that the process was terminated.

Alternatively:

To adjust the counterblade from the driver's seat:

EQG003-098

„ On the terminal open the Crop flow main menu -> Grinding device and counterblade menu

"Adjustment",

see Page 399 .

„ Press the "Start adjustment" key.

Æ A progress bar shows how far the adjustment of the counterblade has progressed. At the end of the process the display shows whether the adjustment has successfully concluded or whether the process was terminated.

506

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Grinding chopping blades 26.5

If the header was replaced, check the counterblade after the first readjustment or adjustment to determine whether the chopping blades are in contact with the counterblade:

„ Leave the cabin and go to the grinding control unit.

„ Lift the header using the grinding control unit.

„ Check whether noise is generated which indicates that the chopping blades have come into contact with the counterblade.

Æ If no noise is generated, the counterblade has been correctly readjusted or adjusted.

Æ If noise is generated, the value must be reduced in the "Sensitivity of the automatic counterblade adjustment" parameter.

„ Set down the header on the ground using the grinding control unit.

EQG003-099

„ Reduce the value of the "Sensitivity of the automatic counterblade adjustment" parameter in one small step.

„ Readjust or adjust the counterblade again.

When the counterblade has been readjusted or adjusted:

„ Leave the cabin and go to the grinding control unit.

„ Lift the header using the grinding control unit.

„ Check whether noise is generated which indicates that the chopping blades have come into contact with the counterblade.

Æ If no noise is generated, the counterblade has been correctly readjusted or adjusted.

Æ If noise is generated, the value must be reduced in the "Sensitivity of the automatic counterblade adjustment" parameter until noise is no longer generated after readjusting or adjusting the counterblade.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 507

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.5

Grinding chopping blades

To readjust the counterblade from the Grinding Control Unit:

26.5.5

BX001-279

„ Alternatively tap the "Move right counterblade up to chopping drum" key (3) and the "Move left counterblade up to chopping drum" key (5) on the grinding control unit.

As soon as noise is generated when readjusting the counterblade on one side (the blades have then come into contact with the counterblade):

„ Immediately release the key and tap the corresponding "Move counterblade away from the chopping drum" key (4 or 6).

„ Readjust the counterblade on the opposite side using the same procedure.

When the counterblade has been readjusted, the chopping drum must run without making any noise.

If there is no noise while the counterblade is being re-adjusted, the blades must be re-adjusted

or worn blades and blades which can no longer be re-adjusted must be replaced, see

Page 515

.

Grinding and readjusting counterblade (for the version with "automatisch counterblade adjustment")

The sensitivity of the automatic counterblade adjustment can be adjusted in the grinding device and counterblade "Settings" menu.

508

EQ002-453

„ On the terminal open the Crop flow main menu -> Grinding device and counterblade menu

"Settings", see Page 399 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or replacing grinding stone 26.6

Depending on the selected header profile, the parameter for the sensitivity of the automatic counterblade adjustment is:

• KMC-1100 – EasyFlow

• KMC-1101 – Maize EasyCollect 2-part

• KMC-1102 – Maize EasyCollect 3-part

• KMC-1103 – XDisc

• KMC-1104 – Maize XCollect 3-piece

The parameter is used to set the distance of the counterblade to the blades of the chopping drum due to automatic counterblade adjustment.

At 0%, the distance between the counterblade and the blades of the chopping drum is the largest.

At 100%, the distance between the counterblade and the blades of the chopping drum is the smallest.

To start a grinding process with subsequent readjustment of the counterblade:

26.6

EQG003-100

„ On the terminal open the Crop flow main menu -> Grinding device and counterblade menu

"Maintenance",

see Page 399

.

„ Press the "Start grinding and readjusting counterblade" key.

„ Wait until an information message appears which shows that the readjusting process has successfully concluded or that the process was terminated.

Readjusting or replacing grinding stone

WARNING

Risk of injury due to rotating chopping drum

Sharp and rotating chopping blades represent a danger of injury when the grinding device flap is opened while the chopping drum rotates.

„ Do not open the flap of grinding device until the chopping drum has come to a complete stop.

WARNING

Risk of fire due to deposits in the grinding channel

A mixture of dust, grass and chaff in the grinding channel is a source of fire and means an increased fire risk during the grinding process.

„ Before grinding the chopping blades, check the automatic readjustment of the grinding stone and clean the grinding channel.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 509

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.6

Readjusting or replacing grinding stone

INFO

Check the grinding stone for damage and wear and replace if required. These may cause the grinding stone to run noisily, resulting in an uneven grinding pattern.

The grinding stone of the grinding device is automatically re-adjusted during the grinding process.

If automatic re-adjustment no longer occurs, the grinding stone must be re-adjusted.

The grinding stone can be re-adjusted 3–4 times, then the grinding stone must be replaced.

26.6.1

Checking grinding stone

BX001-272

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

To open the flap of the grinding device:

WARNING! Risk of injury from exposed, rotating cutter drum. Do not open the flap on the grinding device until the cutter drum has come to a standstill!

„ Unlock the lock (2) by turning it anti-clockwise using a flat head screwdriver and swivel up the flap (1).

510

BX001-273

„ Clean the grinding channel (1) (e.g. blow out with compressed air).

„ Measure the visible thread length of the grinding device (dimension X).

If dimension X is ≥ 5 mm, the grinding stone setting is correct and the grinding process can be started.

„ Close the flap of the grinding device again.

If dimension X is < 5 mm, the grinding stone must be re-adjusted or replaced.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

26.6.2

Readjusting grinding stone

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or replacing grinding stone 26.6

BX001-280

To prepare the grinding device for re-adjustment:

„ Remove the screw (1).

„ Remove the pawl (2).

„ Measure and note down dimension X from the lower edge of the grinding stone (3) to the lower edge of the grinding slide (4).

„ Rotate the detent pin (5) by 90° until it engages in the first notch.

BX001-281

„ Loosen the ratchet wheel (2) using a spanner WAF 30 (1) until the detent pin engages.

„ Continue loosening the ratchet wheel (2) until the detent pin fully engages and locks the grinding stone adjustment.

BX001-282

„ To loosen the clamp of the grinding stone, continue loosening the ratchet wheel (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 511

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.6

Readjusting or replacing grinding stone

„ Press down the grinding stone (3) from above until dimension X-2 mm has been reached from the lower edge of the grinding stone to the lower edge of the grinding slide.

„ To reclamp the grinding stone, tighten the ratchet wheel to a torque of 180 Nm.

„ To ensure that the grinding stone does not touch the chopping blades, check the dimension

X-2 mm.

NOTICE

Damage to chopping drum and grinding device due to incorrect operation

If there is no free travel to the chopping drum when the grinding stone has been readjusted, there is a risk of collision between the grinding stone and the chopping blade.

„ After readjusting the grinding stone, check and observe dimension X – 2 from the lower edge of the grinding stone to the lower edge of the grinding slide.

NOTICE

Damage to the chopping drum due to the grinding stone falling out of the grinding device

If the grinding stone is too short due to wear, it is no longer adequately clamped and may fall onto the rotating chopping drum.

„ If dimension Y (distance from the upper edge of the grinding stone to the upper edge of the hexagon nut) is greater than 160 mm, replace the grinding stone.

512

BX001-280

„ Measure dimension Y (distance from the upper edge of the grinding stone to the upper edge of the hexagon nut) through the nut.

If dimension Y is < 160 mm, the clamping length is adequate to securely clamp the grinding stone.

NOTICE

Damage to the grinding device due to incorrect operation

If the detent pin is not removed again when the grinding stone has been readjusted, it will be damaged during the next automatic grinding process.

„ After readjusting the grinding stone, always lift the detent pin and rotate it by 90°.

„ Pull the detent pin (5) out of the notch and rotate by 90°.

„ Re-attach the pawl (2).

„ Close the flap of the grinding device again.

„

Reset the wear counter on the operating terminal, see Page 399

.

„ After the first grinding process, retighten the ratchet wheel, tightening torque = 180 Nm.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

26.6.3

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or replacing grinding stone 26.6

If dimension Y is ≥ 160 mm, the grinding stone must be replaced, see Page 513

Replacing grinding stone

The grinding stone (1) must be replaced when it is worn to the extent that it can no longer be readjusted.

Replace the clamping rings (3) too when you replace the grinding stone (1).

5 6

5

2

1

4

3

4

3

BX001-283

1 Grinding stone

2 Threaded sleeve

3 Clamping ring

4

5

6

Intermediate ring

Sleeve gearwheel

Ensure that the parts are correctly arranged when you install the new grinding stone:

• Clamping rings (3), intermediate ring (4), and sleeve (5) must be mounted as shown in the figure.

• The bevelled edges of intermediate ring (4) and sleeve (5) must point downwards.

BX001-280

To prepare the grinding device for replacement of the grinding stone:

„ Remove the screw (1).

„ Remove the pawl (2).

„ Measure and note down dimension X from the lower edge of the grinding stone (3) to the lower edge of the grinding slide (4).

„ Rotate the detent pin (5) by 90° until it engages in the first notch.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 513

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.6

Readjusting or replacing grinding stone

514

BX001-281

„ Loosen the ratchet wheel (2) using a spanner W/F 30 (1) until the detent pin engages.

„ Continue loosening the ratchet wheel (2) until the detent pin fully engages and locks the grinding stone adjustment.

„ Continue loosening the ratchet wheel (2) and remove.

„ Press out and remove the grinding stone.

„ Remove the clamping rings.

„ Insert a new grinding stone from above.

„ Press down the grinding stone from above until dimension X-2 mm has been reached from the lower edge of the grinding stone to the lower edge of the grinding slide.

„ Re-attach the ratchet wheel and tighten to a torque of 180 Nm.

„ To ensure that the grinding stone does not touch the chopping blades, check the dimension

X-2 mm.

NOTICE

Damage to chopping drum and grinding device due to incorrect operation

If there is no free travel to the chopping drum when the grinding stone has been readjusted, there is a risk of collision between the grinding stone and the chopping blade.

„ After readjusting the grinding stone, check and observe dimension X – 2 from the lower edge of the grinding stone to the lower edge of the grinding slide.

NOTICE

Damage to the grinding device due to incorrect operation

If the detent pin is not removed again when the grinding stone has been readjusted, it will be damaged during the next automatic grinding process.

„ After readjusting the grinding stone, always lift the detent pin and rotate it by 90°.

„ Pull the detent pin out of the notch and rotate by 90°.

„ Re-attach the pawl.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or changing chopping blades 26.7

26.7

1

2

3

X

5

4

BX002-709

„ Adjust the adjusting pawl (1) such that it engages on the 4th tooth (2) behind the pawl (4).

„ At the nut (5), adjust the distance between the outside of the adjusting pawl (1) and the 3rd tooth (3) behind the pawl (4) such that the distance is X=1 - 2 mm.

„ Close the flap of the grinding device again.

„ Reset the grinding cycle counter on the terminal,

see Page 399 .

„ After the first grinding process, retighten the ratchet wheel, tightening torque = 180 Nm.

Æ The process "Replace grinding stone" is complete.

Readjusting or changing chopping blades

WARNING

Risk of injury from sharp chopping blades and sharp screw bars (for version with

MaxFlow chopping drum)

When performing maintenance work on the chopping drum, there is a risk of the operators being injured by the sharp chopping blades or the sharp screw bars.

„ When working on the chopping drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.

„ Wear protective gloves when working on the chopping drum.

„

Turn the chopping drum clockwise using the chopping drum turning lever only see

Page 517 and, when the required position has been reached, lock with the locking bolt, see Page 517

.

INFO

To avoid imbalances in the chopping drum:

„ the chopping blades and the screw bars must always be replaced in pairs.

Replace both blades and both screw bars each with are located on the chopping drum offset by 180°

(e.g. blade 1 and blade 6 in case of a chopping drum with 20 blades, blade 1 and blade 8 in case of a chopping drum with 28 blades, blade 1 and blade 10 in case of a chopping drum with 36 blades).

The blades and screw-on strips which form a pair depend on the total number of blades.

„ Mount a set of dismounted screw-on strips in the same order as before disassembly on the chopping drum again.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 515

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.7

Readjusting or changing chopping blades

11

12

BX001-284

Worn chopping blades may result in an unsatisfactory chop quality. To keep wear as low as possible, the chopping blades (1) must be ground correctly and regularly and the distance between the counterblade and the chopping blades (cutting gap) must be set correctly and regularly,

see Page 500 .

The chopping blades (1) must be replaced if they can no longer be re-adjusted and the coating (2) under the chopping blade is worn. In the original state the coating X=19 mm.

The chopping drum operates particularly efficiently if the maximum cutting radius and conveying space can be used. Therefore the chopping blades should be re-adjusted if the dimension is less than X=10-12 mm.

Preparatory activities:

• Remove the intake unit,

see Page 491

.

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

Slackening the belt drive for intermediate gearbox chopping drum

3

2

3

516

1

4

BX002-462

To be able to rotate the chopping drum using the turning lever, the "Chopping drum" belt drive must be slackened.

„ Open the left side hood.

„ Press the valves (4) into the control block (3) and turn to the left until the valve heads automatically jump out.

„ Check whether the belt tensioner (1) of the "Cutter drum" belt drive has been run in and the belt drive has been slackened.

If not:

„ Start the engine and run at idling speed for several seconds.

The pressure tank (2) is filled, the belt tensioner (1) is relieved and the "Chopping drum" belt drive has been slackened.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Rotating chopping drum

1 2

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or changing chopping blades 26.7

5

4

3 3 6

BX002-379 / BX002-380

The turning lever (3) for the biogas chopping drum has a holding fixture (1) at one for the hexagon head screws which are used to attach the chopping blades. At the opposite end the turning lever (3) for the biogas chopping drum has a holding fixture (2) which fits into the boreholes of the blade carriers.

The turning lever (4) for the MaxFlow chopping drum has a holding fixture (5) at the end for the boreholes of the blade carriers (6).

„ Turn the chopping drum clockwise using the turning levers (3, 4) only.

After the maintenance work:

„ Press the valve heads into the control block and turn clockwise.

„ Close the side hood on left.

The belt tensioner of the belt drive for the "intermediate gearbox cutter drum" is tensioned again as soon as the engine is started.

Locking the chopping drum

The locking device is on the right side of the chopping drum

1

2

BX001-286

The chopping drum (1) has a locking borehole (2) for each working position.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 517

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.7

Readjusting or changing chopping blades

1

2

3

BX001-287

„ Push a spanner (width across flats 17) onto the locking bolt (1).

„ Pull out the spring cotter pin (3).

„ Turn the chopping drum (2) into the desired working position using the turning lever.

„ Use the spanner to push the locking bolt (2) towards the chopping drum up to the stop and to rotate it one quarter turn clockwise.

Setting the chopping blades (for version with MaxFlow chopping drum)

NOTICE

Damage to the machine caused by installation of defective screws

If the old screws are screwed in after changing the chopping blades, there is a risk that these screws may be damaged and fail during operation, possibly damaging the machine.

„ When changing the blades, use new screws to fasten the chopping blades.

NOTICE

Risk of damage to counterblade and chopping blade due to twisting of the chopping blade in the grass drive under severe conditions

Upon a contact with a foreign object (e.g. a stone), the chopping blade should move inwards to avoid serious consequential damage. If the contact with the foreign object happens in the outer section of the chopping blade, there is a risk that the chopping blade will not shift inwards, but rather twists about the central screw. This can cause contact between the chopper blade and the counterblade.

The following is therefore recommended for grass operation under severe conditions:

„ Tighten the screws in the centre of the chopping blades to a tightening torque of 280 Nm.

„ Tighten the two outer screws of the chopping blades to a tightening torque of 320 Nm.

To sharpen the chopping blades with as few grinding cycles as possible, the chopping blades must be adjusted to the grinding device.

518

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or changing chopping blades 26.7

5

2

3

4

6

1

3

BX001-288

„ Grind the chopping blades (1) using the grinding device,

see Page 500 .

INFO

If the counterblade has to be replaced, do this before making the following settings.

„ Using the grinding control unit, set the counterblade (3) with the spindle motors (4) parallel

to the ground surface of the blades, see Page 505 .

2

X

6

90°

3

BX001-289

ü The chopping drum is locked,

see Page 517 .

„ Measure the distance "X" between the counterblade (parallel to the upper edge of the counterblade) and the drum casing on the left and right.

„ Determine the difference between the two values.

„ Using the grinding control unit, set the distance between the counterblade (3) and the drum casing (6) (measured parallel to the upper edge of the counterblades) to the dimension

X=87–89 mm. In doing so, consider the difference determined beforehand. This ensures that the counterblade has been aligned parallel to the blades.

„ Loosen the centre screw (2) of the blade.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 519

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.7

Readjusting or changing chopping blades

4 5

7 7

8

1

3

BX001-290

„ Screw a ring spanner W/F17 (7) with screw and washer on the supplied eccentric (8). The eccentric is located in the direction of travel on the left of the chopping drum housing.

„ Insert the eccentric into the borehole (4).

„ Loosen the outer screws (5) until the blade (1) can be positioned backlash-free by turning the eccentric.

„ Adjust the blade (1) by moving the ring spanner (7). Set the distance between blade (1) and counterblade (3) to a dimension of 0.1 mm.

„ Tighten all hexagon head screws of the blade using a spanner (torque 280 Nm).

„ Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum, rotate the chopping drum using a turning lever by one row of blades and lock again.

„ Readjust the blades on the next row of blades.

„ Continue in this manner until all rows of blades on the chopping drum have been readjusted equally.

„ Unlock the chopping drum.

„ Set the grinding stone until there is a gap of 0.5 mm between the blade back and the

grinding stone, see Page 509

.

„ Move the counterblade back a little, equally on both sides.

„ Mount the intake unit,

see Page 494

.

„

Grind the chopping blades, see Page 500 .

„

Re-adjust the counterblade, see Page 505 .

520

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or changing chopping blades 26.7

Checking the distance between buffer and threaded bolt

X

1

2

3

BX002-504

„ On both sides of the machine, check the distance X between the buffer (2) and the threaded bolt (1).

„ The setting is correct if the distance X is greater than 3 mm.

„ If the distance X is less than 3 mm, adjust the castle nut (3) until the distance X is greater than 3 mm.

Adjusting the chopping blades (for version with 40 biogas chopping drum)

NOTICE

Damage to the machine caused by installation of defective screws

If the old screws are screwed in after changing the chopping blades, there is a risk that these screws may be damaged and fail during operation, possibly damaging the machine.

„ When changing the blades, use new screws to fasten the chopping blades.

To sharpen the chopping blades with as few grinding cycles as possible, the chopping blades must be adjusted to the grinding device.

BX001-622

„ Grind the chopping blades (1) using the grinding device,

see Page 500 .

INFO

If the counterblade has to be replaced, do this before making the following settings.

„ Using the grinding control unit, set the counterblade (3) with the spindle motors (4) parallel

to the ground surface of the blades, see Page 505 .

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 521

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.7

Readjusting or changing chopping blades

BX001-623

ü The chopping drum is locked,

see Page 517 .

„ Measure the distance "X" between the counterblade (parallel to the upper edge of the counterblade) and the drum casing on the left and right.

„ Determine the difference between the two values.

„ Using the grinding control unit, set the distance between the counterblade (3) and the drum casing (6) (measured parallel to the upper edge of the counterblades) to the dimension

X=87–89 mm. In doing so, consider the difference determined beforehand. This ensures that the counterblade has been aligned parallel to the blades.

„ Loosen all hexagon head screws (2) of a blade.

„ Set the gap between the blade (1) and the counterblade (3) to 0.1 mm.

„ Tighten the chopping blade (1) in the sequence 2a, 2b, 2c, 2d using a spanner (torque

280 Nm).

„ Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum, rotate the chopping drum using a turning lever by one row of blades and lock again.

„ Readjust the blades on the next row of blades.

„ Continue in this manner until all rows of blades on the chopping drum have been readjusted equally.

„ Unlock the chopping drum.

„ Set the grinding stone until there is a gap of 0.5 mm between the blade back and the

grinding stone, see Page 509

.

„ Move the counterblade back a little, equally on both sides.

„ Mount the intake unit,

see Page 494

.

„

Grind the chopping blades, see Page 500 .

„

Re-adjust the counterblade, see Page 505 .

522

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or changing chopping blades 26.7

Checking the distance between buffer and threaded bolt

X

1

2

3

BX002-504

„ On both sides of the machine, check the distance X between the buffer (2) and the threaded bolt (1).

„ The setting is correct if the distance X is greater than 3 mm.

„ If the distance X is less than 3 mm, adjust the castle nut (3) until the distance X is greater than 3 mm.

Replacing chopping blades (for version with MaxFlow chopping drum)

Worn and damaged chopping blades must be replaced.

WARNING

Risk of injury from sharp chopping blades and sharp screw bars (for version with

MaxFlow chopping drum)

When performing maintenance work on the chopping drum, there is a risk of the operators being injured by the sharp chopping blades or the sharp screw bars.

„ When working on the chopping drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.

„ Wear protective gloves when working on the chopping drum.

„

Turn the chopping drum clockwise using the chopping drum turning lever only see

Page 517 and, when the required position has been reached, lock with the locking bolt, see Page 517

.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine caused by installation of dirty parts

If dirty chopping blades and screw bars are installed, there is a risk of the chopping blades becoming detached from the chopping drum and damaging components of the machine.

„ Clean all parts before installing them.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine caused by installation of defective screws

If the old screws are screwed in after changing the chopping blades, there is a risk that these screws may be damaged and fail during operation, possibly damaging the machine.

„ When changing the blades, use new screws to fasten the chopping blades.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 523

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.7

Readjusting or changing chopping blades

NOTICE

Risk of damage to counterblade and chopping blade due to twisting of the chopping blade in the grass drive under severe conditions

Upon a contact with a foreign object (e.g. a stone), the chopping blade should move inwards to avoid serious consequential damage. If the contact with the foreign object happens in the outer section of the chopping blade, there is a risk that the chopping blade will not shift inwards, but rather twists about the central screw. This can cause contact between the chopper blade and the counterblade.

The following is therefore recommended for grass operation under severe conditions:

„ Tighten the screws in the centre of the chopping blades to a tightening torque of 280 Nm.

„ Tighten the two outer screws of the chopping blades to a tightening torque of 320 Nm.

INFO

To avoid imbalances in the chopping drum:

„ the chopping blades and the screw bars must always be replaced in pairs.

Replace both blades and both screw bars each with are located on the chopping drum offset by 180°

(e.g. blade 1 and blade 6 in case of a chopping drum with 20 blades, blade 1 and blade 8 in case of a chopping drum with 28 blades, blade 1 and blade 10 in case of a chopping drum with 36 blades).

The blades and screw-on strips which form a pair depend on the total number of blades.

„ Mount a set of dismounted screw-on strips in the same order as before disassembly on the chopping drum again.

BX001-291

524

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or changing chopping blades 26.7

7

7

2

9

1

2

X

6

90°

3

BX001-292

To replace the chopping blade:

„ Grind the chopping blades (1) using the grinding device,

see Page 500 .

INFO

If the counterblade has to be replaced, do this before making the following settings.

„ Using the grinding control unit, set the counterblade (3) parallel to the ground surface of the

blades, see Page 505

.

ü The chopping drum is locked,

see Page 517 .

„ Measure the distance "X" between the counterblade (parallel to the upper edge of the counterblade) and the drum casing on the left and right.

„ Determine the difference between the two values.

„ Using the grinding control unit, set the distance between the counterblade (3) and the drum casing (6) (measured parallel to the upper edge of the counterblades) to the dimension

X=87–89 mm. In doing so, consider the difference determined beforehand. This ensures that the counterblade has been aligned parallel to the blades.

„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2).

„ Pull out the chopping blade forwards.

„ Clean the blade carrier (7) and the screw bar (9).

„ Check the screw bar.

„ Replace damaged or heavily worn screw bar.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 525

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.7

Readjusting or changing chopping blades

BX001-293

„ When inserting dummy blades (1), pay attention to the installation position; the notch (2) must be outside and at the front, as seen in the direction of travel. The other attachment is, as described below, identical to the installation of the chopping blades.

„ Insert a new chopping blade using new screws (2).

„ Leave the middle screw (2a) loose.

„ Screw a ring spanner (W/F 17) with a screw and washer on the supplied eccentric. The

eccentric is located in direction of travel left on the chopping drum housing, see Page 518 .

„ Insert the eccentric into the borehole of the blade carrier (7).

„ Tighten the outer screws (2b, 2c) until the blade can be positioned backlash-free by turning the eccentric.

„ Adjust the blade by moving the ring spanner. Set the gap between the blade and counterblade (3) to a dimension of 0.1 mm.

„ Tighten the screws in the sequence 2a, 2b, 2c (from the inside to the outside) to a torque of

280 Nm.

„ Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum, rotate the chopping drum using a turning lever by one row of blades and lock again.

„ Readjust the blades on the next row of blades.

„ Continue in this manner until all rows of blades on the chopping drum have been readjusted equally.

„ Unlock the chopping drum.

„ Set the grinding stone until there is a gap of 0.5 mm between the blade back and the

grinding stone, see Page 509

.

„ Move the counterblade back a little, equally on both sides.

„ Mount the intake unit,

see Page 498

.

„

Grind the chopping blades, see Page 500 .

„

Re-adjust the counterblade, see Page 505 .

526

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or changing chopping blades 26.7

Checking the distance between buffer and threaded bolt

X

1

2

3

BX002-504

„ On both sides of the machine, check the distance X between the buffer (2) and the threaded bolt (1).

„ The setting is correct if the distance X is greater than 3 mm.

„ If the distance X is less than 3 mm, adjust the castle nut (3) until the distance X is greater than 3 mm.

Replacing the chopping blades (for version with 40x biogas chopping drum)

Worn and damaged chopping blades must be replaced.

WARNING

Risk of injury from sharp chopping blades

When performing maintenance work on the chopping drum, there is a risk of the operators being injured by the sharp chopping blades.

„ When working on the chopping drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.

„ Wear protective gloves when working on the chopping drum.

„ Turn the chopping drum clockwise using the chopping drum turning levers only

see

Page 517 and, when the required position has been reached, lock with the locking bolt, see Page 517

.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine caused by installation of dirty parts

If dirty chopping blades and screw bars are installed, there is a risk of the chopping blades becoming detached from the chopping drum and damaging components of the machine.

„ Clean all parts before installing them.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine caused by installation of defective screws

If the old screws are screwed in after changing the chopping blades, there is a risk that these screws may be damaged and fail during operation, possibly damaging the machine.

„ When changing the blades, use new screws to fasten the chopping blades.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 527

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.7

Readjusting or changing chopping blades

INFO

To avoid imbalances in the chopping drum:

„ the chopping blades and the screw bars must always be replaced in pairs.

Replace both blades and both screw bars each with are located on the chopping drum offset by 180°

(e.g. blade 1 and blade 11 in case of a chopping drum with 40 blades).

The blades and screw-on strips which form a pair depend on the total number of blades.

„ Mount a set of dismounted screw-on strips in the same order as before disassembly on the chopping drum again.

BX001-624

528

BX001-627

To replace the chopping blade:

„ Grind the chopping blades (1) using the grinding device,

see Page 500 .

INFO

If the counterblade has to be replaced, do this before making the following settings.

„ Using the grinding control unit, set the counterblade (3) parallel to the ground surface of the

blades, see Page 505

.

„ Measure the distance "X" between the counterblade (parallel to the upper edge of the counterblade) and the drum casing (6) on the left and right.

„ Determine the difference between the two values.

„ Using the grinding control unit, set the distance between the counterblade (3) and the drum casing (6) (measured parallel to the upper edge of the counterblades) to the dimension

X=87–89 mm. In doing so, consider the difference determined beforehand. This ensures that the counterblade has been aligned parallel to the blades.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Readjusting or changing chopping blades 26.7

BX001-625

„ Unscrew the hexagon head screws (2a, 2b, 2c, 2d).

„ Pull out the chopping blade forwards.

„ Clean the blade carrier (7) and the pressure plates (9).

„ Check the pressure plates (9).

„ Replace damaged or heavily worn pressure plates (9).

„ Insert the chopping blade (1) with new screws.

NOTICE

When installing the chopping blades (1), observe installation direction of the threaded bars

(8). The area (I) with the rounded corners must be positioned on the chopping drum (6), the area (II) must be turned away from the chopping drum (6).

BX001-626

„ Set the gap between the blade and the counterblade to 0.1 mm.

„ Tighten the screws in the sequence 2a, 2b, 2c, 2d to a torque of 280 Nm.

„ Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum, rotate the chopping drum using a turning lever by one row of blades and lock again.

„ Replace the blades on the next row of knives.

„ Continue in this manner until all rows of knives on the chopping drum have been equally replaced and readjusted.

„ Unlock the chopping drum.

„ Set the grinding stone until there is a gap of 0.5 mm between the blade back and the

grinding stone, see Page 509

.

„ Move the counterblade back a little, equally on both sides.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 529

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.8

Working with half the number of chopping blades

„ Mount the intake unit,

see Page 494

.

„

Grind the chopping blades, see Page 500 .

„

Re-adjust the counterblade, see Page 505 .

Checking the distance between buffer and threaded bolt

X

1

2

3

26.8

BX002-504

„ On both sides of the machine, check the distance X between the buffer (2) and the threaded bolt (1).

„ The setting is correct if the distance X is greater than 3 mm.

„ If the distance X is less than 3 mm, adjust the castle nut (3) until the distance X is greater than 3 mm.

Working with half the number of chopping blades

The speed of the intake and the number of cutting blades determine the chop length.

530

EQG003-093

If the adjustable chop length range is inadequate and the chop length is still too short, the number of chopping blades can be reduced to half.

„ Remove every second blade from both sides of the cutting drum.

„ To guard the blade carriers, attach the supplied dummy blades (accessories),

see

Page 523

.

„ Set the relevant number of blades on the terminal,

see Page 397

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

26.9

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Turning or replacing counterblade 26.9

Turning or replacing counterblade

WARNING

Risk of injury from sharp chopping blades and sharp screw bars (for version with

MaxFlow chopping drum)

When performing maintenance work on the chopping drum, there is a risk of the operators being injured by the sharp chopping blades or the sharp screw bars.

„ When working on the chopping drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.

„ Wear protective gloves when working on the chopping drum.

„

Turn the chopping drum clockwise using the chopping drum turning lever only see

Page 517 and, when the required position has been reached, lock with the locking bolt, see Page 517

.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine by foreign bodies which get into the crop flow

If the counterblade or the counterblade support is not flat, the components could be damaged, small parts could get into the crop flow and damage components.

„ Ensure that the counterblade and the counterblade support are clean and flat. If necessary, clean or replace the components that are not alright.

1

1a

1b

BX001-295

Both sides of the counterblade (1) can be used. If one or both sides (1a, 1b) of the counterblade are worn, the counterblade must be turned or replaced. If the forage harvester is operated with a worn counterblade, this will result in increased diesel consumption, unsatisfactory cutting quality and in a reduction in the downtime of the chopping blade. To essentially keep wear as low as possible, the gap between the counterblade and the chopping blades (cutting gap) must be adjusted correctly,

see Page 500

.

Furthermore, the cutting blades must be correctly ground, see Page 515 .

Preparatory activities:

„ Remove the intake unit,

see Page 496

.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 531

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.9

Turning or replacing counterblade

532

2,3,4

2,3,4 1

2,3

BX001-296

Turning/changing counterblade

„

Grind the chopping blades with the grinding device, see Page 500 .

„ Using the grinding control unit, adjust the counterblade (1) parallel to the ground surface of

the blades, see Page 505

.

„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2), the detent edged washers (3) and the washers (4).

„ Pull the counterblade (1) forwards out of the support.

„ Clean the skid surface area and the underside of the counterblade (1).

!

1

!

X

2

90°

1

3,4,5

350 Nm

3,4

180 Nm

3,4,5

350 Nm

BX001-297

NOTICE

Damage to machine parts due to loose components

If the counterblade is not securely attached, it may become detached and damage the blades on the chopping drum or the entire chopping drum.

„ Secure the screw connections identified by on the right and left of the machine with medium strength LOCTITE

Installing new counterblade

„ Drive the counterblade support parallel to the cutter drum far enough so that the counterblade (1) can be attached.

„ Position the new counterblade (1) on the counterblade support and attach hand-tight in the centre at the bottom using the hexagon head screws (3), the detent edged washers (4) and the washers (5).

„ Align the counterblade (1) parallel to the ground blade backs on the counterblade support.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System

Operating the mounting cart of the chopper unit (for "Chopper unit mounting cart" design)

26

26.10

„ Tighten all three screw connections on the counterblade using the indicated torque, see diagram BX001-297.

„

Attach the intake unit, see Page 494 .

„

Readjust the counterblade, see Page 505 .

26.10

Operating the mounting cart of the chopper unit (for "Chopper unit mounting cart" design)

26.10.1

Setting mounting cart

BX001-923

The retaining tubes of the mounting cart must be set according to the machine type.

The boreholes (2) must be used for machines with a chopping drum width of 630 mm.

The boreholes (1) must be used for machines with a chopping drum width of 800 mm.

Setting retaining tube

BX001-924

„ Dismount the safety linch pins (3) and pull out the bolts (2) upwards.

„ Push the right retaining tube (1) into the desired position.

„ Mount the bolts (2) and secure them by means of the safety linch pins (3).

„ Dismount the safety linch pins (6) and pull out the bolts (4) upwards.

„ Push the left retaining tube (5) into the desired position.

„ Mount the bolts (4) and secure them by means of the safety linch pins (6).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 533

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.11 Turning or replacing conveyor bars of pre-compression roller

26.10.2

Parking mounting cart

BX001-934

„ In order to park the mounting cart with the removed chopping drum unit securely, remove the support jacks (3) and secure them with a bolt and a safety linch pin (1).

„ Set the support wheel by means of the crank handle (2) so that the mounting cart is completely on the support jacks (3).

BX001-935

„ In order to facilitate working at the chopping drum unit, dismount the linch pin and the bolt (2) and swivel the crossbar (1) to the side.

26.11

Turning or replacing conveyor bars of pre-compression roller

The pre-compression roller (1) is fitted with conveyor bars which have a smooth and a serrated side. The conveyor bars can be attached in such a way that either the smooth or the serrated side is used.

From experience the smooth side obtains the best results for grass operation and the serrated side for maize operation.

INFO

The conveyor bars must be changed if the wear is so great that the conveyor bars are no longer higher than the crossbars on the pre-compression and feed roller.

INFO

Due to metal detection, only fastening material made of anti-magnetic steel may be used. The screws must not be tightened with an impact wrench because of the magnetization effect as the metal detection triggers constantly if there are magnetized screws on the pre-compression roller.

534

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Changing conveyor bars on feed roller 26.12

Turning the conveyor bars on the pre-compression roller

1

2

3

BXG000-086

„ Remove the intake unit,

see Page 491

.

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

„ Remove the screws (3) from the conveyor bar (2).

„ Turn the conveyor bar (2) and attach (tightening torque 35 Nm).

26.12

Changing conveyor bars on feed roller

4

BXG000-087

The bottom feed roller (4) can also be fitted with conveyor bars.

These conveyor bars are used to protect the feed roller against wear and cannot be turned.

26.13

Adjusting the distance between the scraper and flat roller

WARNING

Damage to scraper and flat roller due to overheating

If the gap between the scraper and flat roller is too small, the scraper will exert pressure on the flat roller and overheating will result which could lead to fire. If there are damages or grooves on scraper or flat roller and if the gap between scraper and flat roller is too large, forage may accumulate there, heat up by friction and lead to fire.

„ Check the scraper and the flat roller for damage and grooves.

„ Adjust the gap between the scraper and the flat roller using tension springs and counter nuts until the scraper does not exert any pressure on the flat roller and the gap is not too large.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 535

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.13 Adjusting the distance between the scraper and flat roller

NOTICE

Machine damage caused by broken scraper

If the scraper is too thin, it may break, get into the crop flow and damage machine parts there.

„ Check the thickness of the scraper according to maintenance table,

see Page 440

.

„ If the scraper is thinner than 24 mm, it must be replaced.

The adjustment is made on the removed intake unit.

The scraper must be adjusted, preferably with no gap, over the entire width of the flat roller.

The gap between the scraper and flat roller must be 0.3 mm to 0.6 mm

1

2

BX001-302

To relieve the rear tension springs:

„ On the left and right sides of the machine unscrew the screws (2) from the rear tension springs (1).

536

BX001-301

Setting distance between scraper and flat roller

WARNING! Risk of injury from the sharp edge of the scraper. When working on the scraper, work particularly carefully and prudently and wear protective gloves.

„ Loosen the 3 hexagon nuts (3).

„ To check the gap between the scraper (7) and the flat roller (8) using a feeler gauge, lift the compression roller (4) using a mounting lever (5).

WARNING! Risk of injury due to the raised roller unit! Before measuring the gap, secure the roller unit from inadvertently dropping.

„ Check the gap between the scraper (7) and the flat roller (8) using a feeler gauge.

If the gap is between 0.3 mm and 0.6 mm, the setting is correct.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Setting the gap compression roller-scraper 26.14

If the gap is greater than 0.6 mm, the scraper must be readjusted.

„ If required, readjust the scraper (7) evenly over the entire width by gently tapping it.

If the gap is between 0.3 mm and 0.6 mm, the setting is correct.

If the gap is less than 0.3 mm, the scraper must be readjusted.

„ If required, remove the scraper (7) with two hexagon head screws M12 in the forcing bores (6) evenly over the entire width of the flat roller.

„ Check the gap between the scraper (7) and flat roller (8), using a feeler gauge, and readjust if required.

If the gap is between 0.3 mm and 0.6 mm, the setting is correct.

„ Remove both hexagon head screws M12 from the forcing bores.

When the gap between the scraper and flat roller has been set

„ Tighten the 3 hexagon nuts (3).

1

2

BX001-302

„ On the left and right sides of the machine screw the screws (2) tightly back into the rear tension springs (1).

26.14

Setting the gap compression roller-scraper

NOTICE

Machine damage caused by broken scraper

If the scraper is too thin, it may break, get into the crop flow and damage machine parts there.

„ Check the thickness of the scraper according to maintenance table,

see Page 440

.

„ If the scraper is thinner than 24 mm, it must be replaced.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

The adjustment is made on the removed intake unit.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 537

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.14 Setting the gap compression roller-scraper

1

2

BX001-302

To relieve the rear tension springs:

„ On the left and right sides of the machine unscrew the screws (2) from the rear tension springs (1).

4

5

BXG000-132

Setting the gap between the compression roller and scraper

The gap between the conveyor bars (1) of the compression roller and the scraper (3) must be

X=3-8 mm.

„ Check the dimension X between the conveyor bars (1) of the compression roller and the scraper (3).

If the dimension X is between 3 mm and 8 mm, the setting is correct.

If dimension X is <3 mm, the gap X must be increased.

„ Raise the top roller unit (4), e.g. using a mounting lever (5) and support securely.

„ Place discs under the bump stops (2) of the intake unit.

„ Measure the gap X.

If the gap X is >8 mm, gap X must be reduced.

„ Raise the top roller unit (4), e.g. using a mounting lever (5) and support securely.

„ Remove the discs from under the bump stops (2) of the intake unit.

„ Measure the gap X.

When the gap between the compression roller and scraper has been set:

538

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance – Feed System 26

Setting the tension springs of intake unit 26.15

1

2

BX001-302

„ On the left and right sides of the machine screw the screws (2) tightly back into the rear tension springs (1).

26.15

Setting the tension springs of intake unit

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

1 2

3

X

3

4

BX001-304

The rear tension springs on the left and right (3) must be pre-tensioned equally on both sides of the intake unit to the dimension X=445 mm.

„ Measure the dimension X on the tension springs (3) on both sides of the machine.

Æ If the dimension X=445 mm, the setting of the tension springs (3) is correct.

Æ If the dimension is not X=445 mm, the pretension of the tension springs (3) must be set.

The tension spring must be adjusted by the dimension by which dimension X deviates from the value 445 mm. To do this:

„ Loosen the lock nut (1).

„ Loosen the screw (4).

„ Screw the tension spring (3) onto the threaded piece (2) by the difference to dimension X.

„ Tighten the screw (4).

„ Tighten the counter nut (1).

„ Measure the dimension X on the tension springs (3) on both sides of the machine.

Æ If the dimension X=445 mm, the setting of the tension springs (3) is correct.

Æ If the dimension is not X=445 mm, the pretension of the tension springs (3) must be set again.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 539

26 Maintenance – Feed System

26.15 Setting the tension springs of intake unit

1 5

6

Z c

4

Y

7

2 3 2

8 9

BX002-574

The tension spring at the front left (5) and the tension spring at the front right (1) are fitted with an integrated stop on which the upper roller unit rests. They are therefore not pretensioned.

At the factory the tension spring at front left (5) is set to a dimension Y=481 mm and the tension spring at front right (1) is set to a dimension Z=491 mm. If the pre-compression roller (4) and the feed roller (3) are not parallel to each other, the position of the rollers can be adjusted to each other by changing the dimension Y or Z.

„ Hook the upper roller unit into a suitable hoist.

To align the pre-compression roller (4) and the feed roller (3) parallel to each other, on the right and left sides of the machine:

„ Loosen the lock nut (6).

„ Remove the cotter pin (8) and the bolt (9).

„ Until the pre-compression roller (4) has been set parallel to the feed roller (3), set the spring length (Y, Z) using the threaded piece (7).

„ Ensure that the rollers in the outside area (2) do not touch the wear plates.

„ Insert the bolt (9) and secure with the cotter pin (8).

„ Tighten the counter nut (6).

„ Lower the upper roller unit using the hoist.

540

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

27

27.1

Maintenance - Crop Flow 27

Access points to crop flow 27.1

Maintenance - Crop Flow

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 19 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 34 .

To obtain the best possible crop flow, the wear plates of the individual components must be checked and, if required, replaced. The wear plates are worn if there is severe erosion resulting in small retaining edges.

The following components must be checked:

• Intake unit

• Transfer shaft

• Grass channel

• Corn conditioner (wedge on right / left)

• Discharge accelerator (housing, rear wall)

• Channel support at top

• Spout

Access points to crop flow

The crop flow is accessed via the maintenance flaps, e.g. to eliminate crop blockages in the crop flow.

Before opening the maintenance flaps

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 34 .

2

1

BXG000-083

To access the maintenance flaps of the lower crop flow, remove the cover (1).

„ Loosen the quarter turn fasteners (2) and remove the cover (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 541

27 Maintenance - Crop Flow

27.1

Access points to crop flow

27.1.1

Removing the grass channel

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

ü The crop flow cover is removed,

see Page 200

.

27.1.2

BX002-014

„ To unlock the grass channel (4) loosen the screws (2) on both sides and rotate the lock (1) to the side.

„ Pull out the grass channel (4) on the handles (3) and set it down to the side.

Installing the grass channel

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 34

.

ü The crop flow cover is removed,

see Page 200

.

27.1.3

BX002-014

„ Make sure that the locking (1) on both sides are in horizontal position.

„ Insert the grass channel (4) on the handles (3) until it reaches the stop.

„ Rotate the locking (1) downward on both sides and secure them with the screws (2).

Opening maintenance flap transfer shaft

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

542

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - Crop Flow 27

Access points to crop flow 27.1

27.1.4

1

2

3

BXG000-085

„ Loosen the hexagon head screws (1) and turn the clamping pieces (2) to the side.

„ Fold down the maintenance flap (3).

„ When the maintenance work is complete, fold up the maintenance flap (3), turn the clamping pieces (2) in front of the maintenance flap and secure with the hexagon head screws (1).

Removing drum base and grating base (version with "Grating base")

The steps for removing the drum base and the friction base (version with "friction base") are identical.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

ü The counterblade has been moved away from the chopping drum,

see Page 505

.

ü

The lifting unit is in the top position, see Page 261

ü The chopping drum is locked,

see Page 517

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

WARNING! Crush hazard due to lowering chopper unit. If the chopper unit has not been secured against lowering, it may lower and cause injuries.

To securely support the chopper unit:

„ Support the chopper unit only with suitable and adequately dimensioned materials which will not break or yield under the load. (Car jacks do not provide secure support and must not be used.)

1

BX002-085

„ Dismount the deflector sheet (1) and put it aside with the mounting material.

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 543

27 Maintenance - Crop Flow

27.1

Access points to crop flow

1

2

3

BX002-082

„ Dismount the clamps (3) if they are mounted on the inside of the chopping drum housing.

„ Remove the screw connections (1).

„ Loosen the screws (2).

2

1

3

BX002-083

„ Remove the bolts (2).

„ Remove the screw connections (1).

„ Swivel the clevises (3) downwards.

1

2

1 2 3

BX002-084

WARNING! Risk of injury from unsecured drum base (1). Never work under a suspended load. Dismount the drum base (1) only with 2 persons from the side.

The drum base (1) weighs approx. 30 kg.

„ Raise the drum base (1) and remove it downwards out of the chopping drum housing (2).

544

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

27.1.5

Maintenance - Crop Flow 27

Access points to crop flow 27.1

Mounting drum base and grating base (version with "Grating base")

The steps for mounting the drum base and the friction base (version with "friction base") are identical.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

ü The counterblade has been moved away from the chopping drum,

see Page 505

.

ü

The lifting unit is in the top position, see Page 261

ü The chopping drum is locked,

see Page 517

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

WARNING! Crush hazard due to lowering chopper unit. If the chopper unit has not been secured against lowering, it may lower and cause injuries.

To securely support the chopper unit:

„ Support the chopper unit only with suitable and adequately dimensioned materials which will not break or yield under the load. (Car jacks do not provide secure support and must not be used.)

3

1 1

2

2

4

BX002-086

WARNING! Risk of injury from unsecured drum base (1). Never work under a suspended load. Mount the drum base (1) only with 2 persons from the side.

The drum base (1) weighs approx. 30 kg.

„ Insert the drum base (3) from below into the chopping drum housing (4) such that the roll pins (2) are in the notches (1) on the bar of the drum base.

2

1

3

BX002-083

„ Mount the screw connections (1) loosely.

„ Swivel the clevises (3) upwards.

„ Mount the bolts (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

1 2 3

545

27 Maintenance - Crop Flow

27.1

Access points to crop flow

1

2

3

BX002-082

„ Tighten the screw connections (2).

„ Mount the screw connections (1).

„ Mount previously dismounted clamps (3).

1

27.1.6

BX002-085

„ Mount the deflector sheet (1).

„ Adjust the drum base,

see Page 432 .

Removing the rear wall of the discharge accelerator

3 3

1

2

6 5

8

7

6

BXG001-127

„ Dismount the hexagon head screws (1, 8) and remove the adjusting engine (2) of the discharge accelerator rear wall.

„ Dismount the screws (7).

„ Remove the bolts (6).

„ Dismount the screws (3).

4

546

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - Crop Flow 27

Access points to crop flow 27.1

WARNING! Risk of injury from the loosened discharge accelerator rear wall (5). Secure the discharge accelerator rear wall (5) against falling out.

„ Swivel the support brackets (4) outwards.

„ To remove the discharge accelerator rear wall (5), move it first upward and then to the rear.

„ Reinstall the discharge accelerator rear wall (5),

see Page 547

.

27.1.7

27.1.8

Reinstalling the rear wall of the discharge accelerator

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

1 1

3

4

2

7

6

7

5

8

BXG002-128

„ Install the discharge accelerator rear wall (6).

„ Swivel the support brackets (2) inwards.

„ Insert the screws (1).

„ Mount the bolt (7).

„ Insert the screws (8).

„ Mount the adjusting engine (4) of the discharge accelerator rear wall with the hexagon head screws (3, 5).

„ Set the rear wall of the discharge accelerator,

see Page 434

.

Removing maintenance flap in channel support

3

1

3

BXG000-084

„ Screw out the hexagon head screws (1).

„ Remove the maintenance flap (3).

„ When the maintenance work is complete, attach the maintenance flap (3) and secure with the hexagon head screws (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 547

27 Maintenance - Crop Flow

27.1

Access points to crop flow

27.1.9

Opening maintenance flap in the spout

WARNING

Risk of injury due to falling

There is a risk of falling when working at heights on the machine. As a result, people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Make sure you stand securely.

„ Use a suitable fall protection.

„ Secure the area below the assembly point against falling objects.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 451 .

2

1

BX002-079

„ To open the maintenance flaps (1), swivel the spout forwards on the left and lower it until the maintenance flaps are accessible from the platform.

„ To open the maintenance flap (2) (for version with "spout extension"), swivel the spout forwards on the left and lower until the maintenance flaps are accessible from the ground.

548

BX001-609

„ Loosen the nuts (1) and push the maintenance flap (2) to the side.

„ Open and turn the maintenance flap.

„ When the maintenance work is complete, turn back and close the maintenance flap (2).

„ Push the maintenance flap (2) into the original position and tighten the screws (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

27.2

27.2.1

Maintenance - Crop Flow 27

Maintaining the corn conditioner 27.2

Maintaining the corn conditioner

Lubricating the deflection roll of the corn conditioner belt after washing

NOTICE

Risk of damage to the deflection roll bearing of the corn conditioner belt drive after cleaning with water

The bearing can be damaged if the deflection roller bearing of the corn conditioner belt drive is not lubricated after cleaning with water.

„ Manually lubricate the deflection roll bearing of the corn conditioner belt drive after cleaning with water.

1 2 2 3

BX002-715

After cleaning with water, the bearing of the deflection roll (1) of the corn conditioner belt drive (2) must manually be lubricated until the bearing is completely filled with fresh grease.

Lubricate through the grease nipple on the grease distributor (3) of the central lubrication for the corn conditioner belt drive (2).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 549

27 Maintenance - Crop Flow

27.2

Maintaining the corn conditioner

1 2 3

BX002-713

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Lubricate the deflection roll bearing through the grease nipple (1) on the grease distributor (2) for the corn conditioner belt drive until grease emerges all around the seal of the deflection roll (3).

„ While lubricating, rotate the deflection roll (3) occasionally so that the grease can be distributed evenly in the fixed bearing.

1 2

27.2.2

BX002-714

„ After lubrication, remove excess grease from the deflection roll (1) and the rocker arm (2).

Check the corn conditioner with rollers for wear and tear

Before using the corn conditioner, the rollers should be checked for wear. Worn rollers no longer achieve the required conditioning quality and the crops are no longer received so well, possibly resulting in crop blockages.

550

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

Maintenance - Crop Flow 27

Maintenance discharge accelerator 27.3

27.3

BX001-315

ü To check the wear of the rollers, the corn conditioner must be removed or must be moved all the way backwards on the swivel device.

„ Place a ruler (1) on one tooth of the rollers.

„ The gap between the roller and ruler should not be greater than X=1 mm. Otherwise, it is recommended to replace the rollers.

Maintenance discharge accelerator

NOTICE

Risk of damage to the discharge accelerator due to water damage caused by a highpressure cleaner

The bearings of the discharge accelerator can be damaged if the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner is aimed directly on the bearings during cleaning.

„ Never aim the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner at the bearings of the discharge accelerator.

27.3.1

Cleaning the bearing of the discharge accelerator

1

2

3

BX002-706

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 34

.

„ Dismount the screws (1) and remove the guard sheet (2).

„ Clean the bearings of the discharge accelerator. Use compressed air for cleaning if necessary.

„ After cleaning, manually lubricate through the grease nipple (3) until grease emerges all around the labyrinth seal.

„ Mount the guard sheet (2) with the screws (1).

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en 551

27 Maintenance - Crop Flow

27.3

Maintenance discharge accelerator

27.3.2

Checking discharge scoops

27.3.3

BXG000-094

„ To check the discharge scoops (1), remove the maintenance flap from the channel support.

„ Examine the discharge scoops:

- There should be no major damage, e.g. caused by stones, resulting in forage wrapping around the discharge scoop.

- The edge of the discharge scoops should not be severely eroded so that the distance to the rear wall is always even.

Removing/installing discharge scoops

BXG000-095

Removing discharge scoops

Prerequisite:

ü

Rear wall of discharge accelerator has been removed, see Page 546 .

„ To remove the discharge scoops, remove the screw connections (2).

„ Remove discharge scoops (1).

552

BiG X 630

Original operating instructions 150001270_04_en

27.3.4

Maintenance - Crop Flow 27

Maintenance discharge accelerator 27.3

Installing discharge scoops

NOTICE

Damage to discharge accelerator

If the discharge scoops are not replaced in pairs, an imbalance may occur during operation and lead to subsequent damage on the machine.

„ Always replace the discharge scoops in pairs and opposite each other.

„ Clean supporting surface of the rotor.

„ Fix new discharge scoops (1) with news screws (2) hand-tight.

„ Pull the discharge scoops outwards (towards the rear wall) and tighten the screws (2) to a tightening torque of 95 Nm.

„ Check distance of the scraper and adjust if required,

see Page 553 .

„ Mount rear wall of discharge accelerator.